Yuma Courthouse

98 W 1
st
St.
Yuma, AZ 85364

HVAC O&M INDEX
Spec Section 26 65 01 Cooling Towers



TAG # Equipment Manufacturer Vendor

CT 1-2 Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
Marley Model NC8401MAN1SGF
Marley
7401 W 129 Street
Overland Park, KS 66213
P (913) 664-7400

Climatec
2851 W Kathleen Rd.
Phoenix, AZ 85053
P (602) 944-3330
F (602) 674-1279

CT 1-2 Narrow Variable Frequence
Drive/Bypass
Yaskawa Model E7NVB011
Yaskawa
2121 Norman Drive South
Waukega, IL 60085
(800) YASKAWA
Climatec
2851 W Kathleen Rd.
Phoenix, AZ 85053
P (602) 944-3330
F (602) 674-1279

Centrifugal Separator
w/Sweeping System
Griswold Water Systems
1525 E 6
th
St.
Corona, CA 92879
Climatec
2851 W Kathleen Rd.
Phoenix, AZ 85053
P (602) 944-3330
F (602) 674-1279











Phone (480) 820-1235 / Fax (480) 820-1131
3385 N. Nevada St., Chandler, AZ 85225
HVAC Comm. Lic.251310 L-79 / Res. Lic.251311 C-39
Plumbing Comm. Lic.251309 L-37 / Res. Lic. 253946 C-37R




HVAC OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE INDEX
Yuma Courthouse

Spec Section: 23 65 01

Contractor Information
Tag: CT 1-2 Cooling Towers



General Contractor: Sundt Construction, Inc.
180 W 1
st
St., Suite D
Yuma, AZ 85364
(928) 271-5883
Project Manager: Frank Bejarano

Subcontractor: Tempe Mechanical
3385 N Nevada St.
Chandler, AZ 85225
(480) 820-1235
Project Manager: Josh Young

Supplier: Climatec
2851 W Kathleen Rd.
Phoenix, AZ 85053
(602) 944-3330
Sales Rep: Bryan Nelson/Matt Seech

Manufacturer: Marley
7401 W 129 Street
Overland Park, KS 66213
(913) 664-7400

Service/Warranty: Tempe Mechanical
3385 N Nevada St.
Chandler, AZ 85225
P (480) 820-1235
F (480) 289-3978





9



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


PROJ ECT: J ohn M. Roll US - Yuma Courthouse



LOCATION: Yuma, AZ



CONTRACTOR: Tempe Mechanical



SUBMITTED BY: Climatec, Inc.
2851 W. Kathleen Rd.
Phoenix, AZ. 85053
602-944-3330


MANUFACTURER: Marley



PRODUCT: Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
OPERATING MANUALS

MODEL: NC8401MAN1SGF


SERIAL #: NC-10050616-A1, NC-10050616-B1


TAGS: CT 1~2


DATE: 7/12/12
Page 2 of 541
SPX Cooling Technologies User Manuals February 21, 2012
Project : Yuma Court House
98 W 1st St
Yuma AZ 85364
For: Tempe Mechanical
3385 N Nevada St
Chandler AZ 85225-1154
Perf ormance Condit ions:
Flow Rat e: 360.00 GPM Hot Wat er: 95.00F Cold Wat er: 85.00F Wet Bulb: 80.00F
Mot or Capacit y per Cell: 7.50 HP Mot or Out put per Cell: 7.40 HP
Fan Speed RPM: 370.00 Trial Fan Pit ch Degrees: 22.00
Order No: 10050616 Model No: NC8401MAN1SGF PO No: 55540
Sales Of f ice Order No: PQ11-5856BN
Please cont act your local sales represent at ive if you have any quest ions:
Climatec Inc
2851 W Kathleen Rd
Phoenix AZ 85053
Phone: 602-944-3330
Fax: 602-944-4759
Email: kellieh@climatec.com
Your local sales represent at ive will be happy t o quot e current part s price and lead t ime upon request .
Go t o ht t p://spxcooling.com f or a f ull list of represent at ives.
This package cont ains t he f ollowing user manuals:
Manual Rev Description
00-1218 C OM-GRDR 1800&2000 User Manual
07-1205 A OM-CPLG MC07 MC09&MC11
09-1150 A NC 8400 User Manual
2010-1234 Marley X7 Fan User Manual
2010-1241 Marley M-5 Vibrat ion Swit ch User Manual
92-1308 A DM-MDT-C DOWNTIME MANUAL
92-1371 PL-HC VALVE 04 06 08
92-1475 A SM-MOTOR-M MOTOR IOM MANUAL
Page 3 of 541
/ Marley Geareducer

Model 1800 and 2000 /

User Manual 00-1218C
Page 4 of 541
Page 5 of 541
3
/ Operation and Service Instructions /
Protection Against Corrosion
Geareducer

units ship from the factory with a protective coat-

ing of epoxy enamel paint on all unmachined parts and with
rust-proong oil and grease on machined surfaces. Machined
surface coatings normally protect the Geareducer against
atmospheric corrosion during storage periods for up to six
months. However, if oil is added to the Geareducer, the new
oil will dissolve the rust-proong grease and require that the
Geareducer be run once a week to keep a protective coating
of oil on all interior machined surfaces.
Check Geareducer exterior yearly and touch up with epoxy
paint if required. If your Geareducer is equipped with an oil
gauge and drain line, coat any exposed threads at pipe joints
to prevent corrosion.
Alignment
In order to assure long service life, the Geareducer and motor
must be level, and the drive shaft or coupling must be properly
aligned. Refer to the alignment instructions in the Driveshaft or
Coupling Manual shipped with the cooling tower. Copies are
also available from your local Marley sales representative.
Initial Operation
Check to be sure that the Geareducer is lled with oil and
that there are no visible oil leaks. If equipped with an external
dipstick/oil level gauge, be sure the oil full mark corresponds
with the full level at the Geareducer.
NoteIf this tower is equipped with a two-speed motor,
allow a time delay of at least 20 seconds when switching
from high speed to low speed. Allow a time delay of at least
two minutes when changing direction of fan rotation. Failure
to provide these delays may signicantly reduce equipment
service life.
Figure 1 Service Fittings
Drain Plug
Vent
Oil Level
Check and Fill

Page 6 of 541
4
/ Operation and Service Instructions /
Lubricants
To insure maximum performance and service life, it is rec-
ommended Marley factory lubricants be used in all Marley
Geareducers. Marley lubricants can be purchased through
your local Marley sales representative.
NoteGeareducer is designed for 5-year oil change in-
tervals. To maintain ve-year change intervals, use only
Marley Gearlube. Marley Gearlube must be inspected every
six months to ensure the oil has not been contaminated. If
turbine-type mineral oil is used the oil must be changed every
six months.
Table 1 Synthetic oil5-year oil change interval
Winter or Summer Severe Duty/High Temperature
Air Temperature at Geareducer
Below 110F (43C) Above 110F (43C)
ISO 150 ISO 220
If lubricants other than Marley factory lubricants are used,
they must not contain any additives (such as detergents or EP
additives) which are adversely affected by moisture and could
reduce the service life of the Geareducer. The responsibility
for use of lubricants other than Marley factory lubricants rests
with the customer/owner and the lubricant supplier.
Seasonal temperature changes may require one viscosity of oil
for summer operation and another for winter operation. Refer
to the tables below for the seasonal selection information.
Maintenance Service Monthly Semi-annually Seasonal Startup or Annually
Geareducer Drive:
Inspect and tighten all fasteners including oil plug x x
Check for and repair oil leaks x x x
Check oil level x R x
Change oil R R
Make sure vent is open x x
Check driveshaft or coupling alignment x
Inspect and tighten driveshaft or coupling fasteners x
Check driveshaft or coupling bushing / ex elements for unusual wear x
Lube Lines (if equipped)
Check for oil leaks in hoses and ttings x R x
R Refer to instructions within this manual
Note: It is recommended at least weekly, that the general operation and condition be observed. Pay particular attention to any changes in sound
or vibration that may signify a need for closer inspection.
Page 7 of 541
5
Scheduled Maintenance
WarningMake certain that mechanical equipment is
inoperable during periods of maintenanceor during any
situation of possible endangerment to personnel. If your
electrical system contains a disconnect switch, lock it out
until the period of exposure to injury is over.
MonthlyCheck Geareducer oil level. Shut down the unit and
allow 5 minutes for the oil level to stabilize. Add oil if required,
noting the addition in your maintenance log. If equipped with
an external dipstick/oil level gauge, small quantities of oil can
be added at that location.
Semi-annuallyCheck that all the assembly bolts and cap
screws are tight, that oil plugs and pipe connections are in
place and free from leaks, and that the vent on the Geareducer
(and external dipstick/oil level gauge, if present) is cleara
clogged vent can lead to oil leaks. Intermittent operation
and extended periods of downtime can cause condensation
of water in the oil. If using Marley Gearlube, the oil condi-
tion must be inspected every six monthssee Changing
Geareducer Oil for maximizing service life. If using turbine-
type mineral oil, change oilsee Changing Geareducer Oil
for instructions.
Annually Check mechanical equipment anchor bolts,
drive shaft coupling bolts, and coupling set screws. Tighten
as required.
Every 5 YearsChange oil. Geareducer was designed for
5-year oil change intervals. Perform Monthly and Every Six
Months maintenance checks prescribed above. To maintain
ve-year change intervals, use only Marley Gearlube.
Changing Geareducer Oil
Drain the Geareducer oil by removing the drain plug. See
Figure 1 for location. If equipped with an external dipstick/
oil level gauge, remove the drain plug at that location, and
drain the entire system.
To maximize service life of the Geareducer, remove a sample
from the drained oil and look for evidence of foreign material,
such as water, metal shavings or sludge, or send the oil sample
to an oil analysis lab for inspection. If you nd unacceptable
condensation or sludge, ush the Geareducer with mineral
oil before relling.
After inspection is complete, ll the Geareducer with 9
1
2
quarts (9 liters) of oil. See Figure 1 for location. If the
Geareducer is equipped with an external dipstick/oil level
gauge an additional 2 to 3 quarts (1.9 to 2.8 liters) of oil will
be required. Be certain that the vent on the Geareducer (and
external dipstick/oil level gauge, if present) is not plugged.
Verify that the gauge/drain line is full and that there aren't any
leaks at the connections.
/ Operation and Service Instructions /
Protection Against Corrosion
Check Geareducer exterior yearly and touch up with epoxy
paint if required. If your Geareducer is equipped with an oil
gauge and drain line, coat any exposed threads at pipe joints
to prevent corrosion.
Repair and Overhaul
The Model 1800 and 2000 Geareducer is assembled using
specialized tools and xtures. Bearings and gear sets are
unique and not available from other sources. Geareducers
can be repaired in the eldhowever, major repairs require
the use of a fully equipped machine shop. Refer to the Field
Repair section of this manual for further instructions.
If your Geareducer ever needs replacement or repair, we rec-
ommend returning the unit to a Marley factory service center.
Contact your Marley sales representative to discuss course
of action. A factory reconditioned Geareducer carries a one
year warranty. The Marley cooling tower order number will be
required if the Geareducer is shipped back to the factory for
repair. Obtain a "Customer Return Material" tag from the
Marley sales representative in you area.
To nd your Marley sales representative call 913 664 7400 or
check the internet at spxcooling.com
Page 8 of 541
6
Figure 2
/ Parts List /
PINION CAGE
GEAREDUCER
CASE
BOTTOM CAP
AIR VENT
PINION CAGE
CAP
501
504
505
503
311
411
102
412
502
420
103
104 312
101
5
101
202
201
203
COVER
DOWEL PIN
BEARING
RETAINER
WATER
SLINGER
210
420
320
301
Page 9 of 541
7
1 Complete Geareducer Assembly.
5 Ring Gear Hub.
100 Spiral Bevel Gear Set.
101 Set of matched spiral bevel gears including
integral pinion shaft with key.
Gear ratios as follows:
4.80 to 1 3.75 to 1 2.71 to 1
4.09 to 1 3.27 to 1 5.375 to 1
102 Ring gear attaching hardware.
103 Locknuts.
104 Lockwasher.
200 Fan Shaft Set.
201 Fan shaft.
202 Ring gear hub key.
203 Fan key.
210 Fan attaching hardware.
Cap screws and washers.
301 Oil Slinger.
310 Set of Two Pinion Shaft Bearings.
311 Head, tapered roller bearing.
312 Tail, tapered roller bearing.

320 Pinion Cage Shims.
410 Fan Shaft Bearing Set.
411 Lower tapered roller bearing.
412 Upper tapered roller bearing.

420 Fan Shaft Shims.
500 O-Rings Set.
502 Water slinger O-ring.
503 Pinion cage O-ring.
504 Pinion cage cap O-ring.
505 Pinion seal O-ring.
501 Pinion Shaft Oil Seal.

Parts List
/ Parts List /
Page 10 of 541
8
/ Field Repair /
General
Geareducers can be repaired in the eldhowever, major
repairs require the use of a fully equipped machine shop.
When eld repair or replacement of parts is necessary, the
following procedure is recommended for the disassembly
and assembly of the unit. If any O-ring, oil seal or gasket is
to be reused, care should be taken not to damage it during
disassembly. Parts which contain O-rings or seals should not
be jerked or twisted past a shoulder or edge. These parts are
marked with an asterisk (*) in the description below. O-rings,
oil seal and gaskets should be carefully inspected for damage
before being reinstalled. New O-rings and oil seal should be
installed during a major overhaul.
Disassembly
Part numbers and referencesrefer to Figure 2 .
1. Drain oil.
2. Remove outer ring of bolts in pinion cage cap and remove
pinion subassembly*.
NoteThe thickness of the shim pack (320) is important in
resetting the gears. The shim pack should either be saved or
carefully measured with a micrometer. If the gears are to be
replaced, record the pinion setting distance that is etched
on the pinion gear.
3. Remove water slinger*.
4. Remove bearing retainer and shim pack (420) from top
of case.
NoteThe thickness of this shim pack is important in the
backlash setting of the gears. The shim pack should either
be saved or carefully measured with a micrometer.
5. Drive dowel pins down into case.
6. Remove bolts and case cover and lift fan shaft assembly
out of the case.
7. Turn case over and remove bottom cap and shims.
NoteThe thickness of this shim pack is important in setting
the fan shaft bearing endplay. This pack should be saved or
carefully measured with a micrometer.
8. Remove bearing cups (411 and 412) from the Geareducer
case and cover.
Pinion Cage Disassembly
1. Remove pinion cage cap* from pinion cage.
2. Remove O-rings* (503 and 504).
3. Slide seal off of pinion shaft and remove O-ring (505).
3. Remove locknuts and lockwasher (103 and 104) then
press pinion shaft (101) out of pinion cage. This will free
tail bearing cone (312).
4. Press oil slinger (301) and head bearing cone (311) from
the pinion shaft.
5. Press bearing cups (311 and 312) out of pinion cage.
Fan Shaft Disassembly
1. Remove ring gear (101) from the ring gear hub
(5).
2. Press ring gear hub and lower bearing cone (411) off of
the fan shaft (201).
3. Remove lower fan shaft key (202).
4. Press the top bearing cone (412) off of the shaft.

Page 11 of 541
9
Assembly
Before assembling a new pinion gear in the pinion cage, check
match numbers on pinion gear and spiral bevel ring gear to
be certain that they are a matched set. Gears are lapped in
matched sets at the factory and should not be separated.
Numbers are etched on both the pinion and ring gear as il-
lustrated in Figure 3.
All parts that are to be reused should be thoroughly cleaned
before being reinstalled. Replace bearings if necessary.
Pinion Cage Subassembly
1. Place oil slinger (301) on pinion shaft.
2. Press head bearing cone (311) on pinion shaft making
sure oil slinger and bearing are against gear.
3. Press bearing cups (311 and 312) into pinion cage.
4. Lower pinion cage on pinion shaft, until head bearing
cone and cup mate.
5. Press tail bearing cone (312) on pinion shaft until it mates
with its bearing cup.
MATCHED NUMBER TO BE COMPARED WITH THE SAME
NUMBER ON THE RING GEAR. (EXAMPLE CO-43)
PINION SETTING DISTANCE. (EXAMPLE 4.860)
BACKLASH (NORMAL) AT WHICH THE GEARS WERE
LAPPED. (EXAMPLE .010)
MATCHED NUMBER TO BE COMPARED WITH THE SAME
NUMBER ON THE PINION GEAR. (EXAMPLE C0-43)
THE PINION SETTING DISTANCE IS THE DISTANCE
THE END OF THE PINION SHOULD BE FROM THE
CENTERLINE OF THE RING GEAR SHAFT.
Figure 3 Gear Match Numbers and Setting Data
6. Install locknuts and lockwasher (103 and 104). Tighten
nuts on bearing cone until 5 to 15 inlb

(565-1695 mNm)
of bearing preload is obtained. Bearing preload is the
resistance in the bearings to shaft rotation measured
in inlb

required to rotate the shaft at uniform velocity.

Preload is necessary to insure the stability of the gear
engagement. Crimp the lockwasher to hold the two nuts
in place.
7. Install O-ring (503) in groove on pinion cage. Install
O-ring (505) on pinion shaft outboard of locking-nut
threads
8. Install oil seal* (501) onto the pinion shaft.
9. Position O-ring (504) in groove in cap and place cap
on shaft. Slide cap up against pinion cage and install
bolts.
10. Record the pinion setting distance that is etched on the
pinion gear.
/ Field Repair /
Page 12 of 541
10
/ Field Repair /
Installation of Fan Shaft
1. Press ring gear hub (5) and the upper and lower bearing
cones (411 and 412) on the fan shaft (201). Install ring
gear (101) on ring gear hub and tighten cap screws to
55 ftlb

(75 Nm)

.
2 Install the bottom cap using old shim pack or make up
equivalent thickness shim pack (420).
3. Press bottom fan shaft bearing cup (411) in bore.
4. Install fan shaft assembly in case.
5. Press upper fan shaft bearing cup (412) in cover. Apply
a bead of sealant to the cover ange inboard of the bolt
holes. Install cover on case. Install dowel pins in cover
and drive ush with top of cover.
6. Install cap screws and tighten to 20 ftlb

(27 Nm)
.

7. Install bearing retainer using old shim pack (420) or
equivalent and tighten cap screws to 20 ftlb

(27 Nm)
.

5. Rotate the fan shaft several turns in each direction to seat
the bearing rollers. With a dial indicator and using the
Geareducer case as a reference, measure and adjust the
fan shaft bearings to .001-.003" (.025-.076mm) endplay.
The endplay is adjusted by adding shims (420) under the
bearing retainer.
Installation of Pinion Cage
1. Find the difference between the pinion setting distance of
the old gear and the new pinion gear and adjust the old
shim pack (320) or make a new shim pack to compensate
for the different setting distances.
Example:
Pinion setting distance of old gear 4.883
Pinion setting distance of new gear 4.878
Difference .005
Remove .005 from shim pack.
2. Install pinion cage subassembly into case.
NoteEngage pinion gear tooth with "X" marked on end
between ring gear teeth marked with "Xs". Care must be
taken not to damage the pinion gear teeth by forcing them
into the ring gear teeth.
Gear Setting Procedure
The proper mounting of the gear set is essential to obtain
long life and smooth operation of the gears. The pinion and
ring gears were positioned approximately in the preceding
steps. The correct gear position is determined by the gear
backlash.
With the "X" marked tooth on the pinion gear engaged be-
tween the two "X" marked teeth on the ring gear, check the
backlash with a dial indicator as shown in Figure 5. Lock the
pinion shaft against rotation. The amount of movement of the
fan shaft, measured at a distance equal to the outside radius
of the ring gear is the backlash. The backlash on all ratios
should be between .007 and .014" (.18 and .36mm). With the
"X" teeth engaged, the backlash should be approximately in
the middle of the allowable range. Check the backlash at three
other points around the ring gear to be sure the backlash is
within the specied limits. Adjust ring gear axially by removing
or adding shims (420) at bottom bearing cap.
NoteTo maintain bearing adjustment corresponding shim
(420) adjustment must be made at the bearing retainer.
Example: Removing .003" shims at the bottom bearing retainer
requires the addition of .003" shims at the top bearing retainer
to maintain correct bearing adjustment.
Recheck the backlash to make sure it is within the proper
limits.
COLLAR
SET SCREW
TOP VIEW
OF INDICATOR
POINT OF MEASUREMENT
OUTSIDE RADIUS OF GEAR
DIAL INDICATOR
Figure 5 Gear Backlash Measurement
Page 13 of 541
11
/ Field Repair /
Final Assembly
1. Remove bottom cap and apply a bead of sealant to the
bottom cap ange inboard of the bolt holes. Reinstall the
bottom bearing retainer cap and tighten the cap screws
to 20 ftlb

(27 Nm).
2. Install O-ring (502) in water slinger.
3. Install water slinger on fan shaft (201).
4. Replace air vent and all pipe plugs.
5. Fill with lubricant selected from Table I.
Page 14 of 541
7401 WEST 129 STREET | OVERLAND PARK, KANSAS 66213 UNITED STATES | 913 664 7400 | spxcooling@spx.com | spxcooling.com
In the interest of technological progress, all products are subject to design and/or material change without notice.
2008 SPX Cooling Technologies, Inc.
|
Printed in USA
Manual 00-1218C
Page 15 of 541
/ Marley SofTork

Series MC Coupling /
User Manual 07-1205A
Page 16 of 541
Assembly and Alignment
1. Inspect and clean motor and Geareducer

shafts.
Remove any burrs on shafts with emery cloth or a
ne le. Remove all lubricants from coupling bores
and mating surfaces. Install keys in motor and
Geareducer shaft keyways.
2. Install a clamp ring on each coupling half using the
bolts provided.
Note: Leave this attachment loose for now, only
engaging a few threads of each boltit may be
necessary to reposition the clamp rings for parallel
alignmentStep 7.
Caution: Do not lubricate bolt threads.
3. Slip each coupling half onto its mating shaft. Move
the motor and Geareducer into place.
Note: Clamp ring must be mounted to coupling
half before the motor and Geareducer are
positioned.
4. Check coupling spacing by measuring dimension
C at the top of the coupling only. Refer to Table
and Detail 1. Slide the coupling halves along the
shafts to obtain spacing. The maximum distance
between shaft ends is 2". The shafts may protrude
through the coupling halves if necessary.
5. Tighten each set screw on its key24 ftlb

.
Detail 1
CLAMP RING
BOLT
FLEXIBLE
ELEMENT
CLAMP RING
COUPLING
HALF
C
B MIN
D
FLANGE
DIA
Page 17 of 541
6. Check angular alignment by measuring the C
dimension at 90 intervals (take at least four
measurements). The total difference between any
two measurements, C max C min, must not
exceed
1
16". See Detail 1.
7. Check parallel alignment by laying a straight
edge across the outside of the coupling halves at
several places around its circumference. Parallel
misalignment may not exceed
1
16". See Detail 2.
Tip: If the clamp rings are larger in diameter than the
coupling halves, remove enough clamp ring bolts
to rotate the clamp rings so the straight edge bears
directly on the coupling halves.
If measured misalignment is greater than
1
16",
shim the motor and/or Geareducer mounting
feet to obtain proper alignment. After adjusting
shims, tighten the hold-down hardware and check
alignment. Repeat the procedure until proper
alignment is achieved. The best alignment is
achieved when the straight edge is in contact with
the coupling halves at four points as shown in
Detail 2.
8. With clamp ring bolts holding the clamp ring(s) in
place, wrap the exible element around the clamp
rings as shown. Make sure the beads of the element
are fully worked down into the seats.
9. Hold the split of the exible element closed. An
1
8" maximum gap is allowable. Tighten one or two
bolts directly opposite the splitenough to hold the
exible element in place. Using both hands, knead
the rubber element toward the split. Hold split
closed and tighten the next two bolts farthest from
splitenough to hold the exible element in place.
Repeat this procedure on all remaining ange bolts.
Retighten each bolt in the order shown in Detail 3
using a torque specied in table.
Note: MC07 couplings have 5 bolts/half, use a
similar cross pattern.
Tighten all bolts a second time to the specied
torque.
Caution: Do not over-torque bolts or you may
damage the clamp ring.
Maintenance
1. Marley SofTork couplings do not require lubrication.
2. Thoroughly inspect the coupling at least every six
months. Check for looseness of set screws and
coupling halves on shafts, and for wear of the
exible element.
3. Contact your Marley sales representative if you need
replacement parts. Call 913 664 7400 or check the
web at spxcooling.com to locate your nearest rep.
Detail 2
STRAIGHT EDGE
1
/
16
" MAX
Coupling B C D
Torque
ft lb

Cap Screw
MC07 5
1
8" 1
1
2" 5
5
8" 24
5
16" x 1
1
2"
MC09 5
9
16" 1
17
32" 7
3
8" 33
3
8" x 1
1
2"
MC11 6
3
8" 1
9
16" 9
3
16" 33
3
8" x 1
1
2"
1 3
5
2
4
6
Detail 3
Page 18 of 541
M07-1205A
7401 WEST 129 STREET | OVERLAND PARK, KANSAS 66213 UNITED STATES | 913 664 7400 | spxcooling@spx.com | spxcooling.com
In the interest of technological progress, all products are subject to design and/or material change without notice.
2008 SPX Cooling Technologies, Inc.
|
Printed in USA
Page 19 of 541
/ NC

Steel Cooling Tower /

User Manual 09-1150A
Page 20 of 541
2
Contents
Tower Location ............................................................................................................5
Tower Shipment...........................................................................................................5
Receiving Tower ..........................................................................................................5
Hoisting Tower .............................................................................................................5
Tower Installation.........................................................................................................6
Tower Start-Up ......................................................................................................... 13
Tower Operation ....................................................................................................... 15
Wintertime Operation.............................................................................................. 17
Water Treatment and Blowdown .......................................................................... 19
Cooling Tower Cleaning ......................................................................................... 21
Schedule of Tower Maintenance .......................................................................... 24
Motor Relubrication Instructions .......................................................................... 26
Seasonal Shutdown Instructions ......................................................................... 27
Prolonged Shutdown .............................................................................................. 28
Maintenance Schedule ........................................................................................... 29
Troubleshooting ........................................................................................................ 30
Additional Information ............................................................................................. 32
Note
This manual contains vital information for the proper installation and
operation of your cooling tower. Carefully read the manual before
installation or operation of the tower and follow all instructions.
Save this manual for future reference.
Indicates presence of a hazard which can cause severe personal
injury, death or substantial property damage if ignored.
Indicates presence of a hazard which will or can cause personal
injury or property damage if ignored.
Indicates special instructions on installation, operation or main-
tenance which are important but not related to personal injury
hazards.
Warning
Caution
Note
The following dened terms are used throughout this manual to bring attention
to the presence of hazards of various risk levels, or to important information
concerning the life of the product.
Page 21 of 541
3
Preparation
The Marley NC cooling tower purchased for this installation represents the cur-
rent state of the art in crossow, induced draft cooling tower design. Thermally
and operationally, it is the most efcient cooling tower of its class.
These instructionsas well as those offered separately on motors, fans, Geare-
ducers

, couplings, drive shafts, oat valves, etc.are intended to assure that

the tower serves you properly for the maximum possible time. Since product
warrantability may well depend upon your actions, please read these instruc-
tions thoroughly prior to operation.
If you have questions about the operation and/or maintenance of this tower,
and you dont nd the answers in this manual, please contact your Marley
sales representative. When writing for information, or when ordering parts,
please mention tower serial number shown on the nameplate located on the
access door.
Safety First
The location and orientation of the cooling tower can affect the safety of those
responsible for installing, operating or maintaining the tower. However, since
SPX Cooling Technologies does not determine the location or orientation of
the tower, we cannot be responsible for addressing those safety issues that
are affected by the towers location or orientation.
WARNING
The following safety issues should be considered by those respon-
sible for designing the tower installation.
access to and from the fan deck
access to and from maintenance access doors
the possible need for ladders (either portable or permanent) to
gain access to the fan deck or maintenance access doors
the possible need for handrails around the fan deck
the possible need for external access platforms
potential access problems due to obstructions surrounding the
tower
lockout of mechanical equipment
the possible need for safety cages around ladders
the need to avoid exposing maintenance personnel to the poten-
tially unsafe environment inside the tower.
Warning
Page 22 of 541
4
Preparation
Those are only some of the safety issues that may arise in the design
process. SPX strongly recommends that you consult a safety engineer
to be sure that all safety considerations have been addressed.
Several options are available that may assist you in addressing some of these
personnel safety concerns, including:
a handrail system around the perimeter of the fan deck with either one or
two ladders for access to the deck
ladder extensions (used where the base of the tower is elevated)
safety cages for fan deck ladders
external lube lines
fan cylinder extensions
ow control/balancing valves
fan barrier
access door platform
motor located outside the tower
external motor access platform
Tower Location
Space available around the tower should be as generous as possible to pro-
mote ease of maintenanceand to permit freedom of airow into and through
the tower. If you have questions about the adequacy of the available space
and the intended conguration of the tower, please contact your Marley sales
representative for guidance.
Prepare a stable, level support foundation for the tower, utilizing weight, wind
load, and dimensional information appearing on appropriate Marley submittal
drawings. Supports must be level to insure proper operation of the tower.
The cooling tower must be located at such distance and direction
to avoid the possibility of contaminated tower discharge air being
drawn into building fresh air intake ducts. The purchaser should ob-
tain the services of a Licensed Professional Engineer or Registered
Architect to certify that the location of the tower is in compliance
with applicable air pollution, re, and clean air codes.
Warning
Page 23 of 541
5
Tower Shipment
Unless otherwise specied, NC towers ship by truck (on at bed trailers),
which lets you receive, hoist, and install the tower in one continuous operation.
Single-cell towers ship on one truck. Multicell towers, depending on their size,
may require more than one truck.
Responsibility for the condition of the tower upon its arrival belongs to the
truckeras does the coordination of multiple shipments, if required.
Receiving Tower
Prior to unloading the tower from the delivering carrier, inspect the shipment
for evidence of damage in transit. If damage is apparent, note the freight bill
accordingly. This will support your future recovery claim.
Find and remove the installation instruction drawings and bills of material
located in a plastic tote in the cold water basin. This information should be
kept for future reference and maintenance purposes.
Hoisting Tower
NC8411 through NC8414 models consist of two modules per cell. The upper
module includes hoisting clips at the top of the module. The hoisting clips on
the lower module are located near the bottom on the sides of the cold water
basin. All other models ship in a single module.
NC upper and lower modules must be hoisted and set separately.
Do not preassemble modules prior to hoisting.
The hoisting clips for NC8409 are located near the bottom of the tower on
the cold water basin sides. The hoisting clips for all other models are located
at the top of the tower. A Hoisting-Installation label which has hoisting
dimensional information is located on the side casing near the tower cen-
terline. Remove tower from the carrier and hoist into place according to the
instructions on the label.
Hoisting clips are provided for ease of unloading and positioning
tower. For overhead lifts or where additional safety is required,
safety slings should also be placed under the tower. Under no
circumstances should you combine the top and bottom modules
of modular models and attempt to hoist them at the same time by
utilizing the hoisting clips alone!
Warning
Receiving and Hoisting
Caution
Page 24 of 541
6
Tower Installation
These installation instructions are intended to help you prepare
before your tower arrives. If discrepancies exist between these
instructions and those shipped with the tower, the instructions
shipped with the tower will govern.
1. Prior to placement of the tower, conrm that the supporting platform is
level, and that the anchor bolt holes are correctly located in accordance
with Marley drawings.
2. Place tower (or bottom module of NC8411 through NC8414 models)
on your prepared supports, aligning anchor bolt holes with those in your
supporting steel. Make sure that the orientation agrees with your intended
piping arrangement. Attach tower to supporting steel with four
3
4" diameter
bolts and at washers (by others). Position at washers between the bolt
head and the tower basin ange.
3. NC8411 through NC8414 models only. Before setting top module in place
on bottom module, clean any debris from the underside of the top module ll,
skid and beams and from the top of the bottom module and remove shipping
cover from bottom of top modulereplace fasteners at side of module to
prevent leaks. Place top module on the top peripheral bearing surface (factory-
installed gasket) of bottom module, aligning mating holes as it is set in place.
(Make sure that the orientation of the top module agrees with your intended
piping arrangement. Sections are 180 reversible with respect to each other.)
Attach top module to bottom module with fasteners providedaccording to
NC Field Installation Manual Assembly Instructions.
If tower purchased is one fan cell only, ignore steps 4 through 8.
4. If collection basins are to be equalized by the use of Marley standard umes,
unbolt the coverplate from the basin of the cell just installed. The coverplate
is located in the center of the basin side.
5. Unbolt temporary coverplate from the basin of the 2nd cell and set 2nd cell
(or bottom module of 2nd cell) in place. Align anchor bolt holes and ume
openings in basin sides.
6. Install ume according to Field Installation Manual instructions.
It is important that the cells be rmly anchored before the ume is
attached to the 2nd cell.
Note
Note
Installation
Page 25 of 541
7
7. Repeat steps 2 and 3 for 2nd top section on NC8411 through NC8414
models.
8. Repeat steps 4 through 7 for any remaining cells.
9. Attach your cold water supply piping to the cold water basin outlet connec-
tion in accordance with drawing instructions, utilizing gaskets provided.
Do not support your pipe from the tower or outlet connection
support it externally.
Normally, one of the following three outlet arrangements is provided:
Case face connection: This is a factory-installed, galvanized pipe nipple,
extending horizontally from the side of the cold water basin. It is both beveled
for weldingand grooved for a mechanical coupling. If a weld connection is
used, it is recommended that the weld area be protected against corrosion.
Cold galvanizing is suggested, applied according to the manufacturers
instructions.
Bottom outlet connection: This is a factory-installed, circular opening
in the cold water basin oor of one or more cells. An appropriately-sized
circular opening has been provided to accept a 125# ANSI B16.1 at-face
ange connection.
Side outlet sump connection: Unless otherwise specied, sumps are
manufactured of heavy duty FRP (ber-reinforced polyester) construction.
Because of their size, they are attached upside down in the basin to pre-
vent damage in shipment. They must be inserted into the square opening
prepared in the oor of the cold water basin of one or more cellssealed
against leakage, and attached by machine bolts, according to the installa-
tion drawing included. An appropriately-sized circular opening in the vertical
face of the sump has been provided to accept a 125# ANSI B16.1 at-face
ange connection.
10. Attach makeup water supply piping to appropriately-sized oat valve con-
nection located in cold water basin side wall. Install the drain and overow
according to the NC Field Installation Manual Assembly Instructions.
If you wish to pipe overow and drain water to a remote discharge point,
make those connections at this time also.
11. Attach your warm water return piping to the inlet connections of the
tower.
Caution
Installation
Page 26 of 541
8
Fasteners and components provided by others that are to be at-
tached to the tower must be compatible with the cooling tower
materialsi.e. fasteners in a stainless steel cold water basin must
be stainless steel.
Except for the horizontal components of top-mounted piping, and
as prescribed on Marley drawings, do not support your pipe from
the tower or inlet connectionsupport it externally.
Normally, one of the following four inlet arrangements is provided:
Standard distribution basin connections: These are circular openings
two per cellin the top deck of the tower near the air inlet face, provided
to accept standard 125# at-face anges. Remove the center section of
the inlet ume assembly to gain access to attach inlet fasteners. (Refer to
NC Field Installation Manual shipped with tower.)
Marley ow-control valve connections (option): Marley ow-control
valvestwo per cellare designed to 1take the place of the standard
elbows normally required for inlet connection, and 2provide means of
regulating ow to both sides of the tower. Remove the center inlet ume
assembly to gain access for attachment of valves. (Refer to NC Field
Installation Manual Assembly Instructions shipped with tower.) Valves
provide a vertical face for attachment of your standard 125# ange.
Side inlet connection (option): A pipe stub is provided in the casing
wall above the access door for connection to the external piping by means
of the rubber coupling provided.
Bottom inlet connection (option): An appropriately sized hole and bolt
circleone per cellis provided in the oor of the cold water basin. Bolt
circle is designed to accept a standard 125# at-face ange.
12. Wire motor in accordance with wiring diagram.
For maintenance/safety purposes, SPX recommends a lockout
type disconnect switch for all mechanical equipment. In addition
to a disconnect switch, the motor should be wired to main power
supply through short circuit protection, and a magnetic starter with
overload protection.
Warning
Note
Installation
Caution
Page 27 of 541
9
Installation
Motor Wiring
Wire motor leads as shown on the motor nameplate matching the supply
voltage. Do not deviate from the motor nameplate wiring.
Either of following symbols may be shown on the motor nameplate
, , Y, or YY. These symbols represent how the motor is constructed on
the inside and in no way have anything to do with a Delta or Wye electrical
distribution system serving the motor.
When using a starter:
Set motor overload protection to 110% of motor nameplate amps.
This setting allows the fan motor to operate during cooler weather.
During cooler weather it is common for the motor to draw 6 to 10%
higher than nameplate amps. High amps are common during tower
commissioning when the tower is dry and the ambient air temperature
is cool.
Do not start the motor more than four to ve times per hour. Short
cycling the tower will cause fuses, breakers or O.L.s to operate and
will decrease motor life.
When using a two-speed starter:
Motor rotation must be the same at slow speed and high speed.
Single winding motor requires a starter with a shorting contactor.
Two-winding motor requires a starter with out a shorting contactor.
All two-speed starters must have a 20 second time delay relay when
switching from high speed to low speed.
Do not start the motor more than four to fve times per hour (each
low speed start and each high speed start count as one start).
When using a VFD:
Before beginning, ensure that the motor is rated for Inverter Duty
per NEMA MG-1, part 31.
Set the VFD solid state overload protection to 119% of motor name-
plate amps and set maximum current parameter in the VFD to motor
nameplate amps. Maximum current parameter will reduce fan speed
and limit amp draw to nameplate amps during cold weather opera-
tion. If furnished with a mechanical O.L. set this at 110% over motor
nameplate amps.
Note
Note
Note
Page 28 of 541
10
Installation
Motor rotation must be the same in both VFD mode and By-pass
mode.
If cable distance between the VFD and motor is greater than 100 feet
a DV/DT output lter is recommended to avoid damage to the motor.
100 feet distance is based on our eld experience, the VFD manufac-
ture may state different distances and distance does vary depending
on the VFD manufacture.
Program the VFD for variable torque output. Flux vector and constant
torque modes may damage the gearbox.
Do not start and stop the motor using the safety switch at the motor.
If the drive is being commanded to run and the load side is cycled ON
and OFF with the safety switch this may damage the VFD.
Using a VFD in cooling applications has advantages over traditional single
or two speed motor control. A VFD can reduce the cost of electrical energy
being used and provide better temperature control. In addition, it reduces the
mechanical and electrical stress on the motor and mechanical equipment.
Electrical savings can be large during periods of low ambient temperature
when the cooling requirement can be satised at reduced speeds. To benet
from these advantages, it is important that the drive be installed correctly.
Marley supplies VFD and VFD controls specically designed for our cool-
ing products. If you have purchased a Marley VFD and/or controls package,
please follow the instructions in the User Manual for that system. Most VFD
problems can be avoided by purchasing the Marley drive system. If you are
installing a VFD other than the Marley drive, please refer to that drives instal-
lation manual.
Improper use of a VFD may cause damage to equipment or personal
injury. Failure to correctly install the VFD drive will automatically
void all warranties associated with the motor and any equipment
that is either electrically or mechanically (directly) attached to the
VFD drive system. The length of this warranty avoidance will be
contingent on properly installing the VFD system and repairing any
damage that may have occurred during its operation. SPX Cool-
ing Technologies does not assume responsibility for any technical
support or damages for problems associate with non-Marley brand
VFD systems.
Changing the operational fan speed from the factory settings could
cause the fan to operate in an unstable region which may result in
damage to the equipment and possible injury.
Warning
Warning
Page 29 of 541
11
Mechanical Equipment:
Always shut off electrical power to the tower fan motor prior to
performing any maintenance on the tower. Any electrical switches
should be locked out and tagged out to prevent others from turning
the power back on.
1. If equipped, check oil level in accordance with the Geareducer User Manual
for the Geareducer. (Although the Geareducer was lled to the proper
level at the factory, tipping during shipment and hoisting may have caused
some loss of oil.) If oil is required, ll Geareducer to the proper level with
approved lubricant. (See Geareducer User Manual ) Check oil level at the
Geareducer or dipstick (standpipe located on fan deck, if so equipped) to
conrm that the proper level is indicated.
2. Install fan guard according to the installation drawing shipped with the
tower. NC8401 through NC8403 models include a single-piece fan guard.
NC8405 through NC8414 models include a two-piece fan guard. Models
with extended velocity-recovery cylinders do not have fan guards.
Improper installation of the fan guard will destroy the structural
integrity of the fan guard. Failure of the fan guard could allow op-
erating or maintenance personnel to fall into the rotating fan.
3. Spin the fan manually to assure that all fan blades properly clear the inside of
the fan cylinder. Observe the action of the coupling (or drive shaft couplings)
to be sure that the motor and Geareducer are properly aligned. If necessary,
correct the alignment in accordance with the included manual.
For Power Belt Drive equipped models observe the action of the sheaves
and belts to be sure that the motor is properly aligned with the fan sheave.
See the Belt Tensioning and Sheave Alignment section of this manual.
It is essential that the fan guard be installed in accordance with the
Field Installation Manual shipped with the tower.
Warning
Installation
Warning
Caution
Page 30 of 541
12
4. Momentarily bump (energize) the motor and observe rotation of the fan.
The fan should rotate in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from
below. If rotation is backwards, shut off the fan and reverse two of the three
primary leads supplying power to the motor.
If tower is equipped with a two-speed motor, check for proper rota-
tion at both speeds. Check also to see that starter is equipped with a
20 second time delay which prevents direct switching from high
speed to low speed. If the fan is intended to be reversed for deicing
purposes, make sure that the starter is equipped with a 2 minute
time delay between changes of direction. These delays will prevent
abnormal stress from being applied to the mechanical equipment
and the electrical circuit components.
5. Run the motor and observe the operation of the mechanical equipment. Opera-
tion should be stable, and there should be no evidence of oil leakage.
6. If equipped with belt drive check the torque on the fan and motor sheave
after 10 to 60 hours of operation. See Bushing Fastener Torque Values of
the Belt Tensioning and Sheave Alignment section of this manual.
If the water supply system is not being operatedor if there is no
heat load on the systemmotor amps read at this time may indicate
an apparent overload of as much as 1020%. This is because of the
increased density of unheated air owing through the fan. Deter-
mination of an accurate motor load should await the application of
the design heat load.
Installation
Caution
Note
Page 31 of 541
13
Warning
Tower Start-Up
Among other sources, outbreaks of Legionnaires Disease have
reportedly been traced to cooling towers. Maintenance and water
treatment procedures that prevent amplication and dissemination
of Legionella and other airborne bacteria should be formulated and
implemented BEFORE systems are operated and continued regularly
thereafter to avoid the risk of sickness or death.
Water System:
1. New installations should be cleaned and treated with biocides by a water
treatment expert before startup.
2. Remove any and all accumulated debris from tower. Pay particular atten-
tion to inside areas of cold water basin, hot water basins, louvers and drift
eliminators. Make sure that cold water outlet screens are clear and properly
installed.
3. Fill the water system to an approximate depth of 7" in the depressed area
of the cold water basin at the center of the tower. For models NC8407
through NC8414 ll the water system to an approximate depth of 8". This
is the recommended operating water level. Adjust the oat valve so that it is
75% open at that level. Continue flling the system until the water reaches
a level approximately
1
8" below the lip of the overow.
If tower is equipped with a standard case face outlet connection,
vent accumulated air from the top of the suction hood by removing
one or both tap screws provided at that location. Replace these tap
screws when venting is complete. (On certain models, the top of the
suction hood for 14" diameter side suctions is 1
1
4" above the top of
the overfow. In those situations, it is necessary to block the overfow
and continue lling the basin to the level where the aforementioned
tap screws are submerged before venting.)
4. Completely open all hot water ow control valves. Start your pump(s) and
observe system operation. Since the water system external to the tower will
have been lled only to the level achieved in the cold water basin, a certain
amount of pump-down of the basin water level will occur before water
completes the circuit and begins to fall from the ll. The amount of initial
pump-down may be insufcient to cause the oat valve to open. However,
Note
Installation
Page 32 of 541
14
you can check its operation by pressing down on the operating lever to
which the stem of the oat valve is attached.
Some trial and error adjustment of the oat valve may be required to balance
the makeup water with tower operation. Ideally, the oat valve setting will
be such that no water is wasted through the overow at pump shutdown.
However, the water level after pump start-up must be deep enough to
assure positive pump suction.
5. If the tower is equipped with flow-control valves, adjust them to
equalize hot water depth in the distribution basins after reach-
ing design water ow rate. Each basin should have from 3" to 5
1
2"
water depth, with uniform depth from basin to basin. Fix valves in this posi-
tion with the locking bar when depth is correct. Failue to tighten the locking
bar after valve adjustment may result in damage to the valve. If the tower is
equipped with the Marley internal piping option, the basins are self-balancing
and this step is not necessary.
Uniform distribution depth of 3" to 5
1
2" is essential to efcient tower op-
eration. Contact your Marley sales representative if you are considering a
permanent change in circulating water ow rate that would prevent operation
within these limits.
6. Continue pump operation for about 15 minutes, after which it is recom-
mended that the water system be drained, ushed, and relled.
7. While operating the condensing water pump(s) and prior to operating the
cooling tower fan, execute one of the two alternative biocidal treatment
programs described in the following:
Resume treatment with the biocide which had been used prior to shut-
down. Utilize the services of the water treatment supplier. Maintain the
maximum recommended biocide residual (for the specic biocide) for
a sufcient period of time (residual and time will vary with the biocide)
to bring the system under good biological control
or
Treat the system with sodium hypochlorite to a level of 4 to 5 ppm free
chlorine residual at a pH of 7.0 to 7.6. The chlorine residual must be
held at 4 to 5 ppm for six hours, measurable with standard commercial
water test kits.
Installation
Page 33 of 541
15
If the cooling tower has been in operation and then shut down for a duration
of time and not drained, perform one of the two previous biocidal treatment
programs directly to the cooling water storage vessel (cooling tower sump,
drain down tank, etc.) without circulating stagnant water over the cooling
tower ll or operating the cooling tower fan.
After biocidal pretreatment has been successfully completed, cooling water
may be circulated over the tower ll with the fan off.
When biocidal treatment has been maintained at a satisfactory level for
at least six hours, the fan may be turned on and the system returned to
service. Resume the standard water treatment program, including biocidal
treatment.
Tower Operation
General:
The cold water temperature obtained from an operating cooling tower will vary
with the following inuences:
1. Heat load: With the fan in full operation, if the heat load increases, the
cold water temperature will rise. If the heat load reduces, the cold water
temperature will reduce.
Note that the number of degrees (range) through which the tower cools
the water is established by the system heat load and the amount of water
being circulated, in accordance with the following formula:
The cooling tower establishes only the cold water temperature attainable
under any operating circumstance.
2. Air wet-bulb temperature: Cold water temperature will also vary with the
wet-bulb temperature of the air entering the louvered faces of the tower.
Reduced wet-bulb temperatures will result in colder water temperatures.
However, the cold water temperature will not vary to the same extent as
the wet-bulb. For example, a 20F reduction in wet-bulb may result in only
a 15F reduction in cold water temperature.
3. Water ow rate: Increasing the water ow rate GPM will cause a slight
elevation in cold water temperature, while reducing the water ow rate
will cause the cold water temperature to decrease slightly. However, at a
given heat load (see formula above), water ow reductions also cause an
increase in the incoming hot water temperature. Use care to prevent the
Range F =
Heat Load (Btu/hr)
GPM x 500
or in SI units
Range C =
Heat Load (kilowatts)
Liters/sec x 4.187
Operation
Page 34 of 541
16
hot water from exceeding 125F, in order to prevent damage to the tower
components.
4. Air ow rate: Reducing air ow through the tower causes the cold water
temperature to rise. This is the approved method by which to control leaving
water temperature.
If your tower is equipped with a single-speed motor, the motor may be shut
off when the water temperature becomes too cold. This will cause the water
temperature to rise. When the water temperature then becomes too warm
for your process, the motor can be restarted.
Fan cycling limits:
Considering the normal fan and motor sizes utilized on NC towers,
anticipate that approximately 4 to 5 starts per hour are allowable.
If your tower is equipped with a two-speed motor, you will enjoy greater op-
portunity for temperature control. When the water temperature becomes too
cold, switching the fan to half-speed will cause the cold water temperature
to risestabilizing at a temperature a few degrees higher than before. With
a further reduction in water temperature, the fan may be cycled alternately
from half-speed to off.
Do not start the motor more than four to fve times per hour (each
low speed start and each high speed start count as one start).
If your tower consists of two or more cells, cycling of motors may be shared
between cells, increasing your steps of operation accordingly.
Multicell towers equipped with two-speed motors will maximize energy
savings and minimize sound levels if fans are staged so that all fans are
brought up to low speed before any fan goes to high speed.
For greater insight on cold water temperature control, please read
Cooling Tower Energy and its Management, Technical Report
#H-001-A, available on our website
Operation
Note
Note
Page 35 of 541
17
Caution
Wintertime Operation:
The Marley ll system used in NC cooling towers has air entrance louvers that
are molded as an integral part of the ll. This feature makes these towers very
forgiving of cold weather operation, even at the low temperature and reduced
load conditions encountered in free cooling and other low temperature applica-
tions. Nevertheless, during operation in subfreezing weather the opportunity
exists for ice to form in the colder regions of the tower.
Slushy, transitory ice forms routinely in the colder regions of the ll
of low temperature towers, and is visible through the tower louvers.
Such ice normally has no adverse effect on tower operation, but
its appearance should be a signal to the operator to undertake ice
control procedures.
It is the operator's responsibility to prevent the formation of destruc-
tive (hard) ice on the cooling tower fll. Certain guidelines should
be followed:
1. Do not allow the towers leaving water temperature to drop below a mini-
mum allowable levelsay 36F to 40F. If such low temperature operation
is necessary or benecial to your process, establish the minimum allowable
level as follows:
During the coldest days of the rst winter of operation, observe whether
any ice is forming on the louver face, particularly near the bottom part of
the louver face. If hard ice is present on the louvers, you must increase the
allowable cold water temperature. If the coldest possible water is benecial
to your process, ice of a mushy consistency can be toleratedbut routine
periodic observation is advisable.
If the minimum allowable cold water temperature is established at
or near minimum heat load, it should be safe for all operating condi-
tions.
Having established the minimum allowable cold water temperature, maintain-
ing that temperature can be accomplished by fan manipulation, as outlined
in Item 4 under Tower Operation. However, in towers of more than one
cell, where fans are manipulated sequentially, please realize that the water
temperature will be signicantly lower in the cell or cells operating at the
highest fan speed than the net cold water temperature produced by the
Note
Operation
Page 36 of 541
18
entire tower would indicate. Wintertime operation of multicell towers at
low cold water temperature levels requires that the operator be especially
watchful.
2. As cold air enters the louvers, it causes the water owing over the ll to be
drawn inward toward the center of the tower. Thus, under fan operation, the
louvers and lower periphery of the tower structure remain partly dry, see-
ing only random splashing from within the towerplus normal atmospheric
moisture from the entering air. Such lightly wetted areas are most subject
to freezing.
Therefore, if excessive ice forms on the louvers, stop the fan for a few
minutes. With the fan off, the water ow will increase in the vicinity of the
louvers and reduce the ice buildup.
3. Under extended extreme cold conditions, it may be necessary to operate
the fan in reverse. This forces warm air out through the louvers, melting any
accumulated iceadequate heat load must be available. Reversal may be
at either full or half speed; however, we recommend reversal at half speed.
Reverse operation of the fan should be used sparingly and should only be
used to control ice, not to prevent it. Reverse fan operation should not
need to exceed 1 or 2 minutes. Monitoring is required to determine the
time required to melt accumulated ice.
Reverse operation of fans for prolonged periods during subfreezing
weather can cause severe damage to fans and fan cylinders. Ice can
accumulate inside fan cylinders at fan blade plane of rotation and fan
blade tips will eventually strike this ring of ice, damaging the fan blades
or cylinder. Ice can also accumulate on fan blades and be thrown off,
damaging fan cylinder or blades. Allow a minimum of 10 minute delay
between reverse operation and forward operation during subfreezing
weather to permit ice to dissipate from fan blades and fan cylinders.
See Fan Drive Caution note in the Mechanical Equipment Installation
section of this manual.
4. With no heat load on the circulating water, icing cannot be controlled
effectively by air control during freezing weather. Towers must not be
operated with reduced water rate and/or no heat load during
freezing weather. If the circulating water system cannot be shut down,
water returning from the process should be made to bypass the tower. If
a bypass is used, all water must be bypassed without modulation. If the
water bypass is directly into the tower's cold water basin, its design must
be approved by SPX Cooling Technologies.
Warning
Operation
Page 37 of 541
19
Intermittent Wintertime Operation:
If periods of shutdown (nights, weekends, etc.) occur during freezing
weather, measures must be taken to prevent the water in the cold
water basinand all exposed piping, both internally and externally
from freezing.
Several methods are used to combat this, including:
automatic water basin heater systems available from Marley.
eld installation of heat tracing of piping, both internally and externally.
eld modication to provide a weep hole by drilling a
3
16" hole in PVC piping,
7 up from the base of the ange of the internal riser. The hole should be
plugged with a " tap screw with sealing washer. For steel piping, drill a
13
64"
diameter hole 2" up from the base of the ange of the internal riser and tap
for a -20 bolt with sealing washer that will be used as a plug. See gures
below for drilling details. Normally weep holes are plugged during tower
operation and plugs removed during downtime in freezing temperatures. To
leave the hole unplugged during operation, drill a
3
16" hole at an upward angle
that will allow the water ow to drain downward into the basin.
Unless some means of freeze prevention is incorporated into your
system, the tower basin and exposed pipework should be drained
at the beginning of each wintertime shutdown period.
If tower basin is drained, verify that all basin heaters have been shut
off either by automatic cutoff or disconnect switch.
It is recommended that you discuss your freeze prevention options with your
local Marley sales representative.
Caution
Operation
Warning
DRILL FOR PLUGGING HOLES
DRILL FOR NO PLUG
TAP SCREW
OR BOLT
Warning
Page 38 of 541
20
Water Treatment and Blowdown
Maintaining Water Quality:
The steel used in NC towers has been galvanized with a heavy zinc coating
averaging 2.0 mils in thickness. The NC stainless steel option is even more
corrosion resistant than galvanized steel in certain environments. Other ma-
terials used (PVC ll, drift eliminators, and louvers, aluminum fans, cast iron
Geareducer, etc.) are selected to offer maximum service life in a normal
cooling tower environment, dened as follows:
Circulating water with a pH between 6.5 and 8; a chloride content (as NaCl)
below 500 ppm; a sulfate content (SO4) below 250 ppm; total alkalinity (as
CaCO
3
) below 500 ppm; calcium hardness (as CaCO
3
) above 50 ppm; a
maximum inlet water temperature not to exceed 125F; no signicant con-
tamination with unusual chemicals or foreign substances; and adequate water
treatment to minimize scaling.
Startup Conditions: The water conditions during the initial tower operation
are crucial in preventing premature corrosion of galvanized steel (white
rust). For at least the rst eight weeks of operation, pH should be controlled
between 6.5 and 8.0 with hardness and alkalinity levels between 100 and
300 ppm (expressed as CaCO
3
).
Chlorine (if used) shall be added intermittently, with a free residual not to
exceed 1 ppmmaintained for short periods. Excessive chlorine levels may
deteriorate sealants and other materials of construction.
An atmosphere surrounding the tower no worse than moderate industrial,
where rainfall and fog are no more than slightly acid, and they do not contain
signicant chlorides or hydrogen sulde (H2S).
Many proprietary chemicals exist for control of scale, corrosion, and biologi-
cal growth and should be used prudently. Also, combinations of chemicals
may cause reactions which reduce treatment effectiveness, and certain
chemicals such as surfactants, biodispersants and antifoams may increase
drift rate.
Unless you purchased a stainless steel NC, the structure of your NC
tower consists primarily of galvanized steel, therefore your water
treatment program must be compatible with zinc. In working with
your water treatment supplier, it is important that you recognize
the potential effects on zinc of the specic treatment program you
choose.
Operation
Note
Page 39 of 541
21
Cooling Tower Cleaning:
Any evaporative-type cooling tower must be thoroughly cleaned on
a regular basis to minimize the growth of bacteria, including Legio-
nella Pneumophila, to avoid the risk of sickness or death. Service
personnel must wear proper personal protective equipment during
decontamination. Do NOT attempt any service unless the fan motor
is locked out.
Operators of evaporative cooling equipment, such as water cooling towers,
should follow maintenance programs which will reduce to an absolute minimum
the opportunity for bacteriological contamination. Public Health Service ofcials
have recommended that good housekeeping procedures be followed, such
as: regular inspections for concentrations of dirt, scale, and algae; periodic
ushing and cleaning; and the following of a complete water treatment program
including biocidal treatment.
The visual inspection should take place at least once a week during the operat-
ing season. The periodic ushing and cleaning should be done before and after
each cooling season, but in any event at least twice a year. The louvers, drift
eliminators, and easily accessible ll surfaces should be ushed by use of a
moderate-pressure water nozzle, being careful not to cause physical damage.
A reliable water treatment program should be installed and maintained. Filtra-
tion devices may be employed to reduce the suspended solids concentrations,
thus increasing the effectiveness of the water treatment program. See Tower
Startup section of this manual.
Blowdown:
A cooling tower cools water by continuously causing a portion of it to evaporate.
Although the water lost by evaporation is replenished by the makeup system, it
exits the tower as pure waterleaving behind its burden of dissolved solids to
concentrate in the remaining water. Given no means of control, this increasing
concentration of contaminants can reach a very high level.
In order to achieve water quality which is acceptable to the cooling tower (as
well as the remainder of your circulating water system), the selected water
treatment company must work from a relatively constant level of concentra-
tions. This stabilization of contaminant concentrations is usually accomplished
by blowdown, which is the constant discharge of a portion of the circulating
water to waste. As a rule, acceptable levels on which to base a treatment
schedule will be in the range of 2-4 concentrations. The following table shows
Maintenance
Warning
Page 40 of 541
22
the minimum amount of blowdown (percent of ow) required to maintain different
concentrations with various cooling ranges*:
* Range = Difference between hot water temperature coming to tower and cold water tem-
perature leaving tower.
EXAMPLE: 700 GPM circulating rate, 18F cooling range. To maintain 4
concentrations, the required blowdown is 0.458% or .00458 times 700 GPM,
which is 3.2 GPM.
If tower is operated at 4 concentrations, circulating water will contain four
times as much dissolved solid as the makeup water, assuming none of the
solids form scale or are otherwise removed from the system.
When water treatment chemicals are added, they should not be in-
troduced into the circulating water system via the cold water basin
of the cooling tower. Water velocities are lowest at that point, which
results in inadequate mixing.
Belt Tensioning
The belt tension is adjusted by loosening the 8 bolts that secure the motor
mount frame to the belt drive frame, then loosen the retaining nuts on the two
threaded rods and turn the threaded rods to apply proper tension. Apply the
same quantity of turns to each threaded rod to insure that the tensioning frame
remains parallel to the mechanical support beams. Retighten hardware. Ideal
tension is the lowest tension at which the belt will not slip under peak load
conditions. Check tension frequently during the rst 24-48 hours of run-in
operation. Overtensioning shortens belt and bearing life. Keep belts free from
foreign material which may cause slipping. Never apply belt dressing as this will
damage the belt and cause early failure. A Dodge

V-Belt Tension Tester is an

alternate method for tensioning V-belts. Check with you local belt supplier.
Maintenance
Note
Cooling Range
Number of Concentrations
1.5X 2.0X 2.5X 3.0X 4.0X 5.0X 6.0X
5 F .78 .38 .25 .18 .11 .08 .06
10 F 1.58 .78 .51 .38 .25 .18 .14
15 F 2.38 1.18 .78 .58 .38 .28 .22
20 F 3.18 1.58 1.05 .78 .51 .38 .30
25 F 3.98 1.98 1.32 .98 .64 .48 .38
Multipliers are based on drift of 0.02% of the circulating water rate.
Page 41 of 541
23
SHEAVE
STRAIGHT EDGE
SHEAVE
THREADED ROD
FAN SHAFT
Sheave Alignment
The motor sheave is to be positioned as close as possible to the motor in
order to minimize torque on the motor bushings.
The motor and fan sheaves may have grooves that are not used. The bottom
surface of the motor and fan sheaves must be aligned within
1
8" of each
other and level within
1
2 (
1
8" in 12) in order to not adversely affect belt and
sheave life.
Alignment can be achieved by placing a straight edge across the sheaves
making sure that it is level and measuring down to the bottom surface of
both sheaves at four points.
The belt is to be located in the lowest set of
grooves.
Maintenance
g n i h s u B e z i S r e n e t s a F
e u q r o T
b l t f

m N
H S
0 2 -
6 8
S D S
0 2 -
6 8
D S
0 2 -
6 8
K S
8 1 -
3 1 8 1
F S
6 1 -
2 2 0 3
E
3 1 -
5 3 8 4
F
2 1 -
5 6 8 8
Bushing Fastener
Torque Values
Page 42 of 541
24
Maintenance
Schedule of Tower Maintenance
Some maintenance procedures may require maintenance personnel to enter
the tower. Each cased face of the tower has a door for access to the interior
of the tower. The NC8401 and NC8402 have a 30" wide by 33" high door.
All other models have a 30" wide by 48" high door.
The optional fan deck ladder is designed and intended solely for personnel to
gain access to the fan deck. The fan deck ladder should not be used to enter
or exit the access doors located on the cased face of the tower unless the
optional access door platform is provided.
The purchaser or owner is responsible for providing a safe method
for entering or exiting the access door. Use of the fan deck ladder
to enter or exit the access doors may result in a fall.
Included with this instruction packet are separate Service Manuals on each
major operating component of the tower, and it is recommended that you
read them thoroughly. Where discrepancies may exist, the separate Service
Manuals will take precedence.
The following is recommended as a minimum routine of scheduled mainte-
nance:
Always shut off electrical power to the tower fan motor prior to
performing any inspections that may involve physical contact with
the mechanical or electrical equipment in or on the tower. Lock out
and tag out any electrical switches to prevent others from turning
the power back on. Service personnel must wear proper personal
protective clothing and equipment.
Weekly: Inspect for bacterial growth and general operation conditions. Bacte-
rial growth should be reported to your water treatment expert for immediate
attention.
Monthly (Weekly at start up): Observe, touch, and listen to the tower.
Become accustomed to its normal appearance, sound, and level of vibration.
Abnormal aspects relating to the rotating equipment should be considered
reason to shut down the tower until the problem can be located and corrected.
Observe operation of the motor, coupling (or drive shaft), Geareducer and
Warning
Warning
Page 43 of 541
25
Maintenance
fan. Become familiar with the normal operating temperature of the motor, as
well as the sight and sound of all components as a whole.
If equipped, check for Geareducer oil leaks. Check the Geareducer as well
as any optional oil lines to external oil dipstick/sight glass.
Inspect louvers, drift eliminators and basin trash screens and remove any
debris or scale which may have accumulated. Replace any damaged or worn
out components. Use of high-pressure water may damage the eliminator and
louver material.
Observe operation of the oat valve. Depress the operating lever to make
sure that the valve is operating freely. Inspect the suction screen for plugging.
Remove any debris that may have accumulated.
Check for any buildup of silt on the oor of the cold water basin. Mentally make
note of the amount, if any, so future inspections will enable you to determine
the rate at which it is forming.
Every 3 months: If equipped, lubricate fan shaft bearings. While rotating
equipment by hand, grease the bearings until a bead forms around the seals.
Mobil SHC 460 grease is recommended.
Semi-Annually: If equipped, check the belt tension and condition.
If equipped, check Geareducer oil level. Shut down the unit and allow 5 min-
utes for the oil level to stabilize. Add oil if required.
Clean and disinfect cooling tower with biocides. Systems with biofouling, high
general bacterial counts, or positive cultures of legionella may require additional
cleaning. Refer to Cooling Tower Cleaning section of this manual. Consult
your water treatment expert as to prudent biological evalution testing.
Geareducer models used on NC cooling towers are designed for
5-year oil change intervals. To maintain ve-year change intervals,
use only oil designed specically for these Geareducers. If, after
ve years, turbine-type mineral oil is used, the oil must be changed
semiannually. Refer to the Geareducer Manual for oil recommenda-
tions and further instructions.
Annually: Inspect the tower thoroughly, making maximum use of instructions
given in the separate service manuals. Check structural bolted connections
and tighten as required. Make preventive maintenance repairs as necessary.

Note
Page 44 of 541
26
Relubricate motor according to the manufacturers instructions. Refer to the
Motor Re-lubrication Instructions of this manual for towers equipped with the
motor outside the plenum area.
Check to see that all bolts are tight in the fan and mechanical equipment
region, including the fan cylinder and fan guard. Refer to Componet User
Manuals for torque values.
Every 5 Years: If equipped, change Geareducer oil. Refer to the Geareducer
User Manual for instructions.
Motor Relubrication Instructions
Motor located outside plenum option
Open and lock out disconnect switch to make certain motor cannot
be started.
1. Remove guard as shown. Opposite end motor bearing is accessible from
outside the tower.
2. Remove grease ll and relief plugs at both shaft extension end and opposite
end bearings and remove hardened grease, using clean wire.
Maintenance
MOTOR STEEL SIDE CASING
ATTACHMENT SCREW
GUARD
GREASE FILL PLUG
GREASE RELIEF PLUG
3. Insert grease ttings in grease ll openings and add grease until grease is
forced out through relief openings.
4. Replace ll plugs and operate mechanical equipment 30 minutes to one
hour to purge excess grease at grease relief opening.
Warning
Page 45 of 541
27
5. Reinstall grease relief plugs and reinstall guard.
6. Resume normal tower operation.
Seasonal Shutdown Instructions
When the system is to be shut down for an extended period of time, it is
recommended that the entire system (cooling tower, system piping, heat
exchangers, etc.) be drained. Leave the basin drains open.
During shutdown, clean the tower (see Warning on cooling tower cleaning
in the Maintenance section of this manual) and make any necessary repairs.
Pay particular attention to mechanical equipment supports and coupling (or
drive shafts).
Following each years shutdown and cleaning, inspect the towers metal surfaces
for evidence of the need to apply a protective coating. Do not misinterpret
grimeand transient rust from the piping systemas a need to have the tower
painted. If relatively bright metal can be exposed by cleaning, consider that the
galvanizing has remained effective. Unless there is evidence of a generalized
failure of the galvanizing, localized touch-up should be all that is required.
To the extent that the galvanizing (zinc coating) still exists, paint
will not adhere to it readily. Contact the manufacturer of the coating
you intend to use for instructions.
Tower framework: Check structural bolted connections and tighten as
required.
Fans: Check fan assembly bolting and tighten as required. Use torque values
prescribed in the Fan User Manual.
Fans shaft bearings: If equipped, lubricate fan shaft bearings at close of each
operating season, as described in the Maintenance section of this manual.
Electric motors: Clean and lubricate motor at close of each operating season
(refer to motor manufacturers recommendations.) Check motor anchor bolts
and tighten as required.
Maintenance
Page 46 of 541
28
Do not start motor before determining that there will be no interfer-
ence with free rotation of the fan drive.
The motor should be operated for three hours at least once a month. This
serves to dry out windings and re-lubricate bearing surfaces (refer to Marley
Electric Motor User Manual Manual 92-1475 ).
At start of new operating season, make sure bearings are adequately lubricated
before returning motor to service.
Prolonged Shutdown
If shutdown period is longer than seasonal, contact your Marley sales repre-
sentative for additional information.
SPX Cooling Technologies Services
Our interest in your NC cooling tower does not end with the sale. Having
conceived, designed, and manufactured the most reliable and longest-lasting
cooling tower on the market, we want to make sure that you gain the maximum
possible benet from its purchase.
Therefore, the following services are available which are intended to: assure
the maximum possible service life under your operating conditions; tailor the
operating characteristics to your specic needs; and maintain consistently
optimum thermal performance capability. They are available by contacting
your Marley sales representative.
Replacement parts: A complete stock of parts and components is maintained
at one or more of the various Marley plants. In cases of emergency, they can
normally be shipped within 24 hoursby air freight if necessary. However, you
would obviously benet from anticipating your need in advance, thus avoiding
the cost of special handling.
Be sure to mention your tower serial number (from the tower nameplate) when
ordering parts.
Periodic maintenance: You may wish to contract with SPX for regularly
scheduled visitsfor the purpose of inspecting and reporting your towers
conditionto make recommendations intended to prevent emergencies and
to perform maintenance considered outside the norm.
This service is not intended to replace the important function performed by
your maintenance staff. Their attention assures the towers routine operating
performance, and is invaluable. However, we recognize the unusual manner
in which a cooling tower performs its functionas well as the unique forces
which act upon itmay be considerations which occasionally require the
services of an expert technician.
Maintenance
Caution
Page 47 of 541
29
Maintenance Schedule
Maintenance Service Monthly Semi-annually Seasonal Startup or Annually
Inspect General Condition and Operation x x
Observe Operation of:
Mechanicalmotor, fan and drive mechanism x x
Makeup valve (if equipped) x x
Inspect for unusual noise or vibration x x
Inspect and Clean:
Air inlet x x
PVC drift eliminators x x
Distribution basin, nozzles and collection basin x x
Fan motor exterior x x
Check:
Collection water basin level x x
Blowdownadjust as required x x
Geareducer Drive (if equipped):
Check for loose fasteners including oil drain plug x
Check for / repair oil leaks x x
Check oil level x x
Change oil R
Make sure vent is open x x
Check driveshaft or coupling alignment x
Check for loose driveshaft or coupling fasteners x
Check driveshaft or coupling bushings or ex element for unusual wear x x
Lube lines (if equipped):
Check for oil leaks in hoses or ttings x R x
Belt drive (if equipped):
Fan shaft bearing lubrication (every 3 mo.) every 3 months every 3 months
Check and tighten support fasteners x
Check shaft, sheave and belt alignment x
Check belt tension and condition x x
Check sheave bushing fastener torque x
Fan:
Check and tighten blade and hub fasteners x
Check fan blade pitch and tip clearance x
Check fan cylinder for loose fasteners x
Motor:
Lubricate (grease as required) R
Check mounting bolts for tightness x
Operate at least 3 hours a month 3 hours a month 3 hours a month
Basin Heater (if equipped):
Check for proper operation of temp/low water level sensor x
Inspect/clean buildup of contaminant from sensor x x
Structure:
Inspect/tighten all fasteners x x
Inspect and touch up all metal surfaces x
R Refer to Component User Manual
Note: It is recommended at least weekly, that the general operation and condition be observed. Pay attention to
any changes in sound or vibration that may signify a need for closer inspection.
Page 48 of 541
30
e l b u o r T e s u a C y d e m e R
t r a t S t o N l l i W r o t o M
s l a n i m r e t r o t o m t a e l b a l i a v a t o n r e w o P
s n o i t c e n n o c d a b y n a t c e r r o C . r e t r a t s t a r e w o p k c e h C
. r o t o m e h t d n a s u t a r a p p a l o r t n o c e h t n e e w t e b
, s d a o l r e v o t e s e R . t i u c r i c l o r t n o c d n a s t c a t n o c r e t r a t s k c e h C
l o r t n o c d e l i a f e c a l p e r r o s e h c t i w s d e p p i r t t e s e r , s t c a t n o c e s o l c
. s e h c t i w s
d a o l r e v o e r u s e k a m , r e t r a t s t a s d a e l l l a n o t o n s i r e w o p f I
. n o i t i d n o c r e p o r p n i e r a s e c i v e d t i u c r i c t r o h s d n a
s n o i t c e n n o c g n o r W . s m a r g a i d g n i r i w t s n i a g a s n o i t c e n n o c l o r t n o c d n a r o t o m k c e h C
e g a t l o v w o L
k c e h C . y l p p u s r e w o p t s n i a g a e g a t l o v e t a l p e m a n k c e h C
. s l a n i m r e t r o t o m t a e g a t l o v
g n i d n i w r o t o m n i t i u c r i c n e p O . s t i u c r i c n e p o r o f s g n i d n i w r o t a t s k c e h C
k c u t s e v i r d n a f r o r o t o M
r e c u d e r a e G d n a r o t o m k c e h c d n a d a o l m o r f r o t o m t c e n n o c s i D
. m e l b o r p f o e s u a c r o f
e v t c e f e d r o t o R . s g n i r r o s r a b n e k o r b r o f k o o L
e s i o N r o t o M l a u s u n U
e s a h p - e l g n i s g n i n n u r r o t o M
- e l g n i s f i t r a t s t o n l l i w r o t o M . t i t r a t s o t t p m e t t a d n a r o t o m p o t S
. r o t o m d n a , s l o r t n o c , g n i r i w k c e h C . d e s a h p
y l t c e r r o c n i d e t c e n n o c s d a e l r o t o M . r o t o m n o m a r g a i d g n i r i w t s n i a g a s n o i t c e n n o c r o t o m k c e h C
s g n i r a e b d a B . s g n i r a e b d a b e c a l p e R . n o i t a c i r b u l k c e h C
e c n a l a b n u l a c i r t c e l E
f i t c e r r o C . s e n i l e e r h t l l a f o s t n e r r u c d n a s e g a t l o v k c e h C
. d e r i u q e r
m r o f i n u t o n p a g r i A . g n i r a e b r o s t i f t e k c a r b t c e r r o c d n a k c e h C
e c n a l a b n u r o t o R . e c n a l a b e R
d r a u g l l e b d n e g n i t t i h n a f g n i l o o C . n a f e c a l p e r r o l l a t s n i e R
t o H s n u R r o t o M
e g a t l o v d e c n a l a b n u r o e g a t l o v g n o r W
e t a l p e m a n t s n i a g a s e n i l e e r h t l l a f o t n e r r u c d n a e g a t l o v k c e h C
. s e u l a v
d a o l r e v O
r o f k c e h C . l a u n a M e c i v r e S n a F e e S . h c t i p e d a l b n a f k c e h C
. s g n i r a e b d e g a m a d m o r f s a n i a r t e v i r d n a f n i g a r d
M P R r o t o m g n o r W
r o t o m f o M P R k c e h C . y l p p u s r e w o p t s n i a g a e t a l p e m a n k c e h C
. o i t a r r a e g d n a
d e s a e r g r e v o s g n i r a e B
e g r u p o t d e e p s o t p u r o t o m n u R . s f e i l e r e s a e r g e v o m e R
. e s a e r g e v i s s e c x e
s g n i r a e b n i t n a c i r b u l g n o r W
s ' r e r u t c a f u n a m r o t o m e e S . t n a c i r b u l r e p o r p o t e g n a h C
. s n o i t c u r t s n i
n e p o e s a h p e n O
- e l g n i s f i t r a t s t o n l l i w r o t o M . t i t r a t s o t t p m e t t a d n a r o t o m p o t S
. r o t o m d n a , s l o r t n o c , g n i r i w k c e h C . d e s a h p
n o i t a l i t n e v r o o P
e l p m a w o l l A . s g n i n e p o n o i t a l i t n e v k c e h c d n a r o t o m n a e l C
. r o t o m d n u o r a n o i t a l i t n e v
t l u a f g n i d n i W . r e t e m m h O h t i w k c e h C
t f a h s r o t o m t n e B . t f a h s e c a l p e r r o n e t h g i a r t S
e s a e r g t n e i c i f f u s n I . s g n i r a e b e s a e r g e r d n a s g u l p e v o m e R
s e g n a h c d e e p s r o g n i t r a t s t n e u q e r f o o T
. r h / s d n o c e s 0 3 f o l a t o t a o t e m i t n o i t a r e l e c c a e v i t a l u m u c t i m i L
r e d i s n o C . t r a p a r e h t r a f s t n i o p t e s e g n a h c d e e p s r o f f o / n o t e S
. l o r t n o c e r u t a r e p m e t e n i f r o f e v i r d D F V y e l r a M a g n i l l a t s n i
n g i e r o f r o , e s a e r g f o n o i t a r o i r e t e D
e s a e r g n i l a i r e t a m
. e t a c i r b u l e r d n a s g n i r a e b h s u l F
d e g a m a d s g n i r a e B . s g n i r a e b e c a l p e R
p U e m o C t o N s e o D r o t o M
d e e p S o T
s l a n i m r e t r o t o m t a w o l o o t e g a t l o V
p o r d e n i l f o e s u a c e b
n o e g a t l o v r e h g i h e s U . s p a t f o g n i t t e s d n a r e m r o f s n a r t k c e h C
r o e z i s e r i w e s a e r c n I . s d a o l e c u d e r r o s l a n i m r e t r e m r o f s n a r t
. a i t r e n i e c u d e r
s r a b r o t o R n e k o r B
. d e r i u q e r e b y a m r o t o r w e n A . s g n i r e h t r a e n s k c a r c r o f k o o L
. r o t o m k c e h c n o s r e p e c i v r e s r o t o m e v a H
) r o t o M ( n o i t a t o R g n o r W s e s a h p f o e c n e u q e s g n o r W . s d a e l r o t o m e e r h t e h t f o o w t y n a h c t i w S
Troubleshooting
Page 49 of 541
31
Troubleshooting
e l b u o r T e s u a C y d e m e R
e s i o N r e c u d e r a e G
s g n i r a e b r e c u d e r a e G
. n o i t a r e p o f o k e e w e n o r e t f a s r a e p p a s i d e s i o n f i e e s , w e n f I
e c i v r e S r e c u d e r a e G e e S . r e c u d e r a e G l l i f e r d n a , h s u l f , n i a r D
. e c a l p e r , y s i o n l l i t s f I . l a u n a M
s r a e G
. s r a e g n r o w y l d a b e c a l p e R . t n e m e g a g n e h t o o t t c e r r o C
. h t e e t d e g a m a d r o n e k o r b h t i w s r a e g e c a l p e R
e v i r D n a F l a u s u n U
n o i t a r b i V
s w e r c s p a c d n a s t l o b e s o o L
t n e m p i u q e l a c i n a h c e m l l a n o s w e r c s p a c d n a s t l o b l l a n e t h g i T
. s t r o p p u s d n a
n r o w r o t f a h s e v i r d d e c n a l a b n U
s g n i l p u o c
r e p o r p n i e r a s t f a h s r e c u d e r a e G d n a r o t o m e r u s e k a M
r o r i a p e R . d e h c t a m y l r e p o r p " s k r a m h c t a m " d n a t n e m n g i l a
r o g n i d d a y b t f a h s e v i r d e c n a l a b e R . s g n i l p u o c n r o w e c a l p e r
e v i r D e e S . s w e r c s p a c g n i c n a l a b m o r f s t h g i e w g n i v o m e r
. l a u n a M e c i v r e S t f a h S
n a F
y t e f a s s a n a f f o r e t n e c m o r f r a f s a e r a s e d a l b l l a n i a t r e c e k a M
e e S . e m a s e h t d e h c t i p e b t s u m s e d a l b l l A . t i m r e p s e c i v e d
. s e d a l b n o p u - d l i u b t i s o p e d f f o n a e l C . l a u n a M e c i v r e S n a F
s g n i r a e b r e c u d e r a e G n r o W
s a s g n i r a e b e c a l p e R . y a l p d n e t f a h s n o i n i p d n a n a f k c e h C
. y r a s s e c e n
r o t o m d e c n a l a b n U
, s e t a r b i v l l i t s r o t o m f I . r o t o m e t a r e p o d n a d a o l t c e n n o c s i D
. r o t o r e c n a l a b e r
t f a h s r e c u d e r a e G t n e B
f i e c a l p e R . r o t a c i d n i l a i d h t i w t f a h s n o i n i p d n a n a f k c e h C
. y r a s s e c e n
e s i o N n a F
r e d n i l y c n a f f o e d i s n i g n i b b u r e d a l B . e c n a r a e l c p i t e d a l b e d i v o r p o t r e d n i l y c t s u j d A
s p m a l c e d a l b n i s t l o b e s o o L . y r a s s e c e n f i n e t h g i t d n a k c e h C
e c n a t s b u s n g i e r o f r o e l a c S
m e t s y s r e t a w g n i t a l u c r i c n i
n w o d w o l b t n e i c i f f u s n I l a u n a m s i h t f o n o i t c e s " t n e m t a e r T r e t a W " e e S
y c n e i c i f e d t n e m t a e r t r e t a W
r e t a W " e e S . t s i l a i c e p s g n i t a e r t r e t a w t n e t e p m o c t l u s n o C
l a u n a m s i h t f o n o i t c e s " t n e m t a e r T
e r u t a r e p m e T r e t a W d l o C
m r a W o o T
) " n o i t a r e p O r e w o T " e e S (
n g i s e d e v o b a s i . p m e t b l u b t e w g n i r e t n E
f i e e S . r e w o t g n i t c e f f a e r a s e c r u o s t a e h l a c o l f i e e s o t k c e h C
r e w o t f o n o i t a l u c r i c e r g n i s u a c e r a s e r u t c u r t s g n i d n u o r r u s
. e v i t a t n e s e r p e r y e l r a M h t i w y d e m e r s s u c s i D . r i a e g r a h c s i d
w o l o o t s a w . p m e t b l u b t e w n g i s e D
y e l r a M h t i w y d e m e r s s u c s i D . e z i s r e w o t e s a e r c n i o t e v a h y a M
. e v i t a t n e s e r p e r
n g i s e d n a h t r e t a e r g d a o l s s e c o r p l a u t c A
y e l r a M h t i w y d e m e r s s u c s i D . e z i s r e w o t e s a e r c n i o t e v a h y a M
. e v i t a t n e s e r p e r
g n i p m u p r e v O . s n o i t i d n o c n g i s e d o t r e w o t r e v o e t a r w o l f r e t a w e c u d e R
r i a r o f d e v r a t s r e w o T
t c a r t n o c t c e r r o c f o e r u s e b o t e g a t l o v d n a t n e r r u c r o t o m k c e h C
, s r e v u o l n a e l C . y r a s s e c e n f i s e d a l b n a f h c t i p - e R . r e w o p e s r o h
r o s e r u t c u r t s y b r a e n f i e e s o t k c e h C . s r o t a n i m i l e d n a l l i f
. r e w o t o t w o l f r i a l a m r o n g n i t c u r t s b o e r a s l l a w g n i s o l c n e
. e v i t a t n e s e r p e r y e l r a M h t i w y d e m e r s s u c s i D
g n i t i x E t f i r D e v i s s e c x E
r e w o T
g n i w o l f r e v o s n i s a b n o i t u b i r t s i D
e B . s n o i t i d n o c n g i s e d o t r e w o t r e v o e t a r w o l f r e t a w e c u d e R
. d e g g u l p t o n d n a e c a l p n i e r a s e l z z o n n i s a b r e t a w t o h e r u s
n o i t a n i m i l e t f i r d y t l u a F
e r a s r o t a n i m i l e d n a , s r e v u o l , l l i f l a r g e t n i t a h t e e s o t k c e h C
s r o t a n i m i l e t f i r d f I . y l t c e r r o c d e l l a t s n i d n a , s i r b e d f o e e r f , n a e l c
n i d e l l a t s n i y l t c e r r o c e r a y e h t e r u s e k a m , l l i f m o r f e t a r a p e s e r a
t u o n r o w r o d e g a m a d e c a l p e R . y r a s s e c e n f i n a e l C . e c a l p
. s t n e n o p m o c
Page 50 of 541
Manual 09-1150A
7401 WEST 129 STREET | OVERLAND PARK, KANSAS 66213 UNITED STATES | 913 664 7400 | spxcooling@spx.com | spxcooling.com
In the interest of technological progress, all products are subject to design and/or material change without notice.
2009 SPX Cooling Technologies, Inc.
|
Printed in USA
Additional Information
Increased load requirements: NC towers are designed so that cells of
either equal or unequal capacity can be added in the future. This allows you to
compensate for the load increases that normally occur with the replacement
or addition of production equipmentand still retain continuity with respect
to your cooling tower system.
Tower rebuilding: SPX Cooling Technologies routinely rebuilds and upgrades
cooling towers of all materials and manufacture. If your tower ever reaches the
limit of its service life, we recommend that you investigate the cost of rebuild-
ing before you routinely order a new replacement tower.
Each NC tower includes a document package containing general
orientation drawings, NC Field Installation Manual Assembly Instructions,
and tower component manuals. These documents contain important in-
formation relating to safe installation and operation of the cooling
tower. Field installation is always required for fan guards, piping inlets and
piping outlets. Some optional accessories, such as valves, handrails, ladders
and safety cages may also require eld installation. If installation details are
not covered in the NC Field Installation Manual a separate installation
drawing or manual for each purchased option is included in the document
package along with bills of material. If you have purchased an option and
cant nd the appropriate installation drawing, contact your local Marley sales
representative before proceeding.
In addition to these specic documents, SPX publishes numerous technical
reports including more detailed information on a variety of cooling tower op-
eration and service topics. Your Marley sales representative will be happy to
give you copies of these reports at no charge.
For complete parts and service assistance, contact the Marley sales repre-
sentative in your area. If you need help locating the ofce nearest you, please
phone 913 664 7400 or check the internet at spxcooling.com.
Page 51 of 541
/ Marley M-5 Vibration Switch /
User Manual 2010-1241
Page 52 of 541
2
Installation
This bulletin should be used by experienced personnel as a guide to the instal-
lation of the Marley M-5 vibration switch. Selection or installation of equipment
should always be accompanied by competent technical assistance.
Before proceeding to install and wire the unit, read and thoroughly under-
stand these instructions. The switch model number should be checked
to conrm that you have the correct hazardous area rating for your ap-
plication.
Installation
1 The sensitive axis of the vibration switch is perpendicular to the mounting
base. The preferred mounting is with the sensitive axis in the horizontal
plane, since most machines vibrate more in that plane. Mount the switch
solidly to the frame of the machine. In most cases the switch or mounting
bracket will come preinstalled.
2 Remove the cover and wire the switch(es) into the alarm or shutdown circuit.
Do not exceed switch contact ratings listed in the specications. Keep eld
wiring away from the moving part of the mechanism.
3Observe all local electrical codes.
4 All the power must be switched off before opening of the enclosure in an
explosive atmosphere.
5 The Vibration Switch must be electrically connected by means of a ame-
proof cable gland or stopping box certied to EN 50018.
6 For ambient temperatures below +14F and above +140F use eld wiring
suitable for both minimum and maximum ambient temperature.
7 Reinstall the cover by rst insuring the sealing gasket is in place and properly
seated in the grove in the housing. Place the cover on the unit and install
the four cover bolts. Torque the four bolts to 16 ftlb. Caution should be
used to not over-torque the bolts as this could damage the housing and
compromise the seal.
8 The temporary conduit entry plugs are placed in the housing to provide
physical protection for the threads during shipping. Once the unit is installed
in the eld these plugs must be replaced. These temporary plugs do not
provide adequate environmental protection for the switch when installed
in the eld.
Caution
Page 53 of 541
3
Installation
Vibration Switch Testing
The vibration switch is a safety circuit acting as a run permissive for the
VFD or starter controlling the fan motor. Follow lockout / tagout procedures
on the fan starting equipment.
A special tool is required to adjust the setpointdo not attempt to adjust.
Adjusting the setpoint will VOID the warranty. The setpoint is factory set
at 1g which is more than sufcient to allow the mechanical equipment to
get up to speed without tripping the motor. The default trip setting should
allow for a full voltage start and operation at all speeds.
During installation and testing, if a problem with either the sensitizing
or desensitizing setting is suspected or you think the unit is defective,
do not attempt to adjust the setpoint. Call 800-462-7539 or 281-940-
1802 Field Service or 713-702-8805 Technical Assistance after hours for
troubleshooting.
To test the operation of the electrical contacts in the vibration switch please
follow one of the provided procedures below. The rst test procedure is the
recommended procedure to use without having to remove the switch cover.
Test 1 Do not adjust the setpoint. Loosen the four mounting bolts
on the vibration switch supportdo not remove. Either lightly tap or
shake the vibration switch thus triggering the unit indicating the unit
is active. Retighten the mounting bolts and reset the unit.
Test 2 Do not adjust setpoint. Remove the cover to expose the
inside of the switch. Using a screwdriver, toggle the trip plate to force
the electrical contacts open and closed. The trip plate is bright metal
and measures 1
3
4" x 1" and is located towards the bottom of the
switch. With the adjusting pin located to the left, the normally closed
contact will be closed when the right hand side of the trip plate is
depressed. Check continuity at the terminal points COMMON and
NORM CLOSED or at the fan controller to conrm contacts are op-
erational. A typical control circuit uses a closed contact to allow the
fan to run. An open contact means excessive vibration has occurred
shutting off the starter or VFD.
Warning
Caution
Note
Page 54 of 541
4
Note
Installation
As stated previously, adjusting the setpoint will void the warranty on this
switch. If by either accident or intentionally, the setpoint is tampered with,
the following instructions are provided indicating how to properly readjust
the setpoint. If the proper setpoint cannot be achieved through these
steps, then call for technical assistance. In order to adjust the setpoint,
a special tool is required and may be furnished upon request from SPX
Cooling Technologies.
Turning Setpoint Adjustment Too Far Counter-Clockwise
If the setpoint adjustment is turned too far counter-clockwise (approximately
3-4 turns) the switch will trip and will not stay in a reset position after de-
pressing the manual reset push-button.
At approximately 11 turns the switch will trip and cannot be reset because
the spring and adjusting rod have dislodged out of position. There is no
mechanical stop position when turning counter clockwise. Repair of the in-
ternal mechanism can be accomplished in the eld by removing the internal
switch mechanism from the switch body. The switch mechanism is held in
with three screws. Once removed the adjusting rod and spring may be put
back into operating position.
Turning Setpoint Adjustment Too Far Clockwise
The adjusting rod has a nylon stop bushing preventing the rod from being
over turned. Once the adjustment bottoms out, the switch is at or beyond
the maximum setting and may not trip on vibration.
Getting The Adjustment Position Back To Normal
Once an adjustment is out of range and the rod and spring have not been
dislodged the switch may be adjusted back to normal settings. With the
switch cover removed rotate the adjusting rod clockwise until it bottoms
out. Push the right hand side of the trip plate down to reset the switch. At
this point the NORM CLOSED CONTACT is closed. Rotate the adjusting
rod approximately two turns counter-clockwise slowly or until the trip bar
moves up with a click. Then rotate the adjusting rod clockwise one full turn.
If the cooling product fan start or run position trips the switch then rotate the
adjusting rod clockwise in
1
8 increments until the trip holds in.
Page 55 of 541
5
Installation
Electrical Reset and Startup Lockout
The optional electrical reset circuit consists of an electrical solenoid in series
with a thermistor. If the rated voltage is continuously applied to the reset circuit
at startup, the reset solenoid energizes for a xed time interval (approximately
30 seconds), after which time the solenoid is automatically de-energized by
the thermistor. This action provides a trip lockout during machine startup
roughness. The voltage must be removed from the reset circuit when the fan
motor is stopped to allow the thermistor to cool off. The switch mechanism
can then be reset electrically by a momentary application of the reset voltage
or it can be reset manually.
If the fan motor is restarted immediately after a shutdown, the lockout
period will be shortened because the thermistor will be hot. An increase
in the ambient temperature will also shorten the lockout period.
Specications
FunctionArmature mechanism trips on high vibration and operates snap
action switch(es).
Frequency Range0 to 3600 RPM.
ResetLocal reset, plus optional remote reset electrical coil. See How to
Order ("D").
Start DelayApplying reset coil voltage at start up holds mechanism from
tripping for 20-30 seconds, after which the switch is active. Requires electric
reset option.
Temperature Range -40F to 160F
EnclosureHigh strength copper-free (
4
10 of 1% max) aluminum alloy.
Environmental RatingNEMA 4, IP 65 & CE Mark (NEMA 4X Optional).
Switch Contact(s) Rating15 amps, 125, or 480 VAC;
1
8 hp, 125 VAC;
1
4
hp, 250 VAC;
1
2 amp, 125 VDC;
1
4 amp, 250 VDC.
Hazard RatingSee How to Order ("A").
Weight4.0 lb
Note
Page 56 of 541
6
Information
Schematic
5.56" Mounting Holes
6.50"
Push-Button Reset
Mounting Plate
.75" NPT Entry
Ground
Connection
5.60"
2.33"
Mounting Holes
3.25" 4.25"
1.88"
4.43"
5.33"
.75" x .375 Holes (4)
DPDT Contacts
L (+) 7 Reset Coil
GRN Case GRN Case
1
2
3
1
2
3
4
5
6
DPDT Contacts
1
2
3
4
5
6
N () 8 Reset Coil
L (+) 4 Reset Coil
N () 5 Reset Coil
SPDT Contacts
1
2
3
SPDT Contacts
Wiring
Dependent on switch conguration
Page 57 of 541
7
Information
How To Order
For new or replacement vibration switches call 1-800-4Marley
M-5
ooo
-
ooo
Example: M-5 111-010
A
o
Hazard Rating
0 = None
1 = UL, cUL Explosion Proof, Class I, Div 1, Groups C and D
Class II, Div 1, Groups E, F and G
2 = UL, cUL Explosion Proof, Class I, Div 1, Groups B, C and D
Class II, Div 1, Groups E, F and G
B
o
Contacts
1 = SPDT 2 = DPDT
C
o
Full Scale Range
1 = 5g 2 = 2g 3 = 10g
D
o
Reset Coil and Startup Delay
0 = None 1 = 115VAC 2 = 230VAC 3 = 24VDC 4 = 115VDC
E
o
Wiring Entry/Mounting Plate (retro t)
1 =
3
4" NPT 6 = M20 x 1.5
F
o
Environmental Rating
0 (or blank) = NEMA 4, IP65 1 = NEMA 4X, IP65
Tested for compliance with the applicable EC Electromagnetic Com-
patibility requirements
note When Option C = 2, Option D cannot = 3 for operation in the
horizontal axis.
When Option A = 1 or A = 2, Option E cannot = 6
A B C D E F
Page 58 of 541
M2010-1241
7401 WEST 129 STREET | OVERLAND PARK, KANSAS 66213 UNITED STATES | 913 664 7400 | spxcooling@spx.com | spxcooling.com
In the interest of technological progress, all products are subject to design and/or material change without notice.
2010 SPX Cooling Technologies, Inc.
|
Printed in USA
This electronic equipment was manufactured according to high quality stan-
dards to ensure safe and reliable operation when used as intended. Due to its
nature, this equipment may contain small quantities of substances known to be
hazardous to the environment or to human health if released into the environ-
ment. For this reason, Waste Electrical and Electronic Equipment (commonly
known as WEEE) should never be disposed of in the public waste stream.
The Crossed-Out Waste Bin label afxed to this product is a reminder to
dispose of this product in accordance with local WEEE regulations. If you
have questions about the disposal process, please contact SPX Cooling
Technologies customer service.
Information
Environmental
Note
Page 59 of 541
/ Marley Cooling Tower Downtime Instructions /
Manual 92-1308A
Page 60 of 541
2
Instructions for Downtime
Mechanical Draft Cooling Towers
Preface
Proper preventive maintenance of equipment during downtime will assure
trouble-free start-up. This manual gives suggested procedures for protec-
tion of tower mechanical equipment for downtime ranging from seasonal
to extended downtime in two different periods. The periods increase in
length and in extent of protection.
SPX Cooling Technologies offers these suggestions as being representative
of good practice. Warranty of condition after downtime and or amendment
to specic contract warranties is not intended.
Never start motor on fan drive without rst making sure that there will
be no interference with free rotation of the fan, drive shaft, or V-belt.
Seasonal Downtime
Fans, Drive Shafts, and V-belts
Maintain freedom for fan rotation. Do not operate if snow, ice or other
obstruction will interfere with rotation.
Geareducers
With the introduction of the 10.1, 20.1, and 22.3 Geareducer

models,
oil changes in these models have been reduced to 5-year intervals. To
maintain ve-year change intervals, use only oil designed specically
for these Geareducer models. Proceed to step 2 below. If, after ve
years, turbine-type mineral oil is used, then proceed starting with step
1. Refer to Geareducer Service Manual for oil recommendations and
further instructions.
1. At start of down-time period, operate Geareducer until oil is warm
(120 F) and change the oil. See Lubrication section of the Geareducer
Service Manual for instructions on changing oil. Allow freedom for fan
to windmill.
2. Each month, drain any water condensate from the lowest point of the
Geareducer and its oil system. Check the oil level and add oil if neces-
sary. Operate the Geareducer a minimum of 20 minutes to recoat the
interior surfaces with oil.
3. To return to operation, drain off any condensate, check oil level and
add oil as necessary to establish required oil level. Change oil at normal
recommended interval, accounting for downtime as operating time.
Warning
Note
Page 61 of 541
3
Bearing Housing, Oil Lubricated Type
1. At start of downtime period, operate bearing housing until oil is warm
(95 F) and change the oil. See the Lubrication section of the Bearing
Housing Service Manual for instructions on changing oil. Allow fan
freedom to windmill.
2. Each month drain any water condensate from the lowest point of the
bearing housing. Add oil if necessary to maintain oil level.
3. To return to operation, drain any water condensate, check oil level and
add oil as necessary to establish required level. Change oil at normal
recommended interval, accounting for downtime as operating time.
Electric Motors
1. At start of shutdown, clean all air passages and lubricate bearings.
See the motor manufacturers instructions.
2. Each month, run motor until it has reached operating temperature.
Space heaters are recommended. If heaters are used, motors need
be run only 20 minutes minimum.
Higher density of cold air at fan increases motor horsepower. If motor
overloads will not allow fan motor operation at high speed in forward
direction, one of the following might be done:
If overloads are adjustable, set at a higher value (+ 15%) for
cold weather operation.
Operate motor (fan) in reverse (reverse any 2 leads).
Operate two speed motor at low speed.
3. Enclose motors or cover them to protect from wet-down of a re pro-
tection system or rainfall.
4. To return into operation, clean all air passages, remove temporary
vented cover and lubricate bearings.
Drive Train Backstop
Fill to normal level with oil recommended in Drive Train Backstop Service
Manual.
Note

Page 62 of 541
4
Extended Downtime (beyond 3 months)
Fans and Drive Shafts
Maintain freedom of rotation. Do not operate if snow, ice or other obstruc-
tions will interfere with rotation.
V-Belt Drives
1. At start of down time, remove and store belts in a cool, dry, dark
room. Clean and coat sheave grooves with rust preventative, lacquer
or paint.
2. Remove rust preventative from sheaves before reinstalling belts.
Geareducers with External Gauge and Drain Lines
At Start of Downtime Period:
1. Operate Geareducer until oil is warm (120 F) and drain the oil. Com-
pletely replacing the oil may only be required for Geareducers using
mineral oil. See Geareducer note on Page 2 for further information.

2. Fabricate and install an expansion chamber on the sight glass riser; see
Figure 1. The gure shows the proportions of the expansion chamber
and its relationship in elevation to the oil level. The purpose is to allow
for expansion of the oil due to temperature change from that at the
time of lling without causing it to overow at the fan shaft closure.
Smaller chambers may satisfy smaller Geareducer applications, but
the 4 depth and elevation relationships should be maintained.
Expansion volumes required by Geareducers most likely to require this
type of storage are listed by basic Series number:
Models 34, 36 and 38 ______ 1.5 gallons (5.68 liters )
Models 3600 and 4000 _____ 1.5 gallons (5.68 liters )
Models 27 and 32 ________ 1.0 gallons (3.79 liters )
Models 22, 2200 and 2400 ___ .75 gallons (2.84 liters )
The vent may be removed from the top of the oil level gauge to be used
as a vent for the expansion chamber. The chamber must be vented.
3. Remove the vent or vent line from the Geareducer.
4. Fill the Geareducer with oil until it rises just to the bottom of the vent
hole in the top (cover) of the Geareducer. Use one of the oils listed in
the appropriate Geareducer Manual.
5. Smaller Geareducers than listed may be stored this way, provided the
basic requirement of submerging the top-most bearing in oil and the
requirements above are satised.
6. Plug the vent on the Geareducer with a 1/2" pipe plug. The Series 22
requires a 1/4" plug.
Page 63 of 541
5
7. Open the disconnect switch to the fan motor, and tag it to prevent
running the Geareducer while it is full of oil. Allow Geareducer freedom
to windmill. (See note on page 6.)
8. Quarterly, drain water condensate at lowest point of oil system, at
drain in expansion chamber, check and make up oil level and rotate
input shaft at least 15 revolutions. Allow to windmill.
Figure 1
At End of Downtime Period
1. Drain oil to operating level.
2. Remove the pipe plug from the Geareducer vent hole and reinstall the
vent tting or line.
3. Remove the tag and close the disconnect switch to the fan motor. The
expansion chamber may be removed .
4. If downtime was 6 months or longer, check to be sure there is no
obstruction to rotation and run Geareducer until oil is warm (120 F).
Stop the Geareducer and change the oil. Changing oil may only be
required for Geareducers using mineral oil. See Geareducer note on
page 2 for further information.
Geareducers without External Gauge and Drain Lines
Use the same procedure as outlined for Geareducer with external gauge
and drain lines. It will be necessary to install an external gauge and drain
line or pipe and a riser which would permit mounting the expansion cham-
ber outside the fan cylinder, see Figure 1.
1"
OIL LEVEL 2"
14" x 14" x 4"
OIL EXPANSION CHAMBER
AIR VENT
DRAIN
PLUG
SUPPORT
SIGHT GLASS
ASSEMBLY
LINE TO
VENT
VENT HOLE
An ordinary standpipe to 6" min. elevation above oil level may be substituted
for the chamber with the possibility of oil spillage from Geareducer fan shaft
closure due to wide temperature fluctuations (see note on page 6). Oil level
must be monitored and kept at vent hole level, shown here, at all times.

Page 64 of 541
6
Bearing Housings, Oil Lubricated
1. At the start of the downtime period, operate bearing housing until oil
is warm (95 F), then change the oil. See the Lubrication section of the
Bearing Housing Service Manual for instructions.
2. Each quarter, drain any water condensate from the lowest point of
the bearing housing. Add oil as necessary to maintain level. Allow to
windmill. (See note below.) Rotate 15 revolutions.
3. To return to operation, bring up to operating temperature and change
the oil.
Electric Motors
1. At start of downtime period, lubricate bearings. See motor manufac-
turers instructions on lubrication.
2. Keep the motor temperature 5 F to 10 F above ambient temperature
with the aid of space heaters or reduced voltage winding heating. Al-
low freedom to windmill.
3. Once each quarter, rotate motor shaft 15 revolutions.
4. Once each year, remove grease ll and relief plugs and lubricate motor
bearings. Do not operate motor. Replace plugs.
5. Enclose motors or cover them to protect from wet-down of a re pro-
tection system or rainfall.
6. To return to operation, remove temporary covers and clean air pas-
sages. Remove grease ll and relief plugs and lubricate bearings.
Operate the motor to purge excess grease and replace the plugs. See
motor manufacturers instructions on lubrication.
The frequency of maintenance operations required by these instruc-
tions assumes sufcient wind velocity to cause some fan rotary motion
(not necessarily fan spinning) at least once per month. This motion is
required to reposition bearing, shaft and gear elements with respect
to each other to allow the lubricant the greatest opportunity to protect
these vital parts from corrosion. Any time a period of one month passes
without wind-caused fan rotary motion, maintenance personnel should
be alert to this fact and provide manual rotation of the drive line. At
least 15 revolutions of the motor shaft is recommended.
Drive Train Backstop
Fill to top with oil recommended in the Drive Train Backstop Service
Manual. Drain and rell to top each two-year period. To start up, drain oil
to operating level.

Note
Page 65 of 541
7
General
Fire ProtectionProtect dry wood towers against re. Any ammable
debris should be removed weekly. Wood towers may be wetted for re
protection. This may be done by providing some form of sprinkler system
to wet the entire top of the tower. This should include the top structure
inside the fan cylinder. Sprinkling should be avoided in freezing weather.
The sprinkler system must be designed in order not to cause direct water
impingement on Geareducer shaft closures, the Geareducer vent, the
Geareducer external oil system vent, and the electric motor shaft closures,
air openings, vents and drains.
The electric motor(s) must be covered with a vented enclosure to avoid
moisture entrapment. This is necessary to avoid excessively high humidity
around the motors, and to avoid wide uctuation in motor temperature
that sprinkling would cause. The enclosure should cover any back stop or
brake assembly mounted on, or connected to any part of the motor.
During Freezing WeatherDrain tower basins and all exposed piping
including risers. Leave the drain and overow valves open to prevent ac-
cumulation of rain water, snow or melted snow and ice.
During Non-Freezing WeatherIt may be more convenient to keep
normal water level in wood basins for short downtime periods to keep
basins tight. Wood basins (over longer periods) and concrete and steel
basins should be drained.
Flow Control Valves are to be left full open with locking bar locked. Ap-
ply grease through the zerk tting to the stem-guide interface and coat
the entire exposed stem with grease. NLGI #2 Lithium base grease is
suggested. See Figure 2.
Start-Up Preparation of a wood tower after a long dry shut-down should
include thorough wetting before full operation.
LOCKING
BAR
APPLY GREASE
TO STEM
GREASE AT
ZERK FITTING
Figure 2

Page 66 of 541
Manual 92-1308A
7401 WEST 129 STREET | OVERLAND PARK, KANSAS 66213 UNITED STATES | 913 664 7400 | spxcooling@spx.com | spxcooling.com
In the interest of technological progress, all products are subject to design and/or material change without notice.
2008 SPX Cooling Technologies, Inc.
|
Printed in USA
Page 67 of 541
/ Marley HC Valve 4 thru 8 Diameter /
User Manual 92-1371
Page 68 of 541
/ Assembly Sequence /
1. Attach valve stem guide and gasket to valve body.
2. Install locking bar on operating handle and valve
stem sub-assembly.
3. Install operating handle and valve stem sub-as-
sembly with locking bar through valve stem guide.
4. Place valve disc and washers on valve stem. Install
self-locking nut and tighten to compress resilient
washer to
1
8 to
3
16 thick. Center valve disc in
valve inlet opening by differential tightening of the
three valve stem guide machine bolts.
5. Grease valve stem threads at grease tting using
rust inhibiting lithium base grease of HLGI No.
2 consistence. Coat exposed valve stem threads
with grease.
6. After adjusting the ow set the locking bar in the
locked position to stabilize the stem and disc.
/ Replacement Parts /
1.0 Complete Valve Assembly
Ready for installation.
1.1 Valve Stem Guide With Grease Fitting, Gasket
and Attaching Hardware
1.2 Operating Handle And Valve Stem Sub-Assembly
1.3 Washers, Resilient Washer, Self-Locking Nut
1.4 Valve Disc
1.5 Valve Body Gasket
1.6 Locking Bar
1.7 Valve Body
Pipe Flange Outlet Illustrated
Marley / HC Valve 4- 6 Diameter /
4 and 6 Valves with Pipe Flange Outlet
6 Valve with Rectangular Flange Outlet
6 Valve with Skirted (No Flange) Outlet
Maximum Pressure 25 P.S.I.
Page 69 of 541
When ordering parts always provide original Marley tower order number and tower serial number. Contact the Marley
sales representative in your area for assistance.
/ Assembly Sequence /
1. Attach valve stem guide and gasket to valve body.
2. Place valve disc and washers on valve stem. Install
self-locking nut and tighten to compress resilient
washer to
1
8 to
3
16 thick.
3. Install valve stem and disc sub-assembly through
valve stem guide. Center valve disc in valve inlet
opening by differential tightening of the three
valve stem guide machine bolts.
4. Install locking bar on valve stem.
5. Install operating handle on valve stem and insert
pin through valve stem and operating handle.
6. Grease valve stem threads at grease tting using
rust inhibiting lithium base grease of NLGI No.
2 consistence. Coat exposed valve stem threads
with grease.
7. After adjusting the ow, set the locking bar in the
locked position to stabilize the stem and disc.
/ Replacement Parts /
1.0 Complete Valve Assembly
Ready for installation.
1.1 Valve Stem Guide With Grease Fitting, Gasket
and Attaching Hardware
1.2 Operating Handle, Valve Stem, Pin
1.3 Washers, Resilient Washer, Self-Locking Nut
1.4 Valve Disc
1.5 Valve Body Gasket
1.6 Locking Bar
1.7 Valve Body
Skirted (No Flange) Outlet Illustrated
8 Valve with Pipe Flange Outlet
8 Valve with Rectangular Flange Outlet
8 Valve with Skirted (No Flange) Outlet
Maximum Pressure 25 P.S.I.
Marley / HC Valve 8 Diameter /
Page 70 of 541
Manual 92-1371
7401 WEST 129 STREET | OVERLAND PARK, KANSAS 66213 UNITED STATES | 913 664 7400 | spxcooling@spx.com | spxcooling.com
In the interest of technological progress, all products are subject to design and/or material change without notice.
2008 SPX Cooling Technologies, Inc.
|
Printed in USA
Page 71 of 541
/ Cooling Tower Motor /
User Manual 92-1475A
Page 72 of 541
Page 73 of 541
3
RECEIVING AND STORING MOTORS
A motor should be inspected on receipt to make sure it was
not damaged during shipment. Turn the shaft by hand to
see that it turns freely. Check motor nameplate for correct
horsepower, voltage, phase and speed.
If a motor is stored before installation, place it in a building
in which air is kept reasonably dry and with a minimum of
temperature uctuation to prevent moisture condensing
in the motor. Do not store directly on the oor, always
block up.
Windings should be meggered at the time the motors are
put in storage.
If motors have space heaters, the heaters should be ener-
gized when the motors are placed in storage.
NOTE: Remove units from containers when heaters are
energized. Reprotect if necessary.
If outdoor storage is necessary, protection should include
a vapor barrier beneath the motor. The motor should be
blocked up to prevent ooding. All external parts such as
shafts, machined surfaces, and threaded holes should be
protected with a rust inhibitor coating.
Rotate motor shaft monthly to insure that the bearing
surfaces are protected with lubricant.
When a motor is removed from storage, the insulation and
rotor movement should be checked. The insulation should
be checked by applying the potential from a 500 volt me-
gohmmeter between the windings and grounded frame for
10 minutes. Resistance readings should be taken at 1 and
10 minutes. Correct the readings to 40C as discussed on
page 6 of this manual. Calculate the winding polarization
index by dividing the 10 minute reading by the one minute
reading. The recommended minimum value of polarization
index for alternating current machine is:
Class A insulation 1.5
Class B insulation 2.0
Class F insulation 2.0
A low polarization index indicates the insulation should be
cleaned and dried before the motor is placed in operation.
It is possible to operate a motor with a polarization value
less than the minimum listed above but this is not consid-
ered good practice.
The rotor movement is checked by rotating the shaft by
hand. If shaft is not free, contact the motor manufacturers
authorized repair shop. Grease in the motor bearings should
be purged at the time of removal from storage. Refer to
LUBRICATION on pages 5 and 6.
INSTALLATION
Check to see that the motor nameplate data agrees with
the voltage and frequency of the power supply provided
for the motor. All induction motors will operate successfully
when the frequency is not more than ve percent above or
below the nameplate rating, the voltage is not more than
ten percent above or below the nameplate rating, and the
combined variation in voltage and frequency is not more
than ten percent above or below the nameplate rating.
The power supply line for the motor should be of sufcient
capacity to carry 125 percent of the motors full load cur-
rent with a maximum voltage drop of three percent on the
line.
The power supply MUST conform with motor nameplate
voltage. Motors rated 200 volts are for a 208 volt system.
Motors rated 230/460 volts are for a 240 or 480 volt
system. Do not use a 230 or 230/460 volt motor on a
208 volt system.
Unbalanced voltages in the power supply will greatly in-
crease the internal losses of the motor, reducing the safe
load the motor can carry. Have the power company correct
any unbalanced voltage.
When motor power is supplied by overhead conductors,
it is advisable to provide a lightning arrestor on each un-
grounded line.
Installation, Operation and Maintenance
of
Electric Motors
on Cooling Towers
Page 74 of 541
4
Wire the motor to the power supply through a disconnect
switch, short-circuit protection, and suitable magnetic
starter with overload protection. All wiring and fusing should
be in accordance with the National Electrical Code and
local requirements. All motors should be connected as
shown on the nameplate diagram.
The National Electrical Code requires a motor to be in sight
of the controller unless the disconnecting means can be
locked open or unless there is a manually operated switch
in sight of the motor which will disconnect the motor from
its electrical supply.
Overload protection should be installed in all three lines.
Size overload heaters in starters for nameplate service
factor and amps. Overloads for 1.15 service factor motors
must kick out at no more than 125% of nameplate current.
Overloads for 1.0 service factor motors must kick out at
no more than 115% of nameplate current.
Overloads should be at the same ambient temperature as
motor. Do not use ambient compensated overloads.
If a two-speed motor is used, be sure control characteristics
are compatible with the motor. A two-speed single-winding
motor requires a different starter than a two-speed two-
winding motor. Starters for two-speed motors must include
a minimum time delay of 20 seconds when switching from
high to low speed.
When a disconnect switch is installed between motor and
starter for two speed or part winding start single- speed
motor, a 6-pole disconnect must be used.
SAFETY NOTE: Use of two 3-pole disconnects can result
in one disconnect not being off and unexpected starts
or motor damage.
If reverse operation of mechanical equipment is required,
provide minimum time delay of two minutes before en-
ergizing motor when changing direction of rotation.
Check the wiring system for grounds and check the
resistance between all leads for open, bad or incorrect
connections before operating the motor.
The conduit system should be arranged so that trapped
water will collect in a sump equipped with suitable drain
and will not go into the motor terminal box.
When the motor must be moved for coupling removal
or belt adjustment, a short section of exible, watertight
metallic conduit should be used in place of rigid conduit
to protect the leads to the motor.
Remove all water drain plugs from totally-enclosed mo-
tors. These plugs will be located in the lowest part of the
installed motor. Because of inaccessability of drain plugs
with motor installed on supports, it is sometimes necessary
to remove plugs before the motor is bolted in place.
The drain plugs on explosion-proof motors are automatic
and must not be removed.
NOTE: After motor is installed, it should be run for
three hours at least once a month, even if the tower is
not in operation. This serves to dry out windings and
relubricate bearing surfaces. If motors are purchased
with space heaters, they should be energized as soon
as possible. Use an auxiliary contact on the starter to
turn heater off when motor is running.
OPERATION
Sleeve bearing motors are usually shipped without oil and
must be oiled before operation. Ball bearing motors are
lubricated for the initial operation by the motor manufac-
turer; however, it is recommended that the grease and
relief plugs be removed and the motor bearing housing
be examined for presence of adequate grease before mo-
tor is placed in operation. Add grease if necessary. See
instructions on pages 5 and 6 for lubricating ball bearing
or sleeve bearing motors.
Turn the rotor by hand to see that it rotates freely. Motor
shaft should be parallel to driven shaft so that there are
no stresses in motor frame.
INITIAL STARTING: The motor should bring the fan up to
speed in less than 15 seconds. If it does not, check con-
nections, fuses, overloads and voltage at motor terminals
during start-up period. Run the motor to check the connec-
tions and direction of rotation. If the rotation is incorrect,
change any two of the three motor leads for a three phase
motor or interchange the connections of either the main or
start windings for single phase capacitor start motor.
CAUTION: Excessive fan cycling may shorten the mo-
tor's expected service life. On fans 20 feet (6 meter)
diameter and smaller allow for 4 to 5 starts per hour.
On larger fans, 2 or 3 starts per hour may be the limit.
On two speed motors each low speed start and each
high speed start count as one start.
If a two-speed motor is used, allow a time delay of a minimum
of 20 seconds after de-energizing the high speed winding
and before energizing the low speed winding. Tremendous
strains are placed on driven machinery and motor unless
the motor is allowed to slow to low speed rpm or less
before the low speed winding is energized.
When changing fan direction of rotation, allow a minimum of
two minutes time delay before energizing the fan motor.
DETERMINE LOAD AT MOTOR: With design water rate
and design heat load on the tower, test motor hp as fol-
lows:
Page 75 of 541
5
0
108
107
Figure 1
F
A
C
T
O
R
106
105
104
103
102
101
100
99
98
97
96
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100
1. Run motor for 30 minutes. Record motor name plate
data.
2. Measure voltage between all lines at motor terminals.
3. Measure amps in all three lines.
4. Average the measured volts and amps and calculate
test horsepower using the following equation:
5. For a given fan pitch setting and RPM, horsepower will
If it is desired to correct for high or low test barometric
pressure, multiply the predicted horsepower by standard
station barometric pressure and divide by test station
barometric pressure.
*Use ambient dry-bulb temperatures if checking a forced
draft cooling tower.
Fan motor overloads sized for summer weather will
handle the higher winter horsepower without adjustment
providing they are at the same ambient temperature as
the motor and there is ample heat load on tower.
NORMAL OPERATION: Class B insulated motors are
rated at a maximum total operating temperature of 130C
(266F). A thermometer in contact with the winding may
indicate a temperature up to 100C (212F). on a protected
motor or up to 115C (239F) on a totally enclosed motor
without the motor being too hot. Therefore, a motor that
appears to be hot is not necessarily overloaded. Check
with thermometers.
CAUTION: Normal operating temperatures of electric
motors can be hot enough to cause burns. Avoid any
unprotected contact with the surface of an operating
motor.
MAINTENANCE
SAFETY NOTE: When working on the fan or fan drive,
make sure the electric motor cannot be started. See
"Installation" section.
To obtain maximum motor life, establish a schedule of main-
tenance based on the particular application of the motor
and observe the following procedures and precautions:
CLEANING: Remove any oil, dust or scale deposits from
the motor. They can cause excessive insulation tempera-
tures.
LUBRICATION:
Ball Bearing Motors: The following table may be used as
a guide in determining greasing periods for motors:
hp (test) =
Volts x Amps (average)
Volts x Amps (nameplate)
x hp (nameplate)
vary directly with the air density which is a function of
temperature and barometric pressure. Because fans are
generally pitched for summer weather horsepower, it is
expected that the motor nameplate horsepower will be
exceeded during winter operation. Assuming 100% heat
load, the temperature rise in the motor will be greater at
the higher horsepower, but the operating temperature
of the motor will actually be lower due to the drop in
ambient temperature. Under these conditions, the higher
horsepower should not be detrimental to the motor.
If the horsepower measurement is taken during cold
weather conditions, the predicted horsepower which will
result during summer operation may be determined by
applying the Factor from Figure 1. For a given location,
the barometric pressure will not normally vary enough
to cause signicant error and for this reason, has not
been included in the Factors.
Example: The horsepower on an induced draft cooling tower* is
7.8 hp on a 40F ambient wet-bulb day. What is the predicted
hp on a 75F ambient wet-bulb day?
hp
(75F)
= hp
(40F) X

Factor (75F)
= 7.8 x
Factor (40F)
100.8
105.9
= 7.43
y t u D p h 0 3 1 p h 0 5 2 0 4
t n e t t i m r e t n I s h t n o m 2 1 s h t n o m 2 1
y a d r e p s r u o h 6 1 o t 8 s h t n o m 2 1 s h t n o m 6
s u o u n i t n o C s h t n o m 8 s h t n o m 4
Page 76 of 541
6
-10
0.05
0.1
1.0
0.5
10
5
100
50
0 10 20 30 40
Winding Temperature C
I
n
s
u
l
a
t
i
o
n

R
e
s
i
s
t
a
n
c
e

T
e
m
p
e
r
a
t
u
r
e

C
o
e
f
f
i
c
i
e
n
t

K
t
50 60 70 80 90 100
To Convert Observed Insulation Resistance R
t
to 40C
Multiply by the Temperature Coefficient K
t
, R
c
R
t
x K
t
All greases will deteriorate in time depending upon bearing
size, speed and temperature. The grease used should be
recommended by the motor manufacturer. See instructions
attached to motor for recommended lubricant. If these
instructions have been lost or misplaced, obtain informa-
tion on lubricant to use and local supply source from motor
manufacturers nearest authorized service facility or from
the motor manufacturer. Give complete motor nameplate
data and state clearly that the motor is used on a water
cooling tower. Chevron SRI-2 is recognized by many motor
manufacturers as a suitable grease for ball bearing mo-
tors for cooling tower service. In general, a polyurethane
or lithium base grease with rust and oxidation inhibitors is
recommended. Use a grease of NLGI No. 2 consistency.
Do not mix greases which are of different types or speci-
cations. If a change is desired, the motor bearing housing
grease reservoir should be completely cleaned of old
grease before repacking with new grease.
The relief method of greasing motors tends to purge the
bearing housing reservoir of used grease by forcing out old
grease with new grease. Use a plunger type grease gun
which will not t the bearing grease ll hole too tightly.
Either an excess or insufcient amount of lubricant in the
bearings can cause overheating. To prevent this occurrence,
use the following greasing procedure:
1. Stop motor.
2. Wipe grease plugs, outside of bearing housing, and
relief plug, clean.
3. Remove grease and relief plugs and free relief hole of
any hardened grease. Use a thin piece of wire in open-
ing.
4. Add grease with a hand operated pressure gun until
new grease appears at the relief hole. Take special care
when greasing the fan end bearing of TEFC motors. The
long relief might be too small for the bearing to relieve
properly.
5. Run the motor for approximately one hour after greasing
to permit rotating parts of the bearing to expel excess
grease. Take out some of the excess grease with a thin
piece of wire.
6. Replace plugs and wipe the outside of the bearing
hous ing clean.
Every few years the motor end brackets should be removed
and the grease reservoirs cleaned and repacked full with
approved ball bearing grease. Open bearings should be
cleaned and repacked.
Bearings should be checked for "roughness" by turning
the outer race slowly with the ngers while holding the
inner race. If the bearing feels rough or binds in spots, it
should be replaced.
Sleeve Bearing Motors: Check oil in sleeve bearings at
least every three months. When journal size is less than
two inches, stop the motor to check the oil level. Old oil
should be drained and replaced at least every year. Clean
out oil well if there is evidence of dirt and sludge.
Motor shaft must be stopped when motor is oiled. The
oil used should be a good grade of mineral oil of light or
medium viscosity (such as SAE No. 10). Turbine oil rather
than automotive crankcase oil is recommended.
Check bearing wear yearly by measuring the air gap with a
feeler gauge. Measure gap in at least four equally spaced
positions at each end of the motor with two of the places
being the lowest point and the point subject to the load
pull.
INSULATION: Check insulation resistance with a mego-
hmmeter at the end of each shutdown period. Apply the
megohmmeter potential to the winding for one minute
before taking a reading. Correct the reading to 40C by
using the equation:
R
40C
= K
t
x R
t
and the curve below
Approximate Insulation Resistance Variation with Temperature
for Rotating machines.
Page 77 of 541
7
A record of these corrected readings will show a trend in
the insulation condition. It is considered good practice to
recondition a winding if the resistance, having been high
on previous readings, drops to near the recommended
minimum value as calculated by:
Do not start motor without determining that there will
be no interference with free rotation of the fan drive.
MOTOR WARRANTY
Motor manufacturers warranties run for 12 months in service
but not to exceed 18 months from date of manufacture.
Motor manufacturers warrant their products to be of the
type and quality described, suitable for the service for
which they are supplied, and free of defects in materials
and workmanship. Failures from causes external to the
motor (e.g., single phasing, operation under prolonged or
extensive overload, damage from handling, improper main-
tenance, use on other than the service for which supplied,
defect in wiring to power supply, or deciency or defect
in controls) are not covered by the motor manufacturers
warranties.
If a motor failure occurs within the warranty period
because of defect in material or workmanship, the
motor manufacturer is liable and has the right to
remedy the failure by adjustment, repair, or supplying
a replacement motor F.O.B. his factory or authorized
repair facility. In such event, the motor must be de-
livered to the nearest repair facility authorized by
the motor manufacturer with notication that the
motor is from a Marley product and that warranty
consideration is requested. Prompt notication of
such failure should be directed to a Marley sales
representative.
Motor manufacturers will not accept warranty obligation
for repair of motors by other than their authorized repair
facility nor warranty obligation for materials or workman-
ship employed in making repairs. Repair shops, including
authorized repair facilities, generally warrant their material
and workmanship for a period of 12 months.
Motor manufacturers warranties do not cover cost of
dismounting, transportation to and from repair facilities,
or remounting motors.
MOTOR OPERATION NOTE:
Higher density of cold air at fan increases motor horse-
power. If motor overloads will not allow fan motor operation
at high speed in forward direction, one of the following
might be done:
1. If overloads are adjustable, set at a higher value
(+15%) for cold weather operation. Readjust for sum-
mer operation.
2. Operate motor (fan) in reverse (reverse 2 loads).
3. Operate 2-speed motor at low speed.
Megaohms =
1000 + Rated Voltage of Machine
1000
Motors in continuous operation will stay at a temperature
sufciently above ambient temperature to prevent conden-
sation of moisture on and about the windings, even if the
location is very humid. Idle motors, however, accumulate
moisture readily which causes gradual deterioration of insu-
lation. Where motors are idle for a long time, single-phase
heating or space heaters may be required to prevent water
condensation.
Check insulation resistance at least once a year with
the motor at normal operating temperature. Comparison
with several previous readings will give an indication of
improvement or deterioration of insulating value. Read-
ings, to have comparison value, should be taken under
the same conditions (temperature, operating time since
last shutdown, etc.).
Low or falling resistance readings indicate the need for
maintenance. Contact the nearest repair facility authorized
by the motor manufacturer for repair service.
VIBRATION: If vibration occurs, it should be corrected
without delay. Use the following procedure to determine
source of trouble:
1. Check motor mounting to see that fasteners are tight.
2. Disconnect motor from load and run motor separately.
If motor still vibrates, rebalance rotor.
3. If vibration is in mechanical equipment*, check:
a. Alignment of motor with mechanical equipment.
b. Tightness of Geareducer, or belt driven compo-
nents, mounting bolts.
c. Unbalance in drive shaft or fan.
*Refer to service manuals for operating and maintenance
recommendations.
SEASONAL SHUTDOWN
If a motor is used only seasonally, it should be cleaned
and lubricated at the close of each season. Refer to mo-
tor manufacturers recommendations for lubrication and
maintenance instructions. At start of new season, make
sure bearings are adequately lubricated before return-
ing motor to operation. When tower is not in operation,
the motor should be run for three hours at least once a
month. This serves to dry out windings and relubricate
bearing surfaces.
Page 78 of 541
Manual 92-1475A
7401 WEST 129 STREET | OVERLAND PARK, KANSAS 66213 UNITED STATES | 913 664 7400 | spxcooling@spx.com | spxcooling.com
In the interest of technological progress, all products are subject to design and/or material change without notice.
2009 SPX Cooling Technologies, Inc.
|
Printed in USA
Page 79 of 541
9



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


PROJ ECT: J ohn M. Roll US - Yuma Courthouse



LOCATION: Yuma, AZ



CONTRACTOR: Tempe Mechanical



SUBMITTED BY: Climatec, Inc.
2851 W. Kathleen Rd.
Phoenix, AZ. 85053
602-944-3330


MANUFACTURER: Marley



PRODUCT: Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
ASSEMBLY MANUALS & DRAWINGS

MODEL: NC8401MAN1SGF


SERIAL #: NC-10050616-A1, NC-10050616-B1


TAGS: CT 1~2


DATE: 7/12/12
Page 80 of 541
SPX Cooling Technologies Lit erat ure Package February 21, 2012
Project: Yuma Court House
98 W 1st St
Yuma AZ 85364
For: Tempe Mechanical
3385 N Nevada St
Chandler AZ 85225-1154
Performance Conditions:
Flow Rate: 360.00 GPM Hot Water: 95.00F Cold Water: 85.00F Wet Bulb: 80.00F
Motor Capacity per Cell: 7.50 HP Motor Output per Cell: 7.40 HP
Fan Speed RPM: 370.00 Trial Fan Pitch Degrees: 22.00
Order No: 10050616 Model No: NC8401MAN1SGF PO No: 55540
Sales Office Order No: PQ11-5856BN
Please contact your local sales representative if you have any questions:
Climatec Inc
2851 W Kathleen Rd
Phoenix AZ 85053
Phone: 602-944-3330
Fax: 602-944-4759
Email: kellieh@climatec.com
Your local sales representative will be happy to quote current parts price and lead time upon request.
Go to http://spxcooling.com for a full list of representatives.
This instruction package will help you get your cooling unit up and running. Each unit (cell) is
individually identified with a serial number located at the top of this page and on the serial number plate
located on each unit's access door (example: NC-000000-A1). Make sure these numbers match.
Each cell will have it's own material list which lists part descriptions along with drawing number,
quantity and find-number. Find-numbers are part references used on the installation instruction manuals -
not all descriptions in the material list will have find-numbers. The drawing called out on the material list
could be an installation manual (identified with a drawing number), fastener kit or a unique drawing for
your installation. These material lists are required to install options that were purchased with the cooling
unit and are located in the Bills of Material section. All installation manuals and drawings are located in
the Install Manuals & Drawings section.
Also included are User (O&M) Manuals located in the User Manuals section. Start with product User
Manual to be sure installation and orientation of the cooling units is correct. If you have any problems
contact your sales representative-information is located above.
This package contains the following drawings:
Drawing Rev Descript ion
09-113 A STANDARD BOTTOM OUTLET PIPING DETAILS 84
09-1173 SWEEPER SYSTEM DETAILS 8401 THRU 8414
09-118 A LADDER DETAILS
Page 81 of 541
SPX Cooling Technologies Lit erat ure Package February 21, 2012
Order Number: 10050616 Page 2 of 2
This package contains the following drawings:
Drawing Rev Descript ion
09-1250 NC8400 FIELD INSTALL MANUAL
09-1252 Drawing 09-1252
09-1256 Drawing 09-1256
09-1258 Drawing 09-1258
09-1260 Drawing 09-1260
09-1260 Drawing 09-1260
09-1262 NC8400 FI - ANTI VORTEX PLATE
09-1265 NC8400 FI - FLOAT VALVE FLOAT
09-1271 NC8400 MAINTENANCE OPTION MANUAL
09-1273 Drawing 09-1273
09-1274 Drawing 09-1274
09-1276 Drawing 09-1276
09-1281 B Drawing 09-1281
09-1283 Drawing 09-1283
09-136 HOISTING DETAILS 8401 THRU 8414 TOWERS
09-14 A SUPPORT BEARING DETAILS 8401 THRU 8414 T
09-15 A TOP INLET PIPE SUPPORT DETAILS
09-167 RECOMMENDED CONDUIT INSTALLATION
09-19 B COLLECTION BASIN WATER LEVEL DETAILS 840
89-1237 A H.C. VALVE DIMENSIONAL DATA
91-398 B MECHANICAL EQUIPMENT HOLD-DOWN FASTENER
96-25066 A BASIN DRAIN INSTALLATION
This package contains the following user manuals:
Manual Rev Descript ion
00-1218 C OM-GRDR 1800&2000 User Manual
07-1205 A OM-CPLG MC07 MC09&MC11
09-1150 A NC 8400 User Manual
2010-1234 Marley X7 Fan User Manual
2010-1241 Marley M-5 Vibration Switch User Manual
92-1308 A DM-MDT-C DOWNTIME MANUAL
92-1371 PL-HC VALVE 04 06 08
92-1475 A SM-MOTOR-M MOTOR IOM MANUAL
Page 82 of 541
Page 83 of 541
Page 84 of 541
Page 85 of 541
WARNING
The location and orientation of the cooling tower can affect the safety of those
responsible for installing, servicing or reparing the cooling tower. Since SPX does not
dictate or determine where the tower is located or how iti is oriented, SPX is not
responsible for addressing the safety issues that are affected by the tower's location
location and orientation. The following safety issues should be considered by those
responsible for designing and maintaining the tower installation. Failure to consider and
address these issues may result in substantial personal injury or death to those
installing, servicing or repairing the cooling tower.
* Access to and from the fan deck.
* Access to and from maintenance access doors.
* Access for cleaning and other service.
* Potential access problems due to obstructions surrounding the tower.
* The possible need for safety cages around ladders.
These are only some of the safety issues that may arise in the design process. SPX
strongly recommends that you consult a safety engineer to be sure that all safety
considerations have been addressed.
CONFIDENTIAL - The contents of this document are confidential and constitute the
exclusive property of SPX Cooling Technologies and is intended for use in the
construction (contractor) and maintenance (owner) of this cooling tower. This document
and its contents may not be made public in any manner, distributed or loaned to others,
or repoduced or copied either in whole or part without prior written consent of SPX
Cooling Technologies.
Page 86 of 541
This page intentionally left blank
Page 87 of 541
NC8400
09-1250 - NC8400 Field Install - Contents & Instructions PAGE 3 OF 13
Contents

GETTING STARTED
ABOUT THIS MANUAL .............................................................................09-1250
MEASUREMENT SYSTEM .......................................................................09-1250
TOOLS AND SUPPLIES ...........................................................................09-1250
JOINT SEALING INSTRUCTIONS ............................................................09-1250
A FEW WORDS ABOUT FASTENERS ....................................................09-1250
GENERAL DECAL INSTRUCTIONS .........................................................09-1250
STANDARD FIELD DETAILS
MODULE CONNECTION DETAILS (NC8411 THRU NC 8414 ONLY) ......09-1251
FAN GUARD ..............................................................................................09-1252
VELOCITY RECOVERY STACK ...............................................................09-1254
BASIC INLET PIPING ................................................................................09-1255
INLET PIPING WITH OPTIONAL HC VALVES .........................................09-1256
SINGLE INLET PIPING OPTION ..............................................................09-1257
OVERFLOW & DRAIN ...............................................................................09-1258
FIELD INSTALLED OPTIONS
SUMP .........................................................................................................09-1259
BOTTOM OUTLET .....................................................................................09-1260
BOTTOM OUTLET SCREEN .....................................................................09-1261
SCREEN WITH ANTI-VORTEX PLATE .....................................................09-1262
FLUME ........................................................................................................09-1263
WEIR GATE ................................................................................................09-1264
FLOAT VALVE FLOAT ...............................................................................09-1265
STANDPIPE FLOAT VALVE ......................................................................09-1266
ELECTRIC BASIN HEATERS ....................................................................09-1267
EXTERNAL VIBRATION SWITCH .............................................................09-1268
MOTOR OUTSIDE AIRSTREAM (MOA) ....................................................09-1269
FIELD INSTALLED MOTOR .......................................................................09-1270
FAN CYLINDER EXTENSION ................................................................... 09-1253
Page 88 of 541
This page intentionally left blank
Page 89 of 541
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
To obtain maximum efficiency, it is strongly recommended that this entire manual be read before starting
assembly. This assembly manual illustrates the field installation of standard and optional items that your
tower may have. Due to shipping limitations these items can not be installed in the factory. Review all
manuals, drawings, and bills of material prior to assembly. Contact your SPX Cooling Technologies sales
representative should questions arise.
All steel parts are tagged for identification, as shown below.
NEED HELP!
If anything is missing, damaged, or you need help of any kind, contact your SPX Cooling
Technologies Representative as soon as possible. If you need help determining the representative
in your area, please call us at 1-800-4MARLEY, or check the internet at www.spxcooling.com

Find Number: This is a three digit alpha/numeric number that ties everything together. Used throughout
this manual, in the text, it's the number in bold type M35, in the figures, it's the number within the circle. It
is also the first column in the BILL OF MATERIAL. In the bill of material, all tower hardware components
are listed in numerical order by this number.
Item Number: This number is used by SPX to manufacture and inventory the components of your cooling
tower. Give this number to your SPX sales representative if an item is missing or a replacement item is
required.
Drawing Number: (Reference only) This is the number of the drawing used to fabricate this item.
Description: (Reference Only) All steel parts begin with SHEET or ASSEMBLY followed by the size of the
sheet used to fabricate the item or a description of the assembly. Your tower may have a few fiberglass
items which begin GRP.
Stainless Steel: This indicates when an item has been made from stainless steel. If the item is made
from the standard galvanized material this will not be printed on the tag.
Bills of material (BOM) are separate from drawings and this manual. At the top of each bill there is a
Drawing Number and the drawing description which indicates if the items on that bill will be installed per
this assembly manual or per a special installation drawing.
The find number, item number, description and quantity of items are all cross referenced on the bill of the
material. If a number is missing or hard to read, check the illustrations in this assembly manual first and
then the bill of material to see if you can find it. As the tower is prepared for assembly, the quantities of
each item should be checked against the bill of material.
NC8400
09-1250 - NC8400 Field Install - Contents & Instructions PAGE 5 OF 13
Getting Started

Page 90 of 541
MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
The manual uses both, the English System and Metric System of measurement. All units are in
millimeters. Fasteners are denoted in both the English and metric systems. Fasteners are supplied in
conformance with the metric system standard unless otherwise noted in the tower bills of material.
TOOLS AND SUPPLIES
Hoist: 2500 (1140kg) pound capacity. For hoisting of motor on towers with field installed motors or MOA.
1/2" electric drill and bit set.
Socket wrench set: Tower mainly uses 13mm, 19mm & 30mm sockets. Have more than one if
possible.
Combination wrenches: Mainly 13mm up to 30mm. Adjustable wrenches are OK but not
recommended.
Screwdrivers:
Torque wrench: 150 ft lb (203 N-m) capacity.
Caulking guns: Required for application of sealant.
Pipe Wrenches:
Small and large drift pins: (alignment tools) These are extremely important to help line up all the holes.
You should have more than one.
Allen wrenches:
Protractor level: For setting fand blade pitch.
Dial Indicator kit: Marley Item No. 115311M. For drive shaft alignment. Needed for motor outside
airstream option only.
Scaffolding, portable stairs or other means of temporary access and support.
Impact wrenches (electric or pneumatic) with standard and deep sockets: used to tighten all
hardware.
Acetone solvent: About a gallon (4 liters) and clean cotton rags.
Wear protective clothing, gloves, nonslip footwear, hard hat and safety glasses. Fluid Coolers are
constructed of steel and could have burrs that can cause cuts. The surface of the steel could be slick.
Protection from thrown, or falling objects should be used at all times around a construction site.
NC8400
09-1250 - NC8400 Field Install - Contents & Instructions PAGE 6 OF 13
Getting Started

Page 91 of 541
JOINT SEALING INSTRUCTIONS
Surface preparation instructions:
The following information covering surface preparation applies to all sealed joints whether sealer Z11 or
strip sealer Z12 or Z13 is being used. Years of experience has shown the instructions on surface
preparation and sealing details do result in watertight joints. Inadequate attention to these details will
result in joints that leak.
Do not apply either sealer if temperature is below 40Fahrenheit (5 Celcius).
All flanges are to be straight. Rework kinks or bends that exist. Clean surfaces being sealed with acetone.
If cloth is used, it must always be clean and dry. Excercise caution in using solvents, always read
labels and instructions. Care should be taken not to wipe dirt or oil onto the cleaned surface from
adjacent uncleaned area. Mating surfaces to be sealed must be kept clean and dry prior to assembly. No
water, grease or dirt should contaminate cleaned area. Note that stainless steel requires a larger area to
be cleaned because oil will recontaminate surfaces quickly. Oil will migrate through punched holes and
around sheared edges.
Application instructions for Sealer Z11 (Type A, B, & C seals):
Sealer Z11 comes in a 1/12th gallon (315ml) cartridge and is applied using a standard caulking gun. Apply
sealer to the unassembled parts. The typical joint sealing details shown on this page and the following
page are referenced throughout this manual. Care should be taken to fill voids and gaps at joints. After
parts have been assembled, trowel excess sealant over joint, taking care to force sealant back into joint,
and not out of joint. Do not use solvent to aid in applying sealer as solvent adversely affects bonding of
sealant to metal. Care should be taken to avoid leaving holes or air bubbles in sealant.
Do not subject sealed joints to waterloading for 48 hours at temperatures of 70Fahrenheit (21Celci us)
and above. Lower temperature will require a longer cure time.
TYPE A SEAL
TYPE B SEAL
TYPE C SEAL
WATER SIDE
OF JOINT
FASTENER
HOLE
Z11
FASTENER
HOLE
Z11
TUBE SEALER
3/8" [10mm] BEAD
TUBE SEALER
3/8" [10mm] BEAD
FASTENER
HOLE
Z11
This symbol is used throughout the manual to indicate the
locations where sealer Z11 is required. The "A" refers to a
"Type 'A' Seal" which is a 3/8" (10mm) diameter bead of
sealer Z11 laid along the centerline of a row of holes
curving over each hole as it passes. Reference detail at
the right.
"A"
This symbol is used throughout the manual to indicate the
locations where sealer Z11 is required. The "B" refers to a
"Type 'B' Seal" which is a 3/8" (10mm) diameter bead of
sealer Z11 laid along the centerline of a row of holes
curving completely around each hole as it passes.
Reference detail at the right.
"B"
This symbol is used throughout the manual to indicate the
locations where sealer Z11 is required. The "C" refers to a
"Type 'C' Seal" which is a 3/8" (10mm) diameter bead of
sealer Z11 laid completely around each hole in a row of
holes. Reference detail at the right.
"C"
TUBE SEALER
3/8" [10mm] BEAD
NC8400
09-1250 - NC8400 Field Install - Contents & Instructions PAGE 7 OF 13
Getting Started

Page 92 of 541
Application instructions for Strip Sealer Z12 & Z13 (Type D, E & F seals):
Strip sealer is supplied in 1/2" (12mm) Z13 and 1" (25mm) Z12 widths. It is intended that the 1" (25mm)
wide sealer be used unless otherwise noted.
Apply continuous pieces of strip sealer to the unassembled parts. Do not splice pieces except where
turning a corner. Cut with a sharp instrument, do not stretch or tear.
Gaps at joints and corners can be filled by stretching a piece of strip sealer to obtain the proper thickness.
Then work it into the joint to fill the gap and create an even surface.
After parts are set together, use a drift pin or other pointed object to puncture sealer at each fastener hole,
where required.
This symbol is used throughout the manual to
indicate the locations where a single layer of strip
sealer Z12 or Z13 is required. Reference detail at the
right.
"D"
This symbol is used on collection basin joints to
indicate the locations where two layers of strip sealer
are required. Align bottom edge of strip sealer Z13
with top edge of bolt holes. Align top edge of strip
sealer Z12 with bottom edge of bolt holes. Reference
detail at the right.
"E"
This symbol is used on distribution basin joints to
indicate the locations where two layers of strip sealer
are required. Align bottom edge of first strip sealer
Z13 with top edge of bolt holes. Align top edge of
second strip sealer Z13 with bottom edge of bolt
holes. Reference detail at the right.
"F"
TYPE D SEAL
TYPE E SEAL
FASTENER HOLE
Z12
Z13
FASTENER HOLE
Z13
or
Z12
WATER SIDE
OF JOINT
TYPE F SEAL
Z12
Z13
FASTENER
HOLE
NC8400
09-1250 - NC8400 Field Install - Contents & Instructions PAGE 8 OF 13
Getting Started

Page 93 of 541
A FEW WORDS ABOUT FASTENERS
Stainless Steel Fasteners:
Stainless steel fasteners are prone to galling. This is when you notice a sudden increase in the force
needed to turn a nut before parts are clamped. Apply anti-seize compound to the threads of the bolt
before installing the nut. If a nut does not easily spin on a bolt, do not try to force it. Chances are it will
seize. Some extra hardware is included to replace problem hardware.
This manual depicts flanged-head fasteners. On stainless steel towers these connection points will
consist of a regular hex-head bolt and two washers in place of the flange-head bolt.
Tap Screw Repair:
During installation of tap screws in sheet metal parts, tap screws may strip, not allowing the screw to be
fully tightened. if this occurs, place a 3/8" [10mm] nut on the back side of the tap screw and tighten.
Torque requirements:
The idealized standard fastener torque values for galvanized and stainless steel fasteners are shown in
the table below. These values may vary in actual practice. Note that the values shown for stainless steel
fasteners are based on the fasteners being lubricated with anti-seize compound.
Loctite
Critical structural and mechanical attachments require extra protection against the nuts vibrating loose
during tower operation. This is accomplished on galvanized fasteners by applying Loctite, Z05, thread
locking compound to the exposed threads of a bolt after the nut has been installed and tightened. Bolts
should be installed with the threaded end up or horizontally. Reference details below. On stainless steel
fasteners the use of anti-seize compound makes the use of loctite ineffective. Therefore in these critical
areas with stainless steel fasteners, self-locking nuts have been substituted for the standard nuts and
loctite will not be used.

Z05
Z05
Typical bolted attachment with threaded
end of bolt up, or installed horizontally
FASTENER TORQUE
FASTENER TORQUE
FOOT-LBS. (NEWTON-METERS)
GALVANIZED * STAINLESS STEEL
8mm 20 (27.1) 20 (27.1)
10mm 20 (27.1) 20 (27.1)
12mm 45 (61) 27 (37)
16mm 90 (122) 44 (60)
20mm 150 (203) 74 (100)
BOLT
DIAMETER
This symbol is used throughout the manual
to indicate the locations where Loctite Z05
is required. Reference details at the right.
* Values based on fasteners lubricated with
anti-seize compund. (Stainless steel only)
NC8400
09-1250 - NC8400 Field Install - Contents & Instructions PAGE 9 OF 13
Getting Started

Page 94 of 541
FASTENER SUBSTITUTION
The find numbers in this manual refer to flange head bolts and nuts. If your tower is not supplied with
these, or you need replacement hardware for your tower, the following non-flanged hardware may be
substituted.
Flanged Hardware
Standard Hardware
B
G
F
E
D
FIND NO. DESCRIPTION FIND NO. DESCRIPTION FIND NO. DESCRIPTION FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
C VM1 M8 X25 BOLT C V28 5/8" X1 1/2" BOLT
D W48 M8 SPRING WASHER D W04 5/8" LOCK WASHER
E W24 M8 FLAT WASHER E W29 5/8" FLAT WASHER
C VM1 M8 X40 BOLT C VB1 5/8" X2 1/2" BOLT
D W48 M8 SPRING WASHER D W04 5/8" LOCK WASHER
E W24 M8 FLAT WASHER E W29 5/8" FLAT WASHER
C VM1 M8 X70 BOLT C VB2 M16 X80 BOLT
D W48 M8 SPRING WASHER D W04 M16 SPRING WASHER
E W24 M8 FLAT WASHER E W29 M16 FLAT WASHER
C V07 3/8" X1" BOLT C VB3 5/8" X3 1/2" BOLT
D W02 3/8" LOCK WASHER D W04 5/8" LOCK WASHER
E W22 3/8" FLAT WASHER E W29 5/8" FLAT WASHER
C V10 3/8" X1 1/2" BOLT C V32 3/4" X2" BOLT
D W02 3/8" LOCK WASHER D W05 3/4" LOCK WASHER
E W22 3/8" FLAT WASHER C VC4 3/4" X2 1/2" BOLT
C V11 3/8" X2 1/2" BOLT D W05 3/4" LOCK WASHER
D W02 3/8" LOCK WASHER E W30 3/4" FLAT WASHER
E W22 3/8" FLAT WASHER C V35 3/4" X3" BOLT
C V18 1/2" X1" BOLT D W05 3/4" LOCK WASHER
D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER E W30 3/4" FLAT WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER C V39 3/4" X3 1/2" BOLT
C V18 1/2" X1 1/2" BOLT D W05 3/4" LOCK WASHER
D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER E W30 3/4" FLAT WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER
C V8Q 1/2" X2 1/2" BOLT F W24 M8 FLAT WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER G X47 M8 HEXNUT
C V22 1/2" X2 1/2" BOLT F W22 3/8" FLAT WASHER
D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER G X02 3/8" HEXNUT
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER F W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER
C V25 1/2" X4" BOLT G X03 1/2" HEXNUT
D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER F W29 5/8" FLAT WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER G X05 5/8" HEXNUT
C V8Y 1/2" X4 1/2" BOLT X64 M20 FLANGED NUT F X04 3/4" NUT
D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER
M16 FLANGED NUT
VPE M12 X120 FLANGED BOLT
M8 FLANGED NUT
VPC M12 X65 FLANGED BOLT
X61 M10 FLANGED NUT
X62 M12 FLANGED NUT
VPD M12 X100 FLANGED BOLT
X63
VPA M12 X55 FLANGED BOLT
B
X60
VPM M20 X80 FLANGED BOLT
VP7 M12 X25 FLANGED BOLT
VPN M20 X90 FLANGED BOLT
VP8 M12 X40 FLANGED BOLT
VPK M20 X45 FLANGED BOLT
VPL M20 X65 FLANGED BOLT
VPH M16 X80 FLANGED BOLT
VP3 M10 X25 FLANGED BOLT VPJ M16 X90 FLANGED BOLT
VPF M16 X40 FLANGED BOLT
VP1 M8 X40 FLANGED BOLT VPG M16 X65 FLANGED BOLT
A
VP0 M8 X25 FLANGED BOLT
A
VP2 M8 X70 FLANGED BOLT
VP4 M10 X40 FLANGED BOLT
VP6 M10 X65 FLANGED BOLT
A
C
NC8400
09-1250 - NC8400 Field Install - Contents & Instructions PAGE 10 OF 13
Getting Started

Page 95 of 541
GENERAL DECAL INSTRUCTIONS
Decals are an important part of the tower assembly. Decals provide instructions, identifications, cautions
and warnings deemed necessary for proper operation and safety.
Surface Preparation
Surface must be clean and dry. Oil and dirt may be removed with solvent (such as acetone) or
commercial detergent. Wash the area with warm water and dry with a lint-free cloth. Ultimate adhesion
will occur 24-28 hours after application should not be undertaken if temperature is below 35 degrees
Fahrenheit, or if humidity is greater than 95%.
General Application Instructions
Peel off backing paper, taking care to avoid dirt contamination of the exposed adhesive. Carefully apply
decal to the desired location with light pressure to avoid distortion of the vinyl. Once in position, smooth
out with a towel. If air bubbles occur, puncture with a pin and smooth down with a towel. The finished
decal should be completely flat.
NC8400
09-1250 - NC8400 Field Install - Contents & Instructions PAGE 11 OF 13
Getting Started

Page 96 of 541
NOTES
NC8400
09-1250 - NC8400 Field Install - Contents & Instructions PAGE 12 OF 13
Getting Started

Page 97 of 541
This page intentionally left blank
NC8400
09-1250 - NC8400 Field Install - Contents & Instructions PAGE 13 OF 13
Getting Started

Page 98 of 541
NC8400
09-1252B - NC8400 Field Install - Fan Guard PAGE 1 OF 1
Fan Guard

Pre-installed
at factory
FAN GUARD
A single piece fan guard is provided on models NC8401
thru NC8403, Models NC 8405 thru NC8414 use a two
piece fan guard and require guard splice hardware. On
models with a single piece fan guard, position guard
D32 over cylinder and raise center to align holes in fan
cylinder. On models with a two piece fan guard, guard
D32 is installed first and a splice clip N97 is used to
retain guard D34.
A
DETAIL A
B
DETAIL B
X60
VP1
X60
VP0
N97
X60
D32
D34
FAN DECK
(Use VP0 when
installed on
Fan Cylinder
Extension)
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN FIELD INSTALL
FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
VM1 BOLT, M8 X 25MM
W48** LOCK WASHER, M8
W24 FLAT WASHER, M8
X47* NUT, M8
W24 FLAT WASHER, M8
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
VP0
X60
Page 99 of 541
NC8400
09-1256B - NC8400 Field Install - HC Valves PAGE 1 OF 1
HC Valves

INLET PIPING WITH OPTIONAL HC VALVES
If HC valves N40 are to be installed, attach as shown. A full face
gasket N45 is used between valve and distribution basin, and a ring
gasket N39 is used between valve and inlet piping. Valve may be
rotated 90or 180if desired.
N39
N40
N45
X06
X04
or
6" & 8" dia.
valves
10" dia.
valve
Ring gasket
without bolt circle
Inlet piping
supplied by others
or
6" & 8" dia.
valves
10" dia.
valve
Half of these bolts are
threaded into tapped
holes in valve body, the
other half require nuts.
Full face gasket
with bolt circle
Piping, supports, design
of piping and supports,
and restraint of lateral
piping loads is the
reponsibility of others.
Stainless fasteners
are provided with
stainless basins
Center section of intet
flume may be removed if
access for attaching valve
is required. Reinstall flume
after valve is secure.
W36
W35
or
6" & 8" dia.
valves
10" dia.
valve
V46
VN3
or
6" & 8" dia.
valves
10" dia.
valve
3/4" UNC
7/8" UNC
Supplied
by others
FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
VN3 M20 X 45 BOLT
V46 7/8" X 2" BOLT
W35 3/4" SEALING WASHER
W36 7/8" SEALING WASHER
X04 M20 NUT
X06 7/8" NUT
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN HC VALVE
Page 100 of 541
NC8400
09-1258B - NC8400 Field Install - Overflow & Drain PAGE 1 OF 1
Overflow & Drain

OVERFLOW & DRAIN
All towers must have an overflow and drain, either as the standpipe
in the collection basin floor or at the optional coverplate location.
The standpipe overflow and drain is installed per Figure 1. Bolt
coupling assembly Q47 to bottom of the collection basin floor at the
6" (152mm) diameter hole and bolt pattern. Install standpipe Q48.
The standpipe is PVC unless an optional heater element is close by,
then a steel standpipe will be installed with teflon tape (supplied by
others) to protect the threads.
If the optional coverplate drain and overflow is being used, the
cutout in the depressed section for the standpipe has been covered
with a drain plate that must have plug Q18 installed per Figure 2. If
coverplate drain is not being plumbed, install pipe plug Q18 per
Figure 3.
Figure 1
Take care not to cross
thread the PVC standpipe
when threading into the
steel coupling assembly.
Figure 3
Q48
Collection basin
depressed section
Figure 2
VP0
W37
X60
Q47
Standpipe overflow & drain
Floor drain plug
Coverplate drain plug
Q18
Q18
Stainless fasteners
are provided with
stainless basins
Type B
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN FIELD INSTALL
FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
VM1 BOLT, M8 X 25MM
W48** LOCK WASHER, M8
W24 FLAT WASHER, M8
W37 W37 SEALING WASHER, M8
X47* NUT, M8
W24 FLAT WASHER, M8
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
VP0
X60
Page 101 of 541
09-1260A - Field Install - Bottom Outlet PAGE 1 OF 1
BottomOutlet
BOTTOM OUTLET
The typical attachment of customer piping for bottom outlet or equalizer
connection using gasket Q14 is shown in Figure 1. The tower is not designed
to support additional piping loads. DO NOT SUPPORT PIPING FROMTHE
TOWER.
Outlet piping and fasteners
Supplied by others. Fasteners
to be the stainless in stainless
basins.
For additional leak
protection apply
sealer under bolt
head and washer.
Figure 1
Piping, supports, design
of piping and supports,
and restraint of lateral
piping loads is the
reponsibility of others.
Q14
Collection basin
depressed area floor.
"B"
Clean surfaces and
apply a 3/8" (10mm)
dia. bead of sealer
around and between
all holes under basin
where gasket attaches.
Page 102 of 541
NC8400
09-1262 - NC8400 Field Install - Anti-Vortex Plate PAGE 1 OF 1
Anti-Vortex Plate

ANTI-VORTEX PLATE
On towers with higher outlet flows, a screen assembly with an
anti-vortex plate is used as shown in the figure below. Anti-vortex
plate is pre-assembled with screens and retainers. Position
anti-vortex assembly in depressed area of collection basin
centered over outlet.
Bottom outlet
or sump cutout
Screen Assembly with
Anti-vortex Plate
(Center over outlet)
Page 103 of 541
NC8400
09-1265 - NC8400 Field Install - Float Valve Float PAGE 1 OF 1
Float Valve Float

Figure 1
FLOAT VALVE FLOAT
Attach stem Q29 to float Q31. Install float and stem
assembly into end of float valve lever arm as shown in
Figure 1. See your NC Owners Manual for adjustment
of float valve.
Collection basin side
Q31
Q29
Float Valve
Page 104 of 541
WARNING
The location and orientation of the cooling tower can affect the safety of those
responsible for installing, servicing or reparing the cooling tower. Since SPX does not
dictate or determine where the tower is located or how iti is oriented, SPX is not
responsible for addressing the safety issues that are affected by the tower's location
location and orientation. The following safety issues should be considered by those
responsible for designing and maintaining the tower installation. Failure to consider and
address these issues may result in substantial personal injury or death to those
installing, servicing or repairing the cooling tower.
* Access to and from the fan deck.
* Access to and from maintenance access doors.
* Access for cleaning and other service.
* Potential access problems due to obstructions surrounding the tower.
* The possible need for safety cages around ladders.
These are only some of the safety issues that may arise in the design process. SPX
strongly recommends that you consult a safety engineer to be sure that all safety
considerations have been addressed.
CONFIDENTIAL - The contents of this document are confidential and constitute the
exclusive property of SPX Cooling Technologies and is intended for use in the
construction (contractor) and maintenance (owner) of this cooling tower. This document
and its contents may not be made public in any manner, distributed or loaned to others,
or repoduced or copied either in whole or part without prior written consent of SPX
Cooling Technologies.
Page 105 of 541
This page intentionally left blank
Page 106 of 541
NC8400 Contents

Page 107 of 541
This page intentionally left blank
Page 108 of 541
ABOUT THIS MANUAL
To obtain maximum efficiency, it is strongly recommended that this entire manual be read before starting
assembly. This assembly manual illustrates a typical assembly sequence of a basic tower. Some
common options are also included. Refer to separate installation drawings for additional optional
equipment Review all manuals, drawings and bills of material prior to assembly. These documents are
located in a Literature Kit packed with the tower. Contact your SPX Cooling Technologies sales
representative should questions arise.
SAFETY
The location and orientation of the cooling tower can affect the safety of those responsible for installing,
servicing, or repairing the tower. Since SPX Cooling Technologies does not dictate the location, or
orientation of the tower, SPX Cooling Technologies is not responsible for addressing the safety issues that
are affected by the tower's location, or orientation. The following safety issues should be considered by
those responsible for designing the tower installation. Failure to consider and address these issues may
result in substantial personal injury, or death to those involved in installing, servicing, or repairing the
cooling tower.
* Access to and from maintenance access doors
* Access for cleaning and other service
* Potential access problems due to obstructions surrounding the tower
* The possible need for ladders (either portable or permanent) to gain access to the
maintenance access doors
* The possible need for safety cages around ladders.
These are only some of the safety issues that may arise in the design process. SPX Cooling
Technologies strongly recommends that you consult a safety engineer to be sure all safety considerations
have been addressed.
SPX Cooling Technologies offers optional equipment that may assist you in addressing some of these
safety issues. Consult your sales representative for information on these optional items.
Safety is the first priority at the job site. Cooling towers are constructed of material that could cause
injury if not handled properly. It is recommended that Kevlar gloves and sleeves and eye protection be
worn at all time when working with steel, PVC and fiberglass. Hardhats should be worn when working
with overhead objects.
Steel parts may be heavy and the surfaces may be slick from oil used during fabrication. Take
precautions by placing heavy steel parts near or on the ground to minimize the risk of dropping. Although
all steel parts are de-burred, the edges of steel can be very sharp and cut easily. Keep a first aid kit handy
should the need arise.
Use the above suggestions as well as common sense to create a safe working environment. Take steps
to prevent tipping or falling hazards. Protection from thrown or falling objects should be used at all times
around a construction site. Keep the worksite and assembly area clean. Check tools periodically and
replace tools that could break or malfunction. Follow instruction manuals for all powertools and beware of
shock hazards that exist.
NEVER HOLD A PIECE OF STEEL IN PLACE USING ONLY A DRIFT PIN. Drift pins have smooth
surfaces and are designed to slide in and out of holes very easily. Drift pins can not hold themselves in
place. Parts WILL fall if suspended only by a drift pin.
NC8400
09-1271- NC8400 Maintenance Options - Contents & Instructions PAGE 5 OF 9
Getting Started

Page 109 of 541
NC8400
09-1271- NC8400 Maintenance Options - Contents & Instructions PAGE 6 OF 9
Getting Started

PARTS
All steel parts are tagged for identification, as shown above.
Find Number: This is a three-digit alpha/numeric number that ties the bill of material (BOM) to the
drawings. They are identified in the drawings as the alpha/numeric numbers within the circles. The find
numbers on the drawings are used in conjunction with the appropriate BOM to find the correct item
numbers needed for installation.
THE SAME FIND NUMBERS MAY BE USED FOR DIFFERENT PARTS ON DIFFERENT TOWER
CELLS.
Item Number: This number is used by SPX Cooling Technologies to purchase, manufacture and inventory
the components of the modules. Give these item numbers to the project manager if an item is missing or
a replacement item is required.
Drawing Number: (Reference Only) This is the number of the drawing used to fabricate the item. This
number DOES NOT reference the drawing number where the part is used.
Description: (Reference Only) This number describes the dimensions of the flat pattern of the item.
These dimensions MAY NOT correspond to the overall dimensions of the part.
The find number, item number, description and quantity of items are all cross referenced on the bill of
material. If a number is missing or hard to read, check the illustrations in this assembly manual first and
then the bill of material to see if you can find it. As the tower is prepared for assembly, the quantities of
each item should be checked against the bill of material.
NEED HELP!
If anything is missing, damaged, or you need help of any kind, contact your SPX Cooling Technologies
Representative as soon as possible. If you need help determining the representative in your area, please
call us at 1-800-4MARLEY, or check the internet at www.spxcooling.com

Page 110 of 541
NC8400
09-1271- NC8400 Maintenance Options - Contents & Instructions PAGE 7 OF 9
Getting Started

MEASUREMENT SYSTEM
The manual uses both, the English System and Metric System of measurement. All units are in
millimeters. Fasteners are denoted in both the English and metric systems. Fasteners are supplied in
conformance with the metric system standard unless otherwise noted in the tower bills of material.
TOOLS AND SUPPLIES
Hoist: 2500 pound (1140kg) capacity for hoisting.
Small and large drift pins: (alignment tools) these are extremely important to help line up all the holes.
Combination wrenches: mainly 13mm up to 30mm. May be substituted for impact wrenches.
Socket wrench set: Tower mainly uses 13mm, 19mm & 30mm sockets. have more than one if possible.
Impact wrenches (electric or pneumatic) with standard and deep sockets: used to tighten all hardware.
Torque wrench: 150 ft lb (203 N-m) capacity.
Scoffolding, portable stairs, ladders or other means of temporary access and support
Wear protective clothing, gloves, nonslip footwear, hard hat and safety glasses. Fluid Coolers are
constructed of steel and could have burrs that can cause cuts. The surface of the steel could be slick.
Protection from thrown, or falling objects should be used at all times around a construction site.
A FEW WORDS ABOUT FASTENERS
Stainless Steel Fasteners:
Stainless steel fasteners are prone to galling. This is when you notice a sudden increase in the force
needed to turn a nut before parts are clamped. Apply anti-seize compound to the threads of the bolt
before installing the nut. If a nut does not easily spin on a bolt, do not try to force it. Chances are it will
seize. Some extra hardware is included to replace problem hardware.
This manual depicts flanged-head fasteners. On stainless steel towers these connection points will
consist of a regular hex-head bolt and two washers in place of the flange-head bolt.
Tap Screw Repair:
During installation of tap screws in sheet metal parts, tap screws may strip, not allowing the screw to be
fully tightened. if this occurs, place a 3/8" [10mm] nut on the back side of the tap screw and tighten.
Torque requirements:
The idealized standard fastener torque values for galvanized and stainless steel fasteners are shown in
the table below. These values may vary in actual practice. Note that the values shown for stainless steel
fasteners are based on the fasteners being lubricated with anti-seize compound.
Page 111 of 541
NC8400
09-1271- NC8400 Maintenance Options - Contents & Instructions PAGE 8 OF 9
Getting Started

A FEW WORDS ABOUT FASTENERS
Stainless Steel Fasteners:
Stainless steel fasteners are prone to galling. This is when you notice a sudden increase in the force
needed to turn a nut before parts are clamped. Apply anti-seize compound to the threads of the bolt
before installing the nut. If a nut does not easily spin on a bolt, do not try to force it. Chances are it will
seize. Some extra hardware is included to replace problem hardware.
This manual depicts flanged-head fasteners. On stainless steel towers these connection points will
consist of a regular hex-head bolt and two washers in place of the flange-head bolt.
Tap Screw Repair:
During installation of tap screws in sheet metal parts, tap screws may strip, not allowing the screw to be
fully tightened. if this occurs, place a 3/8" [10mm] nut on the back side of the tap screw and tighten.
Torque requirements:
The idealized standard fastener torque values for galvanized and stainless steel fasteners are shown in
the table below. These values may vary in actual practice. Note that the values shown for stainless steel
fasteners are based on the fasteners being lubricated with anti-seize compound.
Loctite
Critical structural and mechanical attachments require extra protection against the nuts vibrating loose
during tower operation. This is accomplished on galvanized fasteners by applying Loctite, Z05, thread
locking compound to the exposed threads of a bolt after the nut has been installed and tightened. Bolts
should be installed with the threaded end up or horizontally. Reference details below. On stainless steel
fasteners the use of anti-seize compound makes the use of loctite ineffective. Therefore in these critical
areas with stainless steel fasteners, self-locking nuts have been substituted for the standard nuts and
loctite will not be used.

Z05
Z05
Typical bolted attachment with threaded
end of bolt up, or installed horizontally
FASTENER TORQUE
FASTENER TORQUE
FOOT-LBS. (NEWTON-METERS)
GALVANIZED * STAINLESS STEEL
8mm 20 (27.1) 20 (27.1)
10mm 20 (27.1) 20 (27.1)
12mm 45 (61) 27 (37)
16mm 90 (122) 44 (60)
20mm 150 (203) 74 (100)
BOLT
DIAMETER
This symbol is used throughout the manual
to indicate the locations where Loctite Z05
is required. Reference details at the right.
* Values based on fasteners lubricated with
anti-seize compund. (Stainless steel only)
Page 112 of 541
NC8400
09-1271- NC8400 Maintenance Options - Contents & Instructions PAGE 9 OF 9
Getting Started

FASTENER SUBSTITUTION
The find numbers in this manual refer to flange head bolts and nuts. If your tower is not supplied with
these, or you need replacement hardware for your tower, the following non-flanged hardware may be
substituted.
Flanged Hardware
Standard Hardware
B
G
F
E
D
FIND NO. DESCRIPTION FIND NO. DESCRIPTION FIND NO. DESCRIPTION FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
C VM1 M8 X25 BOLT C V28 5/8" X1 1/2" BOLT
D W48 M8 SPRING WASHER D W04 5/8" LOCK WASHER
E W24 M8 FLAT WASHER E W29 5/8" FLAT WASHER
C VM1 M8 X40 BOLT C VB1 5/8" X2 1/2" BOLT
D W48 M8 SPRING WASHER D W04 5/8" LOCK WASHER
E W24 M8 FLAT WASHER E W29 5/8" FLAT WASHER
C VM1 M8 X70 BOLT C VB2 M16 X80 BOLT
D W48 M8 SPRING WASHER D W04 M16 SPRING WASHER
E W24 M8 FLAT WASHER E W29 M16 FLAT WASHER
C V07 3/8" X1" BOLT C VB3 5/8" X3 1/2" BOLT
D W02 3/8" LOCK WASHER D W04 5/8" LOCK WASHER
E W22 3/8" FLAT WASHER E W29 5/8" FLAT WASHER
C V10 3/8" X1 1/2" BOLT C V32 3/4" X2" BOLT
D W02 3/8" LOCK WASHER D W05 3/4" LOCK WASHER
E W22 3/8" FLAT WASHER C VC4 3/4" X2 1/2" BOLT
C V11 3/8" X2 1/2" BOLT D W05 3/4" LOCK WASHER
D W02 3/8" LOCK WASHER E W30 3/4" FLAT WASHER
E W22 3/8" FLAT WASHER C V35 3/4" X3" BOLT
C V18 1/2" X1" BOLT D W05 3/4" LOCK WASHER
D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER E W30 3/4" FLAT WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER C V39 3/4" X3 1/2" BOLT
C V18 1/2" X1 1/2" BOLT D W05 3/4" LOCK WASHER
D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER E W30 3/4" FLAT WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER
C V8Q 1/2" X2 1/2" BOLT F W24 M8 FLAT WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER G X47 M8 HEXNUT
C V22 1/2" X2 1/2" BOLT F W22 3/8" FLAT WASHER
D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER G X02 3/8" HEXNUT
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER F W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER
C V25 1/2" X4" BOLT G X03 1/2" HEXNUT
D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER F W29 5/8" FLAT WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER G X05 5/8" HEXNUT
C V8Y 1/2" X4 1/2" BOLT X64 M20 FLANGED NUT F X04 3/4" NUT
D W03 1/2" LOCK WASHER
E W23 1/2" FLAT WASHER
M16 FLANGED NUT
VPE M12 X120 FLANGED BOLT
M8 FLANGED NUT
VPC M12 X65 FLANGED BOLT
X61 M10 FLANGED NUT
X62 M12 FLANGED NUT
VPD M12 X100 FLANGED BOLT
X63
VPA M12 X55 FLANGED BOLT
B
X60
VPM M20 X80 FLANGED BOLT
VP7 M12 X25 FLANGED BOLT
VPN M20 X90 FLANGED BOLT
VP8 M12 X40 FLANGED BOLT
VPK M20 X45 FLANGED BOLT
VPL M20 X65 FLANGED BOLT
VPH M16 X80 FLANGED BOLT
VP3 M10 X25 FLANGED BOLT VPJ M16 X90 FLANGED BOLT
VPF M16 X40 FLANGED BOLT
VP1 M8 X40 FLANGED BOLT VPG M16 X65 FLANGED BOLT
A
VP0 M8 X25 FLANGED BOLT
A
VP2 M8 X70 FLANGED BOLT
VP4 M10 X40 FLANGED BOLT
VP6 M10 X65 FLANGED BOLT
A
C
Page 113 of 541
NC8400
09-1273C - NC8400 MO-GUARDRAIL-CASE FACE-ONE LADDER PAGE 1 OF 3
Ladder & Guardrail

LADDER & GUARDRAIL
CASE FACE W/ LADDER
The ladder and guardrail installation required
for your tower may vary depending on the
optional equipment selected for the tower.
The figure numbers are listed in the order
that they are intended to be installed and are
located on the corresponding page number.
Note: If there is a special option required
for the ladder and guardrail, there will be
additional drawing(s) that will replace (or
be used in conjunction with) the details in
this manual.
Note: On stainless steel towers, hardware
that attaches directly to the tower will be
stainless steel. All remaining hardware will
be galzanized. Stainless steel bolts are
prone to galling. Generously apply thread
lubricant Z21 to threads of bolts before
torquing nuts.
Guardrail Package Case Face w/ Ladder
L37
L35
L34
Not on 8401
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN LDR&GR FACE W/LDR
Page 114 of 541
NC8400
09-1273C - NC8400 MO-GUARDRAIL-CASE FACE-ONE LADDER PAGE 2 OF 3
Ladder & Guardrail

Begin by installing guardrail
assembly L37 to existing post clips.
Next install guardrail assembly L35
to L37 assembly and to existing
louver face guardrail assembly.
Install guardrail assembly L34 to
existing post clips and to existing
louver face guardrail assembly.
Install ladder braces L38 and L39 as
shown. After completion of
installation install plug L28 into top of
all vertical posts.
D
DETAIL D
A
DETAIL A
C
DETAIL C
B
DETAIL B
L34
L37
L35
X62
X62
VPC
L39
VPC
(Typical Louver Corner)
Case Face Guardrail with
Ladder Opening
L37
L35
L34
Not on 8401
VPD
X62
VPD
X62
L38
L38
L39
L39
L39
X62
L28
VPD
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN LDR&GR FACE W/LDR
FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
V22 BOLT, M12 X 65MM
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
V25 BOLT, M12 X 100MM
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
X03* NUT, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
X62
VPC
VPD
Page 115 of 541
NC8400
09-1273C - NC8400 MO-GUARDRAIL-CASE FACE-ONE LADDER PAGE 3 OF 3
Ladder & Guardrail

Connect lower ladder brace L40 to collection
basin side.Models NC8411 thru NC8414
require a mid-ladder brace L44 be attached to
the bottom channel of the top module. Bolt
ladder section(s) L41 (and L42 on models
NC8403 thru NC8414) to ladder braces as
show. Models NC8403 thru NC8409 require a
ladder splice L43 to connect the ladder
sections together.
Cased Face Ladder
Mid-Ladder Brace
Ladder Splice
L43
X61
VP3
NC8411 thru NC8414
NC8403 thru NC8409
When two piece
ladder is required
(NC8403 thru
NC8414 only)
Collection
basin side
L41
VP4
X61
VP4
X61
L41
L42
VP4
L44
X61
VP3
L40
L42
VP3
X61
X61
VP4
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN LDR&GR FACE W/LDR
FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
V07 BOLT, M10 X 25MM
W02** LOCK WASHER, M10
W22 FLAT WASHER, M10
V10 BOLT, M10 X 40MM
W02** LOCK WASHER, M10
W22 FLAT WASHER, M10
X02* NUT, M10
W22 FLAT WASHER, M10
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
VP3
X61
VP4
Page 116 of 541
NC8400
09-1274B - NC8400 MO-GUARDRAIL-LOUVER FACE-NO LADDER PAGE 1 OF 2
Ladder & Guardrail

LADDER & GUARDRAIL
LOUVER FACE W/ NO LADDER
The ladder and guardrail installation required
for your tower may vary depending on the
optional equipment selected for the tower.
The figure numbers are listed in the order
that they are intended to be installed and are
located on the corresponding page number.
Note: If there is a special option required
for the ladder and guardrail, there will be
additional drawing(s) that will replace (or
be used in conjunction with) the details in
this manual.
Note: On stainless steel towers, hardware
that attaches directly to the tower will be
stainless steel. All remaining hardware will
be galzanized. Stainless steel bolts are
prone to galling. Generously apply thread
lubricant Z21 to threads of bolts before
torquing nuts.
Guardrail Package Louver Face w/ No Ladder
L32
L33
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN FAN DECK EXTENSION
Page 117 of 541
NC8400
09-1274B - NC8400 MO-GUARDRAIL-LOUVER FACE-NO LADDER PAGE 2 OF 2
Ladder & Guardrail

A
DETAIL A
B
DETAIL B
VPC
X62
L32
L28
X62
VPD
L33
L33
VPC
X62
(Typical all 4 corners)
Louver Face Guardrail
Install guardrail assy L32
to louver column and existing post
clips. Next install guardrail assy
L33 to louver column and guardrail
assy L32. After completion of
installation install plug L28 in the
top of all vertical posts.
L32
L33
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR
FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
V22 BOLT, M12 X 65MM
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
V25 BOLT, M12 X 100MM
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
X03* NUT, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
X62
VPC
VPD
Page 118 of 541
NC8400
09-1276C - NC8400 MO-GUARDRAIL-CASE FACE-NO LADDER PAGE 1 OF 2
Ladder & Guardrail

LADDER & GUARDRAIL
CASE FACE W/O LADDER
The ladder and guardrail installation required
for your tower may vary depending on the
optional equipment selected for the tower. The
figure numbers are listed in the order that they
are intended to be installed and are located on
the corresponding page number.
Note: If there is a special option required
for the ladder and guardrail, there will be
additional drawing(s) that will replace (or
be used in conjunction with) the details in
this manual.
Note: On stainless steel towers, hardware
that attaches directly to the tower will be
stainless steel. All remaining hardware
will be galzanized. Stainless steel bolts
are prone to galling. Generously apply
thread lubricant Z21 to threads of bolts
before torquing nuts.
Guardrail Package Case Face w/o Ladder
L35
L37
L34
L36
Not on 8401
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FACE W/O LDR
Page 119 of 541
NC8400
09-1276C - NC8400 MO-GUARDRAIL-CASE FACE-NO LADDER PAGE 2 OF 2
Ladder & Guardrail

Begin by installing guardrail
assembly L37 to existing post
clips. Next install guardrail
assembly L35 to L37 assembly
and to existing louver face
guardrail assembly. Install
guardrail assembly L34 to existing
post clips and to existing louver
face guardrail assembly. Install
assembly L36 between L34 &
L37. After completion of
installation install plug L28 into top
of all vertical posts.
Case Face Guardrail
without Ladder Opening
D
DETAIL D
L34
C
DETAIL C
L37
L37
L35
L36
or
or
L34
L36
L37
L35
B
DETAIL B
(Typical Louver Corner)
A
DETAIL A
VPC
X62
Not on 8401
VPD
X62
X62
VPD
L28
VPD
X62
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FACE W/O LDR
FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
V22 BOLT, M12 X 65MM
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
V25 BOLT, M12 X 100MM
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
X03* NUT, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
X62
VPC
VPD
Page 120 of 541
NC8400
09-1281B - NC8400 MO - Ladder Extension PAGE 1 OF 1
Ladder Extension

LADDER EXTENSION
Ladder extensions are provided in either 5'-0" (1.52 m) or
11'-0" (3.35 m) lengths and must be field cut to a shorter
length if required. Install ladder extension L99 by attaching
to existing ladder using splices L98 as shown below.
Note: Bracing or anchorage of ladder extension must be
provided by the customer to prevent bending of ladder
extension.
VP3
X61
X61
L98
L98
L99
Existing Ladder
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN LADDER EXTENSION 2FT-11FT
If you have Safety Cage Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN SAFETY CAGE INSTALL
FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
V07 BOLT, M10 X 25MM
W02** LOCK WASHER, M10
W22 FLAT WASHER, M10
X02* NUT, M10
W22 FLAT WASHER, M10
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
VP3
X61
Page 121 of 541
NC8400
09-1283A - NC8400 MO-ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM - 8401-8402 PAGE 1 OF 5
Access Door Platform

ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM
The access door platform should be installed
next to the ladder. Access to underside of
tower is required for installation. Use Figure 1
to begin access door platform assembly on
tower models NC8401 and NC8402.
Note: On stainless steel towers, hardware
that attaches directly to the tower will be
stainless steel.
Stainless steel bolts are prone to galling.
Generously apply thread lubricant Z21 to
threads of bolts before torquing nuts.
All remaining hardware will be galvanized.
Figure 1
(NC8401 thru NC8402)
L03
X62
L54
VP7
VP7
L53
X62
X62
L54
VP7
X62
L01
L02
VP7
VP7
W33
X62
L01
L02
VP7
X62
L53
Attach the forklift braces L01 inside the forklift
beam using clips L02. Connect beam clips
L53 & L54 to basin side. Insert platform
support beams L03 thru forklift openings in
collection basin side and attach to forklift
brace and beam clips.
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM
FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
V18 BOLT, M12 X 25MM
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
W33 W33 SEALING WASHER, M12
X03* NUT, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
VP7
X62
Page 122 of 541
NC8400
09-1283A - NC8400 MO-ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM - 8401-8402 PAGE 2 OF 5
Access Door Platform

Figure 2
(NC8401)
L06
L08
X62
VP7
VP7
L11
VP7
X62
L06
VP7
W33
X62
Continue access door platform assembly on tower models
NC8401 as indicated in Figure 2.
Attach platform sides L06 to collection basin side. Connect
brace L08 to beam and grating support channel. Bolt
platform end L11 in place as shown.
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM
FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
V18 BOLT, M12 X 25MM
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
W33 W33 SEALING WASHER, M12
X03* NUT, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
VP7
X62
Page 123 of 541
NC8400
09-1283A - NC8400 MO-ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM - 8401-8402 PAGE 3 OF 5
Access Door Platform

Continue access door platform assembly on tower model
NC8402 as indicated in Figure 3.
Attach platform sides L06 and L09 to collection basin side.
Bolt platform end L11 in place as shown.
Figure 3
(NC8402)
L09
L11
X62
VP7
VP7
L06
X62
VP7
W33
X62
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM
FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
V18 BOLT, M12 X 25MM
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
W33 W33 SEALING WASHER, M12
X03* NUT, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
VP7
X62
Page 124 of 541
NC8400
09-1283A - NC8400 MO-ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM - 8401-8402 PAGE 4 OF 5
Access Door Platform

L17
T07
Continue access door platform assembly for all models by
setting platform grating panels L17 in place as shown in Figure
4. Attach panels to beams using tap screws T07.
Figure 4
(NC8401 thru NC8402)
FIND NO. DESCRIPTION
T07 3/8" X 1" TAP SCREW
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM
Page 125 of 541
NC8400
09-1283A - NC8400 MO-ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM - 8401-8402 PAGE 5 OF 5
Access Door Platform

A
DETAIL A
X62
VPC
E30
VP7
L28
L46
X62
VPC
B
DETAIL B
X62
VPC
L45
VPD
X62
VPC
L44
VP7
E30
Use Figures 5 & 6 to finish access door platform assembly
for all models. First attach guard rail post clips E30 to
platform side and attach guardrail assembly L46 to post clip
and platform end. Attach guardrail L45 to post clip and
platform end. Complete access platform assembly by
attaching guardrail assembly L44 to guardrail assemblies
L45 & L46. After completing installation instal plug L28 in the
top of all vertical posts.
L28
Figure 5
(NC8401 thru NC8402)
Figure 6
(NC8401 thru NC8402)
Reference Fastener Kit: KIT FSTN ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM
FIND NO. PARTS LIST DESCRIPTION
V18 BOLT, M12 X 25MM
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
V22 BOLT, M12 X 65MM
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
V25 BOLT, M12 X 100MM
W03** LOCK WASHER, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
X03* NUT, M12
W23 FLAT WASHER, M12
* Use Nyloc Nut for SS fastener
** Lock Washer only required for GALV fastener
X62
VPC
VPD
VP7
Page 126 of 541
Page 127 of 541
Page 128 of 541
Page 129 of 541
Page 130 of 541
Page 131 of 541
Page 132 of 541
Page 133 of 541
Page 134 of 541
9



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


PROJ ECT: J ohn M. Roll US - Yuma Courthouse



LOCATION: Yuma, AZ



CONTRACTOR: Tempe Mechanical



SUBMITTED BY: Climatec, Inc.
2851 W. Kathleen Rd.
Phoenix, AZ. 85053
602-944-3330


MANUFACTURER: Marley



PRODUCT: Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
ORIENTATION DRAWINGS

MODEL: NC8401MAN1SGF


SERIAL #: NC-10050616-A1, NC-10050616-B1


TAGS: CT 1~2


DATE: 7/12/12
Page 135 of 541
Page 136 of 541
Page 137 of 541
Page 138 of 541
Page 139 of 541
9



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


PROJ ECT: J ohn M. Roll US - Yuma Courthouse



LOCATION: Yuma, AZ



CONTRACTOR: Tempe Mechanical



SUBMITTED BY: Climatec, Inc.
2851 W. Kathleen Rd.
Phoenix, AZ. 85053
602-944-3330


MANUFACTURER: Marley



PRODUCT: Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
BILLS OF MATERIAL

MODEL: NC8401MAN1SGF


SERIAL #: NC-10050616-A1, NC-10050616-B1


TAGS: CT 1~2


DATE: 7/12/12
Page 140 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 1
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1
Sub-Mat l No.
Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF TOWER A, CELL 1 COOLING Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F 2019449 1 1 EA KIT FSTN FIELD INSTALL NC8401-3-SCB S3 FSTN KIT
F E 2022859 1 1 EA FAN GUARD-GALV-PAC NC8401 09-1252 B
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2026305 1 1 EA ANTI-VORTEX PLATE 3150 GPM MAX NC 09-1260 A
09-1262
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2026467 1 1 EA LDR&GR CASE FACE W/O LDR -PAC NC8401 09-1276 C
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2026486 1 1 EA STANDPIPE DRAIN & OVERFLOW NC8401-02 S30009-1258 B
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2026490 1 1 EA LDR&GR CASE FACE W/LDR -PAC NC8401 09-1273 C
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2026507 1 1 EA LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR -PAC NC8401 09-1274 B
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2026507 1 1 EA LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR -PAC NC8401 09-1274 B
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F F 2026590 2 2 EA KIT FSTN LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR
NC8401-14G
FSTN KIT
F F 2026592 1 1 EA KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FACE W/LDR
NC8401-14G
FSTN KIT
F F 2026594 1 1 EA KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FACE W/O LDR
NC8401-14
FSTN KIT
F E 2026624 1 1 EA LDR&GR LADDER -PAC NC8401-2 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2029001 1 1 EA COLD WATER BASIN DRAIN S300 4" DIA 96-25066 A
F F 2029265 1 1 EA KIT FSTN EXTRA DRAIN S300 NC8401-14 FSTN KIT
F E 2030936 1 1 EA ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM -PAC NC8401G 09-1283 B
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F F 2030976 1 1 EA KIT FSTN ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM
NC8401-14S
FSTN KIT
F F 2032096 1 1 EA KIT FSTN HC VALVE 6" & 8" S304 BASIN PAC FSTN KIT
F E 2034313 1 1 EA FIELD INSTAL ALUM LDR EXT NC8400 2' THRU 5 09-1281 B
F F 2034315 1 1 EA KIT FSTN LADDER EXTENSION 2FT-11FT FIELD
INSTALL
FSTN KIT
F E 2096276 1 1 EA GASKET 06DIA ANSI 125 09-1260 A
SEE TWR
MANUAL
Page 141 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Cont inue f rom page 1 ...
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 2
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E 2096277 1 1 EA GASKET 08DIA ANSI 125 09-1260 A
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F F 122986X 1 1 EA KIT CUSTOMER LITERATURE PACKAGE
F E B95947 1 1 EA HC VALVE INSTAL 06DIA 09-1256 B
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E C59340 1 1 EA FLOAT VALVE COPPER FLOAT NC12-62&A COPR 09-1265
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC NC8400 MAINTENANCE OPTION MANUAL 09-1271
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC NC8400 FIELD INSTALL MANUAL 09-1250
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC LADDER DETAILS 09-118 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC SWEEPER SYSTEM DETAILS 8401 THRU 8414 09-1173
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC STANDARD BOTTOM OUTLET PIPING DETAILS 84 09-113 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC DM-MDT-C DOWNTIME MANUAL 92-1308 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC Marley M-5 Vibrat ion Swit ch User Manual 2010-1241
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC NC 8400 User Manual 09-1150 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC H.C. VALVE DIMENSIONAL DATA 89-1237 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC COLLECTION BASIN WATER LEVEL DETAILS 840 09-19 B
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC RECOMMENDED CONDUIT INSTALLATION 09-167
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC TOP INLET PIPE SUPPORT DETAILS 09-15 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC SUPPORT BEARING DETAILS 8401 THRU 8414 T 09-14 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC HOISTING DETAILS 8401 THRU 8414 TOWERS 09-136
F E PITCH22 1 1 EA FAN PITCH 22 DEGREES FAN PITCH
Page 142 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 3
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9801
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2022859 Drawing 09-1252,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion FAN GUARD-GALV-PAC NC8401 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F D32 044073X 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG FAN GUARD 72DIA 65-214 L
Page 143 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 4
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9805
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion OPTION
Sub-Mat l No. B95947 Drawing 09-1256,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion HC VALVE INSTAL 06DIA PAC Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC PL-HC VALVE 04 06 08 92-1371
F E N39 778738X 2 2 EA GASKET 1/4X6IDX8 3/4OD 69-2136 H
F F N40 891960X 2 2 EA VALVE HCF 06-11 87-3255 G
F F N45 221481X 2 2 EA GASKET FULL FACE 1/4THK 6DIA 6DIA 71-2532 Q
Page 144 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 5
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9802
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2026486 Drawing 09-1258,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion STANDPIPE DRAIN & OVERFLOW NC8401-02 S300 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E Q47 2026453 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY S300 OVERFLOW 09-2586
F F Q48 2026466 1 1 EA PIPE PVC 4DIAX1' -4 3/8 SCH 80 NPTOE
F F Z11 012450X 1 1 EA SEALER POLYURETHANE TEXT
Page 145 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 6
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 1005
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion OPTION
Sub-Mat l No. 2026305 Drawing 09-1260,09-1262,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion ANTI-VORTEX PLATE 3150 GPM MAX NC8401-14 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E Q20 2026186 1 1 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX751.7X931.8 09-2589
F E Q21 2026173 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX38.1X1182.5 09-2587
F E Q22 B61723 2 2 EA SCREEN SS NO.2MESHX.080X 9.70X24.88 95-2795 A
F E Q23 B61729 2 2 EA SCREEN SS NO.2MESHX.080X 10.86X37.85 95-21097 A
F F VM1 UKA7050-8055 1 8 EA BOLT S304 M8X25 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F W24 UKA7220-8515 2 16 EA M8 WASHER FORM C SSA2 (DIN 9021)
F F X47 UKA7210-8585 1 8 EA M8 HEX NUT NYLOC DIN985-A2-70
Page 146 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 7
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9813
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2096276 Drawing 09-1260,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion GASKET 06DIA ANSI 125 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F Q14 221481X 1 1 EA GASKET FULL FACE 1/4THK 6DIA 6DIA 71-2532 Q
F F Z11 012450X 1 1 EA SEALER POLYURETHANE TEXT
Page 147 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 8
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9812
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2096277 Drawing 09-1260,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion GASKET 08DIA ANSI 125 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F Q14 140434X 1 1 EA GASKET FULL FACE 1/4THK 8DIA 8DIA 71-2532 Q
F F Z11 012450X 1 1 EA SEALER POLYURETHANE TEXT
Page 148 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 9
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9804
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. C59340 Drawing 09-1265,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion FLOAT VALVE COPPER FLOAT NC12-62&A COPR Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F Q29 2088585 1 1 EA VALVE 16" x 3/8" Dia S304 STEM PAC 09-22916
F F Q31 204867X 1 1 EA VALVE 7" DIA COPPER FLOAT
Page 149 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 10
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9806
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2026490 Drawing 09-1273,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion LDR&GR CASE FACE W/LDR -PAC NC8401 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E L35 2028161 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
567MM LABEL
09-2669 B
F E L37 2028163 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
2438MM LABE
2010-
24700
F E L38 2028215 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 4MMX101.6X292.9 NC8400 LADDER
B
09-2712
F E L39 2028216 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 4MMX171.4X286.6 NC8400 LADDER
B
09-2983 A
F E L40 2028217 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 4MMX190.5X959.8 NC8400 LADDER
B
09-2697
F E L43 2028218 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX63.5X330.2 NC8400 LADDER S09-21010
Page 150 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 11
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9808
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2026507 Drawing 09-1274,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR -PAC NC8401 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E L32 2028166 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
1272MM LABE
09-2666 B
F E L33 2028167 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
610MM LABEL
09-2667 B
Page 151 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 12
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9809
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2026507 Drawing 09-1274,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR -PAC NC8401 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E L32 2028166 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
1272MM LABE
09-2666 B
F E L33 2028167 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
610MM LABEL
09-2667 B
Page 152 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 13
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9807
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2026467 Drawing 09-1276,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion LDR&GR CASE FACE W/O LDR -PAC NC8401 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E L35 2028161 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
567MM LABEL
09-2669 B
F E L36 2028164 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8400 A =
567MM LABEL
09-2670 B
F E L37 2028163 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
2438MM LABE
2010-
24700
Page 153 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 14
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9814
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion OPTION
Sub-Mat l No. 2034313 Drawing 09-1281
Descript ion FIELD INSTAL ALUM LDR EXT NC8400 2' THRU 5' Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E L98 2034308 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX63.5X323.8 NC8400G LADDER 09-22251
F F L99 153791X 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM LADDER EXT. EXTENSION 4' -11 84-3775 C
Page 154 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 15
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9811
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2030936 Drawing 09-1283,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM -PAC NC8401G Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E E30 2023207 4 4 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX91.6X171.5 GUARDRAIL POST 09-2160
F E L01 2030830 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX159.1X503.1 ADPF FORK BM
EN
09-21742
F E L02 2030788 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX88.9X103.3 ADPF FORK BM EN09-21025
F E L03 2030835 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX598.0X2239.5 ADPF FORK
BEAM
09-21743 A
F E L06 2030790 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX286.1X1359.3 ADPF END
BEAM N
09-21027
F E L08 2030849 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX189.4X288.1 ADPF POST
BRACE
09-21749
F E L11 2030850 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX371.9X2195.4 ADPF FRONT
PLAT
09-21747
F E L17 2030851 3 3 EA SHEET HMG 1.5MMX2018.8X683.2 ADPF PANEL
NC84
09-21748 A
F E L44 2030812 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
1999MM LAB
09-21739 B
F E L45 2030806 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8403-14 A =
565MM LABE
09-21740 C
F E L46 2030808 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8403-14 A =
1199MM LAB
09-21740 C
F E L53 2030795 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX95.4X111.1 NC8400 ADPF CLI 09-21737
F E L54 2030798 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX95.4X111.1 NC8400 ADPF CLI 09-21738
Page 155 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 16
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9803
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2029001 Drawing 96-25066
Descript ion COLD WATER BASIN DRAIN S300 4" DIA Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E Q18 2026453 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY S300 OVERFLOW 09-2586
F F Q91 562165X 1 1 EA FITTING S300 PIPE PLUG 4DIA
F F Z11 012450X 2 2 EA SEALER POLYURETHANE TEXT
Page 156 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 17
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 5502
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. PITCH22 Drawing FAN PITCH
Descript ion FAN PITCH 22 DEGREES Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F No BOM Required 1 1 PC FAN PITCH 22 DEGREES
Page 157 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 18
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1
Sub-Mat l No. 2019449 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN FIELD INSTALL NC8401-3-SCB S304 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F VM1 UKA7050-8055 1 10 EA BOLT S304 M8X25 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F W24 UKA7220-8515 12 40 EA M8 WASHER FORM C SSA2 (DIN 9021)
F F W37 B64302 10 10 EA WASHER S300 SEALING 5/16 80-1305 K
F F X47 UKA7210-8585 1 20 EA M8 HEX NUT NYLOC DIN985-A2-70
Page 158 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 19
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1
Sub-Mat l No. 2026590 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F L28 E14954 10 10 EA PLASTIC PIPE PLUG NIAGARA SQ-12-1 BLACK O
F F V22 UKA7051-213G 2 14 EA BOLT GALV M12X65 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F V25 UKA7051-220G 2 6 EA BOLT GALV M12X100 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F W03 UKA7221-253G 4 20 EA M12 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV
F F W23 UKA7221-251G 6 40 EA M12 WASHER FORM C GALV (DIN 9021)
F F X03 UKA7211-251G 2 20 EA M12 HEX FULL NUT GALV DIN934-G5
Page 159 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 20
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1
Sub-Mat l No. 2026592 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FACE W/LDR NC8401-14G Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F L28 E14954 7 7 EA PLASTIC PIPE PLUG NIAGARA SQ-12-1 BLACK O
F F V07 UKA7051-005G 1 13 EA BOLT GALV M10X25 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F V10 UKA7051-008G 1 22 EA BOLT GALV M10X40 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F V22 UKA7051-213G 1 11 EA BOLT GALV M12X65 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F V25 UKA7051-220G 1 7 EA BOLT GALV M12X100 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F W02 UKA7221-053G 2 35 EA M10 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV
F F W03 UKA7221-253G 2 18 EA M12 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV
F F W22 UKA7221-051G 3 70 EA M10 WASHER FORM C GALV (DIN 9021)
F F W23 UKA7221-251G 3 38 EA M12 WASHER FORM C GALV (DIN 9021)
F F X02 UKA7211-051G 1 35 EA M10 HEX FULL NUT GALV DIN934-G5
F F X03 UKA7211-251G 1 20 EA M12 HEX FULL NUT GALV DIN934-G5
Page 160 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 21
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1
Sub-Mat l No. 2026594 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FACE W/O LDR NC8401-14 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F L28 E14954 9 9 EA PLASTIC PIPE PLUG NIAGARA SQ-12-1 BLACK O
F F V22 UKA7051-213G 1 7 EA BOLT GALV M12X65 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F V25 UKA7051-220G 1 11 EA BOLT GALV M12X100 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F W03 UKA7221-253G 2 18 EA M12 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV
F F W23 UKA7221-251G 3 38 EA M12 WASHER FORM C GALV (DIN 9021)
F F X03 UKA7211-251G 1 20 EA M12 HEX FULL NUT GALV DIN934-G5
Page 161 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 22
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1
Sub-Mat l No. 2029265 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN EXTRA DRAIN S300 NC8401-14 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F VM1 UKA7050-8055 1 9 EA BOLT S304 M8X25 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F W24 UKA7220-8515 2 18 EA M8 WASHER FORM C SSA2 (DIN 9021)
F F W37 B64302 9 9 EA WASHER S300 SEALING 5/16 80-1305 K
F F X47 UKA7210-8585 1 9 EA M8 HEX NUT NYLOC DIN985-A2-70
Page 162 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 23
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1
Sub-Mat l No. 2030976 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM NC8401-14S Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F L28 E14954 7 7 EA PLASTIC PIPE PLUG NIAGARA SQ-12-1 BLACK O
F F T07 506204X 25 25 EA SCREW SS TAP 3/8X1 HWH TYPE AB S43
F F V18 UKA7051-2055 1 64 EA BOLT S304 M12X25 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F V22 UKA7051-2135 1 9 EA BOLT S304 M12X65 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F V25 UKA7051-220G 1 5 EA BOLT GALV M12X100 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F W03 UKA7221-253G 1 5 EA M12 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV
F F W23 UKA7221-2515 3 153 EA M12 WASHER FORM C SSA2 (DIN 9021)
F F W23 UKA7221-251G 1 5 EA M12 WASHER FORM C GALV (DIN 9021)
F F W33 156190X 10 10 EA WASHER S300 SEALING 1/2 80-1305 K
F F X03 UKA7211-2585 1 80 EA M12 HEX NUT NYLOC DIN985-A2-70
Page 163 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 24
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1
Sub-Mat l No. 2032096 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN HC VALVE 6" & 8" S304 BASIN PAC Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F VN3 UKA7052-0095 18 18 EA BOLT S304 M20X45 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F W35 576439X 20 20 EA WASHER S300 SEALING 3/4 80-1305 K
F F X04 UKA7212-0515 20 20 EA M20 HEX FULL NUT DIN934-A2-70
Page 164 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 25
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2034315 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN LADDER EXTENSION 2FT-11FT FIELD Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F V10 UKA7051-008G 1 9 EA BOLT GALV M10X40 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F W02 UKA7221-053G 1 9 EA M10 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV
F F W22 UKA7221-051G 2 19 EA M10 WASHER FORM C GALV (DIN 9021)
F F X02 UKA7211-051G 1 10 EA M10 HEX FULL NUT GALV DIN934-G5
Page 165 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 26
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264720 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9810
Serial Number NC-10050616-A1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2026624 Drawing SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion LDR&GR LADDER -PAC NC8401-2 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F L41 2019078 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM LADDER 5' -6 3/16" 08-25893
F F L42 2019082 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM LADDER 7' -3 1/2" 08-25892 B
Page 166 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 27
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1
Sub-Mat l No.
Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF TOWER B, CELL 1 COOLING Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F 2019449 1 1 EA KIT FSTN FIELD INSTALL NC8401-3-SCB S3 FSTN KIT
F E 2022859 1 1 EA FAN GUARD-GALV-PAC NC8401 09-1252 B
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2026305 1 1 EA ANTI-VORTEX PLATE 3150 GPM MAX NC 09-1260 A
09-1262
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2026467 1 1 EA LDR&GR CASE FACE W/O LDR -PAC NC8401 09-1276 C
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2026486 1 1 EA STANDPIPE DRAIN & OVERFLOW NC8401-02 S30009-1258 B
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2026490 1 1 EA LDR&GR CASE FACE W/LDR -PAC NC8401 09-1273 C
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2026507 1 1 EA LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR -PAC NC8401 09-1274 B
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2026507 1 1 EA LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR -PAC NC8401 09-1274 B
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F F 2026590 2 2 EA KIT FSTN LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR
NC8401-14G
FSTN KIT
F F 2026592 1 1 EA KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FACE W/LDR
NC8401-14G
FSTN KIT
F F 2026594 1 1 EA KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FACE W/O LDR
NC8401-14
FSTN KIT
F E 2026624 1 1 EA LDR&GR LADDER -PAC NC8401-2 SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E 2029001 1 1 EA COLD WATER BASIN DRAIN S300 4" DIA 96-25066 A
F F 2029265 1 1 EA KIT FSTN EXTRA DRAIN S300 NC8401-14 FSTN KIT
F E 2030936 1 1 EA ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM -PAC NC8401G 09-1283 B
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F F 2030976 1 1 EA KIT FSTN ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM
NC8401-14S
FSTN KIT
F F 2032096 1 1 EA KIT FSTN HC VALVE 6" & 8" S304 BASIN PAC FSTN KIT
F E 2034313 1 1 EA FIELD INSTAL ALUM LDR EXT NC8400 2' THRU 5 09-1281 B
F F 2034315 1 1 EA KIT FSTN LADDER EXTENSION 2FT-11FT FIELD
INSTALL
FSTN KIT
F E 2096276 1 1 EA GASKET 06DIA ANSI 125 09-1260 A
SEE TWR
MANUAL
Page 167 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Cont inue f rom page 27 ...
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 28
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E 2096277 1 1 EA GASKET 08DIA ANSI 125 09-1260 A
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E B95947 1 1 EA HC VALVE INSTAL 06DIA 09-1256 B
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F E C59340 1 1 EA FLOAT VALVE COPPER FLOAT NC12-62&A COPR 09-1265
SEE TWR
MANUAL
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC STANDARD BOTTOM OUTLET PIPING DETAILS 84 09-113 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC SWEEPER SYSTEM DETAILS 8401 THRU 8414 09-1173
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC LADDER DETAILS 09-118 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC NC8400 FIELD INSTALL MANUAL 09-1250
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC NC8400 MAINTENANCE OPTION MANUAL 09-1271
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC HOISTING DETAILS 8401 THRU 8414 TOWERS 09-136
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC DM-MDT-C DOWNTIME MANUAL 92-1308 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC Marley M-5 Vibrat ion Swit ch User Manual 2010-1241
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC NC 8400 User Manual 09-1150 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC H.C. VALVE DIMENSIONAL DATA 89-1237 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC COLLECTION BASIN WATER LEVEL DETAILS 840 09-19 B
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC RECOMMENDED CONDUIT INSTALLATION 09-167
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC TOP INLET PIPE SUPPORT DETAILS 09-15 A
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC SUPPORT BEARING DETAILS 8401 THRU 8414 T 09-14 A
F E PITCH22 1 1 EA FAN PITCH 22 DEGREES FAN PITCH
Page 168 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 29
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9801
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2022859 Drawing 09-1252,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion FAN GUARD-GALV-PAC NC8401 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F D32 044073X 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG FAN GUARD 72DIA 65-214 L
Page 169 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 30
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9805
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion OPTION
Sub-Mat l No. B95947 Drawing 09-1256,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion HC VALVE INSTAL 06DIA PAC Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F DMS DOCUMENT 1 1 PC PL-HC VALVE 04 06 08 92-1371
F E N39 778738X 2 2 EA GASKET 1/4X6IDX8 3/4OD 69-2136 H
F F N40 891960X 2 2 EA VALVE HCF 06-11 87-3255 G
F F N45 221481X 2 2 EA GASKET FULL FACE 1/4THK 6DIA 6DIA 71-2532 Q
Page 170 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 31
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9802
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2026486 Drawing 09-1258,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion STANDPIPE DRAIN & OVERFLOW NC8401-02 S300 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E Q47 2026453 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY S300 OVERFLOW 09-2586
F F Q48 2026466 1 1 EA PIPE PVC 4DIAX1' -4 3/8 SCH 80 NPTOE
F F Z11 012450X 1 1 EA SEALER POLYURETHANE TEXT
Page 171 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 32
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 1005
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion OPTION
Sub-Mat l No. 2026305 Drawing 09-1260,09-1262,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion ANTI-VORTEX PLATE 3150 GPM MAX NC8401-14 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E Q20 2026186 1 1 EA SHEET S300 1.5MMX751.7X931.8 09-2589
F E Q21 2026173 2 2 EA SHEET S300 3MMX38.1X1182.5 09-2587
F E Q22 B61723 2 2 EA SCREEN SS NO.2MESHX.080X 9.70X24.88 95-2795 A
F E Q23 B61729 2 2 EA SCREEN SS NO.2MESHX.080X 10.86X37.85 95-21097 A
F F VM1 UKA7050-8055 1 8 EA BOLT S304 M8X25 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F W24 UKA7220-8515 2 16 EA M8 WASHER FORM C SSA2 (DIN 9021)
F F X47 UKA7210-8585 1 8 EA M8 HEX NUT NYLOC DIN985-A2-70
Page 172 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 33
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9813
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2096276 Drawing 09-1260,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion GASKET 06DIA ANSI 125 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F Q14 221481X 1 1 EA GASKET FULL FACE 1/4THK 6DIA 6DIA 71-2532 Q
F F Z11 012450X 1 1 EA SEALER POLYURETHANE TEXT
Page 173 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 34
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9812
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2096277 Drawing 09-1260,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion GASKET 08DIA ANSI 125 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F Q14 140434X 1 1 EA GASKET FULL FACE 1/4THK 8DIA 8DIA 71-2532 Q
F F Z11 012450X 1 1 EA SEALER POLYURETHANE TEXT
Page 174 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 35
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9804
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. C59340 Drawing 09-1265,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion FLOAT VALVE COPPER FLOAT NC12-62&A COPR Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F Q29 2088585 1 1 EA VALVE 16" x 3/8" Dia S304 STEM PAC 09-22916
F F Q31 204867X 1 1 EA VALVE 7" DIA COPPER FLOAT
Page 175 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 36
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9806
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2026490 Drawing 09-1273,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion LDR&GR CASE FACE W/LDR -PAC NC8401 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E L35 2028161 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
567MM LABEL
09-2669 B
F E L37 2028163 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
2438MM LABE
2010-
24700
F E L38 2028215 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 4MMX101.6X292.9 NC8400 LADDER
B
09-2712
F E L39 2028216 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 4MMX171.4X286.6 NC8400 LADDER
B
09-2983 A
F E L40 2028217 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 4MMX190.5X959.8 NC8400 LADDER
B
09-2697
F E L43 2028218 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX63.5X330.2 NC8400 LADDER S09-21010
Page 176 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 37
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9808
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2026507 Drawing 09-1274,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR -PAC NC8401 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E L32 2028166 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
1272MM LABE
09-2666 B
F E L33 2028167 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
610MM LABEL
09-2667 B
Page 177 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 38
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9809
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2026507 Drawing 09-1274,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR -PAC NC8401 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E L32 2028166 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
1272MM LABE
09-2666 B
F E L33 2028167 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
610MM LABEL
09-2667 B
Page 178 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 39
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9807
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2026467 Drawing 09-1276,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion LDR&GR CASE FACE W/O LDR -PAC NC8401 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E L35 2028161 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
567MM LABEL
09-2669 B
F E L36 2028164 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8400 A =
567MM LABEL
09-2670 B
F E L37 2028163 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
2438MM LABE
2010-
24700
Page 179 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 40
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9814
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion OPTION
Sub-Mat l No. 2034313 Drawing 09-1281
Descript ion FIELD INSTAL ALUM LDR EXT NC8400 2' THRU 5' Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E L98 2034308 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX63.5X323.8 NC8400G LADDER 09-22251
F F L99 153791X 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM LADDER EXT. EXTENSION 4' -11 84-3775 C
Page 180 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 41
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9811
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2030936 Drawing 09-1283,SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM -PAC NC8401G Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E E30 2023207 4 4 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX91.6X171.5 GUARDRAIL POST 09-2160
F E L01 2030830 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX159.1X503.1 ADPF FORK BM
EN
09-21742
F E L02 2030788 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX88.9X103.3 ADPF FORK BM EN09-21025
F E L03 2030835 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX598.0X2239.5 ADPF FORK
BEAM
09-21743 A
F E L06 2030790 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX286.1X1359.3 ADPF END
BEAM N
09-21027
F E L08 2030849 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX189.4X288.1 ADPF POST
BRACE
09-21749
F E L11 2030850 1 1 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX371.9X2195.4 ADPF FRONT
PLAT
09-21747
F E L17 2030851 3 3 EA SHEET HMG 1.5MMX2018.8X683.2 ADPF PANEL
NC84
09-21748 A
F E L44 2030812 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8401 A =
1999MM LAB
09-21739 B
F E L45 2030806 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8403-14 A =
565MM LABE
09-21740 C
F E L46 2030808 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY HDG GUARDRAIL NC8403-14 A =
1199MM LAB
09-21740 C
F E L53 2030795 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX95.4X111.1 NC8400 ADPF CLI 09-21737
F E L54 2030798 2 2 EA SHEET HMG 3MMX95.4X111.1 NC8400 ADPF CLI 09-21738
Page 181 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 42
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9803
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2029001 Drawing 96-25066
Descript ion COLD WATER BASIN DRAIN S300 4" DIA Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F E Q18 2026453 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY S300 OVERFLOW 09-2586
F F Q91 562165X 1 1 EA FITTING S300 PIPE PLUG 4DIA
F F Z11 012450X 2 2 EA SEALER POLYURETHANE TEXT
Page 182 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 43
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 5502
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. PITCH22 Drawing FAN PITCH
Descript ion FAN PITCH 22 DEGREES Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F No BOM Required 1 1 PC FAN PITCH 22 DEGREES
Page 183 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 44
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1
Sub-Mat l No. 2019449 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN FIELD INSTALL NC8401-3-SCB S304 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F VM1 UKA7050-8055 1 10 EA BOLT S304 M8X25 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F W24 UKA7220-8515 12 40 EA M8 WASHER FORM C SSA2 (DIN 9021)
F F W37 B64302 10 10 EA WASHER S300 SEALING 5/16 80-1305 K
F F X47 UKA7210-8585 1 20 EA M8 HEX NUT NYLOC DIN985-A2-70
Page 184 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 45
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1
Sub-Mat l No. 2026590 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN LDR&GR LVR SGL FACE W/O LDR Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F L28 E14954 10 10 EA PLASTIC PIPE PLUG NIAGARA SQ-12-1 BLACK O
F F V22 UKA7051-213G 2 14 EA BOLT GALV M12X65 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F V25 UKA7051-220G 2 6 EA BOLT GALV M12X100 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F W03 UKA7221-253G 4 20 EA M12 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV
F F W23 UKA7221-251G 6 40 EA M12 WASHER FORM C GALV (DIN 9021)
F F X03 UKA7211-251G 2 20 EA M12 HEX FULL NUT GALV DIN934-G5
Page 185 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 46
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1
Sub-Mat l No. 2026592 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FACE W/LDR NC8401-14G Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F L28 E14954 7 7 EA PLASTIC PIPE PLUG NIAGARA SQ-12-1 BLACK O
F F V07 UKA7051-005G 1 13 EA BOLT GALV M10X25 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F V10 UKA7051-008G 1 22 EA BOLT GALV M10X40 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F V22 UKA7051-213G 1 11 EA BOLT GALV M12X65 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F V25 UKA7051-220G 1 7 EA BOLT GALV M12X100 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F W02 UKA7221-053G 2 35 EA M10 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV
F F W03 UKA7221-253G 2 18 EA M12 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV
F F W22 UKA7221-051G 3 70 EA M10 WASHER FORM C GALV (DIN 9021)
F F W23 UKA7221-251G 3 38 EA M12 WASHER FORM C GALV (DIN 9021)
F F X02 UKA7211-051G 1 35 EA M10 HEX FULL NUT GALV DIN934-G5
F F X03 UKA7211-251G 1 20 EA M12 HEX FULL NUT GALV DIN934-G5
Page 186 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 47
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1
Sub-Mat l No. 2026594 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN LDR&GR CASE FACE W/O LDR NC8401-14 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F L28 E14954 9 9 EA PLASTIC PIPE PLUG NIAGARA SQ-12-1 BLACK O
F F V22 UKA7051-213G 1 7 EA BOLT GALV M12X65 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F V25 UKA7051-220G 1 11 EA BOLT GALV M12X100 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F W03 UKA7221-253G 2 18 EA M12 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV
F F W23 UKA7221-251G 3 38 EA M12 WASHER FORM C GALV (DIN 9021)
F F X03 UKA7211-251G 1 20 EA M12 HEX FULL NUT GALV DIN934-G5
Page 187 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 48
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1
Sub-Mat l No. 2029265 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN EXTRA DRAIN S300 NC8401-14 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F VM1 UKA7050-8055 1 9 EA BOLT S304 M8X25 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F W24 UKA7220-8515 2 18 EA M8 WASHER FORM C SSA2 (DIN 9021)
F F W37 B64302 9 9 EA WASHER S300 SEALING 5/16 80-1305 K
F F X47 UKA7210-8585 1 9 EA M8 HEX NUT NYLOC DIN985-A2-70
Page 188 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 49
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1
Sub-Mat l No. 2030976 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN ACCESS DOOR PLATFORM NC8401-14S Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F L28 E14954 7 7 EA PLASTIC PIPE PLUG NIAGARA SQ-12-1 BLACK O
F F T07 506204X 25 25 EA SCREW SS TAP 3/8X1 HWH TYPE AB S43
F F V18 UKA7051-2055 1 64 EA BOLT S304 M12X25 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F V22 UKA7051-2135 1 9 EA BOLT S304 M12X65 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F V25 UKA7051-220G 1 5 EA BOLT GALV M12X100 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F W03 UKA7221-253G 1 5 EA M12 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV
F F W23 UKA7221-2515 3 153 EA M12 WASHER FORM C SSA2 (DIN 9021)
F F W23 UKA7221-251G 1 5 EA M12 WASHER FORM C GALV (DIN 9021)
F F W33 156190X 10 10 EA WASHER S300 SEALING 1/2 80-1305 K
F F X03 UKA7211-2585 1 80 EA M12 HEX NUT NYLOC DIN985-A2-70
Page 189 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 50
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1
Sub-Mat l No. 2032096 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN HC VALVE 6" & 8" S304 BASIN PAC Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F VN3 UKA7052-0095 18 18 EA BOLT S304 M20X45 ISO4014 DIN931-A2-70
F F W35 576439X 20 20 EA WASHER S300 SEALING 3/4 80-1305 K
F F X04 UKA7212-0515 20 20 EA M20 HEX FULL NUT DIN934-A2-70
Page 190 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 51
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9800
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2034315 Drawing FSTN KIT
Descript ion KIT FSTN LADDER EXTENSION 2FT-11FT FIELD Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F V10 UKA7051-008G 1 9 EA BOLT GALV M10X40 ISO4014 DIN931-G4.6
F F W02 UKA7221-053G 1 9 EA M10 SPRING WASHER TYPE B GALV
F F W22 UKA7221-051G 2 19 EA M10 WASHER FORM C GALV (DIN 9021)
F F X02 UKA7211-051G 1 10 EA M10 HEX FULL NUT GALV DIN934-G5
Page 191 of 541
FIELD SPX Cooling Technologies
Literature Package Field BOM
Request ed By BC_BATCH_NA
02/21/2012 11:12:24
Page 52
Order No. 10050616 Mat l No. 2264721 Descript ion MODEL NC8401MAN1SGF Sequence 9810
Serial Number NC-10050616-B1 Product Allocat ion INSTAL
Sub-Mat l No. 2026624 Drawing SEE TWR MANUAL
Descript ion LDR&GR LADDER -PAC NC8401-2 Lit Pac Indicat or F
Find # Item Number Qty Per Total Qty UM Description Drawing / Rev
F F L41 2019078 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM LADDER 5' -6 3/16" 08-25893
F F L42 2019082 1 1 EA ASSEMBLY ALUM LADDER 7' -3 1/2" 08-25892 B
Page 192 of 541
9



OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA


PROJ ECT: J ohn M. Roll US - Yuma Courthouse



LOCATION: Yuma, AZ



CONTRACTOR: Tempe Mechanical



SUBMITTED BY: Climatec, Inc.
2851 W. Kathleen Rd.
Phoenix, AZ. 85053
602-944-3330


MANUFACTURER: Marley



PRODUCT: Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
Certification of Limited Warranty

MODEL: NC8401MAN1SGF


SERIAL #: NC-10050616-A1, NC-10050616-B1


TAGS: CT 1~2


DATE: 7/12/12
Page 193 of 541
SPX Cooling Technologies
Certication of Limited Warranty
WARRANTY 00-160E
SPX Cooling Technologies, Inc. (SPX Cooling) hereby warrants the
stainless steel Marley NC Class cooling tower as follows:
1. This NC stainless steel tower will be free from all defects in material
and workmanship for a period of (5) ve years from date of shipment
by SPX Cooling to the original installation. This warranty is limited to
the mechanical equipment, which consists of fan(s), motor(s), gear-
box(es), driveshaft(s), coupling(s) sheaves and mechanical equipment
support(s) [but excluding the bearing assemblies and V-belts (if ap-
plicable) which are warranted for 18 months], ll (including integrally
molded louvers and drift eliminators) and ll supports; upper and lower
basins and their associated components; structural columns; and all
assembly hardware. To obtain the expected life of the Geareducer
and warranty coverage, scheduled maintenance, in accordance with
the Marley User Manuals, is required to check oil level, check for leaks
at oil plugs, lube line connections, seals and correct as necessary
during that time. All other nonstandard purchased equipment, such as
electrical equipment, consisting of motor controls, Marley VFD, basin
heaters, low water makeup valves, etc. are excluded from this ve year
warranty and will carry the standard warranty provided by its manu-
facturer or in accordance with an SPX Cooling warranty certicate for
that product. The majority of all nonstandard purchased equipment is
shipped either loose or in plastic containers in the basin of the tower.
These components must be stored in a dry and secured environment
until actual installation. Reported issues stemming from moisture in the
components or loss of components will not be warranted. To obtain
the expected life of the motor and warranty coverage, motors must be
installed and operated following the Marley Electric Motor User Manual
92-1475.
2. The aforementioned components will be free from failure due to corro-
sion for a period of ve years from the date shipment by SPX Cooling
to the original installation.
3. SPX Cooling further warrants that the NC stainless steel tower meets
the performance standards set forth in CTI Standard STD-201 Cer-
tication Standard for Water Cooling Towers. Performance altering
operations such as reduced horsepower or fan speed changes voids
CTI Certication.
The obligation under this warranty is limited to the repair or the replace-
ment of defective materials, at SPX Coolings option, F.O.B. original shipping
point or EXWORKS plant. Warranty on repaired or replaced equipment will
be for the time remaining under the terms of the original warranty. This war-
ranty is non transferable.
This warranty does not obligate SPX Cooling to bear the cost of labor,
transportation charges, or other costs incurred in connection with the repair
or replacement of defective parts; nor does this warranty apply to normal
wear and tear nor to damage resulting from operations not conforming with
the NCs operation and maintenance instructions, accident, alteration, misuse
or an abnormally corrosive or abrasive use environment.
SPX Coolings total liability for damages related to the perfor-
mance of or failure to perform shall be limited to the amount of the
contract price and in no event shall either party hereto be respon-
sible or held liable to the other for any special, punitive, indirect,
incidental, or consequential damages.
The above warranties are in lieu of all other warranties expressed
or implied, and all implied warranties of merchantability and tness
for a particular purpose are hereby disclaimed and excluded from
this agreement.
SPX Cooling Technologies, Inc.
7401 W 129 Street | Overland Park, KS 66213
913 664 7400 | spxcooling.com
Page 194 of 541
9




OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA



PROJ ECT: J ohn M. Roll US - Yuma Courthouse



LOCATION: Yuma, AZ



CONTRACTOR: Tempe Mechanical



SUBMITTED BY: Climatec, Inc.
2851 W. Kathleen Rd.
Phoenix, AZ. 85053
602-944-3330


MANUFACTURER: Yaskawa



PRODUCT: Narrow Variable Frequency Drive/Bypass
E7NVB011

TAGS: CT 1~2



DATE: 7/12/12
Page 195 of 541
E7N Drive/Bypass
Technical Manual
Model: E7N Document Number: TM.E7N.01
Page 196 of 541
Quick Reference for Bypass Parameters
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
User
Setting
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
User
Setting
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
User
Setting
Parameter
Number
Factory
Setting
User
Setting
A1-00 0 b5-04 100 E1-05 208V, 230V or
460V
L1-05 0.2
A1-01 2 b5-06 100
E1-06 60
L2-01 2
A1-03 0 b5-07 0
E1-07 3
L2-02
A1-04 0 b5-08 0
E1-08 18
L2-03
A1-05 0 b5-09 0
E1-09 1.5
L2-04
A2-01 b5-10 1
E1-10 10.8
L2-05
A2-02 b5-11 0
E1-11 0
L3-01 1
A2-03 b5-12 0
E1-12 0
L3-02 120
A2-04 b5-13 0
E1-13 0
L3-04 1
A2-05 b5-14 1
E2-01 kVA Dep.
L3-05 1
A2-06 b5-15 0
E2-03 kVA Dep.
L3-06 120
A2-07 b5-16 0
E2-05 kVA Dep.
L4-01 0
A2-08 b5-17 0
F6-01 3
L4-02 2
A2-09 b5-18 0
F6-02 0
L4-05 0
A2-10 b5-19 0
F6-03 1
L4-06 80
A2-11 b5-20 1
F6-05 0
L5-01 10
A2-12 b5-21 1
H1-01 70
L5-02 0
A2-13 b5-22 0
H1-02
L5-03 10
A2-14 b5-23 0
H1-03
See Table
5.1
L6-01 0
A2-15 b5-24 0 L6-02 15
A2-16 b5-25 0 L6-03 10
A2-17 b5-26 0
H1-04 4
L8-01 0
A2-18 b5-27 60
H1-05 6
L8-02
A2-19 b5-28 0
H2-01 0
L8-03 4
A2-20 b5-29 1
H2-02 3B
100
L8-06
A2-21 b5-30 0
H3-02
L8-09 1
A2-22 b8-01 0 L8-10 0
A2-23 b8-04 kVA Dep. L8-11 300
A2-24 b8-05 20 H3-03 0 L8-12 45
A2-25 b8-06 0 H3-08 See Table
5.1
See Table
5.1
See Table
5.1
See Table
5.1
See Table
5.1
L8-15 1
A2-26 C1-01 30 L8-18 1
A2-27 C1-02 30 L8-19 20
A2-28 C1-03 30 H3-09 n1-01 1
A2-29 C1-04 30 n1-02 1
A2-30 C1-09 10 n3-01 5
A2-31 C1-11 0
H3-10 100
n3-02 150
A2-32 C2-01 0.2
H3-11 0
0
n3-03 1
b1-01 See Table
5.1
C2-02 0.2
H3-12 0.3
n3-04 40
C4-01 1
H3-13
o1-01 6
C4-02 200 o1-02 1
b1-02 1 C6-02 kVA Dep. o1-03 0
b1-03 0 C6-03 kVA Dep.
H4-01 2
o1-05 3
b1-04 1 C6-04 kVA Dep.
H4-02 100
o1-06 0
b1-07 0 C6-05 0
H4-03 0
o1-07 2
b1-08 1 d1-01 10.0
H4-04 8
o1-08 3
b1-11 0 d1-02 6.0
H4-05 50
o2-01 0
b1-12 0 d1-03 0
H4-06 0
o2-02 0
b2-01 0.5 d1-04 0
H4-07 0
o2-03 1
b2-02 50 d1-17 6
H4-08 0
o2-04 kVA Dep.
b2-03 0 d2-01 100
H5-01 1F
o2-05 1
b2-04 0 d2-02 0
H5-02

o2-06 1
b2-09 0 d2-03 0
H5-03 0
o2-07 0
b3-01 2 d3-01 0
H5-04 3
o2-08 1
b3-02 120 d3-02 0
H5-05 1
o2-09 1
b3-03 2 d3-03 0
H5-06 5
o2-10 0
b3-05 0.2 d3-04 1
H5-07
o2-12 0
b3-14 1 d4-01 0
H5-08
o2-14 0
b4-01 0 d4-02 10 H5-09 10 o2-15 0
b4-02 0 E1-01 208V, 240V or
480V
L1-01 1 o3-01 0
b5-01 0 L1-02 8 o3-02 1
b5-02 2 E1-03 F L1-03 3 T1-02 kVA Dep.
b5-03 5 E1-04 60 L1-04 1 T1-04 kVA Dep.
kVA Dep.
kVA Dep.
kVA Dep.
kVA Dep.
kVA Dep.
Voltage Dep.
Page 197 of 541
i
Warnings and Cautions
This Section provides warnings and cautions pertinent to this product, that if not
heeded, may result in personal injury, fatality, or equipment damage. Yaskawa is
not responsible for consequences of ignoring these instructions.
YASKAWA manufactures component parts that can be used in a wide variety of industrial applications. The selection and
application of YASKAWA products remain the responsibility of the equipment designer or end user. YASKAWA accepts no
responsibility for the way its products are incorporated into the final system design. Under no circumstances should any
YASKAWA product be incorporated into any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control. Without exception, all
controls should be designed to detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances. All products designed to
incorporate a component part manufactured by YASKAWA must be supplied to the end user with appropriate warnings and
instructions as to that parts safe use and operation. Any warnings provided by YASKAWA must be promptly provided to the
end user. YASKAWA offers an express warranty only as to the quality of its products in conforming to standards and
specifications published in the YASKAWA manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED.
YASKAWA assumes no liability for any personal injury, property damage, losses, or claims arising from misapplication of its
products.
Read and understand this manual before installing, operating, or servicing this Drive and Bypass Unit. All warnings, cautions,
and instructions must be followed. All activity must be performed by qualified personnel. The Drive must be installed accord-
ing to this manual and local codes.
Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Do not remove covers or touch circuit boards while the power is
on.
Before servicing, disconnect all power to the equipment. The internal capacitor remains charged even after the power supply
is turned off. Status indicator LEDs and Digital Operator display will be extinguished when the DC bus voltage is below
50 VDC. To prevent electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicators are OFF and measure DC bus voltage level
to confirm safe level.
Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the unit. This equipment uses sensitive devices and may be damaged
by high voltage.
The Drive and Bypass unit is not suitable for circuits capable of delivering more than the specified RMS symmetrical
amperes. Install adequate branch short circuit protection per applicable codes. Refer to the specification. Failure to do so
may result in equipment damage and/or personal injury.
Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters, capacitors, or overvoltage protection devices to the
output of the Drive. These devices may generate peak currents that exceed Drive specifications.
To avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contactors or output switches placed between Drive and motor, auxiliary
contacts must be properly integrated into the control logic circuit.
YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user; doing so will void the warranty. This
product must not be modified.
Verify that the rated voltage of the Drive and Bypass unit matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying
power.
WARNING
WARNING
Page 198 of 541
ii
Some drawings in this manual may be shown with protective covers or shields removed, to describe details. These must be
replaced before operation.
Observe electrostatic discharge procedures when handling circuit cards to prevent ESD damage.
The equipment may start unexpectedly upon application of power. Clear all personnel from the Drive, motor, and machine
area before applying power. Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads before energizing the Drive and Bypass
unit.
Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible
for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure to heed the warnings in this manual.
Intended Use
Drives and Bypass Units are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery.
For use in the European Union, the installation in machinery and systems must conform to the following product standards of
the Low Voltage Directive:
EN 50178, 1997-10, Equipping of Power Systems with Electronic Devices
EN 60201-1, 1997-12 Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices
Part 1: General Requirements (IEC 60204-1:1997)/
EN 61010, 1997-11Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment
(IEC 950:1991 + A1:1992 + A2:1993 + A3:1995 + A4:1996, modified)

Other
The Drive and Bypass unit is suitable for use on a circuit capable of delivering not more than 100,000 RMS symmetrical
amperes, 240 Vac maximum (240 V Class) and 480 Vac maximum (480 V Class) only when option D (Fused Disconnect) is
specified.
The above statement remains valid when option "B" is specified, however the statement becomes invalid if option "G" is spec-
ified.
This manual is for reference only and subject to change without notice.
WARNING
Page 199 of 541
Introduction iii
Introduction
This Section describes the applicability of the Manual
4Product Description
The E7N Bypass unit provides a means of bypassing the Drive while allowing the motor to operate at full speed, directly from
the AC line. It incorporates an AC Drive and two contactor Bypass arrangement in a single UL listed enclosure. The two
electrically interlocked IEC rated contactors isolate the Drive from the load when operating in Bypass mode.
Control logic provides industry standard Hand/Off/Auto functions and safety circuit interlocks in both drive and Bypass
operating modes.
E7N Bypass components include: a fused 120 VAC control circuit transformer, an input disconnect, motor overload relay,
control keypad and indicating lights.

The E7 Drive, a component of the E7N Bypass package, is a Pulse Width Modulated Drive for 3-Phase AC induction motors.
This type of Drive is also known as an Adjustable Frequency Drive, Variable Frequency Drive, AC Drive, AFD, ASD, VFD,
and Inverter. In this manual, the E7 Drive will be referred to as the Drive.
The Drive is a variable torque AC drive, designed specifically for HVAC applications in building automation, including fans,
blowers and pumps. A new benchmark for size, cost, performance, benefits, and quality, the Drive includes numerous
built-in features such as network communications, H/O/A, PI, parameter storage and copy functions.
The Drive has embedded communications for the popular building automation protocols, Johnson Controls Metasys N2 and
Siemens APOGEE FLN, as well as Modbus. An optional LONWORKS, or BACnet interface card is also available.
The LED keypad/operator is equipped with Hand/Off/Auto functions and copy feature. User parameter settings can be recov-
ered at any time via User Initialization. Optional DriveWizard software allows upload/download, as well as graphing and
monitoring of drive parameters from a PC for ease of drive management.
Built-in PI control eliminates the need for closed loop output signals from a building automation system. It includes feedback
display, inverse, square root and differential control functions, and maintains setpoint for closed loop control of fans and
pumps for pressure, flow, or temperature regulation.
This manual is applicable to E7 Drives defined by model numbers CIMR-E7U_ _ _ _ contained within Bypass units defined
by model numbers E7N_ _ _ _.
This manual is subject to change as product improvements occur. The latest version of the manual can be obtained from the
Yaskawa website www.yaskawa.com . The date shown on the rear cover is changed when revisions are made.
Page 200 of 541
Introduction iv
This manual may describe trademarked equipment, which is the property of other companies. These trademarks are the
property of the registered owner companies and may include the following:
APOGEE
TM
FLN, trademark of Siemens Building Technologies, Inc.
Metasys

, trademark of Johnson Controls Inc.

Modbus

, trademark of Schneider Automation, Inc.

LONWORKS

, trademark of Echelon Corporation

BACnet
Other Documents and Manuals are available to support special use or installation of this product. These documents may be
provided with the product or upon request or downloaded from www.drives.com. Documents may include the following:
TM.E7.01.USER Manual included on CD ROM with product
TM.E7.02.Programming Manual included on CD ROM with product
TM.E7.11.Modbus Manual included on CD ROM with product
TM.AFD.20.LONWORKS Manual included on CD ROM with product
TM.E7.21.APOGEE

Manual included on CD ROM with product
TM. E7.22. Metasys Manual included on CD ROM with product
DriveWizard Software and ManualIncluded on CD ROM with product
Option Instructions Included on CD ROM with product
4Definitions of Acronyms and Abbreviations
AC Alternating Current LRA Locked Rotor Amperes
AIC Amps Interrupting Capacity MCP Motor Circuit Protector
CB Circuit Breaker MTBF Mean Time Between Failures
CIMR Control Induction Motor Rotation NC Normally Closed
CN Connector NEC National Electrical Code
CPT Control Power Transformer NEMA National Electrical Manufacturers Association
CPU Central Processing Unit NO Normally Open
DIP Dual Inline Package OLR Over Load Relay
FLA Full Load Amperes PCB Printed Circuit Board
FVFF Forced Ventilated, inlet Filter, outlet Filter PI Proportional plus Integral control action
HOA Hand/Off/Auto RTS Request To Send
HP Horsepower SFS Soft Start
IEC International Electrotechnical Commission TB Terminal Block
IGV Inlet Guide Vanes THD Total Harmonic Distortion
IPM Intelligent Power Module VA Volt Amperes
KVA Kilo Volt Amperes VAC Volts Alternating Current
LED Light Emitting Diode VAV Variable Air Volume
4Terminology in This Manual
Standard or Configured options - are available with standard lead times
Engineered or Custom options - are available only with extended lead times
Page 201 of 541
Introduction v
4Resources Available
See also www.yaskawa.com.
Table of Resources
Manuals, Installation Guides, and CDs
Document Number Description
TM.E7.01 E7 Drive User Manual
TM.E7.02 E7 Drive Programming Manual
TM.E7.21 E7 APOGEE FLN Technical Manual
TM.E7.22 E7 Metasys N2 Technical Manual
TM.E7B.01 E7B Drive/Bypass Technical Manual
TM.E7L.01 E7L Drive/Bypass Technical Manual
IG.AFD.20 LonWorks Option Card CM048 Installation Guide
IG.AFD.50
Pressure Transducer 3-15 PSI Analog Input Option Card AI-010 Installation
Guide
IG.E7B.02
E7B Drive/Bypass System with Touchpad Control Panel (Option T or Y)
Installation Guide
IG.E7.03 E7 Drive Wiring Installation Guide
CD.E7.01 CD-ROM, Drives for Building Automation
Software
Document Description
SW.DW.14.DriveWizard6.1 DriveWizard Software, Version 6.1
E7 ESP Energy Savings Predictor for E7 Drives
SW.E7HET.01 E7 Harmonic Estimating Tool
Flyers, Bulletins, Price Book And Specifications
Document Description
FL.E7.01 Flyer, E7 Drives, 1/2 to 500 HP
FL.E7.02 Flyer, E7 18-Pulse Drive
FL.E7.03 Flyer, Building Automation Products
FL.E7.04 Flyer, E7B Drive/Bypass System, 1/2 to 500 HP
FL.E7L.01 Flyer, E7L Drive/Bypass System, 1/2 to 60 HP
BL.E7.01 Bulletin, multi-page, E7 Drives and Bypass Packages
BL.E7.02 Bulletin, Significant Cost Savings HVAC Drives for Buildings
BL.E7N.01 Bulletin, multi-page, E7N Narrow Bypass Package shown actual size
E7.DRG Binder, E7 Drive Resource Guide
PB.E7.01 Price Book, E7 Drives and E7 Packages
SG.E7.01 Section 15172 Mechanical Engineering Specifications
SG.E7.10 E7 Drive Mechanical Submittal Specification
SG.E7B.10 E7B Drive/Bypass Mechanical Submittal Specification with 22mm Operators
SG.E7B.11
E7B Drive/Bypass Mechanical Submittal Specification with Touchpad and
LED Keypad
SG.E7B.12
E7B Drive/Bypass Mechanical Submittal Specification with Touchpad and
LCD Keypad
SG.E7L.10 E7L Drive/Bypass Mechanical Submittal Specification
SG.E7N.10 E7N Narrow Bypass Package Mechanical Submittal Specification
Page 202 of 541
Introduction vi
Notes:
Page 203 of 541
Table of Contents vii
Table of Contents
Quick Reference Parameter List ........................................................Inside front cover
Warnings and Cautions................................................................................................ i
Introduction.................................................................................................................. iii
Chapter 1 - Physical Installation ...............................................................................1-1
Bypass Model Number and Enclosure Style .............................................................. 2
Enclosure Data ........................................................................................................... 3
Confirmations upon Delivery ...................................................................................... 5
Bypass Product Options ............................................................................................. 7
Bypass Component Descriptions ............................................................................... 9
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions .......................................................................... 15
Checking and Controlling Installation Site ................................................................ 18
Chapter 2 - Electrical Installation..............................................................................2-1
Termination Configuration - Power Wiring ................................................................. 2
Control Wiring ............................................................................................................. 8
Wiring Diagram ......................................................................................................... 23
Electrical Overview.................................................................................................... 25
Chapter 3 - Control Panel ..........................................................................................3-1
Digital Operator and Control Panel Display ............................................................... 2
Drive Main Menus .................................................................................................... 11
Example of Changing a Parameter .......................................................................... 22
Chapter 4 - Start Up and Operation ..........................................................................4-1
Start Up Introduction .................................................................................................. 2
Bypass Unit Start Up Preparation ............................................................................... 4
Bypass Unit Start Up Procedure ................................................................................. 5
Bypass Unit Operation Description ........................................................................... 10
Chapter 5 - Programming .......................................................................................... 5-1
Regarding Chapter 5................................................................................................... 2
Bypass Unit Basic Programming Parameters ............................................................ 4
Drive Parameters ...................................................................................................... 10
Page 204 of 541
Table of Contents viii
Chapter 6 - Diagnostics & Troubleshooting ........................................................... 6-1
E7N Bypass PCB and H/O/A Control Panel Diagnostics ........................................... 2
Drive Diagnostics ....................................................................................................... 6
Drive Troubleshooting .............................................................................................. 19
Drive Main Circuit Test Procedure ............................................................................ 25
Drive Date Stamp Information .................................................................................. 29
Chapter 7 - Maintenance............................................................................................ 7-1
E7N Maintenance ....................................................................................................... 2
Removing and Replacing the Drive in a Bypass Unit ................................................. 7
Appendix A - Parameters................................................................. A-1
Parameter List ............................................................................................................ 2
Monitor List ............................................................................................................... 26
Fault Trace List ........................................................................................................ 28
Fault History List ...................................................................................................... 29
Decimal to Hex Conversion....................................................................................... 30
Appendix B - Capacity Related Parameters................................... B-1
Drive Capacity ............................................................................................................ 2
Appendix C - Specifications............................................................ C-1
Standard Drive and Bypass Specifications ................................................................. 2
Appendix D - Communication......................................................... D-1
E7N and Serial Communication.................................................................................. 2
Using Modbus Communication .................................................................................. 3
Metasys N2 Point Database...................................................................................... 16
APOGEE FLN Point Database.................................................................................. 20
Appendix E - Peripheral Devices .................................................... E-1
Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection........................................................................ 2
Branch Circuit Overload Protection............................................................................. 3
Peripheral Devices ..................................................................................................... 4
Page 205 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 1
Chapter 1
Physical Installation
This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving
and the installation process for a Drive and Bypass unit.
Bypass Model Number and Enclosure Style .................................. 2
Enclosure Data ............................................................................... 3
Bypass Unit Enclosures ............................................................. 4
Confirmations upon Delivery .......................................................... 5
Receiving Checks ...................................................................... 5
Nameplate Information .............................................................. 5
Bypass Product Options ................................................................. 7
Bypass Component Descriptions ................................................... 9
Bypass Unit Front Control Panel ............................................... 9
Internal Bypass Panel............................................................... 11
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions .............................................. 15
Dimensions and Weights ......................................................... 17
Checking and Controlling Installation Site .................................... 18
Installation Site ............................................................................. 18
Controlling the Ambient Temperature ...................................... 19
Protecting the Bypass Unit from Foreign Matter ...................... 19
Installation Orientation and Enclosure Considerations ............ 19
Page 206 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 2
Bypass Model Number and Enclosure Style
The Bypass covers two voltage ranges: 208 VAC and 480 VAC. Ratings applicable are from 1/2 to 50 HP.
Table 1.1 Bypass
Voltage
Bypass
Base Model Number
HP
Bypass
Continuous
Output
Current
(Amps)
Uses
Basic Drive
Model-Number
NEMA 1
208 VAC
E7NVD002 0.5 2.4 CIMR-E7U22P2
E7NVD003 0.75 3.5 CIMR-E7U22P2
E7NVD004 1 4.6 CIMR-E7U22P2
E7NVD007 2 7.5 CIMR-E7U22P2
E7NVD010 3 10.6 CIMR-E7U22P2
E7NVD016 5 16.7 CIMR-E7U23P7
E7NVD024 7.5 24.2 CIMR-E7U27P5
E7NVD030 10 30.8 CIMR-E7U27P5
E7NVD046 15 46.2 CIMR-E7U2011
E7NVD059 20 59.4 CIMR-E7U2015
E7NVD074 25 74.8 CIMR-E7U2018
480 VAC
E7NVB001 0.5 1.1 CIMR-E7U42P2
E7NVB001 0.75 1.6 CIMR-E7U42P2
E7NVB002 1 2.1 CIMR-E7U42P2
E7NVB003 2 3.4 CIMR-E7U42P2
E7NVB004 3 4.8 CIMR-E7U42P2
E7NVB007 5 7.6 CIMR-E7U43P7
E7NVB011 7.5 11 CIMR-E7U45P5
E7NVB014 10 14 CIMR-E7U47P5
E7NVB021 15 21 CIMR-E7U49P0
E7NVB027 20 27 CIMR-E7U4011
E7NVB034 25 34 CIMR-E7U4015
E7NVB040 30 40 CIMR-E7U4018
E7NVB052 40 52 CIMR-E7U4024
E7NVB065 50 65 CIMR-E7U4030
Page 207 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 3
Enclosure Data
Table 1.2 208V Enclosure Data
Input
Volts
HP
1
Drive
Model
CIMR-
Bypass
2
Model
Number
NEC
FLA
OL
110%
1 min
Heat
3
Loss
Watts
Enclosure Dimensions
4
NEMA 1
H W D
inches
Weight
5
of
Assembly
Electrical
Schematic
208
0.5 E7U22P21 E7N_D002 2.4 2.6 68
41.43 8.38 11.5

70 lbs
DS.E7N.01
0.75 E7U22P21 E7N_D003 3.5 3.8 68
1 E7U22P21 E7N_D004 4.6 5.1 78
2 E7U22P21 E7N_D007 7.5 8.2 110
3 E7U22P21 E7N_D010 10.6 11.7 141
5 E7U23P71 E7N_D016 16.7 18.4 202
7.5 E7U27P51 E7N_D024 24.2 26.6 273
10 E7U27P51 E7N_D030 30.8 33.9 365
15 E7U20111 E7N_D046 46.2 50.8 578
52.38 15.43 14.25

150 lbs 20 E7U20151 E7N_D059 59.4 65.3 653
25 E7U20181 E7N_D074 74.8 82.3 746
Note 1: Horsepower rating is based on a standard NEMA B 4-pole motor.
Note 2: The underscore position in these model numbers codes for the enclosure type: V = NEMA1.
Note 3: Heat loss is the amount of heat dissipated by the drive at full load with all standard options available inside the enclosure. Drive heat sink losses are
included in the heat loss data.
Note 4: Height dimension (H) excludes the mounting screw tabs. Depth dimension (D) excludes the disconnect handle.
Note 5: This data represents the total weight with all possible standard options. Weight could be less depending on the options specified.
Note 6: All standard options are available in this size enclosure.
Page 208 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 4
4Bypass Unit Enclosures
All Bypass units are intended for non-hazardous locations. Various enclosure types are provided to protect against the applica-
tion environmental conditions:
NEMA Type 1 Enclosures
These are constructed for indoor use to provide a degree of protection against incidental contact with enclosed electrical equip-
ment and falling dust or dirt.
Table 1.3 480V Enclosure Data
Input
Volts
HP
1
Drive
Model
CIMR-
Bypass
2
Model
Number
NEC
FLA
OL
110%
1 min
Heat
3
Loss
Watts
Enclosure Dimensions
4
NEMA 1
H W D
inches
Weight
5
of
Assembly
Electrical
Schematic
480
0.5 E7U42P21 E7N_B001 1.1 1.2 57
41.43 8.38 11.5 70 lbs
DS.E7N.01
0.75 E7U42P21 E7N_B001 1.6 1.8 57
1 E7U42P21 E7N_B002 2.1 2.3 62
2 E7U42P21 E7N_B003 3.4 3.7 89
3 E7U42P21 E7N_B004 4.8 5.3 121
5 E7U43P71 E7N_B007 7.6 8.4 155
7.5 E7U45P51 E7N_B011 11.0 12.1 217
10 E7U47P51 E7N_B014 14.0 15.4 318
15 E7U49P02 E7N_B021 21.0 23.1 404
20 E7U40111 E7N_B027 27.0 29.7 408
25 E7U40151 E7N_B034 34.0 31.4 485
52.38 15.43 14.25 150 lbs
30 E7U40181 E7N_B040 40.0 44.0 618
40 E7U40241 E7N_B052 52.0 57.2 1090
50 E7U40301 E7N_B065 65.0 71.5 1045
Note 1: Horsepower rating is based on a standard NEMA B 4-pole motor.
Note 2: The underscore position in these model numbers codes for the enclosure type: V = NEMA1.
Note 3: Heat loss is the amount of heat dissipated by the drive at full load with all standard options available inside the enclosure. Drive heat sink losses are
included in the heat loss data.
Note 4: Height dimension (H) excludes the mounting screw tabs. Depth dimension (D) excludes the disconnect handle.
Note 5: This data represents the total weight with all possible standard options. Weight could be less depending on the options specified.
Note 6: All standard options are available in this size enclosure.
Page 209 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 5
Confirmations upon Delivery
4Receiving Checks
Check the following items as soon as the Drive and Bypass unit is delivered.
If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the shipping company, the distributor or representative you purchased
the Bypass unit from or your Yaskawa office immediately.
The Bypass unit is thoroughly tested at the factory. Any damages or shortages evident when the equipment is received must be
reported immediately to the commercial carrier that transported the material. Shipping damage is not covered by the Yaskawa
warranty. After unpacking and inspecting for damage, verify that internal wire connections have not come loose during
shipment by spot checking wire terminations with a screwdriver or the appropriate tool.
Bypass unit storage must be in a clean and dry location. Maintain the factory packaging and provide covering as needed to pro-
tect the Bypass unit from construction site dirt, water, debris and traffic prior to and during construction.
4Nameplate Information
A nameplate is attached to the right side of the enclosure and the inside of the door of each Bypass unit.
The nameplate shown below is an example for a standard Bypass unit.
Fig 1.1 Bypass Nameplate
(Example)
Table 1.4 Checks
Item Method
Has the correct model of Bypass unit been
delivered?
Check the model number on the nameplate on the right side of the Bypass unit.
Reconcile with packing slip and/or order information.
Is the Bypass unit damaged in any way?
Inspect the entire exterior of the Bypass unit to see if there are any dents,
scratches or other damage resulting from shipping.
Are any screws or other components loose? Use a screwdriver or the appropriate tool to check for tightness.
A.C. INPUT
A.C. OUTPUT
Volts: 480 Hz: 50/60
Phase: 3
Amps: 71.6
Volts: 0-480 Hz: 0-60
Phase: 3
Amps: 65
Serial No: 4W033727440-0002
Model No,: E7NVB065R
Type: E7N BYPASS
W.D.: DS.E7N.01
Inst. Manual: TM.E7N.01, CD.E7.01
UNPN0001
Page 210 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 6
Drive Nameplate Information
A nameplate is also attached to the right side of the Drive inside the Bypass enclosure. The following nameplate is an example
for a standard Drive.
Fig 1.2 Drive Nameplate
(Example)
Bypass Unit Model Numbers
The model number on the nameplate of the Bypass unit indicates the enclosure, voltage, Drive rated current and options of the
Bypass unit in alphanumeric codes.
Fig 1.3 Bypass Unit Model Number
NOTE
(1) 3% and 5% DC Bus Chokes are only available as an option on base numbers up to E7NVB074 and
E7NVB040. Larger drives have a DC Bus Choke as standard.
Drive Enclosure and
Revision Code
Weight
Drive Model Number
Input Power Specifications
Output Power Specifications
Serial Number
UL File Number
V
E7N
L
0
D
BASE NUMBER OPTIONS
Enclosure
Current
Voltage
208V
480V
NEC Rated Amps (001-074)
(Ex.: 021 = 21A)
B
C
0
0
Disconnect Switch
MCP Circuit Breaker
D Fused Disconnect
Main Input Disconnect
G
None (leave blank)
Service Switch
B 3 Contactor Bypass
Drive Input Circuit
Input Filter
None (leave blank)
N Cap Filter
E 7 N V B 0 0 0 0 Y L G X 0 2 1
Communications
Not Enabled (leave blank)
LonWorks
J Enable METASYS N2
3 BACnet
U Enable Siemens APOGEE
V Enable Modbus
Y
Drive Keypad
LED Style Drive Keypad
LCD Style Drive Keypad
P
3-15 PSI Transducer
None (leave blank)
3-15 PSI Transducer
W
Custom Nameplates
None (leave blank)
Custom Nameplates
X
Line Impedance
None (leave blank)
3% Bus Reactor (1)
Z 5% Bus Reactor (1)
0
0
0
0
0
NEMA 1
2-Contactor Bypass
Page 211 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 7
Bypass Product Options
Option B
3 Contactor bypass: Isolates the drive circuit by adding a separate drive input contactor (100 kA short circuit current rating is
provided when using this option in conjunction with option D below).
Option C
Motor Circuit Protector (MCP)/Disconnect: Replaces the standard input disconnect switch and provides short circuit protection
integral with the Drive and Bypass package. The MCP includes a through the door, padlockable operator mechanism. Without
this option, short circuit protection must be provided by others on the input side of the Drive and Bypass unit.
Option D
Fused input disconnect replaces the standard input disconnect switch and provides 100kA of short circuit protection for the
drive and bypass package.
Option G
Drive Input Disconnect Switch: Provides a disconnect means for the input side of the Drive, for Drive isolation capability
during Bypass operation. This disconnect is located inside the enclosure with an integral operating handle.
Option J
Enable Embedded Serial Communications: A no cost option. The Drive in a Bypass unit is capable of network communication
via one of 3 embedded protocols. Specifying option J will enable the Metasys N2 protocol and will provide the necessary
parameter settings and wiring (jumpers) to be network ready when delivered (Project specific H5-0X parameters are setup by
the user).
Option L
Serial Communication, Echelon LonWorks: An isolated RS-422/485 circuit board provides LonTalk protocol for network
communication to a BAS. This option plugs into the CN2 connection on the Drive control circuit board.
Option N
Input Capacitive Network Radio Frequency Interference Filter: Electronic equipment can be sensitive to low levels of voltage
distortion and electrical noise. This passive wye-delta capacitive filter is intended for installation on the VFD input in order to
protect other sensitive electronic loads, it provides attenuation of conducted RFI and EMI.
Option P
Pressure to Electrical Transducer: This transducer is employed when converting a pneumatic signal to an electrical signal for
use as the Drive speed command input. The need for this option comes up on retrofit applications when the pneumatic signal
that formerly controlled the pneumatic actuator on Inlet Guide Vanes (IGV), for example, is now to be used to control the fan
speed via the Drive. This option is wired to terminals TB5-7, TB5-8 and TB5-9, parameters H3-10 and H3-11 are used for
final field calibration of this input if there is jobsite variation from the typical 3 to 15 PSIG pneumatic signal input range.
Option U
Enable Embedded Serial Communications: A no cost option. The Drive in a Bypass unit is capable of network communications
via one of 3 embedded protocols. Specifying option U will enable the Siemens APOGEE protocol and provide the necessary
parameter settings and wiring (jumpers) to be network ready when delivered (Project specific H5-0X parameters are setup by
the user).
Option V
Enable Embedded Serial Communications: A no cost option. The Drive in a Bypass unit is capable of network communications
via one of 3 embedded protocols. Specifying option U will enable the Modbus protocol and provide the necessary parameter
settings and wiring (jumpers) to be network ready when delivered (Project specific H5-0X parameters are setup by the user).
Page 212 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 8
Option X
3% DC Bus Reactor: Attenuates harmonic distortion by limiting the rate of rise of the input current. The bus reactor is wired
to the Drive (+1) and (+2) DC bus terminals to provide the equivalent impedance of a 3% input reactor. This option is only
used on the low end of the horsepower range where DC bus reactors are not a standard Drive component (25 HP and below @
208 VAC, 25 HP and 30 HP and below @ 480 VAC.)
Option Y
LCD Keypad: Offers 5 lines of display with 16 characters on each line for expanded data presentation capability in English (or
other language) format.
Option Z
5% DC Bus Reactor: Attenuates harmonic distortion by limiting the rate of rise of the input current. The bus reactor is wired
to the Drive (+1) and (+2) DC bus terminals to provide the equivalent impedance of a 5% input reactor. This option is only
used on the low end of the horsepower range where DC bus reactors are not a standard Drive component (25 HP and below @
208 VAC, 25 HP and 30 HP and below @ 480 VAC.)
Option 3
Serial Communication, BACnet interface: An isolated RS-422/485 circuit board provides BACnet protocol for network com-
munication to a BAS. This option plugs into the CN2 connection on the Drive control circuit board.
Page 213 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 9
Bypass Component Descriptions
4 Bypass Unit Front Control Panel
The external appearance, component names, and terminal arrangement of the Bypass unit is shown in Figures 1.4 through 1.8.
Fig 1.4 E7N Bypass Unit Appearance & E7N Control Panel with Keypad Operator Controls
Keypad Control Panel Operator
In a Bypass unit the Drive keypad control panel operator is mounted flush with the hinged door of the enclosure. The Keypad
Control/Operator is equipped with 6 LED illuminated selector keys: Hand, Off, Auto, Drive Select, Bypass Select and Drive
Test. The E7N also features 11 other status LED indicators: Control Power, Drive Ready, Drive Run, Drive Fault, Bypass Run,
Motor O/L, Safety Open, Damper/BAS Interlock, Smoke Purge, Auto Transfer and Auto Run. The membrane over the Drive
keypad is non-removable on these Bypass units (In order to use the keypad copy function on a Bypass unit - order a separate
keypad, part number CDR001115).
The Keypad Control/Operator has a digital alpha/numeric display and keypad, in the upper portion, for Drive operation and
programming. The row of LEDs above the alpha/numeric display indicate Drive operational status. The row of LEDs below
the alpha/numeric display indicate the Drive menu that is presently active.
The lower portion of the Keypad Control/Operator displays the operating mode status via LEDs and controls the HAND/OFF/
AUTO functions for both the Drive and Bypass via a touchpad. The general rule for LED colors, in the lower portion of the
control panel, is:
Green = Normal Status
Amber = Abnormal Status
Red = Fault Status
Drive
Keypad Operator
Indicating
Disconnect Handle
Alpha Numeric
LCD Display
LEDs
HOA Keypad
Drive Operational
Status
Page 214 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 10
Input Disconnect Switch
Electrically located on the input power side of the Bypass unit, the disconnect provides a through the door padlockable operator
mechanism. The Bypass three phase input power connection is made to the input terminals of the disconnect. The door mounted
rotary operating mechanism is a convenient means of disconnecting the Bypass unit from line power for equipment maintenance.
The disconnect must be in the OFF position in order to open the enclosure door. The rotary handle can be padlocked in the OFF
position.
This disconnect switch DOES NOT provide branch short circuit protection. A device to provide branch short circuit protection
MUST be provided by others upstream of the E7N Bypass unit.
Fig 1.5 Disconnect Handle Positions OFF, ON Shown in the OFF position
Fig 1.6 Disconnect Handle Positions Shown OFF, With Padlock
Page 215 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 11
4Internal Bypass Panel
Fig 1.7 Internal Bypass Panel
Fig 1.8 PCB A2 Control Logic and Connections
Line Connections
Control Wiring
Control Power
G Option
Bypass Contactor
Output Contactor
Circuit Breaker
Load Connections
PCB A3
Disconnect
Terminal Strips
TB1 - TB5
Transformer
TB4, TB5 and Terminal PE
Jumpers J2 and J3,
Analog Output Signal Level
DIP Switches S1, S2, S3
and S4 for Field
Configuration of
Drive/Bypass Operation
TB1, TB2 and TB3
Jumper J1, Digital Input
Voltage Source Selection
Hinged Enclosure
Door
Overload Relay
Page 216 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 12
Contactors
The Bypass is a 2 contactor or 3 contactor Bypass circuit employing IEC rated contactors in an electrically interlocked
arrangement to allow mutually exclusive operation in Drive or Bypass modes.
The control logic and soft start characteristic of the Drive limit the Drive input and output contactors to motor FLA current or
less. For this reason, the Drive output contactor has a lower current rating than the Bypass contactor. The Bypass contactor is
exposed to motor inrush current (LRA) when starting the motor across-the-line and therefore requires a higher current rating.
OverLoad Relay
The OverLoad Relay (OLR) is mounted to the contactor assembly or back panel (depending on rating), just above the Bypass
contactor (see Figure 1.7). Electrically on the output power side of the Bypass unit, the adjustable thermal OLR provides
overload protection for the motor in both the Drive and Bypass operating modes. The Bypass three phase output power
connection to the motor is made to the output terminals of the overload relay. The OLR is set up in the factory to be a manual
reset device, requiring operator attention if an overload trip-out is experienced.
Control Power Transformer
A Control Power Transformer (CPT) is provided to power the Bypass 120 VAC control circuit. The VA capacity is determined
by the control circuit and optional functions specified for the unit. The CPT primary is fused in both legs, the secondary is
fused when required by NEC (transformer VA and wire size dependent). One side of the transformer secondary is grounded to
the Bypass enclosure.
Electronic Bypass Control Logic
Operating elements such as indicating LEDs and selector buttons, as well as the control logic, have been incorporated into a
PCB assembly to eliminate the potential for loose wires after shipment and to control factory costs.
The operating elements are located on PCB A3, mounted to the inside of the enclosure door and ribbon cable connected to the
control logic PCB A2.
The control logic PCB A2 is mounted to the left hand side of the enclosure and contains the control circuit field wiring termi-
nal strips (TB1 through TB5).
Drive/Bypass logic interlocks explained
The Bypass 120 VAC logic circuit is interconnected with the Drive multi-function digital input terminals and multi-
function digital output terminals to allow a single customer interface to control both Drive and Bypass circuits. These Drive
terminals are therefore not available for other field use. All field control connections are landed at terminal strips TB1 through
TB5 on control logic PCB A2.
PCB Jumpers explained
J1 is a field configuration jumper to allow the user to select the internal 120 VAC power supply, a customer supplied 120 VAC
power supply or a customer supplied 24 VDC power supply for the digital inputs.
J2 and J3 are field configuration jumpers to allow the user to select the signal level (0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA) for the two
analog output signals.
Page 217 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 13
DIP Switch Selectable Functions:
The DIP switches used to select these functions are located on the logic controller Printed Circuit Board (PCB) A2 (See Figure
1.9). The factory default is shown on the wiring diagram in Chapter 2 or Schematic diagram DS.E7N.01.
DIP switches S1, S2, S3 and S4 allow the user to configure various project specific functions of the E7N including:
Serial Communication terminating resistor
Speed command source
Analog input signal level
Activate or inactivate functions:
Auto transfer to Bypass on Drive Fault
Safety interlock circuit
BAS interlock circuit
Power-up mode selection
Function of 3 SPDT programmable output relays:
Annunciate Running in Bypass mode
Damper actuator energized - employed to energize damper actuator
Annunciate Auto-Transfer to Bypass
Annunciate Running in Drive mode
Annunciate Run command received from serial comm
Annunciate Hand mode
Annunciate Auto mode
Annunciate Drive, motor or control fault
Fig 1.9 Printed Circuit Board A2, DIP Switches for Drive/Bypass Operational Configuration
DIP Switch
Location on
PCB A2
TB5 TB4
TB3
TB2
TB1
J2 and J3
Page 218 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 14
DIP Switches are ON when moved toward the enclosure door.
Fig 1.10 DIP Switches S1 to S4 for Drive/Bypass Operational Configuration
DIP Switch S1 example
2
3
4
1
Page 219 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 15
Exterior and Mounting Dimensions
Fig 1.11 Enclosure 1 for up to 10 HP, 208 VAC and up to 20 HP, 480 VAC
NEMA 1
Page 220 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 16
Fig 1.12 Enclosure 2 for 15 ~ 25 HP, 208 VAC and 25 ~ 50 HP, 480 VAC
NEMA 1
Page 221 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 17
4Dimensions and Weights
Table 1.5 Bypass Dimensions and Weights
Rated
Input
Voltage
Continuous
Output
Current
(Amps)
Nominal
HP
(1)
Bypass
E7N
_
NEMA 1
Dimensions inches (mm)
Wall
Mounting
Dimensions
H x W
Drawing Num-
ber
Weight
(lbs)
(3)
Height
(2)
Width Depth
208V
2.4 1/2 D002
41.43
(1052.3)
8.38
(212.9)
11.5
(292.1)
40.29" H
7.14" W
DD.E7N.203.01 70 lbs
3.5 3/4 D003
4.6 1 D004
7.5 2 D007
10.6 3 D010
16.7 5 D016
24.2 7.5 D024
30.8 10 D030
46.2 15 D046
52.38
(1330.4)
15.43
(391.9)
14.25
(361.9)
51.27" H
12.39" W
DD.E7N.255.01
150 lbs 59.4 20 D059
74.8 25 D074
480V
1.1 1/2
B001
41.43
(1052.3)
8.38
(212.9)
11.5
(292.1)
40.29" H
7.14" W DD.E7N.203.01
70 lbs
1.6 3/4
2.1 1 B002
3.4 2 B003
4.8 3 B004
7.6 5 B007
11 7.5 B011
14 10 B014
21 15 B021
27 20 B027
34 25 B034
52.38
(1330.4)
15.43
(391.9)
14.25
(361.9)
51.27" H
12.39" W
DD.E7N.255.01
150 lbs
40 30 B040
52 40 B052
65 50 B065
(1) Horsepower rating is based on standard NEMA B 4-pole motor design
(2) Height dimension includes the mounting screw tabs.
(3) Data represents the total weight of the drive with all possible standard options, not shipping weight.
Page 222 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 18
Checking and Controlling Installation Site
Install the Bypass unit as described below and maintain the specified operating conditions.
4Installation Site
Location of the Bypass unit is important to achieving proper performance and design operating life. Install the Bypass unit as
close as possible to the motor. The NEMA type 1 enclosed units should be installed in an area where it will be protected from:
Direct sunlight, rain or moisture, corrosive gasses or liquids, vibration and dust or metallic particles. The ambient air available
for cooling the unit should be 104 F (40 C) or less.
Wall mount units require a minimum 6 inch clearance above and below, to achieve adequate heat sink cooling.
No side clearance is required for cooling because the cooling air flow is in and out of the enclosure door at the front surface of
the unit (do not block the air flow louvers). Clearance for the opening swing of the enclosure door should be considered when
placing these units. The door is hinged on the left and must open through at least a 90 degree swing with a 120 to 180 degree
swing being preferable (minimum clearance is 1.5).
Install the Bypass unit under the following conditions in UL pollution degree 1 & 2 environments. This excludes wet locations
where surfaces may become conductive due to moisture and contaminant loading.
Observe the following precautions when mounting the Bypass unit.
Install the Bypass unit in a clean location that is free from oil mist and dust.
Install the Bypass unit in an environment where metal shavings, oil, water, or other foreign matter will not get into the
Bypass enclosure.
Install the Bypass unit in a location free from radioactive materials.
Install the Bypass unit in a location free from harmful gasses and liquids.
Install the Bypass unit in a location without excessive vibration.
Install the Bypass unit in a location free from chlorides.
Install the Bypass unit in a location not in direct sunlight.
Install the Bypass unit on a non-combustible surface.
Table 1.6 Installation Site
Type Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity Plenum Rated
NEMA Type 1 14 to 104F (-10-to-+ 40C) 95%-RH-or-less-(no-condensation) Yes
Page 223 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 19
4 Controlling the Ambient Temperature
To enhance the reliability of operation, the Bypass unit should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature
variations. Do not store this Technical Manual or any other documents on the top surface of the Bypass unit, they may cover
the heat sink cooling air discharge opening and cause the unit to overheat.
If the Bypass unit is installed in an enclosure (such as an electrical control box in an air handling unit), use a cooling fan or air
conditioner to maintain the Bypass unit internal air temperature below 113F (45C).
4Protecting the Bypass Unit from Foreign Matter
During Bypass unit installation and project construction, it is possible to have foreign matter, such as metal shavings or wire
clippings, fall inside the Bypass unit. To prevent foreign matter from falling into the Bypass unit, place a temporary cover over
the unit.
Always remove the temporary cover from the Bypass unit before start-up. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the
Bypass unit to overheat.
4Installation Orientation and Enclosure Considerations
Install the Bypass unit vertically so as not to reduce the cooling efficiency. When installing the Bypass unit, always provide the
recommended installation clearances to allow normal heat dissipation.
When preparing to mount the unit, lift it by the base (or lifting rings when provided), never by the enclosure door. For effective
cooling and proper maintenance, the wall mounted units must be installed on a flat non-flammable vertical surface using four
mounting screws.
For all units, the Disconnect handle should be in the OFF position to open the enclosure door. The wall mount units have two
full turn fasteners, CCW to open, that require a flat blade screwdriver to open the enclosure door.
Page 224 of 541
Physical Installation 1 - 20
Notes:
Page 225 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 1
Chapter 2
Electrical Installation
This chapter describes wiring and the electrical installation process for a Drive and
Bypass unit.
Termination Configuration - Power Wiring ......................................2
Field Wiring, Pressure Wire Connector, Wire Type, Range
and Tightening Torque Specifications ........................................3
Cable Length between Drive and Motor ....................................4
Grounding ..................................................................................5
Wire Routing ..............................................................................6
E7 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 208 VAC ..........................7
E7 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 480 VAC ..........................7
Control Wiring ................................................................................8
Bypass Field Control Wire Landing ...........................................8
Annunciation Contacts ...............................................................9
Building Automation System Run/Stop Circuit: ........................10
Safety Interlock Circuit: ............................................................10
Building Automation System Interlock Circuit
(Drive and Bypass enable input): .............................................10
Analog Inputs ...........................................................................12
Analog Outputs.........................................................................14
Serial Communications.............................................................15
Remote Transfer to Bypass ......................................................17
Smoke Purge Operation...........................................................17
Multi-Function Digital Inputs .....................................................17
DIP Switch Programmable Functions Summary ......................18
Bypass Controller PCB ............................................................19
Wiring Checks .........................................................................20
Control Circuit Wiring Precautions ...........................................20
Bypass Control Circuit Terminal Functions ..............................21
Wiring Diagram ............................................................................23
Electrical Overview........................................................................24
Page 226 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 2
Termination Configuration - Power Wiring
The input disconnect switch is located in the upper right hand side of the Bypass unit. The three phase input power
connection is made to the input terminals of the disconnect. See Figure 2.1 for a representative example.
The OverLoad Relay (OLR) is mounted to the contactor assembly or back panel (depending on rating), just above the bypass
contactor. The Bypass three phase output power connection to the motor is made to the output terminals of the OverLoad
Relay.
Fig 2.1 Typical Input Power Connection
Motor Connections
Overload Relay
Bypass Contactor
Ground Lug
Output Contactor
Input Power
Terminals
Drive
Selector
Switch
Page 227 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 3
4Field Wiring, Pressure Wire Connector, Wire Type, Range and Tightening
Torque Specifications
IMPORTANT
Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within 2% of the rated voltage. Line
voltage drop is calculated as follows:
Line voltage drop(V) = 3 x wire resistance (/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 10
-3
WARNING
Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive, remove all power sources, including
main input power and control circuit power. Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal, before
removing any cover. The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside. Even if
the charge lamp is off, one must measure the AC input, output, and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels
prior to resuming work. Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death.
Page 228 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 4
4Cable Length between Drive and Motor
The Bypass unit should be installed as close as possible to the motor to minimize the length of load side power cable needed
between the Drive and the motor. If the cable between the Drive and the motor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will
increase, causing the Drive output current to increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, reduce cable
length, or if necessary, adjust the carrier frequency (set in C6-02) as shown in Table 2.1.
The line side power cables, load side power cables and the control wiring should all be run in a separate conduit. Careful
attention to this recommended design practice will avoid many potential motor and Drive related problems.
(See the limitations on carrier frequency, based on Drive capacity and model number in Appendix B).
Table 2.1 Motor Cable Length vs. Carrier Frequency (C6-02)
Motor Cable Length 164 ft. (50m) maximum 328 ft. (100m) maximum More than 328 ft.(100m)
Carrier Frequency 15kHz maximum 10kHz maximum 5kHz maximum
Page 229 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 5
4Grounding
Drive and Motor Ground Wire Landing
The Drive ground lug (terminal ) is connected to the enclosure. The enclosure ground lug must be connected to earth
ground. See Figure 2.1.
The Drive has a second ground lug to accept the motor ground lead.
Ground Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when connecting the ground wire:
1. 208 VAC Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 100 ..
2. 480 VAC Drives should have a ground connection with resistance of less than 10 ..
3. Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as large-current electrical equipment.
4. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the
ground wire. Leakage current flows through the Drive. Therefore, if the distance between the ground rod and the ground
terminal is too long, potential on the ground terminal of the Drive will become unstable.
5. When using more than one Drive, be careful not to loop the ground wire.
Fig 2.2 Ground Wiring Examples
For grounding connection to earth ground see Figure 2.1.
Control Circuit Ground Terminals
The control logic PCB A2 provides a ground terminal (marked PE) to accept the control wire shield connection. Terminal PE
is located at the top left of PCB A2, near TB4. The control wire shield should be connected on this end only, the opposite end
should be isolated with electrical tape.
IMPORTANT
Grounding of the Bypass enclosure and motor is required for proper system operation.
NO
OK
OK NO
NO
Page 230 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 6
4Wire Routing
The following Figures indicate suggested wire entry and bending areas for representative wall mount enclosures.
Fig 2.3 Typical Wall Mount Enclosure
Page 231 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 7
4E7 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 208 VAC
4E7 Drive Main Circuit Configurations 480 VAC
Table 2.2 Drive Main Circuit Configurations
208 VAC
Note 1. Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives. Failure
to use recommended fuses/circuit breakers (See Appendix E) may result in damage to the wiring, Drive and/or
personal injury.
2. Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Drives.
3. Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-pulse rectification.
Table 2.3 Drive Main Circuit Configurations
480 VAC

Note 1. Input fuses or molded case circuit breakers are required for proper branch circuit protection for all Drives. Failure
to use recommended fuses/circuit breakers (See Appendix E) may result in damage to the wiring, Drive and/or
personal injury.
2. Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Drives.
3. Consult your Yaskawa representative before using 12-pulse rectification.
Power
supply
Control
circuits
{
1
Note

CIMR-_ _ _ 20P4 to 2018
(1/2 Hp to 25 Hp)
Power
supply
Control
circuits
{
1
Note

CIMR-_ _ _ 40P4 to 4018
(1/2 Hp to 30 Hp)
Power
supply
Control
circuits
{
1 & 3
Note

CIMR-_ _ _ 4030
( Hp & 50 Hp) 40
R1/L11
S1/L21
T1/L31
R/L1
S/L2
T/L3
U/T1
V/T2
W/T3
Page 232 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 8
Control Wiring
4Bypass Field Control Wire Landing
The Bypass field control wiring is terminated on the control PCB A2, Terminal blocks TB1 through TB5. The terminal desig-
nations are labeled on the enclosure, adjacent to PCB A2 (see Figure 2.4). Route the control wiring as shown in Figure 2.3.
Fig 2.4 TB1 Control Terminal Locations, All Models
Page 233 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 9
4Annunciation Contacts
Contacts for customer use are provided and wired to TB1 and TB2 as follows for use as annunciators of Bypass unit operation.
All are 5 amp at 120 VAC contacts.
Programmable Output Relays 1, 2 and 3 may be re-programmed via DIP switches S2 and S3 on the Bypass Control PCB A2.
These relays provide form C dry contacts for customer use in annunciation to Building Automation Systems or general duty
in other control logic circuits. Each contact is rated for 5 amps at 120 VAC.
The additional programmable output relay functions are described in the table below:
Table 2.4 Output Relays - Factory Defaults
Function Name (E7N-00) Terminal Block Terminals Type
Motor Run Motor Run * TB1 10-11 Form A
Hand Mode Relay 1 @ TB1 12-13-14 Form C
Auto Mode Relay 2 @ TB2 1-2-3 Form C
System Fault Relay 3 @ TB2 4-5-6 Form C
* = Dedicated
@ = Programmable
Table 2.5 Programmable Output Relay Functions
Function Description Factory Default
Bypass Run Annunciates running in Bypass mode No
Damper Actuator
Intended to close a contact in a damper actuator circuit
whenever the motor is commanded to run (operation similar
to the dedicated Motor Run relay)
No
Auto Transfer
Annunciates automatic transfer to Bypass operation due to a
Drive fault
No
Drive Run Annunciates running in Drive mode No
Serial Com Run
Annunciates that the run command is coming from serial
communications
No
Hand Mode
Annunciates that the Drive or Bypass is being operated in
Hand (local) mode
Relay 1
Auto Mode
Annunciates that the Drive or Bypass is being operated in
Auto (remote) mode
Relay 2
System Fault
Annunciates that a Drive, motor overload or control circuit
fault has occurred
Relay 3
Page 234 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 10
See Table 2.6 for DIP switch positions required to achieve these functions.
4Building Automation System Run/Stop Circuit:
A control terminal block position (TB1, terminals 2 and 9) is provided to connect the Normally Open (NO) Run/Stop contact
from a BAS or other remote controller for auto mode control.
There must be continuity between these terminals in order for the motor to run, in auto mode.
4Safety Interlock Circuit:
A control terminal block position (TB1, terminals 1 and 9) is provided to connect the series circuit of Normally Closed (NC)
safety devices such as: freeze up thermostats, smoke/fire sensors, high pressure limits, temperature limits or vibration
detectors.
On power up the E7N will display a red Safety Open LED in the System Status area of the front control panel if a nor-
mally closed Safety Circuit has not been installed between TB1-1 and TB1-9 on PCB A2. This condition will prevent Drive
or Bypass operation.
1 of 3 items needs to be done before the motor can be started:
1) Install a NC Safety Circuit between TB1-1 and TB1-9 on PCB A2.
2) Install a jumper between TB1-1 and TB1-9 on PCB A2. This method should be used if a Safety Circuit will be
added later in the installation.
3) De-activate these terminals by moving DIP switch S2-7 to the ON position (toward the enclosure door). This solution
is only suggested if a Safety Circuit will never be applied to the drive system.
4Building Automation System Interlock Circuit (Drive and Bypass enable input):
A control terminal block position (TB1, terminals 3 and 9) is provided to connect Normally Open (NO) enabling contacts such
as: damper end switches or occupied cycle timers.
Table 2.6 DIP Switch Settings for Output Relay Functions
No. Function
Programmable
Relay 1
Programmable
Relay 2
Programmable
Relay 3
Active*
Function
Description
S2(6) S2(5) S2(4) S3(3) S3(2) S3(1) S3(6) S3(5) S3(4)
1 Bypass Run OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ENERGIZED Running in Bypass mode
2 Damper Coil OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON ENERGIZED Damper actuator activation
3 Auto Transfer OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF ENERGIZED Auto-Transfer is active
4 Drive Run OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON ENERGIZED Drive is in the Run mode
5 Serial Com. Run ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ON OFF OFF ENERGIZED Serial Comm. Run command
6 Hand Mode ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ENERGIZED Manual mode operation
7 Auto Mode ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ON ON OFF ENERGIZED Auto mode operation
8 System Fault ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON DEENERGIZED Drive, motor or control fault
Factory Settings ON OFF ON ON ON OFF ON ON ON
* ACTIVE = RELAY CONDITION DURING FUNCTION
Page 235 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 11
When a Run command is received in HAND or AUTO mode, the E7N will display a red Damper/BAS LED in the System
Status area of the front control panel. This condition will prevent Drive or Bypass operation.
1 of 3 items needs to be done before the motor can be started:
1) Install a BAS Interlock Circuit between TB1-3 and TB1-9 on PCB A2.
2) Install a jumper between TB1-3 and TB1-9 on PCB A2. This method should be used if a BAS Interlock Circuit will
be added later in the installation.
3) De-activate these terminals by moving DIP switch S2-8 to the ON position (toward the enclosure door). This solution
is only suggested if a Safety Circuit will never be applied to the drive system.
Page 236 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 12
4Analog Inputs
The Drive has two analog input terminals for use as auto mode speed command (terminals A1 & A2) and feedback (terminal
A2) input.
Control Circuit Analog Input Terminals on PCB A2
All control inputs are landed on TB1 through TB5 on PCB A2.
TB3-3 is an analog input terminal and may be connected to either Drive terminal A1 or Drive Terminal A2, to maximize input
flexibility, using DIP switches S1-3 and S1-4. The factory default is TB3-3 connected to Drive terminal A2. With this
connection, the input signal level can be either 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA. The signal level selection is controlled by DIP
switch S1-2 and Drive parameter H3-08.
TB5-9 is also an analog input terminal, it is always connected to Drive terminal A2.
See Table 2.8, Figure 2.5 and Schematic Diagram DS.E7N.01 for clarification of the analog input configuration and applica-
tions.
Table 2.7 Drive Analog Input Terminals
Terminal Signal Level
A1 0 to 10 VDC
A2
4 to 20 mA or 1 to 10 VDC
(programmable via parameter H3-08 and DIP switch S1-2)
Table 2.8 Analog Input - Auto Mode
DIP Switches Drive Drive Applications
S1-2 S1-3 S1-4
Param. Terminal Speed
Feedback
Diff.
H3-08 Connected Command Feedback
TB3-3
Signal Level
0 to 10 VDC N/A OFF ON N/A TB3-3 to A1 X X X
4 to 20 mA ON ON OFF 2 TB3-3 to A2 X X
0 to 10 VDC OFF ON OFF 0 TB3-3 to A2 X X
TB5-9
Signal Level
4 to 20 mA ON N/A N/A 2 TB5-9 to A2
via 3-15
Transducer
0 to 10 VDC OFF N/A N/A 0 TB5-9 to A2 X
Page 237 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 13
Analog Input PCB A2 Configuration
Fig 2.5 Analog Input PCB A2 Configuration
Analog Input (Drive Speed Control Circuit) Wiring
Keep this lead length as short as possible (50 m max.) to maintain signal quality. Insulated twisted shielded pair wire (2 con-
ductor # 18 ga, Belden 8760 or equivalent) is required. Do not run these wires in the same conduits as other AC power or con-
trol wires. The shield must be connected on this end only, stub and isolate the other end. The signal employed is 4 to 20 mA
with parameter H3-08 set for 2: 4 - 20 mA. For 0 to 10 VDC, parameter H3-08 is set for 0: 0 - 10 VDC and the control
PCB DIP switch S1-2 must be in the OFF position.
When setting speed commands from an external speed potentiometer (and not from a Digital Operator), use shielded twisted-
pair wires and ground the shield to terminal PE, as shown in Figure 2.6. Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in
Table 2.13.
Fig 2.6 Analog Input Terminal Configuration

Page 238 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 14
4Analog Outputs
Two analog outputs are provided, both can be configured for a signal level of 0 to 10 VDC or 4 to 20 mA. The signal level is
controlled by the position of jumpers J2 and J3 (see Figures 1.8 and 1.9 for location) on Control PCB A2 and by the values
selected for Drive parameters H4-07 and H4-08.
Configuring the Analog Outputs:
Programming the Analog Outputs:
The TB3-4 and TB5-6 analog outputs can be programmed to be proportional to any of the following Drive variables.
See Page A-17 or the H4-0X parameters in the programming manual, TM.E7.02 for additional programming details.
Table 2.9 Analog Outputs
Terminals Jumper Position Drive
Analog
Output
AC
Common Signal Level J2 J3 Terminal *
Parameter
H4-07
Parameter
H4-08
TB3-4 TB3-1 4-20 mA 1-2 N/A FM 2: 4-20 mA N/A
TB3-4 TB3-1 0-10 VDC 2-3 N/A FM 0: 0-10 V N/A
TB5-6 TB5-7 4-20 mA N/A 1-2 AM N/A 2: 4-20 mA
TB5-6 TB5-7 0-10 VDC N/A 2-3 AM N/A 0: 0-10 V
* = For Drive programming reference
Table 2.10 Analog Output Proportional Variables
Setting Description Setting Description
1 Frequency Ref 20 SFS Output*
2 Output Freq 24 PI Feedback
3 Output Current 31 Not Used
6 Output Voltage 36 PI Input
7 DC Bus Voltage 37 PI Output
8 Output kWatts 38 PI Setpoint
15 Term A1 Level 51 Auto Mode Fref
16 Term A2 Level 52 Hand Mode Fref
18 Mot SEC Current 53 PI Feedback 2
* SFS is the internal soft starter signal. This signal is generated from the reference and often it passes through the accel/ decel functions.
Page 239 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 15
4Serial Communications:
Terminals are provided for full duplex or half duplex connections to the Drive for RS422/RS485 serial communication.
For half duplex operation via Metasys N2 protocol (enabled with option J), APOGEE FLN protocol (enabled with option U)
or Modbus protocol (enabled with option V) field configuration of these terminals is required.
When no cost options J, U or V are ordered:
Jumpers are provided for field installation on terminals TB4-1 to TB4-3 and TB4-2 to TB4-4.
The E7 Drive is programmed to enable the appropriate protocol (parameter H5-08), baud rate (parameter H5-02),
RTS control (parameter H5-07) and error detection time (parameter H5-09).
Option L (LonWorks) does not require jumpers and (with the exception of H5-07) employs the same parameter settings as
Modbus.
For co-ordination with other E7 Technical Manuals, the table below provides the equivalency between E7N Control PCB A2
terminal designations and E7 Drive terminal designations used in TM.E7.01, TM.E7.02, TM.E7.21, TM.E7.22 and
TM.E7B.01.
Table 2.11 Factory Programming for Serial Communication
Parameter (Function)
Option
J U V L
H5-02 (Baud Rate) 3: 9600 Baud 2: 4800 Baud 3: 9600 Baud 3: 9600 Baud
H5-07 (RTS Control) 1: Enabled 1: Enabled 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
H5-08 (Protocol) 1: N2 (Metasys)
2: FLN
(APOGEE)
0: Modbus 0: Modbus
H5-09 (Error Time) 10 10 10 10
Table 2.12 Serial Communications Terminal Designation Cross Reference
E7N RS485 Terminal E7 Drive RS485 Terminal
TB4-1 S+
TB4-2 S-
TB4-3 R+
TB4-4 R-
Page 240 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 16
Terminating Resistor
The terminating resistance must be turned ON only if the Drive is at the very end of the Serial Communication chain. Set the
terminating resistance by turning ON DIP switch S1-1.
Fig 2.7 Terminating Resistor
Fig 2.8 RS-485 Communication Connection
IMPORTANT
1. Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and control circuit wiring.
2. Use shielded cables for the communication wiring, and use proper shield clamps.
3. When using RS-485 communication, connect TB4-1 to TB4-3, and TB4-2 to TB4-4, on the control circuit
terminal board. See Fig 2.8 below.
4. Connect shield at one end only.

TB4-3 TB4-4 TB4-1 TB4-2
TB4 on Control PCB A2
Page 241 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 17
4Remote Transfer to Bypass
Terminal TB1-4 on the Control PCB A2 is a dedicated terminal for Remote Transfer to Bypass operation.
This function allows a contact closure from a BAS, between terminals TB1-4 and TB1-9, to transfer motor operation from
Drive mode to Bypass mode. This remote transfer to Bypass function overrides the Drive Select manual button. An open
contact causes operation in Drive mode and a closed contact results in Bypass mode.
4Smoke Purge Operation
Terminal TB1-5 on the Control PCB A2 is a dedicated terminal for Smoke Purge operation.
This function allows a contact closure between terminals TB1-5 and TB1-9 to transfer motor operation to Bypass for a
maximum capacity smoke control function. When in smoke purge mode, during emergency fire/smoke situations, the motor
overloads and safety interlock circuit are overridden to shift the priority to protecting people rather than equipment.
[Note: Smoke purge overrides all other control inputs and selector buttons. Smoke purge operation can only be terminated by
opening the contact closure at terminal TB1-5 or by opening the disconnect switch (S1 on schematic DS.E7N.01).]
4Multi-Function Digital Inputs
The Bypass 120 VAC logic circuit is interconnected with the Drive multi-function digital input terminals to allow a single
customer interface to control both Drive and Bypass circuits.
As a result, only Drive digital input terminals S6 and S7 are available for other uses. Drive Terminals S6, S7 and SN have been
brought out to TB5-5, TB5-4 and TB5-2 respectively. See Appendix A and Chapter 5, parameter H1-04 and H1-05 for
programming instructions.
Page 242 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 18
4DIP Switch Programmable Functions Summary
Auto Transfer to Bypass
When enabled (DIP switch S2-1 ON), the Bypass unit will automatically switch into Bypass mode on a Drive fault. After
clearing the Drive fault condition, the function resets by moving the disconnect switch to the OFF position and waiting for the
keypad to go blank. CAUTION: Before selecting this function in fan applications, care must be taken to ensure that the
ductwork is designed to handle the pressure resulting from full speed operation with the VAV terminal unit dampers at
minimum position or closed. The factory default for this function is disabled.
Power Up Mode
The Drive/Bypass electronic interface can be configured (via a DIP switch) to be in the AUTO mode or OFF when power is
applied to the unit. This function is controlled by DIP switch S2-2, ON for AUTO operation on power up. The factory default
is to power up to the OFF mode.
1
2
3
4
3
4
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
4-6
1-6
8
S1
ON OFF
IN OUT
FACTORY
SETTING
4-20MADC 0-10VDC ON
ON
OFF
YES
YES
YES
YES
YES NO
INACTIVE ACTIVE
INACTIVE ACTIVE
DIP
SWITCH
SETTINGS
DESCRIPTION
S2
S3
S4
POS.
SAFETY INTERLOCKS AT TB1(1)
BAS/DAMPER INTERLOCKS AT TB1(3)
TB3(3) CONNECTED TO DRIVE ANALOG INPUT 2 (A2)
TB3(3) CONNECTED TO DRIVE ANALOG INPUT 1 (A1)
DRIVE ANALOG INPUT 2 (A2) SIGNAL (H3-08="0", FOR 0-10VDC)
1
2
AUTO TRANSFER TO BYPASS UPON A DRIVE FAULT
OFF AUTO OFF
OFF ACTIVE
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
ACTIVE
INACTIVE
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
OFF
INACTIVE
INACTIVE
INACTIVE
INACTIVE
INACTIVE
INACTIVE
POWER UP IN THE "OFF" OR "AUTO" MODE
3 POWER UP IN THE MAINTENANCE MODE
SEE TABLE 2.6
SEE TABLE 2.6
RESERVED FOR FUTURE EXPANSION MUST BE AT FACTORY SETTING
SPEED COMMAND FROM DRIVE TERMINAL A2, WITH SERIAL COMM.
RESERVED FOR FUTURE EXPANSION MUST BE AT FACTORY SETTING
RESERVED FOR FUTURE EXPANSION MUST BE AT FACTORY SETTING
RESERVED FOR FUTURE EXPANSION MUST BE AT FACTORY SETTING
RESERVED FOR FUTURE EXPANSION MUST BE AT FACTORY SETTING
SERIAL COMMUNICATIONS TERMINATING RESISTANCE SEE TABLE 5.2
SEE TABLE 5.2
TABLE 2.13 DIP Switch Functions
Page 243 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 19
4Bypass Controller PCB
Fig 2.9 Bypass Control Circuit Inputs and Outputs
Customer provided contact closure inputs must have a minimum rating of 5 mA at 120 VAC.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
1
2
3
4
5
6
4
3
1
2
4
2
3
1
AC
+V
FM
+
-
SHIELD
ISOLATED
4-20MADC
OR
0-10VDC
AUTO MODE
SPEED
REFERENCE
INPUT
6
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
REMOTE TRANSFER
SMOKE PURGE
SPARE 6
9
8
7
5
4
3
2
1
TB1
TB2
TB3
TB1 TB1
MIN. RATING
OF CONTACTS:
MIN. RATING
OF CONTACTS:
CN103
A1/A2 FACTORY SETTING IS 4-20mA CONNECTED TO
DRIVE TERMINAL A2 (AS SELECTED BY DIP SWITCH
S1(2), (3) & (4))
OR
INTERNAL SUPPLY
120 VAC LOGIC
CUSTOMER SUPPLIED
120 VAC LOGIC
A2
PROGRAMMABLE
RELAY #1
MOTOR
RUN
5MA, 120VAC
5MA, 120VAC
120VAC
+/- 15%,
25MA MIN.,
4MA MAX.
LEAKAGE
CURRENT
120VAC COMMON
7
8
9
6
5
4
3
2
1
PE
USER SUPPLY COMMON
ELECTRONIC BYPASS
CONTROL PCB
S+
S-
R+
R-
1
2
3
J1 J1
3
2
1
DRIVE
TERMINAL
S7 INPUT
DRIVE
TERMINAL
S6 INPUT
AC
AM
+V
(+15VDC, 20mA)
A2
4-20MADC OR 0-10VDC
(AS SELECTED BY
DIP SW. S1(2).
FACTORY SETTING IS
4-20MADC)
TB5
TB4
DRIVE AM MONITOR OUPUT
4-20MADC OR 0-10VDC
(AS SELECTED BY JUMPER J3.
FACTORY SETTING IS 4-20MADC)
PROGRAMMABLE
RELAY #2
PROGRAMMABLE
RELAY #3
(FACTORY SETTING
IS SYSTEM FAULT)
(FACTORY SETTING)
ELECTRONIC BYPASS
CONTROL PCB
ELECTRONIC BYPASS
CONTROL PCB
SAFETY INTERLOCKS
(+15VDC,
20mA)
3
2
4-20
MADC
1
3
2
0-10
VDC
1
J2 J3
(AS SELECTED BY
DIP SWITCH S1 (2, 3, & 4).
SEE SH. 2, TABLE 4.
FACTORY SETTING
IS 4-20MADC,
CONNECTED TO DRIVE
ANALOG INPUT 2 (A2).)
BAS/DAMPER INTERLOCK
AUTO MODE RUN/STOP
(FACTORY SETTING
IS HAND MODE)
(FACTORY SETTING
IS AUTO MODE)
FACTORY SETTINGS
TB3(4)
FM AM
TB5(6)
DRIVE
TERMINAL
SN
DRIVE
TERMINAL
SP
NOT
USED
SEE THE
APPROPRIATE
TECHNICAL
MANUAL FOR
NETWORK
CONNECTIONS
OPTIONS
J, U OR V
SERIAL
COMMUNICATIONS
METASYS (J),
APOGEE (U) OR,
RS 422/485
MODBUS (V)
DRIVE FM MONITOR OUTPUT
4-20MADC OR 0-10VDC
(AS SELECTED BY JUMPER J2.
FACTORY SETTING IS 4-20MADC)
Page 244 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 20
4Wiring Checks
After all wiring is completed, perform the following checks:
1. Is all wiring correct?
2. Have all wire clippings, screws or other foreign material been removed from the Drive and Bypass enclosure?
3. Are all terminal screws tight?
4Control Circuit Wiring Precautions
Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits:
1. Separate control wiring from power/motor wiring and other high-power lines.
2. Separate wiring for control circuit terminals for digital outputs from wiring to other control circuit terminals.
3. If using an optional external power supply, it should be a UL Listed Class 2 power supply source.
4. Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits to prevent operating faults. Prepare cable ends as
shown in Figure 2.10.
5. Connect the shield wire to terminal PE.
6. Insulate the shield with tape to prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment.
Fig 2.10 Preparing the Termination of Shielded Twisted-Pair Cables
Table 2.14 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Bypass Units)
Terminals
Terminal
Screws
Tightening
Torque
lb.-in.
(Nm)
Possible
Wire Sizes
AWG
(mm
2
)
Recommended
Wire Size
AWG
(mm
2
)
Wire Type
TB1-1 to 14
TB2-1 to 6
TB3-1 to 4
TB4-1 to 4
TB5-1 to 9
Phoenix
type *
3
4.2 to 5.3
(0.5 to 0.6)
Stranded
wire:
26 to 16
(0.14 to 1.5)
18
(0.75) Shielded, twisted-pair wire
*1
Shielded, polyethylene-covered,
vinyl sheath cable
PE M3.5
7.0 to 8.8
(0.8 to 1.0)
20 to 14
(0.5 to 2
*2
)
12
(1.25)
*1. Use shielded twisted-pair cables to input an external speed command.
*2. We recommend using straight solderless terminals on digital inputs to simplify wiring and improve reliability.
*3. We recommend using a thin-slot screwdriver with a 3.5 mm blade width.
Shield sheath Insulation
Connect to shield sheath
terminal PE on PCB A2
Insulate with tape
Do not connect here.
Page 245 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 21
4Bypass Control Circuit Terminal Functions
The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table 2.15.
Table 2.15 Bypass Control Circuit Terminals
Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level
Digital
input
signals
TB1-1
NC Safety Circuit Fault when OPEN
Dry
Contacts
TB1-9
TB1-2
Auto Mode run/stop command Run when CLOSED; stopped when OPEN.
TB1-9
TB1-3
BAS Interlock Enable Drive when Closed
TB1-9
TB1-4
Remote Transfer Transfer to Bypass when Closed
TB1-9
TB1-5
Smoke Purge Transfer to Bypass when Closed
TB1-9
TB5-4
Drive Input Terminal S7 Programmable Input
TB5-2
TB5-5
Drive Input Terminal S6 Programmable Input
TB5-2
Analog
input
signals
TB3-2 +15 VDC power supply +15 VDC power supply for analog Transmitters
+15 VDC
(Max. current: 20 mA)
TB3-3
Analog input or Speed Command
when connected to Drive
Terminal A2 by DIP switches
S1-3 and S1-4
4 to 20 mA/100% or 0 to +10
VDC/100%
(H3-08 and DIP switch S1-2)
Function set by
H3-09.
4 to 20 mA(250)
0 to +10 V(20 k)
Analog Input or Speed Command
when connected to Drive
Terminal A1 by DIP switches
S1-3 and S1-4
0 to +10 VDC/100% 0 to +10 V(20 k)
TB5-9
Multi-function analog input
connected to Drive terminal A2
4 to 20 mA/100% or 0 to +10
VDC/100%
(H3-08 and DIP switch S1-2)
Function set by
H3-09.
4 to 20 mA(250)
0 to +10 V(20 k)
TB3-1
Analog input common
TB5-7
PE
Shield wire, optional ground line
connection point

Digital
output
signals
TB1-10
Motor Run CLOSED During Motor Operation
Dry contacts
Contact capacity:
5 A max. at 250 VAC
5 A max. at 120 VAC
TB1-11
TB1-12
Programmable Relay 1
Form C Relay Function Selections:
1. Bypass Run
2. Damper Actuator
3. Auto Transfer
4. Drive Run
5. Serial Com. Run
6. Hand Mode
7. Auto Mode
8. System Fault
See Table 2.6 for DIP Switch programming
TB1-13
TB1-14
TB2-1
Programmable Relay 2 TB2-2
TB2-3
TB2-4
Programmable Relay 3
TB2-5
TB2-6
Page 246 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 22
Analog
output
signals
TB3-4
Multi-function analog output
(Drive terminal FM)
Frequency Output
0 to +10 VDC/100% frequency
Multi-function
analog monitor 1
Function set by
H4-01
0 to +10 VDC or 4-20
mA set by Jumper J2
and H4-07
TB3-1
Analog output common
TB5-7
0 to +10 VDC or 4-20 mA
set by Jumper J3
and H4-08
TB5-6
Multi-function analog output
(Drive terminal AM)
Current Monitor
0 to +10 VAC/100%
Drive's rated current
Multi-function
analog monitor 2
Function set by
H4-04
RS-485/
422
TB4-1
Communication input
For 2-wire RS-485, short TB4-3 to TB4-1
and TB4-4 to TB4-2.
Differential input,
optical isolation
TB4-2
TB4-3
Communication output
Differential input,
optical isolation
TB4-4
PE Signal common - -
Table 2.15 Bypass Control Circuit Terminals (Continued)
Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level
Page 247 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 23
Wiring Diagram
Page 248 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 24
Page 249 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 25
Electrical Overview
Fig 2.11 E7N Electronic Control Interconnection of Components
Ribbon
Cable
For
signals
between
drive and
PCB-A2
Cat 5 Cable
/w RJ 45
connectors
Electronic
Bypass Control
(PCB-A2)
E7 Drive
Control
Board
Drive
Keypad
Membrane
Keypad for
H/O/A
Control
Panel Components
Contactors
Control Xfmr
Motor OL
Customer
Control
Terminal
Blocks
Ribbon
cable for
LEDs and
switches
for H/O/A
control
Page 250 of 541
Electrical Installation 2 - 26
Notes:
Page 251 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 1
Chapter 3
Control Panel
This chapter describes the displays and functions of the Control Panel.
Digital Operator and Control Panel Display .................................... 2
Digital Operator and H/O/A Control Panel Keys ........................ 3
Drive Digital Operator/Keypad ................................................... 4
Control Panel Indicator Lights (LEDs) ....................................... 6
Selector Key Indicators............................................................... 9
Normal Control Panel Indicators................................................. 9
Abnormal Control Panel Indicators............................................. 9
Fault Control Panel Indicators .................................................. 10
Drive Main Menus ........................................................................ 11
Main Menu Structure ............................................................... 12
- DRIVE - Operation Menu ...................................................... 13
- QUICK - Quick Setting Menu ................................................ 16
- ADV- Programming Menu ..................................................... 18
- VERIFY - Modified Constants (Parameters) Menu ............... 20
- A.TUNE - Auto-Tuning Menu ................................................ 21
Example of Changing a Parameter .............................................. 22
Page 252 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 2
Digital Operator and Control Panel Display
The various items included on the Digital Operator Display and Control Panel are described below.
Fig 3.1 E7 Bypass Control Panel Component Names and Functions
The front control panel has a digital alpha/numeric display and keypad, in the upper portion, for Drive operation and program-
ming. The row of LEDs above the alpha/numeric display indicate Drive operational status. See Table 3.2 for an explanation.
The row of LEDs below the alpha/numeric display indicate the Drive menu that is presently active.
The lower portion of the front control panel displays the operating mode status via LEDs and controls the HAND/OFF/AUTO
functions for both the Drive and Bypass. The general rule for LED colors, in the lower portion of the control panel, is:
Green = Normal Status
Amber = Abnormal Status
Red = Fault Status
Drive Keypad Operator
Drive Digital
Operator/Keypad
Status Indicating LEDs
H/O/A Control Keypad
Drive/Bypass and
HAND/OFF/AUTO
Selector Keys
{
{
Menu Indicating
LCDs
Drive Operational Status
Alpha-Numeric
LCD Digital Display
Page 253 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 3
4Digital Operator and H/O/A Control Panel Keys
The names and functions of the Digital Operator and H/O/A Control Panel Keys are described in Table 3.1.
Table 3.1 Digital Operator and H/O/A Control Panel Keys
Key Name Function
MENU Key Scrolls from one of the five main menus to the next.
ESCAPE Key Returns to the display before the DATA/ENTER key was pressed.
INCREASE Key Increases parameter numbers and set values. Used to move to the next item or data.
DECREASE Key
Decreases parameter numbers and set values. Used to move to the previous item or
data.
SHIFT/RESET Key
Selects the digit to be changed. The selected digit will blink. Also resets the Drive
when a fault has occurred.
DATA/ENTER Key Pressed to enter menus and parameters as well as to set values.
Drive Select Key Selects the Drive mode of operation.
Bypass Select Key Selects the Bypass mode of operation.
HAND Key
Operates the Drive or Bypass via the local control panel. A Run command is
automatic.
OFF Key Removes the Run command.
AUTO Key
Enables the Drive or Bypass to be operated by a remote device such as a DDC or
BAS.
Drive Test Key Provides local control of the Drive while the motor is operating in Bypass mode.
Drive
Select
Bypass
Select
HAND
OFF
AUTO
Drive
Test
Page 254 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 4
4Drive Digital Operator/Keypad
Drive Operational Status Indicators
The definition of the Drive operational status indicators are shown in Table 3.2.
Drive REMOTE Sequence (SEQ) and REMOTE Reference (REF) indicators
The Bypass operates differently than a stand alone Drive with regard to these two indicators. The Bypass control logic interfaces
with the Drive via terminals that would be used, in a Drive only installation, for the REMOTE Sequence (Run Command), and
REMOTE Reference (Speed Command).
Since these terminals are active and the appropriate parameters configured for the Bypass unit operation (see Tables 5.1 and
5.2), the REMOTE Sequence and REMOTE Reference LEDs will be lit even when the H/O/A HAND button is pressed (local
control), providing both the run and speed command from the local control panel. The control signals are Local to the Drive
and Bypass unit, but Remote from the Drive itself.
An exception to this rule occurs for the REMOTE REF indicator when serial communication is employed. See Table 3.3.
Table 3.2 Drive Operational Status Indicators
Indicator Definition
FWD Lit (red) when a forward run command is input. Also lit when the Drive is in Hand Mode.
REV Lit (red) when a reverse run command is input.
REMOTE SEQ Lit (red) when set up for remote run command, see Table 3.3.
REMOTE REF Lit (red) when set up for remote speed command, see Table 3.3.
ALARM Lit (red) when a fault has occurred and flashing when an alarm has occurred.
Table 3.3 Drive REMOTE Sequence (SEQ) and
REMOTE Reference (REF) Indicators
Indicator HAND AUTO
Analog Input
REMOTE SEQ ON ON
REMOTE REF ON ON
Serial COM Input
REMOTE SEQ OFF ON
REMOTE REF OFF ON
Page 255 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 5
Drive Run Indicator
The status of the RUN indicator is shown in Table 3.4 when the Drive is either in the Hand or Auto mode.

Drive Stop Indicator
The status of the STOP indicator is shown in Table 3.5 when the Drive is either in the Hand or Auto mode.
The relationship between the indicators for RUN and STOP and the Drive status is shown in Fig. 3.2.
Fig 3.2 RUN and STOP Indicators
Table 3.4 RUN Indicator
Indicator Status Description
On (Red) Drive is running
Blinking (Red) Drive is decelerating to a stop
Off Drive is stopped
Table 3.5 STOP Indicator
Indicator Status Description
On (Red) Drive is decelerating to a stop or stopped
Blinking (Red) Drive is in a run condition but the speed command is zero
Off Drive is running
RUN STOP
Page 256 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 6
4 Control Panel Indicator Lights (LEDs)
Control Power Status Indicator

Drive Run Indicator
Bypass Run Indicator
Table 3.6 Control Power Indicator
Indicator Status Condition
On (Green)
3 Phase Power is applied to the Bypass unit and the control power
transformer is functioning.
Off
3 Phase Power is disconnected from the Bypass unit or a control
power transformer fuse has cleared.
Table 3.7 Drive Run Indicator
Indicator Status Condition
On (Green)
The Drive has been given a run command in HAND or AUTO mode
and the Bypass circuit is de-energized.
Off
The Drive has no run command in either the HAND or AUTO
modes. The unit may be operating in Bypass mode.
Table 3.8 Bypass Run Indicator
Indicator Status Description
On (Amber)
The Bypass has been given a run command in the HAND or AUTO
mode.
Or, the operation has been remotely transferred to Bypass using the
Remote Transfer to Bypass feature via a BAS contact closure at
terminals TB1-4 and TB1-9.
Or, the operation has been automatically transferred to Bypass after a
Drive fault condition via the DIP switch selectable Auto Transfer to
Bypass feature (S2-1).
Or, the operation has been transferred to Bypass using the Smoke
Purge feature via a contact closure at terminals TB1-5 and TB1-9.
The motor is running at full speed across-the-line and the Drive is
disconnected from the motor.
Off
The Bypass has no run command in either the HAND or AUTO modes.
The unit may be operating in Drive mode.
Page 257 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 7
Bypass Motor OL Indicator
Safeties Open Status Indicator
Drive Fault Indicator
Smoke Purge Status Indicator
Table 3.9 Motor OL Indicator
Indicator Status Description
On (Red)
The motor overload (S10 on schematic E7N-00) has tripped OFF de-
energizing both the Drive and Bypass Circuits.
Off The motor overload (S10) is satisfied.
Table 3.10 Safeties Open Indicator
Indicator Status Description
On (Red)
The NC motor safety circuit connected to terminals TB1-1 and TB1-9
has an open circuit condition.
Off The NC motor safety circuit is satisfied or this function is disabled by
DIP switch S2-7.
Table 3.11 Drive Fault Indicator
Indicator Status Description
On (Red) The Drive has tripped OFF due to an internal Drive fault.
Off The Drive is ready for operation, or operating normally.
Table 3.12 Smoke Purge Indicator
Indicator Status Description
On (Amber)
The Smoke Purge function has been activated, the building fire control
system has closed a contact between terminals TB1-5 and TB1-9.
Off Smoke Purge is not active, the Drive & Bypass are operating normally.
Page 258 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 8
Auto Run Status Indicator
Drive Ready Indicator
Auto/Rem Xfer Status Indicator
Damper/BAS Status Indicator
Table 3.13 Auto Run Indicator
Indicator Status Description
On (Green) The E7N is in AUTO mode and has received a Run command at TB1-2.
Off The E7N is not in AUTO mode or has not received a Run command
when in AUTO mode.
Table 3.14 Drive Ready Indicator
Indicator Status Description
On (Green) The Drive is ready to run or is running (no faults).
Off The Drive has a fault that will prevent operation.
Table 3.15 Auto/Rem Xfer Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
On (Amber)
Auto Transfer to Bypass operation or Remote Transfer to Bypass
operation is active.
Off Auto or Remote Transfer to Bypass are not active (Auto Transfer may
be disabled by DIP switch S2-1).
Table 3.16 Damper/BAS Status Indicator
Indicator Status Description
On (Red)
A NC damper end switch or other BAS interlock contact at TB1-3 is
open.
Off This function is disabled by DIP switch S2-8 or a contact closure exists
between terminals TB1-3 and TB1-9.
Page 259 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 9
4Selector Key Indicators
When off these selector key indicators simply mean that the function has not been selected. The table below describes the
operation when these functions are selected and the key indicator is lit.
4Normal Control Panel Indicators
4Abnormal Control Panel Indicators
Table 3.17 Selector Key Indicators
Selector Key LED Color Function When Lit
Drive Select Green The Drive mode of operation is selected.
Bypass Select Amber The Bypass mode of operation is selected.
HAND Amber The Drive or Bypass is operated via the local control panel. A Run
command is automatic.
OFF Amber The Run command has been removed from the Drive or Bypass.
AUTO Green The Drive or Bypass is operated via a remote device (DDC or BAS).
Drive Test Amber The Drive is operated via the local control panel while the motor is
operating in Bypass mode.
Run LED
Auto LED
(Green in Auto Mode)
(Green indicates Run Command)
(Green indicates no problems)
Ready LED
Auto Run LED
(Green with Auto Mode & Auto Start)
Control Power LED
(Green with Power Applied)
Drive Select LED
(Green in Drive Mode)
Auto Transfer LED
(Amber in Auto X-fer to Bypass Mode;
Amber in Remote X-fer to Bypass Mode)
Drive Test LED
(Amber in Drive Test Mode)
HAND LED
(Amber in Hand Mode)
OFF LED
(Amber in Off Mode)
Smoke Purge LED
(Amber when Smoke Purge activated)
Bypass Select LED
(Amber in Bypass Mode & Run)
Page 260 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 10
4Fault Control Panel Indicators
Safety Open LED
Damper/BAS LED
(Red when Damper Circuit or BAS open)
Fault LED
(Red when Drive is faulted)
Motor O/L LED
(Red when Thermal Overload is tripped)
(Red when Customer Safety is open)
Page 261 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 11
Drive Main Menus
The Drives parameters and monitoring functions are organized into groups called menus that make it easier to read and set
parameters. The Drive is equipped with five menus. The five menus and their primary functions are shown in Table 3.18 and
are directly available by pressing the MENU key.
Table 3.18 Drive Main Menus
Main Menu Primary Function(s)
- DRIVE -
Operation
The Drive can be run in this menu. Also called the Monitor menu.
Use this menu for monitoring values such as frequency reference or output current, displaying fault
history or displaying the fault traces.
- QUICK -
Quick Setting
The Drive can be programmed in this menu.
Use this menu to set/read the most commonly used parameters.
- ADV -
Programming
The Drive can be programmed in this menu.
Use this menu to set/read every parameter.
- VERIFY -
Modified Constants
(Parameters)
The Drive can be programmed in this menu.
Use this menu to set/read the parameters that have been modified from their factory default settings.
- A.TUNE -
Auto-Tuning
For Bypass units Auto-Tuning can only be accomplished through the DriveWizard software
(Part Number DWST616-C2). A free download from www.drives.com.
The Drive can be programmed in this menu.
Auto-tune the Drive in order to utilize the bi-directional speed search feature.
Page 262 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 12
4Main Menu Structure
The menu selection display will appear when the MENU key is pressed from a monitor or setting display.
Press the MENU key from the menu selection display to switch between the menus.
Press the DATA/ENTER key from the menu selection key to monitor data and from a monitor display to access the setting
display.

Fig 3.3 Menu Transitions

WARNING
When running the Drive after using the Digital Operator, press the MENU Key to enter the Drive menu
(DRIVE indicator will flash) and then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the drive menu display to bring up
the monitor display (DRIVE indicator will light). (Monitor display in the drive menu will appear when the
power is turned ON.)
Power ON
Drive Menu
Quick
Programming Menu
Advanced
Programming Menu
Verify Menu
Autotuning
Menu
If a user constant is changed
the number will be displayed.
(Operation possible)
When returning from a setting
display, the rightmost digit
of the monitor display will
flash.
Menu Selection Displays Monitor Displays Setting Displays
Lit Flashing Not lit
Page 263 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 13
4- DRIVE - Operation Menu
This menu is used for setting a speed command or monitoring values such as output frequency and output current. It is also
used for displaying the fault history and the fault traces. The Drive may be limited to this menu in order to accept a run
command, see parameter b1-08 in Chapter 5 and Table 5.1.
Example Operations
Key operations in drive menu are shown in the following figure.
Fig 3.4 Operations in Drive Menu
Menu Selection Display Monitor Constant Display Deleted Monitor Constant Monitor Display
Drive Menu Frequency reference
Output frequency
Output current
Monitor setting for o1-01
Status Monitor
Error Trace
Fault History
Frequency reference setting/
display unit 01-03
Frequency reference
Fan operating time
Current error
Operating time at error
1st previous error
Operating time at 4th
previous error
Power On
Display
Page 264 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 14
U1 Monitor Parameter List
Use and keys to scroll through the U1 Monitor parameter list.
Monitor Parameters
U1-01 Frequency Ref
U1-02 Output Freq
U1-03 Output Current
U1-06 Output Voltage
U1-07 DC Bus Voltage
U1-08 Output kWatts
U1-10 Input Term Sts
U1-11 Output Term Sts
U1-12 Int Ctl Sts 1
U1-13 Elapsed Time
U1-14 FLASH ID
U1-15 Term A1 Level
U1-16 Term A2 Level
U1-18 Mot SEC Current
U1-20 SFS Output
U1-24 PI Feedback
U1-28 CPU ID
U1-29 kWh
U1-30 MWh
U1-34 OPE Detected
U1-36 PI Input
U1-37 PI Output
U1-38 PI Setpoint
U1-39 Transmit Err
U1-40 FAN Elapsed Time
U1-51 Auto Mode Fref
U1-52 Hand Mode Fref
U1-53 PI Feedback 2
Page 265 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 15
U2 Fault Trace Parameter List
After viewing the Monitor parameter list, one may view the Fault Trace parameter list.
Use and keys to scroll through the U2 Fault Trace parameter list.
U3 Fault History Parameter List
After viewing the Fault Trace parameter list, one may view the Fault History parameter list.
Use and keys to scroll through the U3 Fault History parameter list.
Fault Trace Parameters
U2-01 Current Fault
U2-02 Last Fault
U2-03 Frequency Ref
U2-04 Output Freq
U2-05 Output Current
U2-07 Output Voltage
U2-08 DC Bus Voltage
U2-09 Output kWatts
U2-11 Input Term Sts
U2-12 Output Term Sts
U2-13 AC Drive Status
U2-14 Elapsed Time
Fault History Parameters
U3-01 Last Fault
U3-02 Fault Message 2
U3-03 Fault Message 3
U3-04 Fault Message 4
U3-05 Elapsed Time 1
U3-06 Elapsed Time 2
U3-07 Elapsed Time 3
U3-08 Elapsed Time 4
U3-09 Fault Message 5
U3-10 Fault Message 6
U3-11 Fault Message 7
U3-12 Fault Message 8
U3-13 Fault Message 9
U3-14 Fault Message 10
U3-15 Elapsed Time 5
U3-16 Elapsed Time 6
U3-17 Elapsed Time 7
U3-18 Elapsed Time 8
U3-19 Elapsed Time 9
U3-20 Elapsed Time 10
Page 266 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 16
4- QUICK - Quick Setting Menu
This menu is used to set/read a limited set of parameters in the Drive. Follow the key operations below to access the Quick
Setting Menu.
Example Operations
Key operations in quick programming menu are shown in the following figure.
Fig 3.5 Operations in Quick Programming Menu
Menu Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
Quick Programming Menu Language Selection
Reference selection
Operation method selection
Stopping method selection
User Parameter Default Value
Frequency Operation Time
Cumulative Operation Time
Read Allowed Selection
E1-01: Input Voltage Setting
E2-01: Motor Rated Current
F6-01: Operation Selection After Communication Error
H3-02: Terminal A1 Gain Setting
H3-03: Terminal A1 Bias Setting
H3-10: Terminal A2 Gain Setting
H3-11: Terminal A2 Bias Setting
L2-01: Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection
L2-02: Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time
L4-05: Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection
L4-06: Frequency Reference Level at Loss Frequency
L5-01: Number of Auto Restarts Attempts
L5-03: Maximum Restart Time After Fault
L6-01: Torque Detection Selection 1
L6-02: Torque Detection Level 1
L6-03: Torque Detection Time 1
L8-11: Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time
o1-01: User Monitor Selection
o1-05: LCD Brightness Adjustment
o1-07: Second Line User Monitor Selection
o1-08: Third Line User Monitor Selection
b1-04: Reverse Operation Selection
b4-01: Delay - ON Timer
b5-XX: PI Mode Parameters
b8-01: Energy Savings
Control Selection
C1-01: Acceleration Time 1
C1-02: Deceleration Time 1
d2-01: Frequency Reference
Upper Limit
d2-02: Frequency Reference
Lower Limit
Page 267 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 17
Use and keys to scroll through the Quick Setting parameter list.
* This parameters menu location is Quick Setting when b5-01=1, and Programming when b5-01=0.
Parameter
Number
Parameter Name
b1-01 Frequency Reference Selection
b1-02 Run command Selection
b1-03 Stopping Method Selection
b5-01 PI Mode Selection
b5-02* Proportional Gain Setting
b5-03* Integral Time Setting
b5-31* PI Unit Selection
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1
d2-01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit
d2-02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit
E1-01 Input Voltage Setting
E2-01 Motor Rated Current
H3-08* Terminal A2 Signal Level Selection
H3-09* Auxiliary Terminal Function Selection
H3-13* Master/Frequency Reference Terminal Selection
Page 268 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 18
4- ADV- Programming Menu
This menu is used to set/read every parameter in the Drive. Follow the key operations below to access the Programming Menu.
Example Operations
Key operations in advanced programming menu are shown in the following figure.
Fig 3.6 Operations in Advanced Programming Menu
Menu Selection Display Function Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
Advanced Programming Menu Setup settings: A1-xx
PID control: b5-xx
Torque limits: L7-xx
Copy functions: 03-xx
Language
Access level
Control mode selection
PID control mode selection
Proportional gain
PID feedback command
loss detection time
Forward torque limit
Reverse torque limit
Reverse regenerative torque limit
Copy function selection
Read permitted selection
Page 269 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 19
Use , , and keys to scroll through the Programming parameter group list. For a complete parameter list
see Appendix A.
Parameter Group Functions
A1 Initialization
A2 User Parameters
b1 Sequence
b2 DC Braking
b3 Speed Search
b4 Delay Timers
b5 PI Control
b8 Energy Saving
C1 Accel/Decel
C2 S-Curve Acc/Dec
C4 Torque Comp
C6 Carrier Freq
d1 Preset Reference
d2 Reference Limits
d3 Jump Frequencies
d4 Sequence
d6 Field-Weakening
E1 V/F Pattern
E2 Motor Setup
F6 Com OPT Setup
H1 Digital Inputs
H2 Digital Outputs
H3 Analog Inputs
H4 Analog Outputs
H5 Serial Com Setup
L1 Motor Overload
L2 PwrLoss Ridethru
L3 Stall Prevention
L4 Ref Detection
L5 Fault Restart
L6 Torque Detection
L8 Hdwe Protection
n1 Hunting Prev
n3 High Slip
o1 Monitor Select
o2 Key Selections
o3 COPY Function
Page 270 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 20
4- VERIFY - Modified Constants (Parameters) Menu
Verify menu is used to display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a programming menu or by
autotuning. None will be displayed if no settings have been changed.
For the initialization parameters, only A1-00 will be displayed if it has been changed. Other initialize mode settings will not be
displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings.
In the verify menu, the same procedures can be used to change settings as they are used in the programming menus. Use the
INCREASE, DECREASE, and Shift/RESET keys to change the parameters. When the DATA/ENTER key is pressed after
changing the setting, the user parameter will be written into memory and the display will return to parameter monitor
automatically.
Example Operations
An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their default settings:
b1-01 (Reference Selection), C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1), E1-01 (Input Voltage Setting), and E2-01 (Motor Rated Current).
Fig 3.7 Operations in Verify Menu
Menu Selection Display Monitor Display Setting Display
Verify Menu
Frequency reference
selection
Acceleration time 1
Input voltage setting
Motor rated current
Frequency reference
selection
Acceleration time 1
Input voltage setting
Motor rated current
Page 271 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 21
4- A.TUNE - Auto-Tuning Menu
For E7 Bypass units Auto-Tuning can only be accomplished through the DriveWizard software (Part Number DWST616-C2).
A free download from www.drives.com.
This menu is used in non-bypass Drives to auto-tune the Drive in order to utilize the bi-directional speed search feature. Fol-
low the key operations below to access the Auto-Tuning Menu.
For Reference Purposes
Fig 3.8 Operation in Autotuning Menu
Autotuning Monitor Display Setting Display
Autotuning Motor output power
Motor rated current
Autotuning start*
Motor output power
Autotuning Stop command input
Autotuning completed
Motor rated current
Page 272 of 541
Control Panel 3 - 22
Example of Changing a Parameter
Table 3.19 provides an example of how to change parameter C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) from 30 sec to 20 sec.
Table 3.19 Changing a Parameter in the Programming Menu
Step
Number
Digital Operator Display Description
1 Power supply turned ON.
2 MENU Key pressed to enter drive menu.
3
MENU Key pressed to enter quick programming
menu.
4
MENU Key pressed to enter advanced
programming menu.
5 DATA/ENTER pressed to access monitor display.
6
INCREASE or DECREASE Key pressed to display
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1).
7
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to access setting
display. The setting of C1-01 (30.00) is displayed.
8
Shift/RESET Key pressed to move the flashing
digit to the right.
9
DECREASE Key pressed to change set value to
20.00 s.
10
DATA/ENTER Key pressed to enter the set data.
END is displayed for 10 s and then the entered
value is displayed for 0.5 s.
11 The monitor display for C1-01 returns.
Page 273 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 1
Chapter 4
Start Up and Operation
This chapter describes the procedures to prepare for and conduct the E7N Drive
and Bypass unit start up.
Start Up Introduction ...................................................................... 2
The Safety Interlock Circuit at Power Up ................................... 2
The BAS Interlock Circuit at Power Up ...................................... 3
Bypass Unit Start Up Preparation .................................................. 4
Bypass Unit Start Up Procedure .................................................... 5
Bypass Unit Operation Description ............................................... 10
Selector Key Functions ............................................................ 12
DIP Switch Selectable Functions ............................................. 12
Contact Closure Inputs ............................................................ 14
Page 274 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 2
Start Up Introduction
In order to provide you with the most reliable Drive and Bypass unit available, and to avoid any extra costs related to loss or
reduction of warranty coverage, an authorized Yaskawa service representative should complete this start up procedure. Please
complete the checklist in this document and maintain it in a secured location. Should you have a need to contact Yaskawa in
the future, technical service personnel may request information from this document.
Procedures within this document assume that start up is being accomplished by a Yaskawa authorized service person who has
training on the product and is capable of working through the detailed steps with power applied to the Bypass unit while the
enclosure door is open.
Start-Up Date: ____________________________ Start-Up Location: ___________________________________
Start-Up Person: ___________________________ Company Name: _____________________________________
Phone Number: ___________________________ Signature: __________________________________________
Sales Order Number: _______________________ E7N Unit Tag Number: _______________________________
Drive Model Number: ______________________ Drive Serial Number: _________________________________
In this Start-Up chapter, when referring to the keypad display, the complete description of the parameter setting choices are
presented for clarity purposes. For example, one of the setting choices for parameter b1-02 is 1: terminals. Keep in mind that
on the standard LED keypad display, only the number of the choice will be shown. The optional LCD keypad display is
required to see the complete description.
4The Safety Interlock Circuit at Power Up
On power up the E7N will display a red Safety Open LED in the System Status area of the front control panel if a normally
closed Safety Circuit has not been installed between TB1-1 and TB1-9 on PCB A2. This condition will prevent Drive or
Bypass operation.
One of the following three items needs to be done prior to start-up:
1) Install an NC Safety Circuit between TB1-1 and TB1-9 on PCB A2.
2) Install a jumper between TB1-1 and TB1-9 on PCB A2. This method should be used if a Safety Circuit will be added
later in the installation.
3) De-activate these terminals by moving DIP switch S2-7 to the ON position (toward the enclosure door). This solution is
only suggested if a Safety Circuit will never be applied to the drive system.
IMPORTANT INFORMATION
CAUTION
Page 275 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 3
4The BAS Interlock Circuit at Power Up
When a Run command is received in HAND or AUTO mode, the E7N will display a red Damper/Bas LED in the System
Status area of the front control panel. This condition will prevent Drive or Bypass operation.
One of the following three items needs to be done prior to start-up:
1) Install a BAS Interlock Circuit between TB1-3 and TB1-9 on PCB A2.
2) Install a jumper between TB1-3 and TB1-9 on PCB A2. This method should be used if a BAS Interlock Circuit will be
added later in the installation.
3) De-activate these terminals by moving DIP switch S2-8 to the ON position (toward the enclosure door). This solution is
only suggested if a Safety Circuit will never be applied to the drive system.
Page 276 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 4
BYPASS UNIT START UP PREPARATION
Note: These instructions assume that all jumpers and DIP switches are in the factory default position as defined by schematic
diagram DS.E7N.01.
E 1. Review this Bypass Technical Manual and any option instructions and schematics shipped with the Drive and Bypass
unit.
E 2. Verify that the model numbers and voltage ratings are as specified in the purchase order by matching the nameplate
data for each unit to the purchase order.
E 3. Verify that the unit has been installed in accordance with Chapter 1, Receiving and Mechanical Installation and
Chapter 2, Electrical Installation.
E 4. Inspect the security of the supply line power, ground connections and all control circuit connections as identified in
Chapter 2, Electrical Installation.
Double check all the power wires and motor wires.
Verify that the electrical supply power lines (L1, L2, L3) are connected to the input disconnect switch (S1 on the wir-
ing diagram in Chapter 2) and that the motor leads (T1, T2, T3) are connected to the output terminals of the overload
relay (S10 on the wiring diagram in Chapter 2). Ensure that all connections are tight, loose wire connections may
cause intermittent problems or overheating. Factory connections sometimes come loose during shipment.
E 5. Review the installers as wired schematic. Determine if a driven motor safety circuit is connected. This is a series
circuit of NC contacts from devices such as a smoke/fire sensor, freeze-up thermostat or high static pressure limit
switch. Verify that these customer emergency contacts are properly terminated in the Bypass safety shutdown circuit.
These contacts should be wired between terminal TB1-1 and TB1-9. No field programming is required.
Verify that all other field installed wires are correctly terminated (included the shields).
E 6. Verify that the motor is wired for the application voltage. Record the motor nameplate information:
Voltage ______________________________ Motor Rated Amps ___________________________________

E 7. Verify that the input voltage matches the Bypass unit rating.
E 8. Verify that the motor rated full load amps (FLA) does not exceed the rated output current of the Drive and Bypass
controlling it. When multiple motors are simulaneously operated by the Drive, the sum of all motor FLA values must
be less than or equal to that of the Drive and Bypass controlling them.
E 9. Record any other connections to the Bypass unit, by terminal number to determine if special programming of any of
the following is required. (see Chapter 5 or TM.E7.02 for programming details).
Multi-function Digital Inputs
Multi-function Digital Outputs
Analog Outputs
Differential PI control
E 10. Verify that the building automation system logic is ready for the start, stop and speed command functions.
Page 277 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 5
BYPASS UNIT START UP PROCEDURE
(Please review Bypass Start Up Preparation on page 4-4)
The front control panel has a digital alpha/numeric display and keypad, in the upper portion, for Drive operation and program-
ming. The row of LEDs above the alpha/numeric display indicate Drive operational status. The REMOTE SEQ and REF
LEDs in this row are always lit in most Bypass unit applications of the E7 Drive (See Chapter 3 for an explanation). The row
of LEDs below the alpha/numeric display indicate the Drive menu that is presently active.
The lower portion of the front control panel displays the operating mode status via LEDs and controls the HAND/OFF/AUTO
functions for both the Drive and Bypass. The general rule for LED colors, in the lower portion of the control panel, is:
Green = Normal Status
Amber = Abnormal Status
Red = Fault Status
E 1. Before applying power, make sure that the following conditions are met:
The VAV terminal unit dampers, in supply fan applications, are open to prevent duct flexing or damage in a full
speed, across the line starting situation.
The electro-mechanical motor OverLoad Relay (OLR) (S10) is adjusted to equal the Full Load Amps (FLA) value
from the motor nameplate.
The OLR is mounted to the contactor assembly or back panel (depending on rating), just above the Bypass contactor.
See Figure 4.1. Electrically on the output power side of the Bypass unit, the adjustable thermal OLR provides overload
protection for the motor in both the Drive and Bypass operating modes. The OLR is set up in the factory to be a
manual reset device, requiring operator attention if an overload trip-out is experienced.
Fig 4.1 Typical Motor Overload and Contactors
Bypass Contactor
Overload Relay
Reset Button
OverLoad
Adjustment Dial
Circuit Breaker
Output Contactor
Adjustment Dial
Page 278 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 6
Fig 4.2 Overload Relay Detail
E 2. Apply power to the Drive and Bypass package. Using a VOM, ensure that all three phases are present and that the
input voltage is correct for the system being set up. When power is applied to the E7N unit, the control logic will
briefly (<3 seconds) self test all the control panel operating mode LEDs, located on the lower half of the control panel.
Then, the SEQ and REF LEDs (red), DRIVE menu LED (red), STOP LED (red), Control Power LED (green),
Ready LED (green), Drive Select LED (green) and OFF LED (amber) will be lit when the Drive and Bypass are
ready for operation. The alpha/numeric display will show input frequency (speed command), at power up. [Note: If
the Motor O/L LED (red) is lit, press the reset button on the motor overload relay.]
E 3. Various menus are directly available by pressing the MENU key (see Chapter 3). When in the DRIVE menu, the
Drive can accept a run command from local (Hand mode) or remote (Auto mode) sources. Press the MENU
key until the ADV/PRGM menu LED (red) is lit. From here, any of the E7 parameters can be accessed and
changed using the *,, and DATA/ENTER keys. See Appendix A for a list of programmable features. The
VERIFY menu can be used to review or modify only those parameters that have been changed from the Drives
default values. Using the *,, and DATA/ENTER keys as needed, verify that the parameters are correct for the
Drive and installation conditions. See the Factory Parameter Settings printed in Table 1 and Table 6 on page 2 and 3
of the E7N-00 Schematic Diagram or Chapter 5 (Table 5.1 and 5.2) of this manual. Consider any additional parameter
settings that may be needed by this specific application.
The Factory Parameter Settings, table 1 of DS.E7N.01, documents E7 Drive parameter settings, required to
interface with the Bypass logic circuit, that have been established at the factory and stored in a dedicated location
in the E7 memory as User Initialization values (think of it as a back-up file). If additional parameters are set
to the specific needs of the application project, and the system operation has been checked and verified, then the
User
Initialization values should be stored in memory again by entering 1: Set Default in parameter o2-03.
When there is a need for re-initialization (resetting to a known factory starting point for troubleshooting
purposes) of the E7N Drive, then a 2-wire initialization should be carried out by entering 2220: 2 Wire Initial
in parameter A1-03, followed by entering the 1110: User Initialize function, also in parameter A1-03. This will
re-establish the E7 Drive set-up required for the E7N Bypass application and any user parameter values that
have been stored.
IMPORTANT
To maintain overcurrent, short-circuit, and ground-fault protection, the manufacturers instructions for
setting the motor OLR must be followed.
Adjustment Dial
Test Button
Reset Button
Page 279 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 7
Table 1 is also used to document parameters that have been factory set to typical values for fan and pump
applications. These parameters [b1-07, b1-08, b8-01, L4-05, L5-01, L5-03, o1-02, o2-03 and o3-02] may be
changed to meet the needs of the specific application.
E 4. From the ADV/PRGM menu, press DATA/ENTER, go to parameter E1-01 and enter the nominal input voltage that
the Drive will receive in this specific application. The overall voltage classification of the Drive cannot be changed by
this parameter. However, the input voltage should be adjusted within the range available for the given voltage class
of the Drive to match the input voltage level normally found on the jobsite. For example, 480 VAC class Drives may
be employed on nominal three phase voltage distribution systems of: 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC. The factory
default values may need to be changed to meet the needs of the application distribution voltage.
E 5. From parameter E1-01, use the ESC, * and DATA/ENTER keys as necessary, to go to parameter E2-01 and enter
the Motor Rated Current. Set this parameter to the motor rated Full Load Amps (FLA) shown on the motor nameplate.
This is essential for proper Drive operation and motor overload protection. [Note: Do not include the service factor
amps.]
E 6. Press the MENU key to return to the DRIVE menu and the same operational status LED configuration described in
step 2 above. The alpha/numeric display will now be the speed command frequency.
To start the motor in Drive mode, press the HAND key. The DRIVE Run LEDs (red and green) and the HAND LED
(amber) will light and the Drive output will ramp up to 6 HZ. Verify that motor rotation is correct.
If the direction of motor rotation is wrong, press the OFF key and turn the Power OFF! Wait for the red CHARGE
LED (near the Drive power terminals) to go out. When it does, swap the wires for T1 & T2 on the output terminals
of the motor Overload Relay. Tighten the terminal lugs, reapply the power, press the HAND key and re-check the
rotation direction.
E 7. With correct motor rotation, press the MENU key, if necessary, to return to the DRIVE menu. Press DATA/ENTER
(as needed to get F flashing) then using the * and keys, manually run the Drive throughout its entire speed
range, while observing operation. If excessive vibration of the driven load is noted at specific frequencies (speeds), the
Jump Frequency function may be used to eliminate this vibration, by programming d3-01 through d3-04. Press the
OFF key.
E 8. Determine whether the remote speed command is a 0-10 VDC or a 4-20 mA signal. The positive side of the signal
should be connected to terminal TB3-3 of the E7N terminal strip. The common of the remote speed command
signal should be connected to terminal TB3-1 of the E7N. See the connection diagram on page 1 of the E7N Bypass
unit schematic E7N-00 (or Chapter 5 in this manual). [Note: The factory default is 4-20 mA, to change to 0 to 10 VDC
adjust parameter H3-08 to 0: 0-10VDC and move E7N DIP switch S1-2, on the terminal PCB to the OFF
position (toward the unit rear).]
E 9. For the Auto mode, request a run command and speed command signal from the building automation system to
confirm remote (auto) operation.
E 10. Press the AUTO key, the DRIVE Run LEDs (red and green), the AUTO LED (green) and AUTO Run LED (green)
will light and the Drive output will ramp up to the Auto mode speed command. Observe if the remote speed command
can achieve the minimum and maximum speeds desired. If not, perform the following: - See Chapter 5.
For 0-10 VDC input at Terminal TB3-3
1. With no input, adjust the Bias (H3-11 setting) until an output of 0.0 Hz is obtained.
2. With full scale input, adjust the Gain (H3-10 setting) until an output of 60.0 Hz (or other desired maximum
frequency) is obtained.
For 4-20 mA input at Terminal TB3-3
1. With 4 mA input, adjust Bias (H3-11 setting) until an output of 0.0 Hz is obtained.
2. With 20 mA input, adjust Gain (H3-10 setting) until an output of 60.0 Hz (or other desired maximum
frequency) is obtained.
Page 280 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 8
E 11. If the circuit breaker option is not present - go to step 12.
In preparation for testing the Bypass, observe the trip setting of the Circuit Breaker. The trip point is factory set at the
lowest possible setting and must be adjusted for each application. This breaker will trip due to inrush current and load
inertia unless it is reset!
For fan applications adjust the trip setting to ten times motor FLA.
For pump applications adjust the trip setting to six times motor FLA.
If Circuit Breaker tripping is experienced at these settings during motor starting on Bypass, increase the setting
gradually until the motor can be started without Circuit Breaker tripping.
E 12. Press the OFF key and press the BYPASS Select key. The Drive will ramp the motor to zero speed, then the control
will be transferred to Bypass mode. Be prepared to monitor the rotation direction of the motor in Bypass operation.
Bump the HAND key and quickly press the OFF key. Check the motor rotation. Do not allow the motor to continue
operating in Bypass mode until rotation is correct!
If the rotation direction in Bypass is correct, skip the rest of this step. If not, carry out the following corrections:
1. Turn OFF the incoming power feed to the E7N unit. Since the correct rotation in Drive mode was previously
established, do not change any output wires at the motor.
2. Instead, verify that power is OFF. Then swap the wires for L1 & L2 on the input side of the Disconnect Switch or
Circuit Breaker. This will effect rotation in Bypass operation only. Once connections are complete and tight,
reapply the incoming power and repeat the previous step to re-check the rotation direction in Bypass mode.
E 13. Run the motor in Bypass by pressing the HAND key. Record all the phase voltages and currents at this time.
E 14. Press the OFF key and press the DRIVE Select key. Press the HAND key and press the DATA/ENTER key, then
scroll the Speed Command to 60 HZ operation. Monitor the voltages and currents in each of the output phases at full
speed to make sure that the voltages are balanced and that the currents are within the motor nameplate rating during
accel, stable speed, and decel.
E 15. If this application requires the Drive to operate in PI mode, see Chapter 5.
For serial communication, refer to Appendix D in this manual or TM.E7.21 (APOGEE FLN) and TM.E7.22 (Metasys N2).
Page 281 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 9
Notes:
Page 282 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 10
Bypass Unit Operation Description
(For selector key positions, control inputs and DIP switch selectable functions.)
The Bypass has two modes of operation: Bypass and Drive. When in the Bypass mode the connected motor is run directly
from the incoming AC line, whereas in Drive mode the motor is run from the Drive output. The DRIVE Select and Bypass
Select keys located on the front panel determine the operating mode. Within each operating mode are two methods of control;
HAND and AUTO. The HAND/OFF/AUTO selector keys on the front panel determine this control method.
Table 4.1 provides a look at various combinations of the control panel selector key positions, control inputs to TB1 through
TB5 and the status of the DIP switch selectable functions.
1 O Drive 0 0 D E X E X X None
2 O Drive 0 0 D E 0 X None On
3 O Drive 0 0 D X E 0 X None
4 H Drive 0 0 D X E 0 X None On
5 H Drive 0 0 D X X X Drive
6 H Bypass N 0 0 D X X X Bypass
7 H Bypass T 0 0 D X X X Bypass
8 H Bypass N 0 0 D E 0 E 0 X None On
9 H Bypass N 0 0 D X E 0 X None On
10 H Drive X 0 D X X X
X
Bypass On
11 H Drive 0 X D X Bypass
12 H Drive 0 0 E X X X X Bypass Flash
13 H Drive 0 0 E 0 X X X Drive
14 A Drive 0 0 0 D X X X None
15 A Drive X 0 0 D X X X Drive On
On
On
16 A Drive X 0 0 D E 0 X None On
17 A Drive X 0 0 D X E 0 X None On On
18 A Drive X X 0 D X
X
X
X
X Bypass On On
19 A Drive X 0 X D X Bypass On
20 A Drive X 0 0 E X X X X Bypass Flash On
21 A Bypass N X 0 0 D X X X Bypass On
22 A Bypass T X 0 0 D X X X Bypass On
23 A Bypass N X 0 0 D E 0 X None On
24 A Bypass N X 0 0 D X 0 X None On On
25 A Bypass N X 0 X D X X X Bypass On
26 O Drive 0 X D X X X Bypass
27 O Bypass N 0 X D X X X Bypass
28 A Drive X 0 0 D X X 0 None On
29 A Bypass N X 0 0 D X X 0 None On
30 H Drive 0 0 D X X 0 None
31 O Drive 0 0 D D D X None
32 H Bypass N 0 0 D D D X Bypass
33 A Drive X 0 0 D D D X Drive On



Note: A blank cell indicates the input can be in any of the possible positions (dont care).
Definitions:
TB = Terminal Block
SX-X = DIP Switch Number
X = Closed Input Contacts
0 = Open Input Contacts
D = Disabled
Drive or
Bypass
Select
Test/
Normal
Auto
Run
TB1 2&9 TB1 1&9
Motor O/L
Operating
Mode
Result
Remote
Xfer
TB1 4&9
DIP
S2-1
Drive
Fault
DIP
S2-7
Smoke
Purge
TB1 5&9
DIP
S2-8 TB1 3&9
Table 4.1 E7L 2 Contactor Bypass Inputs and Operating Modes
System Auto Xfer Safety Damper/BAS
Control Panel LEDs
Selector Buttons Contact Closure Inputs DIP Switch Selectable Functions
H/O/A
Select
Status LEDs
Safety
Open
Auto/Rem
Xfer
Damper/
BAS Auto Run
Page 283 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 11
SEQ REF
On On On On On 1
On On On On On 2
On On
On
On
On On On On 3
On On On On On On 4
On On On On On On On On 5
On On On On On On On 6
On On On On On On On On On On 7
On On On On On On 8
On On On On On On 9
On On Flash On On On On 10
On On On Flash On
On
On On On
On
11
12 On Flash On On On
On On On
On
On
On
On
On On On On On 13
On On On
On
On
On
On
On On On 14
On On On On On On On 15
On On Flash
Flash
Flash
Flash
Flash
Flash
On On On 16
On On On
On
On
On
On
On
17
18 On On Flash
On On On Flash On
On
On On On 19
On On Flash On On On On On 20
On On On On On On On 21
On On On On On On On On On On 22
On On On On On 23
On On On On On 24
On On On On On
On
On On On 25
On On On Flash On On On On On 26
On On On On On
On
On On On 27
On On On On On On 28
On On On On On On 29
On On On On On On 30
On On On On On 31
On On On
On
On On On 32
On On On On On On On 33
STOP
Drive
Test FWD ALARM RUN
Bypass
Select HAND OFF
Control Panel LEDs
Run Motor O/L
Drive
Select
Auto/Remote
Selector Button LEDs Drive Keypad LEDs
Smoke
Purge Ready Run AUTO
Bypass Drive
Status LEDs
Fault
Page 284 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 12
For additional influences on the Drive behavior in Drive operating mode, consult Table 5.1 and Table 5.2. These tables explain
the settings of Drive parameters required by the Bypass logic (Table 5.1) and those that are also dependent upon the control
options present on the unit (Table 5.2). For Example: In the second line of Table 5.2, for a Bypass equipped with no options
and DIP switch S1-2 in the off position, the hand mode speed command is based on the setting of d1-02 and the auto mode
speed command signal is 0-10VDC.
4Selector Key Functions
Operating with HAND selected - Drive mode:
The Drive can be operated locally from the control panel by first pressing the DRIVE Select key. Then pressing the
HAND key gives the front panel control of the Drive operation. Pressing HAND also provides the run command to the
Drive. When placed into HAND mode the Drive begins running at the HAND mode speed command.

Operating with AUTO selected - Drive mode:
The Drive can be operated remotely by pressing the DRIVE Select key. Then pressing the AUTO key gives a remote
device (BAS or DDC) control of the Drive. In the AUTO mode the Drive will look for a run command contact closure at
terminals TB1-2 and TB1-9 on PCB A2. Speed command signal level and source is determined by the parameter settings
and the options present in the unit, see Tables 5.1 and 5.2. The AUTO speed command is wired to terminals TB3-3 and
TB3-1. Consult Figures 2.5 and 2.6 in Chapter 2, Electrical Installation for correct configuration of the speed command
(analog frequency reference).
Operating with HAND selected - Bypass mode:
The Bypass can be operated locally from the front control panel by pressing the Bypass Select key. In BYPASS mode the
Bypass contactor coil can be energized manually by pressing the HAND key. In Bypass mode, selecting HAND operation
causes the motor to run at full speed, directly across the line.
Operating with AUTO selected - Bypass mode:
The Bypass can be operated remotely by pressing the Bypass Select key and selecting AUTO operation. In the AUTO
mode the Bypass will look for a run command contact closure at terminals TB1-2 and TB1-9 on PCB A2, to control the
run/stop status of across the line full speed motor operation.
Operating with DRIVE TEST selected - Bypass mode:
The only valid use of the DRIVE TEST function is in Bypass mode. DRIVE TEST provides for local control of the
Drive for programming or other tests while keeping it isolated from the motor that is operating in Bypass mode.
4DIP Switch Selectable Functions
The switch selectable functions, Auto Transfer, Safety Circuit Interlock and BAS Interlock represent control strategies that
may need to be disabled under various application circumstances. They may be enabled in any combination from none of them
to all of them. See Table 4.1 for a summary of some common combinations of these switch selectable inputs.
Auto Transfer to Bypass
When enabled (DIP switch S2-1), the Bypass unit will automatically switch into Bypass mode on a Drive fault. After clearing
the Drive fault condition, the function resets by moving the disconnect switch to the OFF position and waiting for the keypad
to go blank. CAUTION: Before selecting this function in fan applications, care must be taken to ensure that the ductwork is
designed to handle the pressure resulting from full speed operation with the VAV terminal unit dampers at minimum position
or closed. The factory default for this function is disabled.
Page 285 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 13
Safety Interlock Circuit
A Control terminal block position (TB1-1) is provided to connect the series circuit of Normally Closed (NC) safety
devices such as: freeze-up thermostats, smoke/fire sensors, high pressure limits, temperature limits or vibration detectors.
Anytime all the safety device contacts are closed, the Drive or Bypass will operate. When any one of these contacts open,
the Drive or Bypass will immediately stop operating. This input is momentary, when a safety device contact re-closes, the
Drive or Bypass will return to operation.
On power up the E7N will display a red Safety Open LED in the System Status area of the front control panel if a
normally closed Safety Circuit has not been installed between TB1-1 and TB1-9 on PCB A2. This condition will
prevent Drive or Bypass operation.
One of the following three items needs to be done prior to start-up:
1) Install a NC Safety Circuit between TB1-1 and TB1-9 on PCB A2.
2) Install a jumper between TB1-1 and TB1-9 on PCB A2. This method should be used if a Safety Circuit will be
added later in the installation.
3) De-activate these terminals by moving DIP switch S2-7 to the ON position (toward the enclosure door). This solution
is only suggested if a Safety Circuit will never be applied to the drive system.
Building Automation System Interlock Circuit
This is a Drive and Bypass enable input. A control terminal block position (TB1-3) is provided to connect Normally Open
(NO) enabling contacts such as: damper end switches or occupied cycle timers. An open contact will override the run com-
mand, preventing Drive or Bypass operation until these input contacts are closed. For example, this input could insure that the
system dampers achieve an operating position before the fan is started in order to protect the ductwork from over pressure.
When a Run command is received in HAND or AUTO mode, the E7N will display a red Damper/BAS LED in the
System Status area of the front control panel. This condition will prevent Drive or Bypass operation.
One of the following three items needs to be done prior to start-up:
1) Install a BAS Interlock Circuit between TB1-3 and TB1-9 on PCB A2.
2) Install a jumper between TB1-3 and TB1-9 on PCB A2. This method should be used if a BAS Interlock Circuit will
be added later in the installation.
3) De-activate these terminals by moving DIP switch S2-8 to the ON position (toward the enclosure door). This solution
is only suggested if a Safety Circuit will never be applied to the drive system.
Page 286 of 541
Start Up and Operation 4 - 14
4Contact Closure Inputs
Auto Mode Run/Stop Contact Input
TB1-3 and TB1-4 are input terminals used for the Run/Stop command when in the AUTO mode. When these input contacts
close, the unit will begin running. When the contacts reopen, the unit will cease
running.
Remote Transfer to Bypass
This function allows a contact closure from a BAS, between terminals TB1-4 and TB1-9, to transfer motor operation from
Drive mode to Bypass mode. This remote transfer to Bypass function overrides the DRIVE/BYPASS selector keys. An open
contact causes operation in Drive mode and a closed contact results in Bypass mode.
Smoke Purge
This function allows a contact closure between terminals TB1-5 and TB1-9 to transfer motor operation to Bypass for a maxi-
mum capacity smoke control function. When in smoke purge mode, during emergency fire/smoke
situations, the motor overloads and safety interlock circuit are overridden to shift the priority to protecting people rather than
equipment. [Note: Smoke purge overrides all other control inputs and selector switches. Smoke purge operation can only be
terminated by opening the contact closure at terminals TB1-5 and TB1-9 or by opening the Disconnect Switch.]
Page 287 of 541
Programming 5 - 1
Chapter 5
Programming
This Manual contains descriptions of all parameters in the Drive that may be useful in
Bypass applications. Parameters are listed in alpha-numerical order. Parameter number
and name, along with a detailed description and its settings are described on the following
pages. For descriptions of all drive parameters, see the Programming Manual (TM.E7.02).
Regarding Chapter 5....................................................................... 2
Standard LED Keypad Display and Optional LCD Keypad
Display........................................................................................ 2
Programming Instructions for Individual Drive Parameters ........ 2
Programming for Various Configuration and Options ................. 2
Virtual Terminals ......................................................................... 2
Bypass Unit Basic Programming Parameters ................................ 4
Discussion of Table 5.2 Option-Dependent Bypass
Parameter Settings .................................................................... 7
Drive Parameters .......................................................................... 10
A1 Initialization ........................................................................ 10
b1 Sequence ........................................................................... 12
b2 DC Braking ......................................................................... 17
b3 Speed Search ..................................................................... 19
b5 PI Function ......................................................................... 23
b8 Energy Savings .................................................................. 37
C1 Accel/Decel ........................................................................ 38
d1 Preset References .............................................................. 39
d2 Reference (Speed Command) Limits .................................. 41
d3 Jump Frequencies .............................................................. 42
d4 Sequence ........................................................................... 43
E1 V/f Pattern .......................................................................... 44
E2 Motor Setup ........................................................................ 47
F6 Com OPT Setup .................................................................. 48
H1 Digital Inputs ...................................................................... 49
H2 Digital Outputs .................................................................... 53
H3 Analog Inputs ..................................................................... 54
L2 Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Function ....................... 60
L3 Stall Prevention ................................................................... 61
L4 Speed Command Loss Detection ....................................... 64
L5 Fault Restart ....................................................................... 65
L6 Torque Detection ................................................................ 67
L8 Hardware Protection ........................................................... 69
o1 Monitor Configuration ......................................................... 71
o2 Key Selections .................................................................... 75
o3 Digital Operator Copy Function .......................................... 78
T1 Auto-Tuning ........................................................................ 80
Page 288 of 541
Programming 5 - 2
Regarding Chapter 5
4Standard LED Keypad Display and Optional LCD Keypad Display:
This programming chapter has been written to cover both the standard LED keypad display and the optional LCD keypad
display. When referring to the keypad display, the complete description of the parameter setting choices are presented for
clarity purposes. For example, one of the setting choices for parameter b1-02 is 1: terminals. Keep in mind that for the
standard LED keypad display, only the number of the choice will be shown. The optional LCD keypad display is required to
see the complete description.
Some sections of this chapter will apply only to the optional LCD operator, for example:
A1-00 Language Selection
o1-05 to o1-08 LCD Display Selections
4Programming Instructions for Individual Drive Parameters:
The discussions of individual Drive parameters in Chapter 5 are descriptive of the basic E7N unit without any options that
would effect the programming of the E7 Drive.
4Programming for Various Configuration and Options:
Tables 5.1 and 5.2 and the section titled Discussion of Table 5.2 Option-Dependent Bypass Parameter Settings provide
details of the unique programming required for the E7N Bypass applications of the Drive with various configurations of
options and sources for the control signals.
Tables 5.3 and 5.4 are similar but add PI control to the configuration possibilities.
4Virtual Terminals
The Drive multi-function digital inputs and Drive analog inputs have (for the most part) become virtual terminals in the E7N
two contactor Bypass design.
The Bypass 120 VAC logic circuit is interconnected, via ribbon cable, with the Drive multi-function digital inputs and Drive
analog inputs to allow a single set of customer interface terminals to control both the Drive and Bypass circuits.
The Drive firmware however refers to these Drive terminals in order to program the functions of these inputs. The E7N
programming documentation and this manual then need to refer to these virtual terminals in Chapter 5 (programming) and
Appendix A (parameters). These virtual terminals are called out, for example, in Table 5.1 Bypass Parameter Settings.
Drive terminals S1 through and including S5 are consumed by the needs of the bypass logic circuit. The programming of these
terminal functions is essential to the operation of the Drive and Bypass unit and is described in Tables 5.1 and 5.2.
Page 289 of 541
Programming 5 - 3
Only Drive terminals A1, A2, S6, S7 and SN are available for other uses. They have been brought out to terminals on the E7N
PCB A2:
Table 5.1 through Table 5.4 and the accompanying paragraphs explain the programming of the Drive for the E7N Bypass
application, including these virtual terminals.
Drive Terminals Correspondence to E7N Terminals
Drive
Terminal
E7N PCB A2
Terminal
Drive Function
Selection Parameter
E7N PCB A2
DIP Switch
A1 TB3-3 b1-01 S1-3, S1-4
A2 TB3-3 H3-08, H3-13 S1-2, S1-3, S1-4
S6 TB5-5 H1-04 N/A
S7 TB5-4 H1-05 N/A
SN TB5-2 Digital Common N/A
Page 290 of 541
Programming 5 - 4
Bypass Unit Basic Programming Parameters
The basic Drive programming for a Bypass unit is different from that of a Drive installation without the Bypass option.
Several Drive parameters have been programmed at the factory to meet the needs of the Bypass logic circuit. See Table 5.1
below, the highlighted parameters are required by the Bypass logic circuit. Only those parameters that are changed from the
Drive default are listed.
Table 5.1 Bypass Parameter Settings
PARAMETER
NUMBER
SETTING
UNITS DESCRIPTION
OPTIONAL LCD
KEYPAD DISPLAY
For Bypass Setting
For Bypass
Drive
Default
b1-01 SEE
TABLE 5.2
1 N/A Frequency Reference Selection Selects the speed
command input source
Reference Source /
Terminals
b1-08 1 0 N/A Run Command Selection During Programming
Selects if run command is accepted in DRIVE Opera-
tion menu only or in all menus.
RUN CMD at PRG /
Enabled
d1-01 10.0 0.0 HZ Frequency Reference 1 Hand Mode Speed Reference,
used with serial communication, see Table 5.2 and
H1-03
Reference 1 / (0-60)
d1-02 6.0 0.0 HZ Frequency Reference 2 Hand Mode Speed Reference,
used without serial communication, see Table 5.2 and
H1-03
Reference 2 / (0-60)
E1-01 208 or 480 480 VOLTS Input Voltage Setting Set to the nominal Voltage Set-
ting for the incoming line
Input Voltage / (range)
E1-05 208, 230 or
460
208 or
480
VOLTS Output Volts Setting Set to the nominal Voltage Rat-
ing of motors
Output Voltage / (range)
H1-01 70 24 N/A Drive Terminal S3 Function Selection Set for Drive
run enable
Terminal S3 Sel / Drive
Enable
H1-02 SEE
TABLE 5.2
14 N/A Drive Terminal S4 Function Selection Set for fault
reset or Frequency Reference 1
Terminal S4 Sel / Multi-
Step Ref 1
H1-03 SEE
TABLE 5.2
3 N/A Drive Terminal S5 Function Selection Set For Fre-
quency Reference 1 or Serial Communication
Terminal S5 Sel / Multi-
Step Ref 1
H2-02 3B A N/A Drive Terminals M3 - M4 Function Selection Set for
serial communication run command
Term M3-M4 Sel / Com
RUN Command
H3-08 SEE
TABLE 5.2
2 N/A Drive Terminal A2 Signal Level Signal selection, 0 to
10 VDC (Drive control board switch S1-2 off) or 4 to
20 mA (Drive control board switch S1-2 on)
Term A2 Signal / 0-10
VDC
H3-09 SEE
TABLE 5.2
2 N/A Drive Terminal A2 Function Selection Selects how
this input will be used by the Drive
Terminal A2 Sel / Aux Ref-
erence
H5-02 SEE
TABLE 5.2
3 N/A Serial Communication Speed Selection, Baud Rate Serial Baud Rate 1
9600 Baud
H5-07 SEE
TABLE 5.2
1 N/A Serial Communication Request to Send Control RT5 Control Sel/enabled
H5-08 SEE
TABLE 5.2
0 N/A Serial Communication Protocol Selection Protocol Select/N2
(Metasys)
H5-09 10.0 2 SEC Serial Communication Error Detection Time CE Detect Time/
(0.0 - 10.0)
L4-05 0 1 N/A Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection Deter-
mines Drive response to loss of the frequency speed
command
Ref Loss Sel / Stop
Page 291 of 541
Programming 5 - 5
The shaded Bypass Parameter Settings in Table 5.1 document Drive parameter settings, required to interface with the Bypass
logic circuit, that have been established at the factory and stored in a dedicated location in the memory as User Initialization
values (think of it as a back-up file).
Table 5.1 is also used to document parameters that have been factory set, for convenience, to typical values for fan and pump
applications. These parameters may be changed to meet the needs of the specific application.
If additional parameters are set to the specific needs of the application project, and the system operation has been checked and
verified, then the User Initialization values should be stored in memory again by selecting and entering 1: Set Default in
parameter o2-03.
When there is a need for re-initialization of the user parameters (re-setting to the User Initialization values) of the Bypass
unit, then a User Initialization function should be carried out by selecting 1110: User Initialize in parameter A1-03. This will
re-establish the drive set-up required for the Bypass application and any user parameter values that have been stored.
The factory parameter settings required to interface with the bypass logic circuit have also been stored in the digital keypad
memory. If there is a need for re-initialization (re-setting to a known factory starting point for trouble-shooting purposes) of the
Bypass unit, then the back-up file in the digital keypad memory can be copied to the drive. In parameter o3-01 select
2: OP->INV WRITE to carry out the copy function.
PARAMETER
NUMBER
SETTING
UNITS DESCRIPTION
OPTIONAL LCD
KEYPAD DISPLAY
For Bypass Setting
For Bypass
Drive
Default
L5-01 10.0 0 N/A Number of Re-start Attempts Sets the number of
times the Drive will perform an automatic re-start
Num of Restarts / (0-10)
L5-03 10 180 SEC Maximum Restart Time After Fault If not success-
fully started after this time, restart attempts stop and
Drive faults
Max Restart Time /
(.5-600.0)
02-01 0 1 N/A Drive Local/Remote Key Function Selection Enables
or Disables the Local/Remote Key
Local/Remote Key/
Disabled
o2-02 0 1 N/A Drive OFF Key Function During Auto Run Enables
or disables the Off key.
Oper STOP Key /
Disabled
o2-03 1 0 N/A User Parameter Default Value Stores Bypass
parameter settings for recall via A1-03 = 1110: User
Initialize
User Defaults/
Set Defaults
o2-15 0 1 N/A Drive Hand Key Function Selection - Enables or dis-
ables the Hand and Auto keys (optional LCD operator)
Hand Key / Disabled
o3-02 1 0 Read Allowed Selection Enables or disables keypad
copy functions
Read Allowable / Enabled
Table 5.1 Bypass Parameter Settings (Continued)
Page 292 of 541
Programming 5 - 6
Definitions:
L = LonWorks Option Card * = The Drive factory default
J = Native Protocol, Metasys N2 # = The H/O/A selector keys must have AUTO selected
P = Pneumatic Interface (3 to 15 PSIG) to allow serial com. to control the Drive
U = Native Protocol, APOGEE FLN @ = Dont care
V = Native Protocol, Modbus
Parameter Reference:
b1-01: Speed Command Input Source H5-02: Communication Speed Selection
0: Operator 3: 9600 Baud (default)
1: Terminals (default) 2: 4800 Baud
H1-02: Drive Terminal S4 Function Selection H5-07: RTS Control Selection
3: Multi-step Ref 1 0: Disabled (RTS always on)
14: Fault Reset (default) 1: Enabled (RTS on only when sending) (default)
H1-03: Drive Terminal S5 Function Selection H5-08: Communication Protocol Selection
3: Multi-step Ref 1 (default) 0: Modbus (default)
6C: Com/Inv Sel 2 1: N2 (Metasys)
H3-08: Drive Terminal A2 Signal Level 2: FLN (APOGEE)
0: 0 - 10 VDC d1-01: Frequency Reference 1
2: 4 - 20 mA (default) d1-02: Frequency Reference 2
H3-09: Drive Terminal A2 Function Selection
0: Frequency Bias
2: Aux Reference (default)
DIP Switch Reference:
S1-1: Terminating resistor, always on for option L, otherwise on only if last device.
S1-2: Drive Terminal A2 signal level
On = 4-20 mA Off = 0-10 VDC
S4-2: Drive input terminal S4 operation
On = Input S4 operates inversely with input S5
Off = Inputs S4 and S5 operate independently
Notes:
Hand mode run/stop for Drive and Bypass is always via the front control panel HAND selector key.
Auto mode run/stop for Drive and Bypass without serial com. is from terminal TB1-2.
Auto mode run/stop with serial com. is from serial com. for both Drive and Bypass modes.
DIP switch configurable terminal TB3-3 is connected to Drive terminal A2 (the default). See Chapter 2 Table 2.8 for the alternate TB3-3 configuration.
A Jumper is required from TB5-2 to TB5-7. This is essential for serial com. applications and benign for all other applications.
Table 5.2 Option Dependent Bypass Parameter Settings
Options
Specified
Parameters Effected by Options Specified and Settings
PCB DIP
Switch S1
1 2
PCB DIP
Switch S4
2
HAND Speed
Command
Source
Drive Terminal A2 Sig-
nal Level via TB3-3 or
TB5-9
AUTO
b1-01
H1-02
(S4)
H1-03
(S5)
H3-08 H3-09 H5-2 H5-7 H5-8
Keypad
d1-01 d1-02
4-20
mA
0-10
VDC
3-15
PSIG
Run/Stop Speed
Terminal
TB1-2
Serial #
TB3-3
(A2)
Serial #
None 1* 14* 3* 2* 0 @ @ @ @ On* Off* X X X X
None 1 14 3 0 0 @ @ @ @ Off Off X X X X
P 1 14 3 2 0 @ @ @ @ On Off X X X X X
J 0 14 6C @ @ 3* 1* 1 Off* @ Off X X X
U 0 14 6C @ @ 2 1 2 Off @ Off X X X
V 0 14 6C @ @ 3 1 0* Off @ Off X X X
J 0 3 6C 0 2* 3 1 1 Off Off On X X X X
U 0 3 6C 2 2 2 1 2 Off On On X X X X
V 0 3 6C 0 2 3 1 0 Off Off On X X X X X
J & P 0 3 6C 2 2 3 1 1 Off On On X X X X X
U & P 0 3 6C 2 2 2 1 2 Off On On X X X X X
V & P 0 3 6C 2 2 3 1 0 Off On On X X X X X
L 0 14 6C @ 2 3 0 0 On @ Off X X X X
L 0 3 6C 0 2 3 0 0 On Off On X X X X
L & P 0 3 6C 2 2 3 0 0 On On On X X X X X
Page 293 of 541
Programming 5 - 7
4Discussion of Table 5.2 Option-Dependent Bypass Parameter Settings:
Drive Parameter Settings for Various Combinations of Bypass and Options
Notes:
See Appendix D, Communications, for additional information on serial communication.
Hand mode run/stop for Drive and Bypass is always via the front control panel HAND selector key.
The HAND/OFF/AUTO selector keys must be in AUTO position if serial communication is to be used to control the
Drive.
For monitoring only of Drive parameters and operation, via serial communication, the user needs only to set-up the
H5-0X "Serial Com Setup" parameters. All other parameters may remain as they were factory programmed for the
Bypass unit and options.
Option L, LonWorks serial communication always requires DIP switch S1-1 (terminating resistor) to be ON. See the
LonWorks Option Installation Guide (IG.AFD.20.LONWORKS) for additional parameter setting instructions. Options
J, U or V require a terminating resistor only when the Drive is the last device on the serial communication chain.
To add a speed potentiometer at terminals TB3-1 to TB3-3 for HAND mode speed command: Configure terminal
TB3-3 to connect to Drive terminal A1 by placing DIP switch S1-3 in the Off position and DIP switch S1-4 in the On
position:
For an E7N with no options, as in line 2 of Table 5.2, change to have H3-09 = 2 and ensure that H3-13 = 1 (all
other parameters per line 2 of Table 5.2)
For an E7N with serial communications, as in lines 4, 5 and 6 of Table 5.2, change b1-01 = 1, H3-09 = 2, and
H3-13 = 0 (all other parameters per line 4, 5 or 6 of Table 5.2)
Options - None; Bypass with no options:
Hand mode speed command from Keypad/Operator.
Auto mode speed command input signal, 4-20 mA applied to Terminal TB3-3 (Drive terminal A2).
Auto mode run/stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1-2 and TB1-9.
Options - None; Bypass with no options:
Hand mode speed command from Keypad/Operator.
Auto mode speed command input signal, 0-10 VDC applied to Terminal TB3-3 (Drive terminal A2).
Auto mode run/stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1-2 and TB1-9.
Significant
Parameter Setting
Drive Operational Result
b1-01 = 1: Terminals (default) Speed command source = Terminals
H3-08 = 2: 4-20 mA (default) Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 4-20 mA (Note Control PCB DIP switch
S1-2 must also be ON)
H3-09 = 0: Frequency Bias Drive Terminal A2 function is set to bias the terminal A1 input. Terminal A1 is
not used, therefore the A2 bias signal becomes the speed command.
H1-03 = 3: Multi-Step Ref 1
(default)
A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure selects d1-02 (keypad) as a preset speed.
This input contact is closed when H/O/A = Hand.
Significant
Parameter Setting
Drive Operational Result
b1-01 = 1: Terminals (default) Speed command source = Terminals
H3-08 = 0: 0-10 VDC Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 0-10 VDC (Note Control PCB DIP switch
S1-2 must also be OFF)
H3-09 = 0: Frequency Bias Drive Terminal A2 function is set to bias the terminal A1 input. Terminal A1 is
not used, therefore the A2 bias signal becomes the speed command.
H1-03 = 3: Multi-Step Ref 1
(default)
A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure selects d1-02 (keypad) as a preset speed.
This input contact is closed when H/O/A = Hand.
Page 294 of 541
Programming 5 - 8
Options - P "Pneumatic Pressure Transducer"; Bypass with pneumatic input for speed
control:
Hand mode speed command from Keypad/Operator.
Auto mode speed command input signal from the pneumatic transducer, or 4-20 mA applied to Terminal TB5-9
(Drive terminal A2).
Auto mode run/stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1-2 and TB1-9.
Options - J, U, V or L "Serial Communications"; Bypass with serial communication for control:
Hand mode speed command from Keypad/Operator.
Auto mode speed command input signal from serial communication.
Auto mode run/stop command for Drive from serial communication.
Auto mode run/stop command for Bypass from serial communication.
Significant
Parameter Setting
Drive Operational Result
b1-01 = 1: Terminals (default) Speed command source = Terminals
H3-08 = 2: 4-20 mA (default) Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 4-20 mA (Transducer output is 4-20 mA)
(Note Control PCB DIP switch S1-2 must also be ON)
H3-09 = 0: Frequency Bias Drive Terminal A2 function is set to bias the terminal A1 input. Terminal A1 is
not used, therefore the A2 bias signal becomes the speed command.
H1-03 = 3: Multi-Step Ref 1
(default)
A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure selects d1-02 (keypad) as a preset
speed. This input contact is closed when H/O/A = Hand.
Significant
Parameter Setting
Drive Operational Result
b1-01 = 0: Operator Speed command source = Keypad/Operator (d1-01)
H1-03 = 6C: Com/Inv Sel 2 A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure allows b1-01 to select d1-01 (key-
pad) as a preset speed. An open contact selects serial com for speed command
and run/stop. This input contact is closed when H/O/A = Hand.
H5-02 = Baud Rate Each protocol requires the baud rate indicated in Table 5.2
H5-07 = RTS Control Each protocol requires the Request to Send control indicated in Table 5.2
H5-08 = Protocol Selection Drive communicates via protocol selected. 0: Modbus, 1: N2 or 2: FLN
Page 295 of 541
Programming 5 - 9
Options - J, U, V or L "Serial Communications"; Bypass with serial communication for run/stop
control and speed monitoring:
Hand mode speed command from Keypad/Operator.
Auto mode speed command input signal, 0-10 VDC applied to Terminal TB3-3 (Drive terminal A2).
Auto mode run/stop command for Drive from serial communication.
Auto mode run/stop command for Bypass from serial communication.
Options - J, U, V or L and P "Serial Communications" and "Pneumatic Pressure Transducer";
Bypass with serial communication for run/stop control and speed monitoring, with pneumatic
input for speed control:
Hand mode speed command from Keypad/Operator.
Auto mode speed command input signal from the pneumatic transducer, or 4-20 mA applied to Terminal TB5-9
(Drive terminal A2).
Auto mode run/stop command for Drive from serial communication.
Auto mode run/stop command for Bypass from serial communication.
Significant
Parameter Setting
Drive Operational Result
b1-01 = 0: Operator Speed command source = Keypad/Operator (d1-01)
H3-08 = 0: 0-10 VDC Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 0-10 VDC (Note Control PCB DIP
switch S1-2 must also be OFF)
H3-09 = 2: Aux Reference (default) Drive Terminal A2 function is set to be a speed command input. This setting
also gives terminal A2 priority over d1-02 for preset speed 2, see Program-
ming Manual TM.E7.02.
H1-02 = 3: Multi-Step Ref 1
DIP switch S4-2 must be ON
A Drive terminal S4 input contact closure selects A2 as preset speed 2 speed
input. The S4 input closes when H/O/A = Auto.
H1-03 = 6C: Com/Inv Sel 2 A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure allows b1-01 to select d1-01
(keypad) as the speed command. An open contact selects serial com for the
run/stop command (the serial com speed command is overridden by the preset
speed above). This input contact is closed when H/O/A = Hand.
H5-02 = Baud Rate Each protocol requires the baud rate indicated in Table 5.2
H5-07 = RTS Control Each protocol requires the Request to Send control indicated in Table 5.2
H5-08 = Protocol Selection Drive communicates via protocol selected. 0: Modbus, 1: N2 or 2: FLN
Significant
Parameter Setting
Drive Operational Result
b1-01 = 0: Operator Speed command source = Keypad/Operator (d1-01)
H3-08 = 2: 4-20 mA (default) Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 4-20 mA (Transducer output is 4-20
mA) (Note Control PCB DIP switch S1-2 must also be ON)
H3-09 = 2: Aux Reference (default) Drive Terminal A2 function is set to be a speed command input. This set-
ting also gives terminal A2 priority over d1-02 for preset speed 2, see
Programming Manual TM.E7.02.
H1-02 = 3: Multi-Step Ref 1
DIP switch S4-2 must be ON
A Drive terminal S4 input contact closure selects A2 as preset speed 2
speed input. The S4 input closes when H/O/A = Auto.
H1-03 = 6C: Com/Inv Sel 2 A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure allows b1-01 to select d1-01
(keypad) as the speed command. An open contact selects serial com for the
run/stop command (the serial com speed command is overridden by the
preset speed above). This input contact is closed when H/O/A = Hand.
H5-02 = Baud Rate Each protocol requires the baud rate indicated in Table 5.2
H5-07 = RTS Control Each protocol requires the Request to Send control indicated in Table 5.2
H5-08 = Protocol Selection Drive communicates via protocol selected. 0: Modbus, 1: N2 or 2: FLN
Page 296 of 541
Programming 5 - 10
Drive Parameters
4A1 Initialization
The initialization group contains parameters associated with initial setup of the Drive. Parameters involving the display
language, access levels, initialization and password are located in this group.
A1-00 Select Language (Optional LCD keypad only)
The setting of parameter A1-00 determines which international language the Drive will use to display non-numerical text. The
A1-00 parameter will not be changed by an Initialization of the Drive (A1-03= 1110: User Initialize, 2220: 2-Wire Initial, or
3330: 3-Wire Initial).
If the Drive is accidentally set to a language unfamiliar to the operator, locating the parameter to change the operator language
can be done by performing the following:
1. Press the MENU key until the -ADV- MENU is shown in the upper left corner of the digital operator.
2. Press the DATA/ENTER key to enter the programming menu. The first parameter shown is A1-00 (Select Language).
3. Press the DATA/ENTER key again and use the INCREASE and DECREASE arrow keys to choose the preferred language
from the list below:
0 : English
1 : Japanese
2 : Deutsch (German)
3 : Francais (French)
4 : Italiano (Italian)
5 : Espaol (Spanish)
6 : Portugu s (Portuguese)
A1-01 Access Level Selection
A1-01 can be used to allow access to and permission to change all Drive parameters. If the Drive is programmed for Operation
Only (A1-01= 0: Operation Only), then only the OPERATION and the PROGRAMMING menus are accessible. Within the
PROGRAMMING menu only parameters A1-01 and A1-04 are adjustable.
Setting Description
0 English (factory default)
1 Japanese
2 Deutsch
3 Francais
4 Italiano
5 Espanol
6 Portugues
Setting Description
0 Operation Only
1 User Level
2 Advanced Level (factory default)
Page 297 of 541
Programming 5 - 11
If A1-01 is configured for Advanced Access (A1-01= 2: Advanced Level), then all menus and all parameters are shown. If the
Access Level Selection is set to Advanced, all parameters should be adjustable unless:
1. The Drive parameters are password protected (A1-04) which will prevent access to A1-00 through A1-03 and all A2
parameters.
2. A digital input has been configured as a Program Lockout (H1-0X= 1B) is active.
3. During serial communication writing, if a parameter change is also attempted via the digital operator, a
BUSY - WRITE PROTECTED message will display. Parameter change will not be possible from the digital operator until an
Enter command is received via the serial communication to finish the serial writing process.
A1-03 Initialize Parameters
The Drive can be set back to one of three default states via the A1-03 parameter.
Note: The E7N application of the Drive employs 2-wire control.
1. User Initialization 1110: The modified Drive parameters are returned to the values selected as user settings. User settings
are stored when parameter o2-03= 1: Set Defaults.
2. 2-Wire Initialization 2220: The Drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs S1 and S2
configured as Forward Run and Reverse Run, respectively.
3. 3-Wire Initialization 3330: The Drive parameters are returned to factory default values with digital inputs S1, S2, and S5
configured as Run, Stop, and Forward/Reverse respectively.
After an initialization is performed, parameter A1-03 will automatically be set back to 0.
Fig 5.1 2 & 3-Wire Control Wiring Examples
See Virtual Terminals note on page 5-2.
A1-00 Language Selection
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
o2-04 kVA Selection
o2-09 Initialization Specification Selection
Setting Description
0 No Initialize (factory default)
1110 User Initialize
2220 2-Wire Initialize
3330 3-Wire Initialize
IMPORTANT
Some parameters are unaffected by either the 2-Wire or 3-Wire initialization. The following parameters will
not be reset when parameter A1-03=2220 or 3330:
S1
S2
SN
FWD Run/Stop
REV Run/Stop
2-wire control
Stop
switch
(NC contact)
Operation
switch
(NO contact)
Run command
(run on momentary close)
Stop command
(stop on momentary open)
Forward/reverse command
(multi-function input)
Sequence input common
S3 or S5
3-wire control 2-wire control
SN
Page 298 of 541
Programming 5 - 12
A1-04 Password Entry
Setting Range: 0 to 9999
Factory Default: 0
If parameters A1-01 through A1-03 and all of the A2 parameters are locked (unchangeable) they can be unlocked by entering
the correct password number into A1-04.
Once the correct password number is entered and the specified parameters are unlocked, a 2-Wire or 3-Wire initialization will
reset the password to 0000.
A1-05 Select Password
Setting Range: 0 to 9999
Factory Default: 0
When the value set into A1-04 does NOT match the value set into A1-05, parameters A1-01 thru A1-03 and A2-32 cannot be
changed. All other parameters determined by A1-01 can be changed. Parameter A1-05 can be accessed by displaying parame-
ter A1-04, then press and hold the RESET key along with the MENU key simultaneously.
4b1 Sequence
The Sequence Group contains parameters associated with starting and stopping the Drive. Parameters involving the Run
Command, Speed Reference location, Stopping Method and Hand/Auto changeover are located in this group.
b1-01 Reference (Speed Command) Source Selection
This is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit. See Table 5.1.
In order to run the Drive and motor with the BYPASS/DRIVE select keys in the DRIVE Select position: the Drive must
receive a Run command and a speed command. Parameter b1-01 specifies from where the speed command is received when
the Drive is in the AUTO mode. Switching into the AUTO mode can be done by pressing the AUTO key of the Hand/Off/
Auto selector.
Setting Description
0 Operator - Digital Preset Speed d1-01
1 Terminals - Analog Input Terminal A1 (or Terminal A2, see Parameter H3-13)
2 Serial Com - RS-485 Terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-
3 Option PCB - Option Board connected at 2CN
IMPORTANT
If a Run command is input to the Drive but no corresponding speed command is input, the Run indicator on
the digital operator will turn on and the STOP indicator on the digital operator will blink.
Page 299 of 541
Programming 5 - 13
If you want the Drive to follow the speed command set by the digital operator: Use the HAND mode by pressing the
HAND key of the HAND/OFF/AUTO selector. The speed command can then be entered into the U1-01 monitor parameter in
the -DRIVE- Menu.
If you want the Drive to follow an AUTO analog speed command: Connect a 0 10 VDC or a 4 20 mA speed command
signal to terminals TB3-3 (positive) and TB3-1 (common). Select the AUTO position of the Hand/Off/Auto selector.
If you want the Drive to receive the speed command from serial communication: Set the parameters indicated in Table 5.2
for the desired serial communication option. Connect the RS-485/422 serial communications cable to terminals TB4-3 (R+),
TB4-4 (R-), TB4-1 (S+), and TB4-2 (S-) on the E7N PCB A2. The HAND/OFF/AUTO selector must be in the AUTO
position.
b1-02 Run Source
To successfully operate the Drive or Bypass and motor remotely, an external run command must be received by the Drive and
Bypass unit. Parameter b1-02 specifies from where the run command for the Drive will be accepted.
This parameter is by default set to 1: Terminals. This setting is required by the Bypass logic circuit.
To issue a run command from the control panel: Press the HAND key of the Hand/Off/Auto selector.
To issue a run command from a remote source, such as a BAS: The Hand/Off/Auto selector must be in the AUTO position.
A contact closure between terminals TB1-2 and TB1-9 will control the Drive or Bypass start and stop operation.
To issue a run command via serial communication: Set the parameters indicated in Table 5.2 for the desired serial
communication option. Connect the RS-485/422 serial communication cable to TB4-3 (R+), TB4-4 (R-), TB4-1 (S+), and
TB4-2 (S-) on the E7N PCB A2.
b1-03 Stopping Method
There are four methods of stopping the Drive when the Run command is removed.
0:Ramp to stop: When the Run command is removed, the Drive will decelerate the motor to 0 rpm. The rate of deceleration
is determined by the active deceleration time. The factory default Decel Time is in parameter C1-02.
Setting Description
0 Operator
1 Terminals (factory default)
2 Serial Com
3 Option PCB
Setting Description
0 Ramp to Stop (factory default)
1 Coast to Stop
2 DC Injection to Stop
3 Coast w/Timer
Page 300 of 541
Programming 5 - 14
When the output frequency has dropped below the DC Injection Start Frequency in b2-01 (Default = 0.5HZ) DC current will be
injected in the motor at a level determined by b2-02 (50% Default). The DC Injection condition will occur for the time
specified by b2-04 (0.0 Default), to establish the end point of the ramp. DC injection can be used to insure the motor is at zero
rpm prior to the Drive shutting off.
Fig 5.2 Deceleration to Stop
The actual deceleration time can be determined by the following formula
If S-Curve characteristics are specified by the Drive programming, they will add to the total time to stop.
1:Coast to stop: When the Run command is removed, the Drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast (uncontrolled
deceleration). The friction of the driven equipment will eventually overcome any residual inertia of the sys-
tem and the rotation will stop.
Fig 5.3 Coast to Stop

IMPORTANT
After a stop is initiated, a subsequent Run commands input before the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
has expired, will be ignored.
ON
OFF
Run Command
Output Frequency Deceleration Time (C1-02)
DC Injection Brake
100 %
0 %
TIME
| b2-04 |
b2-01
(CLOSED)
(OPEN)


02) - (C1 Time Decel active of Setting
04) - (E1 Frequency Maximum
command stop of at time Freq. Output
Stop to Time =
02 or C1-04)
ON
OFF
Run Command
Output Frequency Drive Output Frequency Interrupted
100 %
0 %
TIME
Motor Speed
(CLOSED)
(OPEN)
Page 301 of 541
Programming 5 - 15
2:DCInj to Stop: When the Run command is removed, the Drive will Baseblock (turn off its output) for the Minimum Base-
block Time (L2-03). Once the Minimum Baseblock Time has expired, the Drive will inject DC current into the motor wind-
ings to lock the motor shaft. The stopping time will be reduced as compared to Coast to Stop. The level of DC Injection
current is set by parameter b2-02 (50% Default). The DC Injection brake time is determined by the set value in b2-04 and
the output frequency at the time the Run command is removed.
Fig 5.4 DC Injection Braking to Stop
3:Coast w/Timer: When the Run command is removed, the Drive will turn off its output and the motor will coast to a stop. If
a Run command is input before time T (Operation Wait Time) expires, the Drive will not run and the Run command will
need to be cycled before operation can occur. The time T (Operation Wait Time) is determined by the output frequency
when the Run command is removed and the active deceleration time (C1-02).
Fig 5.5 Coast to Stop with Timer
IMPORTANT
If an overcurrent (OC) fault occurs during DCInj to Stop, lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03)
until the fault no longer occurs.
04) - (E1 Frequency Maximum
Frequency Output 10 04) - (b2
Time Brake Injection DC

=
ON
OFF
Run Command
Output Frequency Drive Output Voltage Interrupted
DC Injection Brake
DC Injection Brake Time Minimum Baseblock
Time (L2-03)
100 %
0 %
D
C

I
n
j
e
c
t
i
o
n

B
r
a
k
e

T
i
m
e
b2-04 x 10
b2-04
10%
100% (Maximum
Output Frequency) b2-04
(CLOSED)
(OPEN)
Run Command
Output Frequency
Drive Output
Voltage
Interrupted
OFF
ON
Timer Value T
(C1-02)
100 %
0 %
O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n

W
a
i
t

T
i
m
e

(
T
)
Deceleration
Time (C1-02)
Minimum
Baseblock
Time (L2-03)
Minimum
Output
Frequency
100% (Maximum
Output
Frequency)
Output Frequency at Stop Command Input
Ignored
Run Command
Timer Value T

(OPEN)
(CLOSED)
Page 302 of 541
Programming 5 - 16
b1-04 Reverse Operation
For some applications reverse motor rotation is not applicable and may even cause problems (e.g., air handling units,
pumps, etc.). Setting parameter b1-04 to 1 or 3 will cause the Drive to ignore any inputs for reverse operation. Setting
parameter b1-04 to either 2 or 3 will change the motor shaft rotation when a Forward Run command is given by exchanging
the order of the output phasing.
The factory default setting of parameter b1-04 is 1: Disabled. When b1-04= 1: Disabled, reverse operation is prohibited
and no exchanging of output phasing occurs.
Its not immediately apparent how to program a reverse run function on the E7N. Cooling tower defrost initiated by a BAS con-
tact closure is an example. Here is one way to accomplish this:
As the unit ships from the factory, Drive terminals S6 and S7 are the only ones available for customer use. All others are
used for the bypass logic circuit.
A dry contact is wired between terminals TB5-2 and TB5-5, (if using Drive terminal S6), or TB5-2 and TB5-4, (if using
Drive terminal S7). Terminal S6 is not available if utilizing the PI function.
H1-04, (if using Drive terminal S6), or H1-05, (if using Drive terminal S7), is programmed for Reverse Jog (13).
d1-17 is programmed for the desired reverse jog speed.
b1-04 is programmed for 0: reverse enable.
When the contact is closed, the motor will run in reverse at the speed programmed in d1-17.
b1-07 Local/Remote Run Selection
When the Drive is switched between the Local (Hand) mode (the digital operator) to the Remote (Auto) mode by the Hand/Off/
Auto selector, there is the possibility that a Run command is already present (i.e. a contact closure between
terminals TB1-2 and TB1-9. Parameter b1-07 determines whether the Drive will:
Ignore the external Run command until it is removed and re-instated (b1-07= 0: Cycle Extern Run)
OR
Accept the already present Run command and immediately begin acceleration to the commanded speed
(b1-07= 1: Accept Extrn Run).
Setting Description
0 Reverse Enabled
1 Reverse Disabled (factory default)
2 Exchange Phase
3 ExchgPhs, Rev Dsbl
Setting Description
0 Cycle Extern Run
1 Accept Extrn Run (factory default)
IMPORTANT
When switching from local mode to Auto mode when b1-07= 1:Accept Extrn Run the Drive may start
unexpectedly if the Run command is already applied. Be sure all personnel are clear of rotating machinery
and electrical connections prior to switching between local mode and Auto mode.
Page 303 of 541
Programming 5 - 17
b1-08 Run Command Selection During Programming
As a convenience to the user, the Drive will respond to a Run input even when the digital operator is being used to adjust
parameters. If it is necessary that external Run commands not be recognized while the Drive is being programmed, set
b1-08= 0: Disabled.
b1-11 Drive Delay Time Setting
Setting Range: 0 to 600 Seconds
Factory Default: 0 Seconds
If a time is set into parameter b1-11, the Drive will delay executing any run command until the b1-11 time has expired.
During Drive delay time execution, the digital operator will display:
Both the ALARM and Run indicators will blink while the Drive waits to execute the Run command.
4b2 DC Braking
The DC Braking Group contains parameters associated with the DC injection braking feature. Parameters involving the start-
ing frequency, current level, braking time, and motor pre heat current level are located here.
b2-01 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 10.0 Hz
Factory Default: 0.5 Hz
Parameter b2-01 sets the output frequency where the Drive begins DC Injection during Ramp to stop. in order to lock the rotor
of the motor and established the end point of the ramp. If b2-01 < E1-09 (Minimum Frequency), then DC Injection begins at
E1-09.
Parameter b2-01 also determines the output frequency that the Drive must be at or below before a Zero Speed condition is
considered true. This affects any digital output configured as a Zero Speed signal (H2-0x= 1: Zero Speed).
Fig 5.6 DC Injection Braking During Stopping
Setting Description
0 Disabled
1 Enabled (factory default)


DDLY
Waiting to RUN

Output Frequency
t
b2-01
DC injection
| |
b2-04
ime
Page 304 of 541
Programming 5 - 18
b2-02 DC Injection Braking Current
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 50%
The level of DC Injection Braking Current affects the strength of the magnetic field attempting to lock the motor shaft.
Increasing the level of current will increase the amount of heat generated by the motor windings and should only be increased
to the level necessary to hold the motor shaft. DC Injection current is set in percentage of Drive rated output current. Drive
rated output current is stated on the Drive nameplate.
b2-03 DC Injection Braking Time at Start
b2-04 DC Injection Braking Time at Stop
Setting Range: 0.00 to 10.00 Seconds
Factory Default: b2-03 = 5.00 Seconds
b2-04 = 0.00 Seconds
b2-03 is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit. See Table 5.1.
The Drive can be programmed to automatically DC Inject for a predetermined amount of time prior to accelerating to speed
(b2-03) and/or at the end of a Ramp to stop (b2-04). Parameter b2-03 can be used to stop a rotating motor prior to attempting
acceleration (i.e. a wind milling fan). If DC Injection braking at start or Speed Search is not enabled, attempting to Drive a
spinning motor may cause nuisance tripping.
Parameter b2-04 can be used to resist any residual motion of the load after the deceleration has finished.
Fig 5.7 DC Injection Braking During Starting and Stopping
Parameter b2-04 also serves the function of affecting the length of time DC Injection to stop (b1-03= 2: DC Injection to
Stop) will occur.
b2-09 Motor Pre-Heat Current
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 0%
A DC current can be circulated within the motor windings while the motor is stopped. The current will produce heat within the
motor and prevent condensation. Parameter b2-09 determines the percentage of Drive rated output current that will be used for
the motor pre-heat function. This function can be useful in applications where the motor sits for extended periods of time in
humid conditions. Motor pre-heating can only be initiated by closing a digital input programmed as a Motor Pre-heat Input
(H1-0x= 60). Check with the motor manufacturer to determine the maximum acceptable current level the motor can withstand
when stopped. Be sure not to exceed the motor manufacturers recommended level.
Output Frequency
DC injection
b2-03 b2-04
Page 305 of 541
Programming 5 - 19
4b3 Speed Search
The Speed Search function allows the Drive to determine the speed of a motor shaft that is being driven by rotational inertia.
Speed Search will allow the Drive to determine the speed of the already rotating motor and begin to ramp the motor to a set
speed without first having to bring it to a complete stop. When a momentary loss of supply power is experienced, the Drive
output is turned off. This results in a coasting motor. When power returns, the Drive can determine the speed of the coasting
motor and start without requiring it to be brought to minimum speed. Speed Search can be programmed to always be active by
setting b3-01 or it can be commanded by remote contact closure by setting a digital input.
There are two forms of Speed Search in the Drive, the speed estimation method and the current detection method.
Parameters L2-03 and L2-04 also affect the current detection method of Speed Search operation.
b3-01 Speed Search Selection
Speed Estimation: Method (b3-01= 0 or 1) The speed estimation method will calculate the speed using measurements of
residual motor fields. The speed estimation version is bi-directional and will determine both the motor speed and direction. To
enable speed estimation Speed Search at start, set b3-01= 1: SpdsrchF Enable.
IMPORTANT
When setting the Drive for remote Speed Search input, via a contact closure, the method of Speed Search
is determined by the setting of b3-01. If b3-01= 0: SpdsrchF Disable then the remote input will initiate
speed estimation method, and if b3-01= 2: SpdsrchI Disable, then the remote input will start the current
detection method.
Setting Description
0 SpdsrchF Disable
1 SpdsrchF Enable
2 SpdsrchI Disable (factory default)
3 SpdsrchI Enable
IMPORTANT
If the speed estimation method of Speed Search is to be used, then Auto-tuning must be performed prior to
using Speed Search. If the length of cable between the Drive and motor is ever changed after Auto-tuning
then Auto-tuning should be performed again.
IMPORTANT
The speed estimation mode cannot be used when there are multiple motors operated by one Drive or the
motor is two or more frames smaller than the standard size motor per the Drive capacity.
Page 306 of 541
Programming 5 - 20
Fig 5.8 Speed Search (Estimated Speed Method) after momentary power loss where the power loss
time is less than the minimum baseblock time
Fig 5.9 Speed Search (Estimated Speed Method) after momentary power loss where the power loss
time exceeds the minimum baseblock time
Current Detection Method (b3-01=2 or 3): The current detection method starts searching from a predetermined frequency
while monitoring the Drive output current to determine when the rotor speed and the Drive output speed (frequency) match.
The current detection version is not bi-directional. To enable current detection Speed Search at start set b3-01= 3: SpdscrhI
enable and program any digital input equal to Speed Search 1 (H1-0x= 61) or Speed Search 2 (H1-0x= 62). Speed Search 1
will start searching from the max. frequency (E1-04) and ramp down to meet the rotor speed. Speed Search 2 will start search-
ing from the set frequency and ramp down to meet the rotor speed.
IMPORTANT
If a UV1 fault occurs when current detection Speed Search is attempted, increase the setting of L2-04.
IMPORTANT
If an OC fault occurs when Speed Search is attempted after power loss recovery, increase the setting of L2-03.
AC power supply
Output frequency
Output current
OFF ON
Start using
speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75*1
10 ms
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before the baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the
minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05).
*2
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03) x 0.75 *1
the motor waits for the
AC power supply
Output frequency
Output current
OFF ON
Start using speed detected
Set frequency
reference
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
10 ms
Speed Search Wait Time
(b3-05)
Note: If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply break time is long,
operation may be the same as the search in case 1.
Note: If the frequency immediately before the baseblock is low or the power supply off time is long,
operation may be the same as the search in case 1.
Page 307 of 541
Programming 5 - 21
Fig 5.10 Speed Search (Current Detection Method) at Startup
Fig 5.11 Speed Search (Current Detection Method) after momentary power loss where the power loss
time is less than the minimum baseblock time
Fig 5.12 Speed Search (Current Detection Method) after momentary power loss where the power loss
time exceeds the minimum baseblock time
Setting of
b3-01
Automatic Speed Search for
all RUN commands
Automatic Speed Search after
momentary power loss and
baseblock
Speed Search Used for
Run with programmed
multi-function input
0 No Yes - Speed Estimation Yes - Speed Estimation
1 Yes - Speed Estimation Yes - Speed Estimation Yes - Speed Estimation
2 No Yes - Current Detection Yes - Current Detection
3 Yes - Current Detection Yes - Current Detection Yes - Current Detection
Run command
Output frequency
Output current
OFF ON
b3-02
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Set frequency
reference
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Maximum output
frequency or
set frequency
* Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05). * Search Delay Time (b3-05).
Speed search current level
AC power supply
Output frequency
Output current
OFF ON Output frequency before power loss
Set frequency
reference
Minimum baseblock time (L2-03)
*1 Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency
immediately before baseblock.
*2 After AC power supply recovery, motor waits for the minimum
Speed Search Wait Time (b2-03).
Deceleration
time set in b3-03
b3-02
speed search operating current
*2
*1
b3-05
AC power supply
Output frequency
Output current
OFF ON Output frequency before power loss
Set frequency
reference
Minimum baseblock time
(L2-03)
Deceleration speed set in b3-03
b3-02
Speed search operating time
Speed search wait time (b3-05)
Deceleration time set in b3-03
Page 308 of 541
Programming 5 - 22
b3-02 Speed Search Deactivation Current
Setting Range: 0 to 200% of Drive rated output current
Factory Default: 120% of Drive rated output current
When using the current detection method of Speed Search, parameter b3-02 sets the current level that will determine when the
search is complete and the rotor and output speeds match. When the output frequency is higher than the actual rotor speed the
slip causes the current to be high. As the output frequency is lowered, the closer it comes to the rotor speed, the lower the cur-
rent draw will be. When the output current drops below the level as set in b3-02 (100% = Drive Rated Current) the output
frequency stops decreasing and normal operation resumes.
b3-03 Speed Search Deceleration Time
Setting Range: 0.1 to 10.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 2.0 Seconds
Parameter b3-03 sets the deceleration ramp used by the current detection method of Speed Search when searching for the
motors rotor speed. Even if Speed Search 2 is selected, for Speed Search at start, the time entered into b3-03 will be the time to
decelerate from maximum frequency (E1-04) to minimum frequency (E1-09).
b3-05 Speed Search Delay Time
Setting Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 0.2 Seconds
In cases where an output contactor is used between the Drive and the motor, extra waiting time is provided after power returns
and before Speed Search is performed. This extra time allows for the contactor to operate. When Speed Search at start is used,
b3-05 will serve as the lower limit of the Minimum Baseblock Time (L2-03).
b3-14 Bi-Directional Speed Search Selection
The b3-14 parameter can be used to turn off the bi-directional capabilities of the Speed Estimation form of Speed Search. By
turning off the bi-directional capability, the speed search will only try to match the speed in the last known direction.
Setting Description
0 Disabled
1 Enabled (factory default)
Page 309 of 541
Programming 5 - 23
4b5 PI Function
The capability to accept an analog signal as feedback for a PI (Proportional + Integral) control function is built into the Drive.
Fig 5.13 PI Block Diagram
Bypass units are shipped with the parameters in Table 5.1 and Table 5.2 pre-established for the configuration ordered.
To add PI control to a Bypass unit; observe the control options that are included in the unit by review of the model number on
the nameplate (inside of door and external lower right side) as well as the option codes and model number description in
Chapter 1. Then revise the parameter settings indicated in Table 5.3 and 5.4 for a line of data, in Table 5.4, with the same
(or similar) combination of options and sources for the speed and run commands. This will add the logic required for PI con-
trol to that required for Bypass control.
Table 5.3 includes parameters that are the same regardless of control options specified while Table 5.4 provides detail on the
option dependent parameters.
Option Card
Serial Com
Terminal A1
D1-01
D1-04
D1-02
Output
frequency
P 1/t 1/t
Z-1
b1-01
1
2
3
Frequency Reference
using multi-step
command
Frequency reference
(U1-01)
PI Set Point
(U1-38)
Proportional
gain
b5-02
I-time
b5-03
I - limit
b5-04
PI Limit
b5-06
PI delay time
b5-08
PI offset
(b5-07)
+
+
+
+
PI output monitor
(U1-37)
b5-01=0
ON
PI control is OFF under the following
conditions:
- b5-01=0
- During JOG command input
- H3-xx=19 and the terminal status is
ON
Upper limit
Fmax x109%
+
+
b5-01=3
b5-01=1
Upper limit
Fmax x109%
Lower limit
Fmax x109%
Lower limit 0
4
MEMOBUS Reg. 06H
PI target value
Integral Hold
H1-xx=31
Integral Reset
H1-xx=30
PI Output
Characteristic
b5-09
b5-11
1
0
Enable / Disable reverse operation
when PI output is negative
Constant b5-19
b5-18
0
1 0
PI SFS
b5-17
PI SFS cancel
H1-xx=34
0
1
o1-03
Scaling
b5-20
Scaling
1
0
1
1
0
Reg. 0Fh, bit 1
Terminal A1
Terminal A2
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=16
1
0
H3-09=B
1
0
1
0
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=16
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=16
Z-1
1
0
1
0
PI Input
Caracteristic
H1-xx=35
1
0
Z-1
PI SFS
b5-17
PI SFS cancel
H1-xx=34
0
1
b5-20
Scaling
PI Input
(U1-36)
+
-
PI Feedback 2
(U1-53)
0
1
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=16
1
0
b5-28
PI Feedback
(U1-24)
b5-20
Scaling
1 0
1 0
b5-07
0 1
+
+
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=16
-
+
+
+
+
-
b5-24
PI Wake Up Level
PI
Wake Up
PI Snooze Function
b5-10
0 1
b5-30
PI Output
Gain
PI offset
H3-09=16
+
-
b5-22
PI Snooze Level
PI
Snooze
PI Snooze Function
+
-
b5-15
Sleep Level
RUN
on/off
0
1
b5-16
Delay
Timer
Sleep Function
Sleep function
selection b5-21
SFS
OFF
b5-23
Delay
Timer
PI Differential
Fdbk. H3-09=16
2
2 0 o r 1
0 or 1
2
Sleep function
selection b5-21
Sleep function
selection b5-21
P
b5-29
Characteristic
H1
Page 310 of 541
Programming 5 - 24
Table 5.3 PI Control Parameter Settings in E7N Bypass Units
PARAMETER
NUMBER
SETTING
UNITS DESCRIPTION
OPTIONAL LCD
KEYPAD DISPLAY
For Bypass Setting
Bypass & PI
Control
Bypass
Default
b1-01 0 SEE TABLE
5.2
N/A Frequency Reference Selection Selects the
speed command input source
Reference Source / Terminals
b5-01 1 0 N/A PI Mode Selection Enables PI mode PI Mode Setting / PI Mode
H1-03 SEE TABLE
5.4
SEE TABLE
5.2
N/A Drive Terminal S5 Function Selection Set
for various operating modes
Terminal S5 Sel / Com/Inv Sel 2,
for example
H1-04 SEE TABLE
5.4
4 N/A Drive Terminal S6 Function Selection Set
for PI Disable, turn off PI controller
Terminal S6 Sel / PI Disable
H3-08 SEE TABLE
5.4
SEE TABLE
5.2
N/A Drive Terminal A2 Signal Level Signal
selection, 0 to 10 VDC (Drive control board
switch S1-2 off) or 4 to 20 mA (Drive con-
trol board switch S1-2 on)
Term A2 Signal / 0-10 VDC
H3-09 B SEE TABLE
5.2
N/A Drive Terminal A2 Function Selection
Selects how this input will be used by the
Drive
Terminal A2 Sel / PI Feedback
H5-02 SEE TABLE
5.4
3 N/A Serial Communication Speed Selection,
Baud Rate
Serial Baud Rate/
9600 Baud
H5-07 SEE TABLE
5.4
1 N/A Serial Communication Request to Send
Control
RTS Control Sel/enabled
H5-08 SEE TABLE
5.4
0 N/A Serial Communication Protocol Selection Protocol Select/N2 (Metasys)
Page 311 of 541
Programming 5 - 25
Definitions:
L = LonWorks Option Card * = The Drive factory default
J = Native Protocol, Metasys N2 # = The H/O/A selector keys must have AUTO selected
P = Pneumatic Interface (3 to 15 PSIG) to allow serial com. to control the Drive
U = Native Protocol, APOGEE FLN @ = Dont care
V = Native Protocol, Modbus ~ = Jumper required TB5-5 to TB1-12 and TB1-13 to TB5-2
Parameter Reference:
b5-01: PI Control Selection H5-02: Communication Speed Selection
0: Disable (default) 3: 9600 Baud (default)
1: Enable 2: 4800 Baud
H1-03: Drive Terminal S5 Function Selection H5-07: RTS Control Selection
3: Multi-step Ref 1 (default) 0: Disabled (RTS always on)
6C: Com/Inv Sel 2 1: Enabled (RTS on only when sending) (default)
H1-04: Drive Terminal S6 Function Selection H5-08: Communication Protocol Selection
4: Multi-step Ref 2 (default) 0: Modbus (default)
19: PI Disable 1: N2 (Metasys)
H3-08: Drive Terminal A2 Signal Level 2: FLN (APOGEE)
0: 0 - 10 VDC d1-01: Frequency Reference 1
2: 4 - 20 mA (default)
DIP Switch Reference:
S1-1: Terminating resistor, always on for option L, otherwise on only if last device.
S1-2: Drive Terminal A2 signal level
On = 4-20 mA Off = 0-10 VDC
S4-2: Drive input terminal S4 operation
On = Input S4 operates inversely with input S5
Off = Inputs S4 and S5 operate independently
Notes:
Hand mode run/stop for Drive and Bypass is always via the front control panel HAND selector key.
Auto mode run/stop for Drive and Bypass without serial com. is from terminal TB1-2.
Auto mode run/stop with serial com. is from serial com. for both Drive and Bypass modes.
DIP switch configurable terminal TB3-3 is connected to Drive terminal A2 (the default). See Chapter 2 Table 2.8 for the alternate TB3-3 configuration.
A Jumper is required from TB5-2 to TB5-7. This is essential for serial com. applications and benign for all other applications.
Table 5.4 Option Dependent Bypass Parameter Settings with PI Control
Options
Specified
Parameters Effected by Options Specified and
Settings
PCB DIP
Switch S1
1 2
PCB DIP
Switch S4
2
HAND Speed
Command
Source
Drive Terminal A2
Signal Level via TB3-3
or TB5-9
AUTO
b5-01
H1-03
(S5)
H1-04
(S6)
H3-08 H5-2 H5-7 H5-8
Keypad
d1-01
4-20
mA
0-10
VDC
3-15
PSIG
Run/Stop
Speed or
Feedback
Setpoint
Terminal
TB1-2
Serial
#
TB3-3
(A2)
Serial
#
Keypad
Serial
#
PI Control 1 19 @ 2 @ @ @ @ On Off X X X X X
PI Control 1 19 @ 0 @ @ @ @ Off Off X X X X X
J & PI 1 6C 19~ 0 3 1 1 Off Off Off X X X X X
U & PI 1 6C 19~ 0 2 1 2 Off Off Off X X X X X
V & PI 1 6C 19~ 0 3 1 0 Off Off Off X X X X X
L & PI 1 6C 19~ 0 3 0 0 On Off Off X X X X X
Page 312 of 541
Programming 5 - 26
Optional LCD Digital Operator and Control Panel Display for PI Control
In Table 5.5, the o1-0X parameter listed setup the Drive display to indicate 3 variables for PI control as in Figure 5.14 when
the HAND/OFF/AUTO selector is in AUTO.
Table 5.5 parameter for optional LCD display setup for PI control.
Fig 5.14 Drive Display for PI Control, AUTO Mode
When the HAND/OFF/AUTO selector is transfered to the HAND position, the display will automatically change to indicate
the speed command, as in Figure 5.15.
Fig 5.15 Drive Display for PI Control, HAND Mode
Table 5.5 Parameters for Optional LCD Display Setup for PI Control
PARAMETER
NUMBER
SETTING
UNITS DESCRIPTION
KEYPAD DISPLAY
For Bypass Setting
For Bypass
Drive
Default
o1-03 1 0 % Digital Operator Display Selection Set for percent Display Scaling / (0-39999)
o1-06 1 0 N/A User Monitor Selection Mode Enables a custom
display for PI Control monitoring
Monitor Mode Sel / 1: 3
Non Selectable
o1-08 24 3 N/A Third Line User Monitor Selection Display PI
Feedback
3rd Monitor Sel / 24: PI
Feedback
PI SETPOINT

FWD REV SEQ REF ALARM
AUTO



- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -


OUTPUT
PI FEEDBACK
RUN
Monitor
DATA
ESC
MENU
ENTER
RESET
STOP
FWD REV SEQ REF ALARM
AUTO



RUN
Monitor
DATA
ESC
MENU
ENTER
RESET
STOP
SPEED COMMAND


- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -


OUTPUT
FEEDBACK
Page 313 of 541
Programming 5 - 27
Discussion of Table 5.4 Options Dependent, PI Control Bypass Parameter Settings:
Typical Drive Parameter Settings for PI Control with Various Combinations of Bypass and Control Options
Notes:
For project specific PI control tuning see the PI Control (b5-XX) parameters in this chapter. Tables 5.3 and 5.4
provide the basic configuration for PI Control from a Drive in an E7N Bypass unit. The b5-XX parameters are
defaulted to a good starting point for most HVAC applications. Final adjustment to some of the b5-XX parameters for
the project at hand may be required.
Hand mode run/stop for Drive and Bypass is always via the front control panel HAND/OFF/AUTO selector.
Options - None; Bypass with PI Control and no options:
Hand mode speed command from Keypad/Operator.
Auto mode PI Setpoint from Keypad/Operator.
Auto mode PI Feedback input signal, 4-20 mA applied to Terminal TB3-3 (Drive terminal A2).
Auto mode run/stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1-2 and TB1-9.
Options - None; Bypass with PI Control and no options:
Hand mode speed command from Keypad/Operator.
Auto mode PI Setpoint from Keypad/Operator.
Auto mode PI Feedback input signal, 0-10 VDC applied to Terminal TB3-3 (Drive terminal A2).
Auto mode run/stop contact closure for Drive and Bypass applied to terminals TB1-2 and TB1-9.
Significant
Parameter Setting
Drive Operational Result
b1-01 = 0: Operator Speed command (Hand) and PI setpoint (Auto) source = Keypad/Operator (U1-01)
b5-01 = 1: Enable Enable PI mode of operation
H1-03 = 19: PI Disable A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure disables PI mode. This input contact is
closed when H/O/A = Hand.
H3-08 = 2: 4-20 mA (default) Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 4-20 mA (Note Control PCB DIP switch
S1-2 must also be ON)
H3-09 = B: PI Feedback Drive Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control
Significant
Parameter Setting
Drive Operational Result
b1-01 = 0: Operator Speed command (Hand) and PI setpoint (Auto) source = Keypad/Operator (U1-01)
b5-01 = 1: Enable Enable PI mode of operation
H1-03 = 19: PI Disable A Drive terminal S5 input contact closure disables PI mode. This input contact is
closed when H/O/A = Hand.
H3-08 = 0: 0-10 VDC Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 0-10 VDC (Note Control PCB DIP switch
S1-2 must also be OFF)
H3-09 = B: PI Feedback Drive Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control
Page 314 of 541
Programming 5 - 28
Options - J, U, V or L "Serial Communications"; Bypass with PI Control and serial communication for run/stop control and
Setpoint input:
Hand mode speed command from Keypad/Operator.
Auto mode PI Setpoint input signal from serial communication.
Auto mode run/stop command for Drive from serial communication.
Auto mode run/stop command for Bypass from serial communication.
Significant
Parameter Setting
Drive Operational Result
b1-01 = 0: Operator Speed command source = Keypad/Operator (U1-01)
b5-01 = 1: Enable Enable PI mode of operation
H1-03 = 6C: Com/Inv Sel 2 A Drive terminal S5 input contact opening (H/O/A = Auto) selects serial com for
both the run/stop command and speed command. A Drive terminal S5 input contact
closure (H/O/A = Hand) allows b1-01 to select Keypad/Operator as the speed
command source. This input contact is closed when H/O/A = Hand.
H1-04 = 19: Disable
Jumpers required:
TB5-5 to TB1-12 and TB1-13 to
TB5-2
A Drive terminal S6 input contact closure disables PI mode.
H3-08 = 0: 0-10 VDC Drive Terminal A2 is programmed for 0-10 VDC (Note - Control PCB DIP switch
S1-2 must also be OFF)
H3-09 = B: PI Feedback Drive Terminal A2 function is set to provide PI feedback for closed loop control
H5-02 = Baud Rate Each protocol requires the baud rate indicated in Table 5.2
H5-07 = RTS Control Each protocol requires the Request to Send control indicated in Table 5.2
H5-08 = Protocol Selection Drive communicates via protocol selected. 0: Modbus, 1: N2 or 2: FLN
Page 315 of 541
Programming 5 - 29
The analog feedback to the Drive for the PI control is via the Drive A2 terminal. The Drive must be programmed
(H3-09= B: PI Feedback) to use terminal A2 as feedback for the PI functionality of the Drive.
The PI setpoint can be configured to come from one of many different inputs or parameters. The table below describes the
options for originating the PI setpoint.
In some situations there are two feedback inputs. Air Handling Unit return fan speed control in a volume matching strategy
for building pressure control is an example. The Drive can be programmed to maintain a set differential between two
analog signals. If input A2 is configured as a PI Differential Mode (H3-09= 16: PI Differential), then the Drive will
maintain a set difference between the measurements read on inputs TB3-3 (configured for Drive Terminal A1) and TB5-9
(Drive Terminal A2). This differential setpoint is programmed by parameter (b5-07).
b5-01 PI Mode
The Drive can be used as a stand-alone PI controller. If PI functionality is selected by parameter b5-01, the Drive will adjust its
output to cause the feedback from a transmitter to match the PI setpoint (b5-19). The setting of b5-01 will determine whether
PI functionality is disabled (b5-01= 0: Disabled), enabled (b5-01= 1: Enabled), or enable with the output of the
PI function used to trim a Speed Command (b5-01= 3: Fref+PI).
b5-02 Proportional Gain Setting
Setting Range: 0.00 to 25.00
Factory Default: 2.00
The proportional gain will apply a straight multiplier to the calculated difference (error) between the PI Setpoint and the
measured transmitter feedback at terminal A2. A large value will tend to reduce the error but may cause instability
(oscillations) if too high. A small value may allow to much offset between the setpoint and feedback (See Figure 5.16 on
following page).
b5-03 Integral Time Setting
Setting Range: 0.0 to 360.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 5.0 Seconds
Table 5.6 PI Setpoint Options
The PI Setpoint
will be read from:
If these conditions are true
Status of
b5-18
Status of
Modbus
Register
0Fh bit 1
Status of
b1-01
Parameter b5-19 = 1 N/A N/A
Modbus Register
06H
= 0 ON N/A
D1-01 = 0 OFF = 0
Terminal A1 = 0 OFF = 1
Serial Com. = 0 OFF = 2
Option PCB = 0 OFF = 3
Setting Description
0 Disabled (factory default)
1 Enabled
3 Fref+PI
Page 316 of 541
Programming 5 - 30
The Integral factor of PI functionality is a time-based gain that can be used to eliminate the error (difference between the
setpoint and feedback at steady state). The smaller the Integral Time set into b5-03, the more aggressive the Integral factor will
be. To turn off the Integral Time, set b5-03= 0.00.
Fig 5.16 PID Feedback Response Characteristics
b5-04 Integral Limit Setting
Setting Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Default: 100.0%
On some applications, especially those with rapidly varying loads, the output of the PI function may have large oscillations. To
suppress these oscillations, a limit can be applied to the integral factor by programming b5-04.
b5-06 PI Output Limit
Setting Range: 0.0 to 100.0%
Factory Default: 100.0%
Places a cap on the output of the PI function. Limiting the PI function may help to prevent large overshoots in the Drives
response to error (the difference between the setpoint and the feedback).
b5-07 PI Offset Adjustment
Setting Range: -100.0% to +100.0%
Factory Default: 0.0%
The PI Offset Adjustment parameter has two different uses. Parameter b5-07 serves different functions depending on whether
it is used on a standard PI loop or a Differential PI loop.
Parameter b5-07 causes an offset to be applied to the output of the PI function in a non-differential PI loop. Every time the PI
output is updated, the offset (b5-07) is summed with the PI output. This can be used to artificially kick-start a slow starting PI
loop.
If the Drive is configured for Differential PI Regulation (H3-09= 16: PI Differential), then this parameter is the target set-
point for the differential to be maintained between the signal measured on analog input A1 and the signal measured on analog
input A2.
Zero
offset with
Integral Action
No Integral With Integral
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
d

F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
M
e
a
s
u
r
e
d

F
e
e
d
b
a
c
k
Setpoint
Offset
Setpoint
Feedback Feedback
TIME TIME
Page 317 of 541
Programming 5 - 31
b5-08 PI Primary Delay Time Constant
Setting Range: 0.00 to 10.00 Seconds
Factory Default: 0.00 Seconds
Acts as a time based filter that lowers the responsiveness of the PI function, but also makes the function more stable when the
setpoint varies rapidly or when the feedback is noisy.
b5-09 PI Output Level Selection
Normally, the output of the PI function causes an increase in motor speed whenever the measured feedback is below the
setpoint. This is referred to as direct acting response. However, if b5-09= 1: Reverse Output, the output of the PI function
causes the motor to slow down when the feedback is below the setpoint. This is referred to as reverse acting response.
b5-10 PI Output Gain Setting
Setting Range: 0.0 to 25.0
Factory Default: 1.0
Applies a multiplier to the output of the PI function. Using the gain can be helpful when the PI function is used to trim the
Speed Command. Increasing b5-10 causes the PI function to have a greater regulating affect on the speed command.
b5-11 PI Reverse Selection
Parameter b5-11 determines whether reverse operation is allowed while using PI control (b5-010). The factory default setting
will not allow the Drive to run in reverse. This parameter does not need to be changed from factory default for a majority of
HVAC applications. (Refer also to b5-09).
b5-12 PI Feedback Reference Missing Detection Selection
Loss of feedback can cause problems to a PI application. The Drive can be programmed to turn on a digital output whenever a
loss of feedback occurs. Feedback Loss Detection is turned on by b5-12. When b5-12= 1: Alarm, the Drive acknowledges
the loss of feedback without stopping or turning on the fault output (MA-MB). If b5-12= 2: Fault, the Drive coasts to a stop
and turns on the fault output if the feedback is determined to be lost.
Setting Description
0 Normal Output (direct acting) (factory default)
1 Reverse Output (reverse acting)
Setting Description
0 0 Limit (factory default)
1 Reverse
Setting Description
0 Disabled (factory default)
1 Alarm
2 Fault
Page 318 of 541
Programming 5 - 32
b5-13 PI Feedback Loss Detection Level
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 0%
b5-14 PI Feedback Loss Detection Time
Setting Range: 0.0 to 25.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 1.0 Seconds
The Drive interprets feedback loss whenever the feedback signal drops below the value of b5-13 and stays below that level for
at least the time set into b5-14. See Figure 5.17 below for timing details.
Fig 5.17 Loss of PI Feedback Feature
b5-15 Sleep Function Start Level
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz
Factory Default: 0.0 Hz
b5-16 Sleep Delay Time
Setting Range: 0.0 to 25.5 Seconds
Factory Default: 0.0 Seconds
The Sleep Function can be programmed to prevent running the Drive when the PI loop output or the speed command is so low
that no usable work is being done and/or equipment damage may result. The Sleep Function can be Enabled by entering a value
in parameter b5-15. If the Drives output drops below the level set by the Sleep Function Start Level (b5-15) and remains there
at least as long as the delay time determined by the Sleep Delay Time (b5-16), then the Drives internal Run command drops
out and the Drive output ceases. Though the Drives output has ceased, all other Drive functions continue. Once the Drives
theoretical output returns to a level above the Sleep Function Start Level (b5-15) and remains above that level for at least the
Sleep Delay Time (b5-16), the internal Run command returns and the Drive output begins again. The b5-16 Delay Time
prevents oscillation about the sleep level. Note: The sleep function can be used even if the P1 function is disabled
(b5-01 = 0: Disabled).
Fig 5.18 Sleep Function Response
Measured
Feedback
T
t
Feedback
Loss Output
T
b5-13
T = b5-14
Feedback
Loss Digital Output
ON (CLOSED)
OFF (OPEN)
TIME
Sleep Level
Output
Speed Command
Upper Limit
d2-01
Output
Speed Command
b5-15
Page 319 of 541
Programming 5 - 33
b5-17 PI Accel/Decel Time
Setting Range: 0.0 to 25.5 Seconds
Factory Default: 0.0 Seconds
This is a soft start function that is applied to the PI setpoint analog input. Instead of having nearly instantaneous changes in
signal levels, there is a programmed ramp applied to level changes. When changing setpoints the error can be limited by
gradually ramping the setpoint through the use of parameter b5-17.
b5-18 PI Setpoint Selection
In order to use parameter b5-19 as the PI Setpoint, set parameter b5-18= 1: Enabled. If b5-18= 0: Disabled the PI Setpoint
will either be:
Modbus Register 06H (If Register 0FH bit 1 is high)
The active speed command (i.e. Determined by the setting of b1-01). See Table 5.7 Setpoint Options
b5-19 PI Setpoint Value
Setting Range: 0.00 to 100.00%
Factory Default: 0.00%
Parameter b5-19 is for a PI Setpoint value. When b5-18= 1: Enabled, the value of b5-19 will take precedent over any other PI
setpoint unless the Drive is set up for Differential Feedback, in which case, b5-18 and b5-19 have no affect on the PI
function.
b5-20 PI Setpoint Display Scaling
The PI Setpoint Display Scaling value (b5-20) is a scaling factor that is applied to the monitor display for both the PI Setpoint
(U1-38) and the PI Feedback (U1-24).
Setting Description
0 Disabled (factory default)
1 Enabled
Setting Description
0 Hz (factory default)
1 %
3 RPM (Synchronous)
3 Engineering Units
Table 5.7 PI Setpoint Display Scaling Options
If b5-20 is:
U1-24 and U1-38
Display Increments.
0 0.01 Hz
1 0.00%
2 through 39
(enter the # of motor poles)
0 RPM
40 through 39999 Engineering Units
Page 320 of 541
Programming 5 - 34
If the monitors seem more natural in terms of percentage, set b5-20= 1. If the monitors are easier to work with when
displaying the equivalent synchronous RPM, set b5-20= [the number of motor poles].
If another engineered unit, such a fpm or cfm, is desired, set b5-20= xxxxx where
X X X X X
Digit 5 Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1

Digits 1 through 4 set the desired number to be displayed at 100% speed.
Digit 5 determines the number of decimal places
If Digit 5 = 0 number format is XXXX
If Digit 5 = 1 number format is XXX.X
If Digit 5 = 2 number format is XX.XX
If Digit 5 = 3 number format is X.XXX
For example:
If b5-20= 10425 then at 100% output the digital operator would display 42.5 for monitor U1-38 or U1-24.
b5-21 Sleep Source
Parameter b5-21 selects the sleep function characteristic action:
When b5-21= 0: SFS Input the sleep function start level (b5-15) is compared to the Drives output (Speed Command after PI
block). This is the setting that should be used for open loop or closed loop control.
It is also possible to have the sleep function start level (b5-15) compared to the Drive input or setpoint. For this special
application set b5-21= 1: PI Setpoint.
When b5-21= 2: Snooze a variation of the sleep function called Snooze is enabled, see parameter b5-22 to b5-27.
Setting Description
0 SFS Input (Output of PI block)
1 PI Setpoint (factory default)
2 Snooze
IMPORTANT
The sleep function can be used even if the PI function is disabled (b5-01= 0: Disabled).
Page 321 of 541
Programming 5 - 35
b5-22 PI Snooze Level
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 0%
b5-23 PI Snooze Delay Time
Setting Range: 0 to 3600 Seconds
Factory Default: 0 Seconds
b5-24 PI Snooze Deactivation Level
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 0%
The Snooze Function is a variation on the Sleep Function. The Snooze function must be selected by setting parameter
b5-21= 2: Snooze. Once the Snooze Function is selected, the Drive monitors the output frequency. If the output frequency
drops below the PI Snooze Level (b5-22), and stays below that level for at least the PI Snooze Delay Time (b5-23), the Drive
output shuts off. This is different from the Sleep Function because it is the feedback that must drop below the PI Snooze
Deactivation Level (b5-24) before normal Drive output will begin again. See Figure 5.19 on the following page.
b5-25 PI Setpoint Boost Setting
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 0%
Just before the Snooze Function is activated, the PI Setpoint can be temporarily increased to create an overshoot of the
intended PI Setpoint. The temporary boost is determined by the PI Setpoint Boost Setting (b5-25). Once the temporary boost
level is reached (or the PI Maximum Boost Time (b5-26) is exceeded), the Drive output shuts off (snoozes) and the intended PI
Setpoint returns. From this point on, the Snooze Function operates normally and the Drive output returns when the feedback
level drops below b5-24. See Figure 5.19 on the following page.
Page 322 of 541
Programming 5 - 36
b5-26 PI Maximum Boost Time
Setting Range: 0 to 3600 Seconds
Factory Default: 0 Seconds
Associated with the Snooze Function. In cases where the temporary PI Setpoint (intended PI setpoint + PI Setpoint Boost)
cannot be reached within the PI Maximum Boost Time (b5-26), the Setpoint Boost is interrupted and the Drive output is
turned off.
Fig 5.19 Snooze Function Operation
b5-27 PI Snooze Feedback Level
Setting Range: 0 to 100%
Factory Default: 60%
This is a second method of initiating the Snooze Function. If the PI feedback level exceeds the PI Snooze Feedback Level
(b5-27), then the Drive output shuts off. Once the PI feedback drops below the PI Snooze Deactivation Level (b5-24) then
normal Drive and PI operation return.
b5-28 PI Feedback Square Root Function Activation
If b5-28= 1: Enabled, the square root of the PI feedback is compared to the PI Setpoint in order to determine appropriate
Drive output to properly regulate the system. This is helpful in cases where the measured feedback is pressure but the PI loop
needs to regulate flow.
Setting Description
0 Disabled (factory default)
1 Enabled
PI Feedback
PI Setpoint
PI Output
Snooze
Function
t
t
t
b5-22
b5-23
b5-23
Either PI
Feedback
reaches the new
boosted setpoint
value or the
maximum boost
time is reached.
b5-24
ON
OFF OFF
PI Output
PI Setpoint
PI Feedback
Snooze
Function
TIME
b5-26
Either PI Feedback
reaches the new
boosted setpoint value
or the maximum boost
time b5-26 is reached.
Page 323 of 541
Programming 5 - 37
b5-29 PI Square Root Gain
Setting Range: 0.00 to 2.00
Factory Default: 1.00
A multiplier applied to the square root of the feedback.
b5-30 PI Output Square Root Monitor Selection
If the PI Function is regulating the flow of a closed loop system by using a pressure feedback, it may be convenient to view the
square root of the PI output using monitor U1-37.
4b8 Energy Savings
The energy savings function improves overall system operating efficiency by operating the motor at its highest efficiency. This
is accomplished by continuously monitoring the motor load and adjusting the motor terminal voltage so that the motor always
operates near its rated slip frequency. A motor is most efficient when operating near rated slip conditions.
b8-01 Energy Savings Selection
When the Energy Savings function is enabled (b8-01= 1: Enabled), the Drive reduces the output voltage to the motor below
the voltage value specified by the programmed V/f pattern whenever the motor load is light. Since torque is reduced during
this voltage reduction, the voltage has to return to normal levels when the load returns. The energy savings is realized through
improved motor efficiency. The reduced output voltage causes increased rotor slipping even with a light load. A motor is most
efficient when operating fully loaded (i.e. operating at rated slip).
b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value
Setting Range: 0.0 to 655.0
Factory Default: Model Dependent
Parameter b8-04 is used in maximizing motor efficiency. The factory setting will be Drive capacity dependent but can be
adjusted in small amounts while viewing the kW monitor (U1-08) and running the Drive to minimize the output kW. A larger
value typically results in less voltage to the motor and less energy consumption. Too large a value will cause the motor to stall.
Setting Description
0 Disabled (factory default)
1 Enabled
Setting Description
0 Disabled (factory default)
1 Enabled
Page 324 of 541
Programming 5 - 38
4C1 Accel/Decel
C1-01 Acceleration Time 1
C1-02 Deceleration Time 1
C1-03 Acceleration Time 2
C1-04 Deceleration Time 2
Setting Range: 0.0 to 6000.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 30.0 Seconds
C1-01 (Acceleration Time 1) sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum speed (E1-04). C1-02 (Deceleration Time 1) sets
the time to decelerate from maximum speed to zero. C1-01 and C1-02 are the factory default active accel/decel pair. Another
accel/decel pair (C1-03 and C1-04) exists that can be activated by a multi-function digital input (H1-0x= 7), or
specified by a switch over frequency as programmed in parameter C1-11.
Note: In fan applications employing duct high pressure safety limit switches, it may be necessary to further adjust the
deceleration time to avoid high pressure limit trips due to damper closure as the system is shut down (an alternate solution in
this situation is to set parameter b1-03 to Coast to Stop).
C1-09 Fast Stop Time
Setting Range: 0.0 to 6000.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 10.0 Seconds
A special deceleration parameter is available for use with emergency or fault operations. Parameter C1-09 will set a
special deceleration that can be operated by closing a digital input configured as H1-0x= 15 or H1-0x= 17. A digital input
configured as H1-0x= 15 will look for a switch closure before initiating the Fast Stop operation. A digital input configured as
H1-0x= 17 will look for the switch opening before initiating the Fast Stop operation.
Unlike a standard deceleration time, once the Fast Stop operation is initiated even momentarily, the Drive cannot be
re-operated until the deceleration is complete, the Fast Stop input is cleared, and the Run command is cycled.
Page 325 of 541
Programming 5 - 39
4d1 Preset References
d1-01 Frequency Reference 1
d1-02 Frequency Reference 2
d1-03 Frequency Reference 3
d1-04 Frequency Reference 4
Setting Range: 0.00 to E1-04 Value
Factory Default: d1-01 = 10.00 Hz
d1-02 = 6.00 Hz
d1-03 = 0.00 Hz
d1-04 = 0.00 Hz
d1-01 and d1-02 are special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit. See Table 5.1.
Fig 5.20 Preset Reference Timing Diagram example
d1-17 Jog Frequency Reference
Setting Range: 0.00 to E1-04 Value
Factory Default: 6.00 Hz
The Drive can be programmed to utilize digital inputs to change between four presets speeds and a jog speed. It is a two-step
process to set the Drive up for preset speeds. First, d1-01 through d1-04 and d1-17 must be programmed with the desired preset
speeds and the desired jog speed, respectively. Next, up to three of the Drives digital inputs (Terminals S3 through S7) need to be
programmed (via parameters H1-01 to H1-05) and wired (to normally open contacts) as Multi-step Speed Reference 1, Multi-step
Speed Reference 2, and Jog Frequency.
Table 5.8 Preset Speed Truth Table
Preset
Speed
Terminal
programmed as Multi-
step Reference 1
Terminal
programmed as Multi-
step Reference 2
Terminal
programmed as Jog
Reference
Details
1 OFF OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 1 (d1-01) or analog input A1
(Determined by b1-01, see page 5-12)
2 ON OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 2 (d1-02) or analog input A2
(Determined by H3-09, see page 5-57)
3 OFF ON OFF Frequency Reference 3 (d1-03)
4 ON ON OFF Frequency Reference 4 (d1-04)
5 - - ON* Jog Frequency (d1-17)
* The Jog Frequency input is given priority over the multi-step speeds.

Shown for H3-13 = 0: Main Fref TA1, A1 and A2 are reversed if H3-13 = 1: Main Fref TA2

RUN
Multi-step
Reference 1 Input
Multi-step
Reference 2 Input
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Closed
Open
Jog Input
Output
Speed
t
d1-01
d1-02
d1-03
d1-04
d1-17
Page 326 of 541
Programming 5 - 40
As shown in Table 5.8, it is possible to use analog inputs in place of Frequency Reference 1 and Frequency
Reference 2.
If b1-01= 1: Terminals then the analog input A1 will be used instead of Frequency Reference 1 for the first preset speed.
If b1-01= 0: Operator, then Frequency Reference 1 will be used.
If H3-09= 2: Aux Reference then the analog input A2 will be used instead of Frequency Reference 2 for the second
preset speed. If H3-092 then Frequency Reference 2 will be used.
IMPORTANT
The programming of d1-01 through d1-04 and d1-17 will be affected by the setting of o1-03. The programming
of these parameters will be in the units specified by Display Scaling parameter (o1-03).
Page 327 of 541
Programming 5 - 41
4d2 Reference (Speed Command) Limits
d2-01 Frequency Reference Upper Limit
Setting Range: 0.0 to 110.0%
Factory Default: 100.0%
d2-02 Frequency Reference Lower Limit
Setting Range: 0.0 to 110.0%
Factory Default: 0.0%
The use of parameters d2-01 and d2-02 places limitations on the speed command that the Drive will accept. The parameters
are set in units of percentage of the maximum frequency (E1-04) and provide limits on any remote speed command input. By
entering upper or lower frequency limits, the Drive programmer can prevent operation of the Drive above or below levels that
may cause resonance, equipment damage or discomfort (see also parameter d3-0X). For example, limits may be needed to
prevent low speed operation of: cooling tower fans with gear boxes, pumps with pressure dependent seals or AHUs with
minimum delivery requirements.
Fig 5.21 Frequency Reference Upper and Lower Limit Effects on the Speed Command
d2-01
d2-02
Frequency Reference Upper Limit
Frequency Reference Lower Limit
Internal Speed Command
Set Speed Command
Note: See also the Sleep function in Figure 5.18 for alternate lower limit implementation.
d2-01
d2-02
Operating
Range
Page 328 of 541
Programming 5 - 42
4d3 Jump Frequencies
d3-01 Jump Frequency 1
d3-02 Jump Frequency 2
d3-03 Jump Frequency 3
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz
Factory Default: 0.0 Hz
d3-04 Jump Frequency Width
Setting Range: 0.0 to 20.0 Hz
Factory Default: 1.0 Hz
In order to avoid continuous operation at a speed that causes resonance in driven machinery, the Drive can be programmed
with jump frequencies that will not allow continued operation within specific frequency ranges. If a speed is commanded that
falls within a dead band, or Jump Frequency, the Drive will clamp the frequency reference just below the dead band and only
accept higher speed commands when the commanded speed rises above the upper end of the dead band, for increasing
references. Similarly, the Drive will clamp the frequency reference just above the dead band and only accept lower speed
commands when the command speed falls below the lower end of the dead band, for decreasing references.
Fig 5.22 Jump Frequency Characteristics
Setting the center point of the dead band with the d3-01 through d3-03 parameters and setting the width of the dead band with
parameter d3-04 determines the dead band characteristics. The programmer can set up to three Jump Frequencies. If multiple
Jump Frequencies are programmed the following rule applies:
d3-01< = d3-02< = d3-03
d3-03
d3-04 User Speed
Command Input
A
c
c
e
p
t
e
d

S
p
e
e
d
C
o
m
m
a
n
d
d3-01
d3-02
d3-04
d3-04
d3-03
d3-04
Page 329 of 541
Programming 5 - 43
4d4 Sequence
d4-01 MOP Reference Memory
The Drive offers the capacity to change the speed command much the way a Motor Operated Potentiometer (MOP) would.
Using programmed digital inputs configured as MOP Increase (H1-0x= 10) and MOP Decrease (H1-0x= 11), the Drive will
increase the speed command whenever the MOP Increase input is closed and decrease the speed command whenever the MOP
Decrease is closed. The speed command will remain constant whenever both inputs are open or closed.
Parameter d4-01 determines whether the last speed command, before the Run command was removed, is remembered even if
the power is cycled to the Drive. If d4-01= 0: Disabled, then when a new Run command is issued the Drives speed
command will be 0 rpm. If d4-01= 1: Enabled, then the speed command will be the last commanded speed before the Run
command was removed.
Setting Description
0 Disabled (factory default)
1 Enabled
Page 330 of 541
Programming 5 - 44
4E1 V/f Pattern
E1-01 Input Voltage Setting
Setting Range: 155.0V to 255.0V (208V/240V Models)
310.0V to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 208.0V (208V Models)
240.0V (240V Models)
480.0V (480V Models)
Set the Input Voltage parameter (E1-01) to the nominal voltage of the connected AC power supply. This parameter adjusts the
levels of some protective features of the Drive (i.e. Overvoltage, Stall Prevention, etc.). E1-01 also serves as the Maximum/
Base Voltage used by the Preset V/Hz curves (E1-03= 0 to D).
E1-03 V/f Pattern Selection
The Drive operates utilizing a set V/f pattern to determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed.
There are 14 different preset V/f patterns to select from with varying voltage profiles, saturation levels (frequency at which
maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies.
There are also settings for Custom V/f patterns that will allow the programmer to manually set (Customize) the V/f pattern
using parameters E1-04 through E1-13.
Using parameter E1-03, the programmer can select one of the preset V/f patterns or chose between a custom V/F pattern with
an upper voltage limit (E1-03= F: Custom V/F) and a custom V/f pattern without a voltage limit (E1-03= FF: Custom w/o
limit).
Setting Description
0 50 Hz
1 60 Hz Saturation
2 50 Hz Saturation
3 72 Hz
4 50 Hz VT1
5 50 Hz VT2
6 60 Hz VT1
7 60 Hz VT2
8 50 Hz HST1
9 50 Hz HST2
A 60 Hz HST1
B 60 Hz HST2
C 90 Hz
D 120 Hz
F Custom V/f (factory default, with parameter values per setting 1)
FF Custom w/o limit
Page 331 of 541
Programming 5 - 45
If one of the custom V/f patterns is selected, then parameters E1-04 through E1-13 will determine the V/F pattern.
Table 5.9 is for 240V class units only, for 480V class units multiply the voltage values by 2.
E1-04 Maximum Output Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 120.0 Hz
Factory Default: 60.0 Hz
Table 5.9 Preset V/f Patterns
Specifications E1-03 V/f Pattern *1 Specifications E1-03 V/f Pattern *1
G
e
n
e
r
a
l
-
p
u
r
p
o
s
e
50Hz 0
H
i
g
h

S
t
a
r
t
i
n
g

T
o
r
q
u
e

*
250Hz
High
Starting
Torque 1
8
High
Starting
Torque 2
9
60Hz Saturation
1
F
60Hz
High
Starting
Torque 1
A
50Hz Saturation 2
High
Starting
Torque 2
B
72Hz 3
H
i
g
h

S
p
e
e
d

O
p
e
r
a
t
i
o
n
90Hz C
V
a
r
i
a
b
l
e

T
o
r
q
u
e
50Hz
Variable
Torque 1
4
120Hz D
Variable
Torque 2
5
60Hz
Variable
Torque 1
6
Variable
Torque 2
7
IMPORTANT
When a factory Initialization is performed, the setting of E1-03 is unaffected but the settings of E1-04 through
E1-13 are returned to their factory default settings.
(Hz)
(V)
230
17
10
0 1.3 2.5 50
0
230
(V)
28
22
15
13
(Hz)
0 1.3 2.5 50
9
8
(Hz)
0 1.5 3.0 50 60
17
10
2
1
F
(V)
230 230
(V)
28
22
17
13
(Hz)
0 1.5 3.0
B
A
60
(Hz)
0 1.5 3.0 60 72
17
10
3
(V)
230
(Hz)
0 1.5 3.0 60 90
17
10
C
(V)
230
230
(V)
57
40
10
9
(Hz)
0 1.3 25 50
5
4
(Hz)
0 1.5 3.0 60 120
17
10
D
(V)
230
230
(V)
57
40
10
9
(Hz)
0 1.5 30 60
7
6
Page 332 of 541
Programming 5 - 46
E1-05 Maximum Output Voltage
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (208V/240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 208.0V (208V Models)
230.0V (240V Models)
460.0V (480V Models)
E1-06 Base Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz (settings above 120.0 Hz are currently not supported)
Factory Default: 60.0 Hz
E1-07 Mid Output Frequency A
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz (settings above 120.0 Hz are currently not supported)
Factory Default: 3.0 Hz
E1-08 Mid Output Voltage A
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (208V/240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 18.0V (208V Models)
18.0V (240V Models)
33.6V (480V Models)
E1-09 Minimum Output Frequency
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz (settings above 120.0 Hz are currently not supported)
Factory Default: 1.5 Hz
E1-10 Mid Output Voltage
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (208V/240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 10.8V (208V Models)
10.8V (240V Models)
16.8V (480V Models)
E1-11 Mid Output Frequency B
Setting Range: 0.0 to 200.0 Hz (settings above 120.0 Hz are currently not supported)
Factory Default: 0.0 Hz
E1-12 Mid Output Voltage B
E1-13 Base Voltage
Setting Range: 0.0 to 255.0V (208V/240V Models)
0.0 to 510.0V (480V Models)
Factory Defaults: 0.0V (208V Models)
0.0V (240V Models)
0.0V (480V Models)
Page 333 of 541
Programming 5 - 47
To set up a custom V/f pattern, program the points shown in the diagram below using parameters E1-04 through E1-13. Be sure
that the following condition is true:
E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-11 E1-04
Fig 5.23 Custom V/f Pattern Programming Curve
Increasing the voltage in the V/f pattern increases the available motor torque. However, when setting a custom V/f pattern,
increase the voltage gradually while monitoring the motor current, to prevent:
Drive faults as a result of motor over-excitation
Motor overheating or excessive vibration
4E2 Motor Setup
E2-01 Motor Rated Current
Setting Range: Model Dependent (see appendix B)
Factory Default: Model Dependent
The Motor Rated Current parameter (E2-01) is necessary information for the Drive motor protection function. The motor over-
load protection parameter L1-01 is enabled by default. In addition, motor rated current is used by the torque compensation func-
tion to insure optimum torque production. Set E2-01 to the full load amps (FLA) value stamped on the motors
nameplate. During Auto-tuning, it is required for the operator to enter the motor rated current in parameter T1-04 on the
Auto-Tuning menu. If the Auto-tuning operation completes successfully, the value entered into T1-04 will be also written into
E2-01.
For applications employing a Drive that is oversized for the motor, E2-01 may be set as low as 10% of the Drive output current
rating. The ampere value in E2-01 however, must always be greater than the No Load Current value in parameter E2-03 or an
OPE02 error will be displayed.
Frequency E1-09 E1-07 E1-06 E1-04 E1-11
Max Voltage E1-05
Mid Voltage B E1-12
Mid Voltage A E1-08
Base Voltage E1-13
Min Voltage E1-10
Min
Freq
Max
Freq
Base
Freq
Mid
Freq
A
Mid
Freq B Freq A
Page 334 of 541
Programming 5 - 48
E2-03 No Load Current
Setting Range: Model Dependent (see appendix B)
Factory Default: Model Dependent
Set E2-03 to the motor no-load current at rated voltage and rated frequency. Consult the motor manufacturer for the proper
value if the no load current is not stated on the motor nameplate.
4F6 Com OPT Setup
(Applies only to the LonWorks

option)
F6-01 Operation Selection After Communication Error
If a serial communication option board is attached to the Drive at the 2CN connector, the Drive will automatically monitor the
card for any type of communication errors. F6-01 is applicable no matter whether a run command or speed command is coming
via the option board, digital operator, or terminal input. The setting of F6-01 determines whether the communication error is
seen as a fault or an alarm. If F6-01= 3: Alarm Only, then the fault output is not energized upon a communication error. All
other settings of F6-01 cause the fault output to energize. The setting of F6-01 does not apply to any of the embedded
communication protocols used at the RS-485/422 terminals on the removable terminal board. (See parameters H5-0X)
F6-02 Option PCB External Fault Detection Selection
F6-03 Option PCB External Fault Stopping Method
If an external fault is received from the LonWorks

or other communication option card, the settings of F6-02 and F6-03 will
determine the Drive operation in reaction to the fault signal. Parameter F6-02 will determine if the external fault is always
recognized (F6-02= 0: Always Detected) or only recognized when the Run command is active (F6-02= 1: Detected only
during operation).
Once the fault is recognized, parameter F6-03 will determine the operation of the Drive. If parameter F6-03 is set to anything
other then 3, the Drive will fault and a stopping sequence is begun. If F6-03= 3: Alarm Only, then the external fault is
treated like an alarm. Operation will continue and an EF0 fault will flash on the digital operator.
Setting Description
0 Ramp to Stop
1 Coast to Stop
2 Fast-Stop
3 Alarm Only (factory default)
Setting Description
0 Always Detected (factory default)
1 Detected only during operation
Setting Description
0 Ramp to Stop
1 Coast to Stop (factory default)
2 Fast-Stop
3 Alarm Only
Page 335 of 541
Programming 5 - 49
F6-05 Current Scaling via Communication Option PCB
A communication option card can read the Drives DPRAM to access the current monitor. The format of the current reading in
the DPRAM will be determined by parameter F6-05.
F6-05= 0: A Display Current is a decimal number corresponding to actual Amperes
F6-05= 1: 100%/8192 (Drive Rated Current) Current reading is a number where
8192 = 100% of Drive rated output current
4H1 Digital Inputs
H1-01 Drive Terminal S3 Function Selection
H1-02 Drive Terminal S4 Function Selection
H1-03 Drive Terminal S5 Function Selection
H1-04 Drive Terminal S6 Function Selection
H1-05 Drive Terminal S7 Function Selection
Setting Range: 0 to 6E
Factory Default: H1-01= 70: Bypass Drv Envl This is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic
circuit. See Table 5.1.
H1-02= This is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit. See Table 5.2
H1-03= This is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit. See Table 5.2.
H1-04= 4: Multi-Step Ref 2 (2 Wire)
3: Multi-Step Ref 1 (3 Wire)
H1-05= 6: Jog Freq Ref (2 Wire)
4: Multi-Step Ref 2 (3 Wire)
Setting Description
0 A Display (factory default)
1 100%/8192 (Drive Rated Current)
Page 336 of 541
Programming 5 - 50
The Drive has five multi-function contact digital inputs. By programming parameters H1-01 through H1-05, the user can assign
specific functions to each input. Below is a table with a complete list of all of the digital input functions. The programming
manual has a more detailed description of each of the functions.
Following are descriptions of only those parameters that are required for Bypass operations and PI control.
Function: Multi-step Ref 1
Setting: 3
Function: Multi-step Ref 2
Setting: 4
The Drive can be programmed to step through four preset speeds and a jog. It is also possible to mix in the analog inputs as
speed references that can be chosen in place of the first and second preset frequency references. The selection of which preset
speed will be the active speed command is determined by the status of the digital inputs set for Multi-step Ref 1 (H1-0x= 3)
and Multi-step Ref 2 (H1-0x= 4). Changing the active speed command via the Multi-step References can be done while the
Drive is running.
Table 5.10 Digital Input Functions
Parameter
setting Function
Parameter
setting Function
0 3-Wire Control 1C Trim Control Increase
1 Local/Remote Selection 1D Trim Control Decrease
2 Option/Inv Selection 1 1E Reference Sample Hold
3 Multi-step Reference 1 20-2F External Fault
4 Multi-step Reference 2 30 Integral Reset
6 Jog Frequency Reference 1 31 Integral Hold
7 Multi-Accel/Decel 1 34 PI Soft Start Cancel
8 External Baseblock N.O. 35 PI Input Characteristic
9 External Baseblock N.C. 36 Option/Inv Selection 2
A Accel/Decel Ramp Hold 60 Motor Pre-heat
C Terminal A2 Enable 61 Speed Search 1
F Terminal Not Used 62 Speed Search 2
10 MOP Increase 64 Speed Search 3
11 MOP Decrease 67 Communications Test Mode
12 Forward Jog 68 High Slip Braking
13 Reverse Jog 69 Jog Frequency Reference 2
14 Fault Reset 6A Drive Enable (Cycle Run)
15 Fast Stop N.O. 6B Com/Inv Selection
17 Fast Stop N.C. 6C Com/Inv SEL 2
18 Timer Function 6D Auto Mode @ Close
19 PI Disable 6E Hand Mode @ Close
1B Program Lockout 70 Drive Enable (Accept Run)
Page 337 of 541
Programming 5 - 51
The following table details which reference is active based on the status of the Multi-step Ref 1 and Multi-step Ref 2 inputs:
The determination of whether the Preset Speed 1 will be the Frequency Reference 1 (d1-01 or the analog input A1) is
determined by the status of b1-01. If b1-01= 1: Terminals, the value of the input to A1 will determine the commanded speed
when Preset Speed 1 is selected. If b1-011, the setting of d1-01 will determine the commanded speed when Preset Speed 1 is
selected.
The determination of Preset Speed 2 is made much the same way as Preset Speed 1 except that the setting of parameter H3-09
decides whether the analog input A2 or d1-02 is Preset Speed 2. If H3-09= 2: Aux Reference, the value of the input to A2
will determine the commanded speed when Preset Speed 2 is selected. If H3-092, the setting of d1-02 will determine the
commanded speed when Preset Speed 2 is selected.
Function: Fault Reset
Setting: 14
Whenever the Drive detects a fault condition, the fault output contact will close and the Drives output will shut OFF causing
the motor to coast (specific stopping methods can be selected for some faults such as L1-04 for motor overheat). Once the Run
command is removed, the fault can be reset by either the RESET key on the digital operator or by closing a digital input
configured as a Fault Reset (H1-0x= 14).
Function: PI Disable
Setting: 19
When the PI Function has been enabled by b5-01 (PI Mode Selection), it can be indefinitely disabled by closing a digital input
configured as a PI Disable input (H1-0x= 19). When disabled, the Drive operates as a standard Drive that does not have PI
enabled.
Function: Com/Inv Sel 2
Setting: 6C
The Com/Inv Selection function allows the user to switch the origin of the Run and speed command between the Drives
terminals and the RS-485/422 port (and the embedded communication protocols) on the removable terminal board. When a
digital input is programmed for the Com/Inv Selection function (H1-0x= 6B) that input will function as follows:
Table 5.11 Digital Input Functions
Preset Speed
Terminal
Programmed
as Multi-step
Reference 1
Terminal
Programmed
as Multi-step
Reference 2
Terminal
Programmed as
Jog Reference
Details
1 OFF OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 1 (d1-01) or analog input A1
(Determined by b1-01)
2 ON OFF OFF
Frequency Reference 2 (d1-02) or analog input A2
(Determined by H3-09)
3 OFF ON OFF Frequency Reference 3 (d1-03)
4 ON ON OFF Frequency Reference 4 (d1-04)
5 - - ON* Jog Frequency (d1-17)
* The Jog Frequency input is given priority over the multi-step speeds.

Shown for H3-13 = 0: Main Fref TA1, A1 and A2 are reversed if H3-13 = 1: Main Fref TA2
Page 338 of 541
Programming 5 - 52
To switch the command source between the serial communication port and the control circuit terminals be sure to program the
following parameters:
Set b1-01 (Frequency Reference Selection) to 1 (Terminals).
Set b1-02 (Run Command Selection) to 1 (Terminals).
Set H1-0x (Input Terminal Function Selection) to 6B or 6C.
The Com/Inv Sel 2 function will operate the same way except the logic is reversed. When a digital input is programmed for the
Com/Inv Selection function (H1-0x= 6C) that input will function as follows:
Table 5.12
Option/Inv Function Input Status Run and Speed Command Source
OPEN From the control circuit and analog input terminals
CLOSED From Serial Com port (R+,R-,S+, and S-) (embedded protocols)
Table 5.13
Option/Inv Function Input Status Run and Speed Command Source
OPEN From Serial Com port (R+, R-, S+, and S-) (embedded protocols)
CLOSED From the control circuit and analog input terminals
IMPORTANT
Switching the Reference and Run sources can only be done while the Drive is stopped.
Page 339 of 541
Programming 5 - 53
4H2 Digital Outputs
H2-01 Drive Terminal M1-M2 Function Selection
H2-02 Drive Terminal M3-M4 Function Selection
Setting Range: 0 to 3B
Factory Default: H2-01= 0: During Run 1
H2-02= 3B: Run Src Com/Opt
H2-01 and H2-02 are two of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit. See Table 5.1.
The Drive has two multi-function outputs. By programming parameters H2-01 and H2-02, the user can assign specific
functions to each output. Below is a table with a complete list of all of the digital output functions. Refer to the Programming
Manual for a more detailed description of each of the functions.
Table 5.14 Digital Output Functions
Parameter
setting
Function
Parameter
Setting
Function
0 During Run1 F Terminal Not Used
1 Zero Speed 10 Minor Fault
2 F
REF
/F
OUT
Agree 1 11 Reset Cmd Active
3 F
REF
/Set Agree 1 12 Timer Output
4 Frequency Detect 1 17 Torque Detect 1 N.C.
5 Frequency Detect 2 1A Reverse Direction
6 Drive Ready 1E Restart Enabled
7 DC Bus Undervoltage 1F Overload (OL1)
8 Baseblock 1 20 OH Pre-alarm
9 Option Reference 38 Drive Enable
A Remote Operation 39 Drive Waiting
B Torque Detect 1 N.O. 3A Frequency Reduced, OH
C Loss of Reference 3B Run from Serial Com
E Fault
Page 340 of 541
Programming 5 - 54
4H3 Analog Inputs
H3-02 Drive Terminal A1 Gain Setting
Setting Range: 0.0 to 1000.0%
Factory Default: 100.0%
The addition of another input signal on terminal A1 to the Drive and Bypass unit, after shipment to the job site, would be the
only reason for changing this parameter.
For example, in variable air volume AHUs with a volume matching control strategy, P1 differential control is employed with
feedback signals connected to both terminals A1 and A2.
H3-03 Drive Terminal A1 Bias Setting
Setting Range: -100.0% to +100.0%
Factory Default: 0.0%
In order to have the Drive properly interpret an analog input, it may be necessary to apply a gain and/or a bias to the signal. The
analog inputs have a resolution of 10 bits (1024 steps). Using the factory default settings for the analog inputs gain and bias,
the 0-10Vdc or 4-20mA signal at the analog input will yield a 0-100% speed command span.
Fig 5.24 Output Frequency as Commanded Via Analog Input
If a different span of analog input signal is desirable, it will be necessary to adjust the gain, the bias, or both to allow the analog
input level to generate the desired frequency command. Adjustment of the gain setting will change the speed command that is
equivalent to the maximum analog input (10Vdc or 20mA). If, for instance, the gain is increased to 200%, then 10Vdc or 20mA
will be equivalent to a 200% speed command and 5 VAC or 12mA will be equivalent to a 100% Speed Command. Since the
Drive output is limited by the maximum frequency parameter (E1-04), 0-5Vdc or 4-12mA will now be equivalent to 0-100%
speed command span.
20mA 4mA
0V
10V
Gain = 100%
Bias = 0%
O
u
t
p
u
t

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

Analog Input Level Signal
Page 341 of 541
Programming 5 - 55
Fig 5.25 Output Frequency as Commanded via Analog Input with Increased Gain Setting
Adjustment of the bias setting will likewise adjust the speed command that is equivalent to the minimum analog input level
(0Vdc or 4mA). If, for instance, the bias is set to 25%, then 0Vdc or 4mA will be equivalent to a 25% speed command. Since
the minimum speed command is 0% an analog input of 2.5 to10Vdc or 8 to 20mA will now be equivalent to 0-100%
speed command span.
Fig 5.26 Output Frequency with Reduced Bias Setting
As a further example, for an inverse-acting speed command, set the bias= 100% and the gain= 0%. The minimum analog input
level (0Vdc or 4mA) will produce a 100% speed command and the maximum analog input level (10Vdc or 20mA) will
produce a 0% speed command.
Fig 5.27 Output Frequency with Inverted Gain and Bias Settings

4mA
20mA
0V 10V
Bias = 0%
O
u
t
p
u
t

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

Analog Input Level
Gain =200%
100%
Analog Input Signal
5V
12mA
0V
4mA
10V
20mA
Gain = 100%
Bias = -25%
O
u
t
p
u
t

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y


Analog Input Level
2.5V
8mA
Analog Input Signal
20mA 4mA
0V
10V
Gain = 100%
Bias = 0%
O
u
t
p
u
t

F
r
e
q
u
e
n
c
y

Analog Input Level
Analog Input Signal
Bias
Gain
Page 342 of 541
Programming 5 - 56
H3-08 Drive Terminal A2 Signal Level
H3-08 is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit. See Table 5.2.
The H3-08 parameter (Drive Terminal A2 Signal Level) allows the programmer to specify the signal that will be applied to the
A2 analog input (E7N Terminal TB3-3 or TB5-9). The A2 analog input can accept either a 010 Vdc or 4-20 mA signal as a
reference. The E7N also has a DIP switch (S1) on the PCB A2 that must be set for the proper reference signal into the A2
analog input. The S1-2 DIP switch setting determines the internal resistance of the Drive A2 input while parameter H3-08
determines how the Drive interprets the measured signal.
Fig 5.28 DIP Switch S1
Setting Description
0 0 - 10VDC
2 4 - 20mA (Default)
Table 5.15 DIP Switch S1-2
Name Function Setting
S1-2 Input signal for Drive analog input A2
OFF: 0 to 10 V (internal resistance: 20 k)
ON: 4 to 20 mA (internal resistance: 250 ) (Factory default)
DIP Switch S1 example
2
3
4
1
O
Location of S1
S1-2
Page 343 of 541
Programming 5 - 57
H3-09 Drive Terminal A2 Function Selection
H3-09 is one of the special parameter settings required by the Bypass logic circuit. See Table 5.2.
The Drive A2 analog input (E7N Terminal TB3-3 or TB5-9) can be programmed to perform many different functions. The
setting of parameter H3-09 determines which of the following functions the A2 analog input will perform.
Function: Aux Reference
Setting: 2
In order for the A2 analog input to be used as the master Speed Command, parameter H3-09 must be set for Aux Reference
(H3-09= 2: Aux Reference). Once A2 is configured as an auxiliary reference, it can be selected as the master Speed
Command by setting H3-13= 1: Main Fref TA2. If H3-09= 2, terminal A2 analog input will become the speed command
when a digital input programmed for Multi-Step Ref 1 (H1-0x= 3) is selected by a contact closure.
Function: PI Feedback
Setting: B
Configuring the A2 analog input as PI Feedback (H3-09= B: PI Feedback) is a requirement of setting the Drive up for PI
operation. The A2 analog input is the only source for feedback for PI operation though the setpoint can come from a number of
different sources (refer to the section covering the PI parameters for more information regarding specifying the setpoint
source. PI parameters are listed in section b5).
Parameters H3-10 (Terminal A2 Gain) and H3-11 (Terminal A2 Bias) can be used to configure the A2 analog input to match
the signal from the Feedback Transmitter.
The U1-24 monitor (PI Feedback) can be used to check the PI Feedback level with the digital operator.
Function: PI Differential
Setting: 16
Normal PI operation will adjust the Drive output in order to match the measured feedback value to a desired setpoint. When PI
is operated in the differential mode, however, the Drive output is adjusted in order to maintain a desired differential between
two feedback signals.
When the A2 analog input is configured as a PI Differential (H3-09= 16: PI Differential), the A1 analog input becomes the
other PI Differential input. The desired differential is set by parameter b5-07 (PI Differential Setpoint) and can be set so that
A2 is held less than A1 (b5-07 <0) or A2 is held greater than A1 (b5-07>0).
When PI Differential operation is chosen, the A1 feedback level can be monitored by U1-24 (PI Feedback) and the A2
feedback level can be monitored by U1-53 (PI Feedback2).
Setting Description
0 Frequency Bias
2 Aux Reference
B PI Feedback
D Frequency Bias 2
E Motor Temperature
16 PI Differential
1F Not Used
Page 344 of 541
Programming 5 - 58
H3-10 Drive Terminal A2 Gain Setting
Setting Range: 0.0 to 1000.0%
Factory Default: 100.0%
H3-11 Drive Terminal A2 Bias Setting
Setting Range: -100.0% to +100.0%
Factory Default: 0.0%
Parameters H3-10 and H3-11 perform the same function for the A2 analog input that parameters H3-02 and H3-03 perform for
the A1 analog input. Please refer to the parameter description for H3-02 and H3-03 for information about H3-10 and
H3-11.
These parameters could be used for final calibration of a factory or field installed pressure to electric transducer input
connected to terminal A2 and AC. This field calibration may be needed if there is a job site variation from the typical 3 to 15
PSIG pneumatic signal input range.
H3-12 Analog Input Filter Time Constant
Setting Range: 0.0 to 2.00 Seconds
Factory Default: 0.30 Seconds
An analog input filter can be used to prevent erratic Drive control when a noisy analog reference is used. Parameter H3-12
sets the time constant for a first order filter that will be applied to both the A1 and A2 analog inputs. The Drive operation
becomes more stable the longer the time programmed, but it becomes less responsive to rapidly changing analog signals.
Fig 5.29 Analog Input Filter Time Constant Effect on Noisy Signal
Analog
Input
Filter
Noisy input
signal
Analog
input post
Internal Analog Input Valve
(Filtered)
Page 345 of 541
Programming 5 - 59
H3-13 Master Frequency Reference Terminal Selection
Parameter H3-13 allows the programmer to select which analog input will serve as the Speed Command input when Termi-
nals are selected as the Auto Mode Speed source (b1-01= 1: Terminals), or Terminal is selected as the reference source for
the Hand mode (b1-12= 1: Terminals). For the A2 analog input to be an effective selection for the H3-13 parameter, param-
eter H3-09 must be configured as Aux Reference (H3-09= 2: Aux Reference).
If H3-092, then the A1 analog input will be used regardless of the setting of parameter b1-12.
Setting Description
0 Main Fref= A1 (factory default)
1 Main Fref= A2
Page 346 of 541
Programming 5 - 60
4L2 Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Function
When momentary power loss recovery is enabled (L2-010), a speed search is executed to catch the potentially spinning motor
shaft. This speed search will occur regardless of the setting of b3-01 Speed Search Selection.
L2-01 Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection
L2-02 Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time
Setting Range: 0.0 to 25.5 Seconds
Factory Default: Model Dependent
The Drive allows different responses to momentary power losses. The setting of L2-01 determines whether the Drive attempts
to restart after a short loss of incoming AC power and for what length of time this capability remains active.
If L2-01= 0: Disabled, the Drive detects a UV1 fault 15ms after power loss and automatic restarting is disabled. The Drive
cannot restart until the external run command is removed and the UV1 fault is reset.
If L2-01= 1: PwrL Ride Thru t, the Drive restarts without the UV1 fault if power is returned within the time specified in
L2-02, the Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time. During the power loss but before the fault trip, the digital operator will
display a UV alarm. If L2-02 is set for a time longer than the control power supply can be sustained, a UV1 fault will not occur
and the Drive restarts upon the return of AC power. The time that the control power supply can be maintained varies with Drive
size. The larger the Drive, the greater the potential ride-thru time.
If L2-01= 2: CPU Power Active, the Drive ignores L2-02 and attempts a restart as long as the control power supply is still
able to maintain a minimal voltage level. In effect, setting L2-01= 2: CPU Power Active (factory default) is programming the
Drive for maximum Power Loss Ride-thru. An equivalent setting is L2-01= 1: PwrL Ride Thru t, with L2-02 set to a time
longer than the control power supply can be maintained after power is lost.
Note: The run command must be held during power loss for any power loss ride-thru capability to be possible. It is for this
reason that 3-wire control is not recommended for use with the Momentary Power Loss function.
Setting Description
0 Disabled
1 PwrL Ride Thru t
2 CPU Power Active (factory default)
Page 347 of 541
Programming 5 - 61
4L3 Stall Prevention
L3-01 Stall Prevention Selection During Accel
L3-02 Stall Prevention Level During Accel
Setting Range: 0 to 200% of Drive rated output current
Factory Default: 120% of Drive rated output current
The stall prevention during acceleration function adjusts the acceleration time in order to prevent OC fault trips during
acceleration. If L3-01= 0: Disabled, stall prevention is disabled. If the load is large enough and the acceleration time short
enough the Drive may fault and stop.
If L3-01= 1: General Purpose, then the standard stall prevention function is enabled. When the output current exceeds the
level set by the L3-02 parameter, the Drive will discontinue accelerating and maintain speed. If, during acceleration, the output
current comes within 15% of the level set by parameter L3-02, the acceleration time is lengthened. Once the output current
level has dropped below the L3-02 level, acceleration will begin again with the acceleration rate reaching the
programmed rate once again 15% below the L3-02 level.
Fig 5.30 Detailed Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
If L3-01= 2: Intelligent, the intelligent stall prevention is enabled. The active acceleration time is ignored and the Drive will
attempt to accelerate as quickly as possible without exceeding the L3-02 output current level.
Setting Description
0 Disabled
1 General Purpose (factory default)
2 Intelligent
IMPORTANT
Stall Prevention during Acceleration is not effective when the output frequency is less than 6Hz.
Stall level during
acceleration
Time
Time
Output frequency
Output frequency is controlled
to prevent the motor stalling.
-15%
Output Current
Page 348 of 541
Programming 5 - 62
The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3-01= 1: General Purpose.
Fig 5.31 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration
The L3-02 parameter is set as a percentage of the Drive rated output current. If the motor capacity is small compared to the
Drives capacity, or if the motor stalls during acceleration, lower the set value of L3-02.
L3-04 Stall Prevention Selection During Decel
The stall prevention during deceleration function adjusts the deceleration time in order to prevent OV fault trips during
deceleration. If L3-04= 0: Disabled, stall prevention is disabled and if the load is large and the deceleration time short
enough the Drive may fault and stop.
If L3-04= 1: General Purpose, then the standard stall prevention function is enabled. If, during deceleration, the DC Bus
voltage exceeds the stall prevention level (see table below), the Drive will discontinue decelerating and maintain speed. Once
the DC Bus voltage has dropped below the stall prevention level, the deceleration will continue down to the Speed Command
level. See figure below.
If L3-01= 2: Intelligent, the intelligent stall prevention is enabled. The active deceleration time is ignored and the Drive will
attempt to decelerate as quickly as possible without causing the DC Bus voltage to exceed the stall prevention level.
The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3-04= 1 General Purpose.
Setting Description
0 Disabled
1 General Purpose (factory default)
2 Intelligent
3 Stall prev w/R
Table 5.16 Stall Prevention During Decel
Drive Voltage
Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration
(V)
240 VAC 380
480 VAC E1-01 400 VAC 760
E1-01 < 400 VAC 660

Output
Frequency
Output
Current
a - Set accel time
b - Accel time is extended
L3-02
t
a b
t
a b
TIME
Page 349 of 541
Programming 5 - 63
Fig 5.32 Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Deceleration
L3-05 Stall Prevention Selection During Running
L3-06 Stall Prevention Level During Running
Setting Range: 30 to 200% of Drive rated output current
Factory Default: 120% of Drive rated output current
The Stall Prevention During Running function will attempt to avoid a Drive OC fault occurrence while the Drive is operating
at a constant speed. If L3-05= 0: Disabled, the Drive may fault if the load increases sufficiently to cause the output current to
reach the OC fault level (180% of Drive rated output current).
If L3-05= 1: Decel Time 1, the Drive is outputting a constant speed, and the Drives output current level exceeds the level set
by parameter L3-06 for more than 100 ms the Drive will begin to decelerate at the rate specified by parameter C1-02. The
Drive will continue to decelerate until the output current level drops below the L3-06 level (less a 2% hysteresis). Once the
output current drops below the L3-06 2% level the Drive will begin to accelerate at the currently active acceleration rate
(either C1-01 or C1-03).
If L3-05= 2: Decel Time 2, the Drive will function as described above except C1-04 will be used instead of C1-02 as the
deceleration rate used when the output current exceeds L3-06 for more than 100 ms.
The following figure demonstrates acceleration when L3-050.
Fig 5.33 Time Chart for Stall Prevention Level During Running
The L3-06 parameter is set as a percentage of the Drive rated output current. If the Drive still faults when L3-050, then either
lower the L3-06 or adjust the C1-02 or C1-04 settings for a quicker deceleration.
Setting Description
0 Disabled
1 Decel Time 1 (factory default)
2 Decel Time 2
t
a
380/660/760 Vdc
t
Output
Frequency
DC Bus
Voltage
b
a - Set decel time
b - Decel time is extended
TIME
a
L3-06
t
Output
Frequency
Output
Current
b
a - Decel time
C1-02 or C1-04.

b Active accel time
t
b a
a - Decel time
C1-02 or C1-04
b - Active Accel time
TIME
Page 350 of 541
Programming 5 - 64
4L4 Speed Command Loss Detection
L4-05 Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection
L4-06 Frequency Reference at Loss of Frequency Reference
Setting Range: 0.0 to 100.0% of previous speed command
Factory Default: 80.0% of previous speed command
The Drive can be configured to compensate for the loss of its external speed command. An external speed command is
considered lost if it drops 90% of its value in 400mS or less.
Fig 5.34 Loss of Frequency Reference Timing Diagram
To enable Frequency loss detection, set L4-05= 1: Enabled @ % of PrevRef. If Frequency Reference Loss Detection is
enabled and the reference is lost, the Drive continues to operate at the speed commanded by parameter L4-06. When the speed
command returns, the Drive again follows the speed command.
Setting H2-01/H2-02= C: Loss of Ref, configures a digital output as a Frequency Reference Loss indication only when
L4-05= 1: Enabled @ % of PrevRef.
Setting Description
0 Disabled (factory default)
1 Enabled @ % of PrevRef

t
Frequency
Reference
Output
Frequency
t
10%
T
L4-06
100%
T = 400mS
100%
10%
TIME
Page 351 of 541
Programming 5 - 65
4L5 Fault Restart
L5-01 Number of Auto Restart Attempts
Setting Range: 0 to 10
Factory Default: 10
L5-02 Auto Restart Operation Selection
L5-03 Maximum Restart Time After Fault
Setting Range: 0.5 to 600.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 600.0 Seconds
All major faults will cause the Drive to stop. For some faults it is possible to configure the Drive to attempt a restart
automatically. After the fault occurs, the Drive baseblocks for L2-03 seconds. After the baseblock is removed the Drive checks
if a fault condition still exists. If no fault condition exists the Drive will attempt to restart the motor. If the restart is successful,
the Drive performs a Speed Search (Regardless of the status of b3-01 Speed Search Selection) from the set speed command
and the Auto Restart Attempts count is increased by one. Even if the restart fails the restart count is increased by one as long as
the Drive attempted to rotate the motor. The restart count will not be incremented if the restart is not attempted due to a
continuing fault condition (i.e. an OV fault). The Drive waits L5-03 seconds before attempting another restart.
Fig 5.35 Automatic Restart Timing Diagram
The auto restart count is reset back to 0 if any of the following occur:
No further faults for ten minutes after the last retry.
The Drives power is turned off (the Drive must be without power long enough to let control power dissipate).
The SHIFT/RESET key is pushed after the last reset attempt.
Setting Description
0 No Flt Relay (factory default)
1 Flt Relay Active

t
t
t
t
Run
Fault
Attempts
Count
L2-03
OV
trying each
L5-03 seconds successful
1
OC
L2-03
2
Voltage
remains high
for a long time,
then reset (1)
and run
L2-03
3
OC
OC condition
gone, resets (3)
and runs.
successful
try but failed
Drive trips on OC,
resets (2) and tries
again but motor still
shorted, trips again.
TIME
Page 352 of 541
Programming 5 - 66
The setting of parameter L5-02 determines whether the fault output (MA-MB) will be closed during an auto restart attempt.
The setting of L5-02 can be important when interfacing the Drive with other equipment.
The following faults will allow the Auto Restart function to initiate:
OC (Overcurrent)
LF (Output Open Phase)
PF (Input Phase Loss)
PUF (DC Bus Fuse)
OL1 (Motor Overload)
OL3 (Overtorque)
OL2 (Drive Overload)
OV (DC Bus Overvoltage)
GF (Ground Fault)
UV1 (DC Bus Undervoltage)
OH1 (Overheat)
In order for auto restart after a UV1 fault, Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru must be enabled (L2-01= 1: PwrL Ride Thru t,
or 2: CPU Power Active). Setting H2-01 or H2-02 equal to 1E configures a digital output as Restart Enabled to signal if
an impending auto restart is possible.
Page 353 of 541
Programming 5 - 67
4L6 Torque Detection
L6-01 Torque Detection Selection 1
L6-02 Torque Detection Level 1
Setting Range: 0 to 300% of Drive rated output current
Factory Default: 15% of Drive rated output current
L6-03 Torque Detection Time 1
Setting Range: 0.0 to 10.0 Seconds
Factory Default: 10.0 Seconds
The Drive can be programmed to indicate when either an overtorque or an undertorque conditions exist. A digital output must
be programmed for Torque Detection, (H2-01/H2-02= B: Trq Det 1 N.O. or 17: Trq Det 1 N.C.). A warning of an
overtorque condition can indicate a jam and an undertorque condition can indicate a broken belt, no water in a pump, or other
loss of load.
To configure Torque Detection requires the following decisions:
1. Do you wish to check for an overtorque condition or an undertorque condition?
2. Do you wish to check for the torque condition whenever the Drive is running or only at speed agree? Nuisance detection
during acceleration, when variable torques are normally required, can be avoided.
3. Do you want the Drive to fault if the torque condition is detected or only alarm and continue operation?
The following table can help choose the proper setting for Torque Detection Selection 1 to get the wanted results.
Setting Description
0 Disabled (factory default)
1 OL@SpdAgree - Alm
2 OL At Run -Alm
3 OL@SpdAgree - Flt
4 OL At Run - Flt
5 UL@SpdAgree - Alm
6 UL at Run - Alm
7 UL@SpdAgree - Flt
8 UL At Run - Flt
Table 5.17 L6-01 Setting Choices
L6-01
Setting
Overtorque Undertorque Fault Alarm
Always
Detected
Only Detected @
Spd Agree
0 Torque Detection Disabled
1 X X X
2 X X X
3 X X X
4 X X X
5* X X X
6 X X X
7 X X
8 X X
*Suggested settings for Loss of Load indication
Page 354 of 541
Programming 5 - 68
After selecting the proper detection scheme the Torque Detection Level (L6-02) must be specified. If the current level read by
the output current transformers rises above (overtorque) or drops below (undertorque) this level, and remains there for at least
the Torque Detection Time (L6-03), then the Torque Detection Function will change the state of any digital output configured
for Torque Detection (H2-01/H2-02= B: Trq Det 1 N.O., or 17: Trq Det 1 N.C.).

Fig 5.36 Over Torque Detection
Fig 5.37 Under Torque Detection
O
u
t
p
u
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
N
o
r
m
a
l
l
y

O
p
e
n

T
o
r
q
u
e

D
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

D
i
g
i
t
a
l

O
u
t
p
u
t
t
CLOSED
L6-03
L6-03
L6-02
*
*
* When the output current drops below the Torque Detection Level by
approximately 10% of the Drives rated output current the digital output is reset.
Closed
Open
Torque detection level -10%
TIME
C
u
r
r
e
n
t
L6-02

O
u
t
p
u
t

C
u
r
r
e
n
t

N
o
r
m
a
l
l
y

O
p
e
n

T
o
r
q
u
e

D
e
t
e
c
t
i
o
n

D
i
g
i
t
a
l
O
u
t
p
u
t

L6-03
L6-03
L6-02
*
* When the output current rises above the Torque Detection Level by
approximately 10% of the Drives rated output current the digital output is reset.
*
t
t
Closed
Open
Torque detection level 10%
TIME
Page 355 of 541
Programming 5 - 69
4L8 Hardware Protection
L8-01 Internal Dynamic Braking Resistor Protection Selection
This parameter is not applicable for Drive operation.
L8-02 Overheat Pre-Alarm Level
Setting Range: 50 to 130
o
C
Factory Default: 95
o
C
L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection
The Drive is capable of warning the operator of an impending heatsink over-temperature fault via an OH pre-alarm. The level
at which the pre-alarm will activate is determined by the setting of parameter L8-02. Measurement of the heatsink temperature
is done with several strategically mounted thermistors. If any of the heatsink thermistors measure a temperature in excess of
the setting of L8-02, the Drive will fault (OH2) and either: ramp to stop using the C1-02 deceleration rate (L8-03= 0: Ramp to
Stop), coast to stop (L8-03= 1: Coast to Stop), ramp to stop using the C1-09 fast stop deceleration rate (L8-03= 2: Fast-
Stop), alarm (OH) and continue running (L8-03 = 3: Alarm Only), alarm (OH) and continue running but at a reduced speed
(L8-03= 4: Alarm & Reduce). If L8-03= 4: Alarm and Reduce, the Drive will continue to run but will reduce the speed to the
level determined by parameter L8-19. Refer to the description for parameter L8-19.
If a digital output is configured for OH Prealarm (H2-01= 20: OH PreAlarm), it will close whenever the heatsink tempera-
ture is greater than the L8-02 level no matter what the setting is of L8-03.
L8-10 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection
Setting Description
0 Not Provided (factory default)
1 Provided
Setting Description
0 Ramp to Stop (Decel Time C1-02)
1 Coast to Stop
2 Fast-Stop (Decel Time C1-09)
3 Alarm Only
4 OH Alarm and Reduce (factory default)
Setting Description
0 Fan On-Run Mode (factory default)
1 Fan Always On
Page 356 of 541
Programming 5 - 70
L8-11 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time
Setting Range: 0 to 300 Seconds
Factory Default: 300 Seconds
Parameters L8-10 and L8-11 allow the Drive programmer to customize the heatsink cooling fan operation. Parameter L8-10
determines whether the cooling fans are always ON whenever the Drive is powered (L8-10= 1: Fan Always On) or if the
cooling fans are only ON when the Drive is in a Run condition (L8-10= 0: Fan On-Run Mode).
Parameter L8-11 is a delayed OFF for the cooling fan if L8-10= 0: Fan On-Run Mode. When the cooling fans are set to turn
OFF when the Run command is removed, parameter L8-11 will cause the fans to continue cooling the Drive for the amount of
time programmed into L8-11 after the Run command is actually removed. The Drive can be programmed to allow the cooling
fan to run for up to 5 minutes (factory default) after the run command is removed.
Both parameters are intended to extend fan life while still providing sufficient cooling for proper Drive operation.
Fig 5.38 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Timing Diagram
L8-19 Overheat Frequency Reference Reduction Level
Setting Range: 0.0 to 100.0% of maximum frequency
Factory Default: 20.0% of maximum frequency
When the heatsink temperature reaches the OH Pre-alarm level (L8-02) and the Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection
parameter is set for Alarm and Reduce (L8-03= 4: OH Alarm & Reduce), the L8-19 parameter sets the amount of speed
decrease that will be applied to the Speed Command in order to lower the heatsink temperature. The decrease in speed will
lower the current being switched and conducted by the heat producing output transistors of the Drive.
Parameter L8-19 is set in percentage of maximum frequency (E1-04).
t
t
Run
Command
Heatsink Fan
RUN
L8-11
ON (CLOSED)
OFF (OPEN)
OFF (OPEN)
ON (CLOSED)
TIME
Page 357 of 541
Programming 5 - 71
4o1 Monitor Configuration
o1-01 User Monitor Selection
Setting Range: 6 to 53
Factory Default: 6
Setting Description
6 Output Voltage (factory default)
7 DC Bus Voltage
8 Output Power
10 Input Terminal Status
11 Output Terminal Status
12 Drive Operation Status
13 Cumulative Operation Time
14 Software Number
15 Terminal A1 Input Voltage
16 Terminal A2 Input Voltage
18 Motor Secondary Current (I
q
)
20 Output Frequency After Soft Start
24 PI Feedback Value
28 CPU Number
34 First Parameter Causing an OPE
36 PI Input
37 PI Output
38 PI Setpoint
39 Memobus Communication Error Code
40 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Time
51 Auto Mode Frequency Reference Value
52 Hand Mode Frequency Reference Value
53 PI Feedback 2 Value
Page 358 of 541
Programming 5 - 72
o1-02 Power-On Monitor
When the Drive is powered up, the display monitor is the Power-On monitor. The factory default Power-On monitor is
Speed Command (U1-01). Pressing the INCREASE key once scrolls the monitors to show the next two sequential monitors,
Output Frequency (U1-02), Output Current (U1-03) and User Monitor as selected by o1-01. The factory default for o1-01 is the
Output Voltage, monitor (U1-06).
The active monitor displayed when the Drive is powered on can be changed to either be U1-01 (Speed Command), U1-02
(Output Frequency), U1-03 (Output Current), or the User Monitor.
For example, if the Drive needs to display the Elapsed Timer as the Power-On monitor, then o1-01 must be set to 13 and
o1-02 must be set to 4. The next time Drive power is cycled, the digital operator displays U1-13 (Elapsed Time).
Setting Description
1 Frequency Reference (factory default)
2 Output Frequency
3 Output Current
4 User Monitor (set by o1-01)
Page 359 of 541
Programming 5 - 73
o1-03 Digital Operator Display Scaling
Parameter o1-03 allows the programmer to change the units in which the speed monitors and some speed parameters are displayed.
The o1-03 parameter will change the units of the following:
U1-01 (Frequency Reference Monitor)
U1-02 (Output Frequency Monitor)
U1-20 (Output Frequency after Soft Start)
d1-01 through d1-17 (Preset Frequency References and Jog Reference)
The table below details how the setting of o1-03 will affect the way the listed monitors and parameters will be displayed.
The factory default setting (o1-03= 0) sets the Drive up to display the affected monitors and parameters in terms of hertz (Hz).
If the speeds seem more natural in terms of percentage of maximum, set o1-03= 1. If the speeds are easier to work with when dis-
playing the equivalent synchronous motor RPM, set o1-03= [the number of motor poles]. If another engineered unit, such as fpm or
gpm, is desired, set o1-03= xxxx where:
X X X X X
Digit 5 Digit 4 Digit 3 Digit 2 Digit 1

Digits 1 through 4 set the desired number to be displayed at 100% speed.
Digit 5 determines the number of decimal places in the displayed number.
If Digit 5 = 0 number format is XXXX
If Digit 5 = 1 number format is XXX.X
If Digit 5 = 2 number format is XX.XX
If Digit 5 = 3 number format is X.XXX
For example:
If o1-03= 10425, then at full speed the digital operator will display 42.5. Configuring parameter o1-03 for
displaying in terms of an engineering unit is only appropriate if the actual display units have a linear relationship with the
actual output speed.
Setting Description
0 Hz (factory default)
1 %
2 - 39 RPM (Enter the # of Motor Poles)
40 - 39999 User Display
Table 5.18 Display Scaling
If o1-03 is: The frequency format is
0 0.01 Hz
1 0.00%
2 through 39
(enter the # of motor poles)
0 RPM
40 through 39999 Engineering Units
Page 360 of 541
Programming 5 - 74
o1-05 LCD Contrast Adjustment
Setting Range: 0 to 5
Factory Default: 3
The contrast setting of the LCD display of the digital operator can be adjusted by the setting of parameter o1-05. The higher the
number programmed into o1-05, the darker the background will become. Set o1-05 to the value that makes the LCD the easiest to
view at the normal viewing distance and angle.
o1-06 User Monitor Selection Mode (Optional LCD Operator only)
o1-07 Second Line User Monitor (Optional LCD Operator only)
Setting Range: 1 to 53
Factory Default: 2
o1-08 Third Line User Monitor (Optional LCD Operator only)
Setting Range: 1 to 53
Factory Default: 3
Normally the monitors shown directly below the active monitor are the next two sequential monitors. If o1-06 (User Monitor
Selection Mode) is set to 1: 3 Mon Selectable, those two monitors are locked as specified by parameters o1-07 and o1-08 and
will not change as the top parameter is scrolled with the INCREASE and DECREASE keys.
For Example:
The Display above showing PI Feedback, PI Output and PI Setpoint would be useful when setting up a PI Control Loop.
Setting Description
0 3 Mon Sequential (factory default)
1 3 Mon Selectable

-DRIVE- Rdy
PI Feedback
U1-24= 64.55%
- - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - - -
U1-37= 0.00%
U1-38= 2.50%

Active Monitor
o1-07
o1-08
Active Monitor Title
PI Output
PI Setpoint
o1-07=37
o1-08=38
Optional LCD Operator
Page 361 of 541
Programming 5 - 75
4o2 Key Selections
o2-03 User Parameter Default Value
The Drive gives the option of configuring any and all of the programming parameters and then saving the parameters as User
Initialization Values. After configuring the Drive, set parameter o2-03= 1: Set Defaults, to save the parameters to a User
Initialization memory location. Once this has been done, the Initialize Parameters parameter (A1-03) will offer the choice of
1110:User Initialize. Choosing A1-03= 1110: User Initialized, will reset all modified parameters back to what they were
the last time they were saved using o2-03.
The choice of setting A1-03= 1110: User Initialized, is unavailable until first setting the User Initialization parameters using
o2-03. Once a User Initialization is set (saved), it can be cleared by setting o2-03= 2: Clear All. After clearing the User
Initialization parameters, the choice of 1110: User Initialize is no longer a available in A1-03.
o2-05 Frequency Reference Setting Method Selection
The factory default setting of the Frequency Reference Setting Method parameter (o2-05= 1: Enabled) dictates that when
setting a Speed Command via the digital operator (Hand mode), it is not necessary to press the DATA/ENTER key before
the Drive will begin to accelerate or decelerate to the new set speed. This is referred to as MOP (Motor Operated
Potentiometer) type functionality. When o2-05= 1: Enabled, the speed command is stored to memory 5 seconds after the
INCREASE or DECREASE keys are released.
When o2-05= 0: Disabled, the digital operator INCREASE and DECREASE keys will change the speed command but the
Drive will not accelerate or decelerate to the new speed command until the DATA/ENTER key is pressed. In order to change
the Speed Command in the HAND mode, U1-01 must be the top monitor and then the ENTER key must be pressed in order to
access the Speed Command function. This in not to be confused with pressing the ENTER key in order to achieve a change in
speed using the INCREASE and DECREASE keys, which is the subject of parameter o2-05.
Setting Description
0 No Change
1 Set Defaults
2 Clear All
Setting Description
0 Disabled
1 Enabled (factory default)
Page 362 of 541
Programming 5 - 76
o2-06 Operation Selection when Digital Operator is Disconnected
Leaving o2-06 enabled will cause the Drive to fault, when the digital operator is removed, even if its not outputting to the
motor. The reset key on the digital operator will need to be pressed after reconnecting the digital operator to reset the fault and
continue normal operation.
If o2-06 = 0: Disabled then the Drive will not fault if the digital operator is disconnected, but the Drive will discontinue
motor operation. If full Drive operation is required while the digital operator is removed set o2-06 = 0: Disabled and
o2-15 = 0: Disabled (Hand Key Function). If both o2-06 and o2-15 are disabled then the digital operator can be disconnected
without disturbing Drive operation.
o2-07 Cumulative Operating Time Setting
Setting Range: 0 to 65535 Hours
Factory Default: 0 Hours
o2-08 Cumulative Operation Time Selection
The Drive features an Elapsed Timer monitor that records in units of hours. The Elapsed Timer monitor is U1-13. Parameter
o2-08 programs this function to either accumulate elapsed hours based on time the Drive is powered (o2-08= 0: Power-On
Time) or time the Drive is running (o2-08= 1: Running Time). The Drive is considered running anytime there is an
active run command or when the Drive is outputting voltage (i.e. including during deceleration).
Parameter o2-07 allows manual adjustment of the Elapsed Timer, primarily to accommodate maintenance or control board
replacement in the event of damage. To reset the Elapsed Timer back to zero, set o2-07= 0.
Setting Description
0 Disabled
1 Enabled (factory default)
Setting Description
0 Power-On Time
1 Running Time (factory default)
Page 363 of 541
Programming 5 - 77
o2-10 Cumulative Cooling Fan Operation Time Setting
Setting Range: 0 to 65535 Hours
Factory Default: 0 Hours
The elapsed time of heatsink cooling fan operation is tracked by the U1-40 monitor. Much like the o2-07 parameter can be
used to adjust or reset the Drive operation elapsed timer, parameter o2-10 can be used to adjust the time displayed by the
U1-40 monitor in the event of fan replacement.
o2-12 Fault Trace / Fault History Clear Function
The operator can clear the Fault Trace (U2) and Fault History logs by setting o2-12= 1: Enabled. Clearing the Fault Trace
and Fault History logs erases all the information.
o2-14 kWh User Monitor Initialization
The kWh monitors (U1-29 and U1-30) track the power usage of the Drive and are not reset by powering down the Drive. To
reset the monitors back to zero, set o2-14= 1: Clear all.
Setting Description
0 Disabled (No Effect) (factory default)
1 Enabled
Setting Description
0 Disabled (No Change) (factory default)
1 Clear All
Page 364 of 541
Programming 5 - 78
4o3 Digital Operator Copy Function
o3-01 Copy Function Selection
The membrane over the Drive keypad also makes the keypad non-removable on Bypass units. In order to use the keypad copy
function on a Bypass unit - order a separate keypad, part number CDR001115 and obtain locally a standard CAT 5
Ethernet cable.
Note: The copy function is disabled when serial communication is active.
o3-02 Read Allowed Selection
The digital operator has parameter COPY capabilities via built in non-volatile memory. The digital operator can READ all of
the parameters in the Drive and store them for later WRITE back to the Drive or into a Drive with the same product code and
software number. In order to read the parameter values and store them in the digital operator, select o3-02= 1: Enabled. If
you attempt to READ the data, which overwrites any previously stored data, without first setting o3-02= 1: Enabled, you
will get a PrE error.
After setting o3-02= 1: Enabled, it is possible to store parameter values in the digital operator by setting o3-01=1
(INVOP READ).
A successful READ of the parameter values will display rEd.
An error may occur while saving the parameter values to the digital operators memory. If an error is displayed, press any key
to cancel the error display and return to parameter o3-01. To COPY parameter values into a Drive, set o3-01= 2: OP->INV
WRITE. During the writing of the parameter values into the Drive the digital operator will display CPy.
An error may occur while writing the parameter values to the Drive. If an error is displayed, press any key to cancel the error
display and return to parameter o3-01.
It is possible to compare the parameter values stored in the digital operator with the parameter values currently in the Drive by
using the VERIFY function. This VERIFY function should not be confused with the -VERIFY- that is displayed on the
digital operator when viewing the Modified Constants menu. To VERIFY the parameter values in the Drive as compared
with those stored in the digital operator, set o3-01= 3: OP<-->INV VERIFY. During the comparing of the parameter values
into the Drive the digital operator will display uFy.
If all the parameter values stored in the digital operator do not match those programmed in the Drive, the digital operator
displays the following uYE.
Setting Description
0 COPY SELECT (factory default)
1 INVOP READ
2
OPINV WRITE
3
OPINV VERIFY
Setting Description
0 Disabled
1 Enabled (factory default)
Page 365 of 541
Programming 5 - 79
The digital operator will not display which parameters did not match, only that the verification found discrepancies in some
parameter values.
NOTE: In order to properly use the COPY or VERIFY functions, the following Drive specifications must be identical
between the Drive that the parameters were read from and the Drive that the parameters are to be written to:
Model Number (e.g. CIMR-E7U2015)
Software Number (e.g. 03011 also known as FLASH ID)
Yaskawa offers DriveWizard software that can also READ, COPY, and VERIFY Drive parameter values. DriveWizard
lists all discrepancies between the Drive and a pre-saved parameter file when verifying is performed.
To use DriveWizard first select o2-15= 0: Disabled and select o2-06= 0: Disabled then remove the digital operator/keypad
and attach the DriveWizard cable in its place.
Page 366 of 541
Programming 5 - 80
4T1 Auto-Tuning
Auto-Tuning can only be accomplished through the DriveWizard software (Part Number DWST616-C2). Available by
download from www.drives.com.
T1-02 Motor Rated Power
Setting Range: 0.00 to 650.00 kW
Factory Default: Model Dependent
T1-04 Motor Rated Current
Setting Range: Model Dependent
Factory Default: Model Dependent
Auto tuning is recommended to achieve optimum performance. In addition, the Drive requires Line-To-Line Resistance
auto-tuning before it can properly perform the Estimated Speed Search method. This method of speed search allows for
bi-directional speed search. The T1 parameters are found under the Auto-Tuning menu.
Auto-Tuning Using DriveWizard
DriveWizard is a PC software program designed to provide the tools necessary to handle Drive installation as well as
parameter record keeping and maintenance. As such it provides an Auto-Tuning method for Drives in Bypass units. The
Auto-Tuning function tunes the Drive setup to the characteristics of the specific motor to which it is applied. Auto-Tuning is
essential if bi-directional Speed Search is required and enabled for the application.
DriveWizard can be obtained either through CD or www.Drives.com. Follow the installation procedures provided with the
software.
With the DriveWizard software loaded onto a PC, connect a standard CAT 5 Ethernet cable from the PCs RS-232 port (with a
DB-9 to CAT 5 adaptor) to the digital operator/keypad port on the Drive. Before disconnecting the digital operator/keypad
from the Drive, set parameter o2-06 (Oper Detection) to 0:disabled. This will allow the Drive to continue running with the
digital operator/keypad removed.
Start DriveWizard and setup the PC communications by setting the appropriate communications port and Baud rate. Typical
settings are Com Port 1 and 9600 Baud.
Once the communications port is set, connect to the Drive by clicking on the pull-down menu Inverter and selecting
Connect. [This can also be done by typing Ctrl+C on your keyboard, or by clicking on the yellow icon resembling two
puzzle pieces.] This will upload all of the current parameters in the Drive to the computer as a working parameter file.
At this point the parameters can be saved as a backup file if desired. [DriveWizard is a third method of saving the complete
parameter list and user settings. In addition to the User Parameters (o2-03) and Keypad Copy (o3-01) functions discussed
in this chapter, DriveWizard can be employed to maintain a downloadable list of the Drive parameter set up on a PC, for
backup or transfer to other drives.]
Auto-Tuning is performed by selecting the Auto-Tuning function from the Inverter pull-down menu. DriveWizard will ask
you to verify that the motor is in a safe operating condition, and then ask you to enter two parameters. DriveWizard will ask
you to fill in parameters T1-02 Mtr Rated Power and T1-04 Rated Current. After this data has been entered, click on the
Load button to enter these values into the Drive memory. The Start button will become available, click on Start to begin
the auto-tuning process. While Auto-Tuning is running the Drive output current and frequency will be displayed, the flashing
green light indicates DriveWizard is communicating with the Drive. When complete, DriveWizard will have auto-tuned the
Drive, adjusted several motor related parameters and the Drive will be ready for optimum performance for bi-directional
Speed Search and other functions.
Page 367 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 1
Chapter 6
Diagnostics & Troubleshooting
This chapter describes diagnostics and troubleshooting for the Drive and Bypass.
E7N Bypass PCB and H/O/A Control Panel Diagnostics ............... 2
Introduction ................................................................................ 2
Specifications.............................................................................. 2
Set Up for Maintenance Mode.................................................... 2
Testing ........................................................................................ 3
Drive Diagnostics ........................................................................... 6
Fault Detection .......................................................................... 7
Alarm Detection ....................................................................... 13
Operator Programming Errors (OPE) ...................................... 16
Auto-Tuning Faults .................................................................. 17
Digital Operator COPY Function Faults ................................... 18
Drive Troubleshooting .................................................................. 19
If Parameter Cannot Be Set .................................................... 19
If the Motor Does Not Operate ................................................ 20
The Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed ..................... 21
If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or
If Acceleration is Slow ............................................................. 21
If the Motor Operates at a Higher Speed
Than the Speed Command ...................................................... 21
If the Motor Overheats ............................................................. 22
If Peripheral Devices Like DDCs or Others are Influenced by
Starting or Running Drive ......................................................... 22
If a Stand Alone Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When
the Drive is Run ....................................................................... 23
If There is Mechanical Vibration .............................................. 23
If the Motor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Stopped ....... 24
If Zero Volts is Detected When a Motor is Started, or Stalls .... 24
If the Accepted Speed Command Does Not Rise to the User
Speed Command Input ............................................................ 24
Drive Main Circuit Test Procedure ................................................ 25
Drive Date Stamp Information ...................................................... 29
Page 368 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 2
E7N Bypass PCB and H/O/A Control Panel
Diagnostics
4Introduction
This section describes a quick and systemic approach in troubleshooting of an E7N Bypass panel and PCB A2. The only addi-
tional testing device needed will be a DVM to verify the PCB A2 interactions and connections to other devices in the E7N
Bypass panel. The bypass control card (PCB A2) provides the capability to test and monitor all the panel, Drive, user and
option wiring efficiently. Thus a bad control card can be detected and replaced, or eliminated from consideration, very rapidly.
Before starting the procedure below, follow routine troubleshooting tests around the offending section to detect possibly faulty
components. For example, if a contactor is not picking up or a blower is not running, measure the voltage across the device. If
the Drive is not working properly, check the keypad and verify that the Drive does not have an internal fault (external faults
might be caused by bypass system and will be resolved later in this section). If the problem is more complex, such as a Bypass
not responding or the interaction between the PCB A2 and the Drive is not normal, then the procedure in this section will help
resolve the issue.
4Specifications
Inputs:
TB1 pins 1-6: 6 x 24VDC15% / 4mA or 120VAC15% / 4mA, Auto-Detect
CN104 pins 2-5: 4 x 120VAC15% / 4mA
CN109 pin 5: 1 x 120VAC15% / 4mA
CN110 pins 21-26: 6 x 3VDC-5.5VDC / 2.7-5mA
CN102 pins 2, 3, 30, 32, 34: 5 x 15-27VDC / 4.2-7.5mA
CN113 pins 2-13: 12 x 3-5VDC / 2mA (1, 6, 7, 8: Inputs Only)
Outputs:
TB1 pins 10-14: 2 x 120VAC15% / 5A
TB2 pins 1-6: 2 x 120VAC15% / 5A
CN105 pin 1: 1 x 120VAC15% / 5A
CN107 pins 1 and 3: 2 x 120VAC15% / 5A
CN109 pins 1 and 3: 2 x 120VAC15% / 5A
CN108 pin 1: 1 x 120VAC15% / 5A
CN110 pins 1-17: 17 x 3-26VDC / 25mA
CN102 pins 19-26, 28: 9 x 15-27VDC / 10mA
CN113 pins 2-5, 9-13: 10 x 3-5VDC / 2mA
Fusing: F101/6.25A (10A-max), F102/0.25A (3A-max)
4Set Up for Maintenance Mode
Power down the panel and wait for the Drive keypad display to extinguish.
Set the DIP switch S2, position 3 (referred to as S2-3 from now on) to the ON position to activate the system Maintenance
Mode.
Page 369 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 3
4Testing
Test all the fuses in the panel, including the two on the bypass control PCB A2.
In maintenance mode, all power or control systems connected to the bypass panel such as motors or controls will be energized
for a couple of seconds to allow the wiring to be tested. If this is not desirable, these wires should be disconnected from the
panel prior to any maintenance mode testing.
Power up the system and verify that for approximately 2 seconds, all the LEDs are lit on the H/O/A keypad. If this does not
occur, the H/O/A keypad, its cable or the Bypass control PCB is defective. Temporarily swap them, one by one, with known
working components to find the source of the problem.
This procedure is based on a properly wired and functioning Bypass control PCB. Before any testing, verify that all three
LEDs on the card are lit brightly (if not, re-check the fuses on the PCB and security of connections): D1 (DRV_OK) monitors
the Drive connection and power status; D56 (VKP_OK) monitors the keypad connection and power status; D61 (VCC_OK)
monitors the control PCB power status.
After the 2 second initial period, LEDs on the keypad go off and start to cycle sequentially with approximately a 2 second
interval. Also, the control PCB A2 relays K1 to K10 along with all the Drive command outputs to Drive terminals S1, S2, S4
and S5 will start cycling concurrently with the keypad LEDs. Both the Motor-Overload-Relay (CN109/5) input and Safety
Interlock input (TB1/1) must be activated. This is done as a safety precaution for the connected power systems. Verify that K1
to K10 are cycling by monitoring the connected devices such as contactors, cabinet blowers and any customer wired outputs.
Cycling of the Drive input commands to Drive terminals S1, S3-S5 can be verified through the Drive keypad by monitoring
U1-10. The first and third to fifth digits should cycle with half the speed of the bypass keypad LEDs.
Test the H/O/A keypad itself for properly functioning of LEDs and switches. To test the LEDs, either all the LEDs should light
up for 2 seconds at power up or, during the cyclic rotation, each of them should light up sequentially. To test the switches,
press any key, the cycling of the LEDs should be interrupted for as long as any of the switches is pressed. This will test the
entire keypad and its cable connections.
Independent from the sequential cycling, the LEDs will blink if the associated inputs are activated. If an LED is blinking due
to a specific input activation, it will be lit for 2 seconds at its turn in the sequence, then resume blinking. This enables monitor-
ing of every input to the system regardless of its origin: drive, user, panel, or options.
Table 6.1 Relation Between Digital Inputs and H/O/A Control Keypad LEDs in Maintenance Mode
Connector Port/Pin Assigned Function Keypad LED
TB1-2 Auto-Run Auto-Run-Mode-Enabled
TB1-3 Damper/BAS Damper/BAS-Enabled
TB1-4 Remote-Transfer Auto-Transfer-Enabled
TB1-5 Smoke-Purge Smoke-Purge-Enabled
TB1-6 Spare Bypass-Mode-Selected
CN104/2 Future expansion Bypass-Run-Enabled
CN104/3 Future expansion Off-Mode-Enabled
CN104/4 Future expansion Auto-Mode-Enabled
CN104/5 Future expansion Hand-Mode-Enabled
CN102/30 Drive-M3/M4 (COMM) Drive-Mode-Selected
CN102/32 Future expansion Drive-Ready-Enabled
Internal On-Board-MCU/NVRAM Drive-Test-Mode-Enabled
CAUTION
Page 370 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 4
Four inputs are excluded from this process, they do not cause any LEDs to blink. They have LEDs on the keypad that monitor
the status independently:
Motor-Overload-Relay input at CN109/5
User-Safety-Interlock input at TB1/1
Drive-Fault-Relay input at CN102/2
Drive-Run-Relay input at CN102/3
If testing of the Drive digital outputs is required, these two outputs can be set to a normally active function on the Drive key-
pad (H2-01 or H2-02 set to 1 (Zero Speed) or 6 (Ready) for example) in order to be monitored on the bypass H/O/A keypad.
Table 6.2 Troubleshooting the E7N
Problem or Fault Solution
Panel/Drive ON, Bypass dead. Check the fuse F101. Verify the power to PCB LEDs.
Any or all the user digital I/O at TB1 are not
accepted.
Test the user-side wiring/circuitry. If it is OK, test the control PCB. Check J1,
S2/7-8 and fuse F102. If external supply used, check the voltage levels. All
either 24VDC or all 120VAC, 10% safe area, no mixing.
Drive TB3/TB5 I/O not OK. Test the Drive functions/wiring only.
No motor-run in Hand mode. Check S4-3 to be off. Maybe in Start/Stop Option mode.
Runs the motor at power up. Check S2-2 to be off. Check TB1-2 and S2-1.
Blinks the LEDs and/or recycles relays/
outputs.
Check S2-3 to be off. Maybe in Maintenance mode.
Drive reads no analog signal. Check S1-2, S1-3 and S1-4. Check the Drive parameters (see Table 5.2).
Shuts down the Drive and/or the motor by
itself and does not run anymore.
Very noisy area or unstable power. If long wiring is present from customer
side, try setting J1 to position 2-3 and supply control power externally. Add
RC filters to TB1-1 through 6 and/or use shielded cables. Recycle the power.
Powers up to Off mode. Check S2-2 to be on and S4-4 to be off.
All LEDs always lit. Check keypad wiring. Bad board and/or voltage.
Off mode locked and Auto or Hand mode not
working.
If Power LED blinks, check keypad wiring and recycle the power. Replace the
H/O/A keypad and/or its cable.
D56 (VKP_OK) LED is off, keypad is dead.
Check the keypad cable and wiring. Replace the H/O/A keypad and/or its
cable.
Does not go back to Drive mode when Drive
fault is reset.
Check S2-1 to be ON. Check the Drive and its wiring.
Control Power LED blinks and motor
cannot run.
Bad keypad or unstable power. Recycle the power and check the keypad and
its connection. Replace H/O/A keypad.
Switches to bypass mode by itself after Drive
run command. Drive will not run.
Drive is not responding properly. Check the drive, cable and connections.
Recycle the power.
The options wired to CN104/1-3 are not
working.
Check S4-3 to be ON. Check the fuse F102.
The options wired to CN104/4-6 are not
working.
Check S4-1 to be ON. Check the fuse F102.
The motor select input at TB1-6 is not
working.
Check CN104/4 and 5 to both be inactivated. Check the fuse F102.
Stays in bypass mode and does not accept any
Drive command.
Check TB1-4 and 5 to be off. Check the Drive connections. Recycle the
power, bad PCB A2.
Drive analog outputs always at max, off or
very low.
Check J2 and J3 jumpers are not missing and in right position (1-2 for I, 2-3
for V), check the H4 parameters.
Drive or Bypass begins to run when Auto is
pressed; with no contact closure at TB1-2.
Check programming of parameter H2-02. This parameter must be set to
3B: Run Src Com/Opt for all E7N units. See Table 5.1.
Page 371 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 5
The overall layout of PCB A2 is shown in Figure 6.1 for further reference.
Fig 6.1 Electronic Bypass Control Board Layout
Customer
Connection
Terminals
Connector
For cable to
Keypad
Customer
120V
Circuit Fuse
Customer
Configuration
Switches
Connector
For cable to
Drive
CPLD
Logic
Processor
Option Port
Connector
Option Port
Connector
Connectors
to Panel
Wiring
Harnesses
Main
Control
Fuse
Power
Supply
Circuits
Mounting
Holes
5 Places
Page 372 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 7
4Fault Detection
When the Drive detects a fault, the fault information is displayed on the digital operator, the fault contact closes, and the motor
coasts to stop. (However, a fault with selectable stopping method will operate according to the stopping method selected.)
If a fault occurs, take appropriate action according to the table by investigating the cause.
To restart, reset the fault with any of the following procedures:
Turn ON the fault reset signal.
Set 14: Fault Reset to a multi-function digital input (H1-01 to H1-05).
Press the RESET key of the digital operator.
Shut off the Drive input power once, and then turn on again.

WARNING
The Run Command (Start Command) needs to be removed prior to resetting a fault. Resetting a fault by
removing and reapplying power to the Drive while the Run Command is applied, may cause the Drive to start
unexpectedly. Therefore, make sure all personnel are clear from the Drive, motor, and machine prior to reset-
ting the Drive.
Table 6.3 Fault Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
BUS
Option Com Err
Option Communication Error
After initial communication was
established, the connection was lost.
Connection is broken, master
has stopped communicating.
Check all connections, verify all
user-side software configurations.
CE
Memobus Com Err
Modbus Communication Error
Control data was not received correctly for
two seconds.
Connection is broken, master
has stopped communicating.
Check all connections, verify all
user-side software configurations.
CPF00
COM-ERR(OP&INV)
Operator Communication Fault 1
Transmission between the Drive and the
digital operator cannot be established
within 5 seconds after supplying power.
Digital operator cable not
securely connected, digital
operator defective, control
board defective...
Remove the digital operator once
and then reinstall it.
External RAM of CPU is defective. Control circuit damage.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Replace the Drive.
CPF01
COM-ERR(OP&INV)
Operator Communication Fault 2
After communication started with the
digital operator, a communication fault
occurred for 2 seconds or more.
Digital operator cable not
securely connected, digital
operator defective, control
board defective.
Remove the digital operator once
and then reinstall it.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Replace the Drive.
CPF02
BB Circuit Err
Baseblock Circuit Fault
Baseblock circuit fault at power-up
Gate array hardware failure
during power-up.
Perform a factory initialization.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Replace the control board.
CPF03
EEPROM Error
EEPROM Fault
EEPROM fault, check sum not valid
Noise or spike on the control
circuit input terminals.
Perform a factory initialization
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Replace the control board.
Page 373 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 8
CPF04
Internal A/D Err
CPU Internal A/D Converter Fault
Noise or spike on the control
circuit input terminals.
Perform a factory initialization.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Replace the control board.
CPF05
External A/D Err
CPU External A/D Converter Fault
Noise or spike on the control
circuit input terminals.
Perform a factory initialization.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Replace the control board.
CPF07
RAM-Err
ASIC Internal RAM Fault
(RAM)
- - -
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Control circuit damage Replace the Drive.
CPF08
WAT-Err
Watchdog Timer Fault
(WAT)
- - -
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Control circuit damage Replace the Drive.
CPF09
CPU-Err
CPU-ASIC Mutual Diagnosis Fault
(COY)
- - -
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Control circuit damage Replace the Drive.
CPF10
ASIC-Err
ASIC Version Fault
(ASIC)
Control circuit damage Replace the Drive.
CPF20
Option A/D Error Option Card Fault
Option card connector
connection fault.
Remove all inputs to the option
board.
Option card A/D converter
fault.
Perform a factory initialization.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Replace the option board.
Replace the Control board.
CPF21
Option CPU Down
Self-diagnosis Fault of Communication
Option Card
Noise or spike on the commu-
nication line, defective option
board.
Perform a factory initialization.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Replace the option board.
Replace the control board.
CPF22
Option Type Err
Communication Option Card Code Number
Fault
Unrecognizable option board
is connected to the control
board.
Remove any option boards.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Perform a factory initialization.
Replace the option board.
Replace the control board.
Table 6.3 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
Page 374 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 9
CPF23
Option DPRAM Err
Communication Option Card
Interconnection Fault
An option board is not
correctly connected to the con-
trol board or an option board
that is not made for the Drive
is attached to the control
board.
Remove power to the Drive.
Connect the option board once
more.
Perform a factory initialization.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Replace the option board.
Replace the control board.
EF0
Opt External Flt
Communication Option Card External Fault
An external fault condition
exists.
Check for an external condition.
Verify the parameters.
Verify communication signal.
EF3
Ext Fault S3
External Fault at Terminal S3
An external fault condition
exists connected to a multi-
function digital input.
Eliminate the cause of an
external fault condition.
EF4
Ext Fault S4 External Fault at Terminal S4
EF5
Ext Fault S5
External Fault at Terminal S5
EF6
Ext Fault S6
External Fault at Terminal S6
EF7
Ext Fault S7
External Fault at Terminal S7
Remove the fault from a multi-
function digital input.
FBL
Feedback Loss
PI Feedback Loss
This fault occurs when PI Feedback Loss
Detection is programmed to fault.
(b5-12 = 2) and the
PI Feedback < PI Feedback Loss Detection
Level (b5-13) for the PI Feedback Loss
Detection Time (b5-14).
PI Feedback source
(e.g. transducer, sensor,
building automation signal) is
not installed correctly or is not
working.
Verify Drive is programmed to
receive the PI Feedback source
signal.
Check to ensure the PI Feedback
source is installed and working
properly.
GF
Ground Fault
Output Ground Fault
Drive output grounding current has
exceeded 50% of the Drive rated output
current.
Motor lead is shorted to
ground, DCCT defective.
Remove the motor and run the
Drive without the motor.
Check the motor for a phase to
ground short.
Check the output current with a
clamp on meter to verify the
DCCT reading.
LF
Output Pha Loss
Output Phase Loss
Drive output has an open phase or the motor
no load current is below the setting of
parameter E2-03.
Open phase on the output on
the Drive.
Check output voltage.
Loose terminal screws at T1,
T2 or T3.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Parameter E2-03 set
incorrectly.
Adjust E2-03 to a lower value.
Table 6.3 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
Page 375 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 10
LL3
Loss of Load Det 1
Loss of Load Detection 1
Drive output current < L6-02 for more than
the time set in L6-03
Motor is underloaded.
Ensure the values in L6-02 and
L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine
status to eliminate fault.
OC
Over Current
Overcurrent
Drive output current exceeded the
overcurrent detection level (approximately
180% of Drive rated output current).
Shorted Drive output phase to
phase, shorted motor, locked
rotor, load too heavy, accel/
decel time too short, contactor
on the Drive output is opened
and closed, a special motor or
a motor with a FLA rating
larger than Drive rated output
current.
Remove the motor and run the
Drive without the motor.
Check the motor for a phase-to-
phase short.
Check the Drive for a phase-to-
phase short at the output.
Verify C1-01 and C1-02 are set
correctly.
Check load conditions.
OH1
Heatsnk MAX Temp
Cooling Fin/Cooling Fin Fan Overheat
The temperature of the Drive cooling fin
exceeded the temperature programmed in
parameter L8-02, and L8-03 = 0-2.
Cooling fan(s) are not
working, high ambient
temperature, a heat source is
too close to the Drive.
Check for dirt build-up on the
fans and cooling fins.
Reduce the ambient temperature
around the Drive.
Drive Internal Cooling Fan
Remove the heating unit. Replace
the cooling fan.
OH3
Motor Overheat 1
Motor Overheating Alarm
The Drive stops or continues operation
according to the setting of L1-03.
Overheating of motor as
measured by motor thermistor.
Recheck the cycle time and the
size of the load.
Recheck the accel/decel time
(C1-01 and C1-02).
Recheck the V/F pattern (E1-01
thru E1-13).
Recheck the motor rated current
value (E2-01).
OH4
Motor Overheat 2
Motor Overheating Fault
The Drive stops operation according to the
setting of L1-04.
Overheating of motor as
measured by motor thermistor.
Recheck the cycle time and the
size of the load.
Recheck the accel/decel time
(C1-01 and C1-02).
Recheck the V/F pattern (E1-01
thru E1-13).
Recheck the motor rated current
value (E2-01).
OL1
Motor Overloaded
Motor Overload
Designed to protect the motor
Fully adjustable from parameter E2-01
The load is too large. The
cycle time is too short at the
accel/decel time.
Recheck the cycle time and the
size of the load as well as the
times set in C1-01 and C1-02.
The voltage of the V/F pattern
is high.
Review the V/F pattern
parameters, E1-01 thru E1-13.
Motor rated current setting is
improper.
Check the motor rated current
value in E2-01.
Table 6.3 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
Page 376 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 11
OL2
Inv Overloaded
Drive Overload
Designed to protect the Drive
The load is too large. The
cycle time is too short at the
accel/decel time.
Recheck the cycle time and the
size of the load as well as the
times set in C1-01 and C1-02.
The voltage of the V/F pattern
is high.
Review the V/F pattern
parameters, E1-01 thru E1-13.
The size of the Drive is small. Change to a larger size Drive.
OL3
Overtorque Det 1
Overtorque Detection 1
Drive output current > L6-02 for more than
the time set in L6-03
Motor is overloaded.
Ensure the values in L6-02 and
L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine
status to eliminate fault.
OPR
Oper Disconnect
Digital Operator Connection Fault
The Drive will stop if the digital operator is
removed when the Drive is commanded to
run through the digital operator.
The digital operator is not
attached or the digital opera-
tor connector is broken.
Attach the digital operator.
Check the digital operator
connector.
Verify the setting of o2-06.
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
DC Bus Overvoltage
208-240VAC: Trip point is 400Vdc
480VAC: Trip point is 800Vdc
High input voltage at R/L1,
S/L2 and T/L3.
Check the input circuit and
reduce the input power to within
specifications.
The deceleration time is set
too short.
Extend the time in C1-02.
Power factor correction
capacitors are being used on
the input to the Drive.
Remove the power factor
correction capacitors.
PF
Input Pha Loss
Input Phase Loss
Drive input power supply has an open phase
or has a large imbalance of input voltage.
Open phase on the input of the
Drive.
Check the input voltage.
Loose terminal screws at
R/L1, S/L2 or T/L3.
Tighten the terminal screws.
Momentary power loss
occurred.
Check the input voltage.
Input voltage fluctuation too
large.
Check the input voltage.
Parameter L8-06 value is set
incorrectly.
Adjust L8-06 according to your
application. The higher the value
the less sensitive it becomes.
PUF
DC Bus Fuse Open
DC Bus Fuse
Detects if the DC bus fuse has opened
Shorted output transistor(s) or
terminals.
Remove power from the Drive.
Disconnect the motor.
Perform the checks without
power in Table 6.6.
Replace the shorted
component(s).
Replace the defective fuse.
Table 6.3 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
Page 377 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 12
RH
DynBrk Resistor
Dynamic Braking Resistor
The protection of the dynamic braking
resistor based on setting of L8-01
Overhauling load, extended
dynamic braking duty cycle,
defective dynamic braking
resistor.
Verify dynamic braking duty
cycle.
Monitor DC bus voltage.
Replace dynamic braking
resistor.
RR
DynBrk Transistr
Dynamic Braking Transistor
The dynamic braking transistor failed.
Shorted dynamic braking
transistor, high DC bus
voltage, defective dynamic
braking resistor.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Replace defective dynamic
braking transistor or resistor...
Monitor DC bus voltage.
UV1
DC Bus Undervolt
DC Bus Undervoltage
The DC bus voltage is L2-05
208-240VAC: Trip point is 190Vdc
480VAC: Trip point is 380Vdc
Low input voltage at R/L1,
S/L2 and T/L3
Check the input circuit and
increase the input power to within
specifications.
The acceleration time is set too
short.
Extend the time in C1-01.
Voltage fluctuation of the input
power is too large.
Check the input voltage.
UV2
CTL PS Undervolt
Control Power Supply Undervoltage
Undervoltage of the control circuit when
running.
External load connected
pulling down the Drive power
supplies.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Repair or replace the Power PCB/
Gate Drive PCB.
Remove all control wiring and
test Drive.
UV3
MC Answerback
Soft Charge Circuit Fault
The pre-charge contactor opened while the
Drive was running.
Contacts on the soft charge
contactor are dirty and the soft
charge contactor does not
function mechanically.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Check the condition of the soft
charge contactor.
Repair or replace the Power PCB/
Gate Drive PCB.
WARNING
Some features within the PI function group cause the Drive to shut down momentarily (e.g. Sleep Function,
Snooze Function, Feedback Loss feature etc.) Upon recovery from the conditions that activate these features,
the Drive may start unexpectedly. Therefore, when enabling these features take appropriate measures to
notify personnel working with this equipment that unexpected starting may occur.
Table 6.3 Fault Displays and Processing (Continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
Page 378 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 13
4Alarm Detection
Table 6.4 Alarm Displays and Processing
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
BUS
Option Com Err
Option Communication Error
After initial communication was
established, the connection was lost.
Connection is broken, master
has stopped communicating.
Check all connections, verify all
user side software configurations.
CALL
SI-F/G ComCall
Serial communication transmission error
Communication has not yet been estab-
lished.
Connection not made properly,
user software not configured to
the proper baud rate or
configuration.
Check all connections, verify all
user side software configurations.
EF
External Fault
Both the forward and the reverse run com-
mands are input simultaneously for 500mS
or more. This alarm stops the motor.
An external forward and
reverse command are input
simultaneously.
Check external sequence logic.
EF0
Opt External Flt
(Flashing)
Communication Option Card External Fault
An external fault condition
exists.
Check for an external condition.
Verify the parameters.
Verify communication signal.
EF3
Ext Fault S3
(Flashing)
External Fault at Terminal S3
An external fault condition
exists connected to a
multi-function digital input.
Eliminate the cause of an external
fault condition.
EF4
Ext Fault S4
(Flashing)
External Fault at Terminal S4
EF5
Ext Fault S5
(Flashing)
External Fault at Terminal S5
EF6
Ext Fault S6
(Flashing)
External Fault at Terminal S6
EF7
Ext Fault S7
(Flashing)
External Fault at Terminal S7
Remove the fault from a multi-
function digital input.
DNE
Drive not Enable
(Flashing)
The Drive does not have the enable com-
mand when the run command is applied.
The Run command has been
applied prior to the enable
signal.
Apply the enable command
before applying the run
command.
FAN
Cooling Fan Error
Failure of the Drive internal cooling fan
when L8-32 = 0
Drive cooling fan has stopped. Replace the cooling fan.
Alarms are Drive protection functions that does not operate the fault contact. The Drive will automatically return to its original
status once the cause of the alarm has been removed.
During an alarm condition, the Digital Operator display flashes and an alarm output is generated at the multi-function outputs
(H2-01 to H2-02) if programmed.
When an alarm occurs, take appropriate corrective action according to the table below.
Page 379 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 14
FBL
Feedback Loss
PI Feedback Loss
This fault occurs when PI Feedback Loss
Detection is programmed to fault.
(b5-12 = 2) and the
PI Feedback < PI Feedback Loss Detection
Level (b5-13) for the PI Feedback Loss
Detection Time (b5-14)
PI Feedback source
(e.g. transducer, sensor, build-
ing automation signal) is not
installed correctly or is not
working.
Verify Drive is programmed to
receive the PI Feedback source
signal.
Check to ensure the PI Feedback
source is installed and working
properly.
Check the motor for a phase-to-
phase short.
Check the Drive for a phase-to
phase short at the output.
Verify C1-01 and C1-02 are set
correctly.
Check load conditions.
LL3
Loss of Load Det 1
(Flashing)
Loss of Load Detection 1
Drive output current < L6-02 for more than
the time set in L6-03
Motor is underloaded.
Ensure the values in
L6-02 and L6-03 are appropriate.
Check application/machine status
to eliminate fault.
OH
Heatsnk Overtemp
(Flashing)
Cooling Fin/Cooling Fin Fan Overheat
The temperature of the Drive cooling fin
exceeded the temperature programmed in
parameter L8-02.
Cooling fan(s) are not working,
high ambient temperature, a
heating unit in close proximity
to Drive is present.
Check for dirt build-up on the
fans and cooling fins.
Reduce the ambient temperature
around the Drive.
Drive Internal Cooling Fan Remove the heating unit.
OH2
Over Heat 2
(Flashing)
Drive overheat pre-alarm signal is input
from a multi-function digital input terminal.
An external overheat condition
exists connected to one of the
multi-function input terminals
S3, S4, S5, S6 or S7.
Check for an external condition.
Verify the program parameters
H1-01 thru H1-05.
OH3
Motor Overheat 1
(Flashing)
Motor Overheating Alarm
The Drive stops or continues operation
according to the setting of L1-03.
Overheating of motor
Recheck the cycle time and the
size of the load.
Recheck the accel/decel time
(C1-01 and C1-02).
Recheck the V/F pattern (E1-01
thru E1-13).
Recheck the motor rated current
value (E2-01).
Check the digital operator
connector.
Verify the setting of
o2-06.
Table 6.4 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
Page 380 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 15
OV
DC Bus Overvolt
(Flashing)
DC Bus Overvoltage
208-240VAC: Trip point is 400Vdc
480VAC: Trip point is 800Vdc
High input voltage at R/L1,
S/L2 and T/L3.
Check the input circuit and
reduce the input power to within
specifications.
Extend the time in C1-02.
The deceleration time is set too
short.
Power factor correction
capacitors are being used on the
input to the Drive.
Remove the power factor correc-
tion capacitors.
OVRD
Emergcy
Override
Emergency Override
Emergency Override is active
Forward or Reverse Emergency
Override input is closed
- - -
PRHT
Motor Preheating
Motor Preheating
Motor is preheating
Motor Preheat 2 input is closed - - -
UV
DC Bus Undervolt
(Flashing)
DC Bus Undervoltage
The DC bus voltage is L2-05
208-240VAC: Trip point is 190Vdc
480VAC: Trip point is 380Vdc
Low input voltage at R/L1, S/L2
and T/L3.
Check the input circuit and
increase the input power to
within specifications.
The acceleration time is set too
short.
Extend the time in C1-01.
Voltage fluctuation of the input
power is too large.
Check the input voltage.
UV2
CTL PS Undervolt
Control Power Supply Undervoltage of the
control circuit when running
External load connected pulling
down the Drive power supplies.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Repair or replace the Power PCB/
Gate Drive PCB.
UV3
MC Answerback
Soft Charge Circuit Fault
The pre-charge contactor opened while the
Drive was running.
Contacts on the soft charge
contactor are dirty and the soft
charge contactor does not
function mechanically.
Cycle power off and on to the
Drive.
Check the condition of the soft
charge contactor.
Table 6.4 Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued)
Digital
Operator Display
Description Cause Corrective Action
Page 381 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 16
4Operator Programming Errors (OPE)
An Operator Programming Error (OPE) occurs when an inapplicable parameter is set or an individual parameter setting is
inappropriate.
The Drive does not operate until the parameter is set correctly. (Alarm output and fault contact do not operate.)
If an OPE occurs, change the appropriate parameter by checking the cause shown in Table 6.5.
Table 6.5 OPE Error and Fault Displays
Digital Operator
Display
Description Cause
Corrective
Action
OPE01
kVA Selection t
Drive kVA setting error
The control board was replaced
and the kVA parameter is set
incorrectly.
Enter the correct kVA setting (o2-04)
by referring to the Drive model
number in Appendix B.
OPE02
Limit
Constant data out of range
Parameter set above the allowable
range
Verify the program settings.
OPE03
Terminal
Multi-function input selection fault
Duplicate functions are selected,
up/down commands or trim control
increase/decrease are not set
simultaneously. Speed search from
maximum frequency and set
frequency are set simultaneously.
Verify program settings
(H1-01~H1-05).
OPE05
Sequence Select
Run command is selected through
serial communication at 2CN but
option board is not installed.
Serial communication option board
is not installed, option board is
installed incorrectly. The run com-
mand selection parameter
B1-02 is set to 3 and option board is
not installed.
Verify that the board is installed.
Remove power to the Drive and
connect the option board once more.
OPE10
V/f Ptrn Setting
V/f data setting fault
V/f parameter settings are not set
correctly.
Check parameters (E1-04 ~ E1-11).
A minimum frequency/voltage value
may be set higher than the maximum
frequency/voltage.
OPE11
CarrFrq/On-Delay
Carrier frequency data setting fault
Carrier frequency proportional gain
C6-05 > 6 and C6-04 > C6-03.
Upper/lower limit error of C6-03 to
5.0kHz
Parameter setting incorrect.
Check the program settings and
correct the errors.
ERR
EEPROM R/W Err
It does not match at EEPROM write.
Power supply is turned OFF.
Parameter is reset repeatedly.
Cycle power off and on to Drive.
Do a factory initialization (A1-03).
Page 382 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 17
4 Auto-Tuning Faults
Auto-tuning faults are shown below. When the following faults are detected, the fault is displayed on the digital operator and
the motor coasts to a stop during operation. The fault contact is not activated.

Table 6.6 Auto-Tuning Displays and Processing
Digital Operator Display Probable Cause Corrective Action
Er - 01
Fault
There is an error in the data input
for autotuning.
There is an error in the relationship
between the motor output and the
motor rated current.
Check input data.
Check Drive and motor capacity.
Check motor rated current.
Er - 02
Minor Fault
A minor fault is detected during
auto-tuning.
Check input data.
Check wirings and around the
machine.
Check the load.
Er - 03
STOP key
The STOP key is pressed during
auto-tuning, and the auto-tuning is
interrupted.

Er - 04
Resistance
Auto-tuning is not completed within
the specified time.
The auto-tuning result became other
than the parameter set range.
Check input data.
Check motor wiring.
If a motor and a machine are
connected, disconnect the motor
from the machine.
Er - 12
I-det. Circuit
Current flow exceeded the motor
rated current.
Current detection value symbol
was reversed.
Any of U/TI, V/T2, and W/T3 has
open-phase.
Check current detection circuit,
wiring and mounting procedure.
Er - 13
Leakage Inductance Fault
Auto-tuning did not finish within the
set time.
Tuning result became other than the
parameter setting range.
Check motor wiring.
End - 3
Data Invalid
Rated current set value is set too
high.
Check input data (especially,
motor output current and motor
rated current value).
Page 383 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 18
4Digital Operator COPY Function Faults
These faults can occur occurred during the operator COPY function. Fault content is displayed on the operator. An error
during the COPY function does not activate the fault contact output or alarm output.
Table 6.7 Digital Operator COPY Function Faults
Function Digital Operator Display Probable Causes Corrective Action
READ
Function
PRE
READ IMPOSSIBLE
o3-01 was set to 1 to write a parameter
when the Digital Operator was
write-protected (o3-02 = 0).
Set o3-02 to 1 to enable writing parameters
with the Digital Operator.
IFE
READ DATA ERROR
The read data length does not agree.
The write data is incorrect.
Repeat the Read.
Check the Digital Operator cable.
Replace digital operator.
RDE
DATA ERROR
An attempted write of a parameter to
EEPROM on the Digital Operator failed.
A low Inverter voltage has been detected.
Repeat the read.
Replace Digital Operator.
COPY
Function
CPE
ID UNMATCHED
The Drive product code or software number
is different.
Use COPY function for the same product
code and software number.
VAE
INV. KVA UNMATCH
The capacity of the Drive being copied and
the capacity in the Digital Operator are
different.
Use COPY function for the same Drive
capacity.
CRE
CONTROL UNMATCHED
The control method of the Drive being
copied and the control method in the
Digital Operator are different.
Use the COPY function for the same
control method.
CYE
COPY ERROR
The parameter written to the Drive was
compared with the parameter in the Digital
Operator and they were different.
COPY retest.
CSE
SUM CHECK ERROR
The checksum in the Drive parameter area
was compared with the checksum in the
Digital Operator parameter area and they
were different.
Retry the copy.
Verify
Function
VYE
VERIFY ERROR
The set value of the digital operator and the
Drive do not match.
Retry Verify function.
After COPY is retested, verify it is
retested.
Page 384 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 19
Drive Troubleshooting
Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, etc., the Drive and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started
up. If this occurs, use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures.
If a fault is displayed on the digital operator, refer to Fault Detection, Table 6.3.
4If Parameter Cannot Be Set
Use the following information if a Drive parameter cannot be set.
The display does not change when the INCREASE and DECREASE keys are pressed.
The following causes are possible.
The Drive is operating (Drive mode).
There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Remove the run command and then set the parameters.
Parameter write enable is input.
This occurs when "parameter write enable" (set value: 1B) is set for a multi-function digital input terminal (H1-01 to H1-05).
If the parameter write enable input is OFF, the parameters cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the parameters.
Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.)
If the parameter A1-04 (Password) and A1-05 (Password Setting) numbers are different, the parameters for the initialize mode
cannot be changed. Enter the correct password in A1-04.
If you cannot remember the password, display A1-05 (Password Setting) by pressing the Shift/Reset Key and the MENU Key
simultaneously while in the A1-04 display. Reset the password and input the reset password in parameter A1-04.
OPE01 through OPE11 is displayed.
The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer to Operator Programming Errors in this chapter and correct the setting.
CPF00 or CPF01 is displayed.
This is a Digital Operator communications error. The connection between the Digital Operator and the Drive may be faulty.
Remove the Digital Operator and then re-install it.
Page 385 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 20
4If the Motor Does Not Operate
Use the following information if the motor does not operate.
Ensure the digital operator is securely connected to the Drive.
The motor does not operate when the HAND key on the Digital Operator is pressed.
The following causes are possible:
The Speed Command (Frequency Reference) is too low.
If the Speed Command (frequency reference) is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Drive
will not operate.
Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency.
The motor does not operate when an external run command is input.
The following causes are possible.
The Drive is not in Drive mode.
If the Drive is not in Drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU key once and press the
DATA/ENTER key. The Drive is now in Drive mode.
The Speed Command is too low.
If the Speed Command is set below the frequency set in E1-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Drive will not operate.
Raise the Speed Command to at least the minimum output frequency.
Page 386 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 21
The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.
The load may be too high. The Drive has a stall prevention function and an automatic torque boost function, but the motor
responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too great. Lengthen the acceleration time
(CI-01) or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor size.
The motor only rotates in one direction.
"Reverse run prohibited" may be selected. If b1-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the
Drive will not receive reverse run commands. This is the default to use both forward and reverse operation, set b1-04 to 0, and
operate in Auto mode.
4The Direction of the Motor Rotation is Reversed
If the motor rotates in the wrong direction, the motor output wiring is incorrect. When the Drive U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3
terminals are properly connected to the motor, the motor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is
received. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type, so be sure to check the specifications.
The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching any two wires among U/TI, V/T2, and W/T3.
4If the Motor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow
Use the following information if the motor does not output torque or if acceleration is too slow.
The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.
If the value set for L3-02 (Stall Prevention Acceleration Level) is too low, the acceleration time will be too long. Check to be
sure that the set value is suitable.
The stall prevention level during running is too low.
If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is too low, the motor speed and torque will be limited.
Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.
4If the Motor Operates at a Higher Speed Than the Speed Command
Use the following information if the motor operates at a higher speed than the Speed Command.
A signal is being input to the Speed Command (current) terminal A2.
If a preset frequency reference is selected, the preset reference takes priority over the normal reference.
If the PI mode of operation is enabled, the Drive output frequency will change to regulate the process variable to the desired
setpoint. Then, the Drive speed may go to maximum.
Page 387 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 22
4If the Motor Overheats
Take the following steps if the motor overheats.
The load is too high.
If the motor load is too high and the motor is used when the effective torque exceeds the motor's rated torque, the motor will
overheat. Reduce the load amount by either reducing the load or increasing the acceleration/deceleration times. Also consider
increasing the motor size.
The ambient temperature is too high.
The motor rating is determined by a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will overheat if it is run con-
tinuously at the rated torque in an environment where the maximum ambient operating temperature rating is exceeded. Lower
the motor's ambient temperature to within its acceptable range.
The withstand voltage between the motor phases is insufficient.
When the motor is connected to the Drive output, Voltage surges are generated by standing waves that can occur with certain
combinations of Drive carrier frequency and motor cable length. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Drive's
input power supply voltage (i.e., 1200VAC for a 480VAC). Be sure to use a motor with a withstand voltage between the motor
phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a 480VAC Drive, use an inverter-duty (NEMA
MG1, Parts 30 & 31) motor. Motor protection filter can also be an effective measure.
4If Peripheral Devices Like DDCs or Others are Influenced by Starting or Running
Drive
If noise is generated by Drive switching, implement the following countermeasures:
1. Change the Drive's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. This will help to reduce the amount
of internal switching.
2. Install an Input Noise Filter at the Drive's input power terminals.
3. Use metal conduit. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Drive and power wires in metal.
4. Ground the Drive and motor.
5. Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring.
Page 388 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 23
4If a Stand Alone Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Drive is Run
The Drive performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause an external ground fault
interrupter to operate and cut off the power supply. Whenever possible, use a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage
detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 200 mA or greater per unit, with an operating time of 0.1 s or more), or one that
incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Drives). It will also help to change the Drive's
Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-02) to lower the carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as
the cable is lengthened.
4If There is Mechanical Vibration
Use the following information when there is mechanical vibration.
The application is making unusual sounds.
The following causes are possible.
There may be resonance between the mechanical system's natural frequency and the carrier frequency.
This is characterized by the motor running with no noise generation, but the machinery vibrates with a high-pitched whine. To
prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6-02 to C6-05.
There may be resonance between an applications characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the
Drive.
To prevent this from occurring, use the jump frequency functions in parameters d3-01 to d3-04, or have the driven motor and
load balanced to reduce vibration.
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with V/f control.
The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain to a more effective level by raising the value of C4-02 (Torque
Compensation Primary Delay Time Parameter) and then lowering the setting of n1-02 (Hunting Prevention Gain).
Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PI control.
If there is oscillation or hunting during PI control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P and I parameters.
Disable integral (I) control
Reduce the proportional gain (P) until hunting stops
Reintroduce the integral function, starting with long integral time values, to eliminate the P offset
Page 389 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 24
4If the Motor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Stopped
If the motor rotates even when the Drive is stopped, the DC injection braking may be insufficient. If the motor continues
operating at low speed, without completely stopping after a stop has been executed, it means that the DC injection braking is
not decelerating the motor enough. Adjust the DC injection braking as follows:
Increase the parameter b2-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Stop) setting.
Increase the parameter b2-02 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting.
4If Zero Volts is Detected When a Motor is Started, or Stalls
Generation of 0 V (main circuit voltage) and stalling can occur if a motor is turning when it is started and the DC injection
braking is insufficient.
This can be prevented by slowing motor rotation by DC injection braking before starting. Increase parameter b2-03
(DC injection braking time at start) setting.
4If the Accepted Speed Command Does Not Rise to the User Speed Command
Input
The Speed Command is within the jump frequency range.
When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency can not be set within the jump frequency range. Check to
be sure that the Jump Frequency (parameters d3-01 to d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (parameter d3-04) settings are
suitable.
The frequency reference upper limit has been reached.
The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula:

Freq Ref Upper Limit = Maximum Output Frequency (E1-04) Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d2-01) / 100

Check to be sure that the parameter E1-04 and d2-01 settings are suitable.
Page 390 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 25
Drive Main Circuit Test Procedure
Before attempting any troubleshooting checks, make sure that the three-phase power is disconnected and locked out. With power removed
from the unit, the DC bus capacitors will stay charged for several minutes. The Charge LED in the Drive will glow red until the DC bus volt-
age is below 10Vdc. To ensure that the DC bus is completely discharged, measure between the positive and negative bus with a DC voltme-
ter set to the highest scale.
WARNING
Prior to removing any protective cover or wiring any part of the Drive, remove all power sources, including
main input power and control circuit power. Wait a minimum of 5 minutes after power removal, before
removing any cover. The charge lamp located within the Drive should be off prior to working inside. Even if
the charge lamp is off, one must measure the AC input, output, and DC Bus potential to insure safe levels
prior to resuming work. Failure to adhere to this warning may result in personal injury or death.
Table 6.8 Main Circuit Test Procedure
Check Procedure
Measure DC Bus Voltage
1. Set the digital multi-meter to its highest VDC scale.
2. Measure between 1 and (-) for the following check:
Place the positive (red) meter lead on 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on (-).
3. If the measured voltage is < 10Vdc, it is safe to work inside the Drive.
If not, wait until the DC Bus has completely discharged.
Input Diodes
(D1-D12 or Q1)
The input diodes rectify or transform the three-phase input AC voltage
into a DC voltage.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the Diode Check setting.
2. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal R/L1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal 1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
3. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal S/L2.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal 1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
4. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal T/L3.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal 1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
5. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal R/L1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
6. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal S/L2.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
7. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal T/L3.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
8. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal R/L1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
9. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal S/L2.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
10. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal T/L3.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
Page 391 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 26
Table 6.8 Main Circuit Test Procedure (Continued)
Check Procedure
Input Diodes
(D1-D12 or Q1)
11. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal R/L1.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
12. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal S/L2.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
13. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal T/L3.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
Soft Charge Resistor Check
(R1, R2, 6PCB)
The soft charge resistor works in conjunction with the soft charge contactor to slowly charge
the DC bus capacitors to minimize the inrush current when power is applied to the Drive.
1. Conduct a visual inspection. Check for physical damage.
2. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
3. If the resistor is damaged, the measured value will be infinite ohms.
Soft Charge Contactor
(K1)
The purpose of the soft charge contactor is to bypass the soft charge resistor after the DC bus
voltage has reached its normal operating level.
1. Conduct a visual inspection. Check for physical damage.
2. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
3. On Drives with a board-mounted contactor, verify that each contact
resistance measures infinite ohms.
4. On Drives without a board-mounted contactor, press the plunger in, and verify that each
contact measures zero ohms.
5. On Drives without a board-mounted contactor, release the plunger, and verify that the
resistance is the ohmic value of the soft charge resistor.
6. On Drives with a board-mounted contactor, verify that the contactor coil measures about
300 ohms. The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to verify the con-
tacts change states.
7. On Drives without a board-mounted contactor, verify that the 230VAC contactor coil
measures about 175 ohms. The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to
verify the contacts change states.
8. On Drives without a board-mounted contactor, verify that the 24Vdc auxiliary coil
measures about 2.2M ohms. The coil can be tested by applying the appropriate voltage to
verify the contacts change states.
DC Bus Fuse
(F1)
The DC bus fuse is located in the negative portion of the DC Bus. The DC bus fuse is used to
protect the main circuit components if the output transistors short. If the DC bus fuse is open,
at least one of the output transistors has failed. When a transistor fails, there is a short
between the positive and negative portions of the DC Bus. The DC bus fuse does not protect
the transistors, but protects the rest of the main circuit from the high current present during a
short. Never replace the DC bus fuse without first checking all of the output transistors.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
2. Place one lead of the multi-meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the
multi-meter on the other side of the fuse.
3. If the fuse is good, the measured value will be zero ohms.
If the fuse is bad, the measured value will be infinite ohms.
Page 392 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 27
Table 6.8 Main Circuit Test Procedure (Continued)
Check Procedure
Output Transistors
(Q1-Q12)
The output transistors are used to switch the DC bus voltage to allow current to flow to the
motor.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the Diode Check setting.
2 Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal U/T1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal 1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
3 Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal V/T2.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal 1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
4 Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal W/T3.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal 1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
5 Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal U/T1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
6. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal V/T2.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
7 Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal W/T3.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal (-).
Expected reading is OL displayed.
8 Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal U/T1.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
9 Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal V/T2.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
10 Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal (-).
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal W/T3.
Expected reading is about 0.5 Volts.
11. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal U/T1.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
12. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal V/T2.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
13. Place the positive (red) meter lead on terminal 1.
Place the negative (black) meter lead on terminal W/T3.
Expected reading is OL displayed.
Control Power Fuse
All Drives have a Control Power Fuse. The fuse is located on either the Power PCB (3PCB)
or the Gate Drive PCB (3PCB). The Control Power Fuse protects the primary switching
mode power supply.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
2. Place one lead of the multi-meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the
multi-meter on the other side of the fuse.
3. If the fuse is good, the measured value will be zero ohms.
If the fuse is bad, the measured value will be infinite ohms.
Page 393 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 28
Table 6.8 Main Circuit Test Procedure (Continued)
Check Procedure
24Vdc Cooling Fans
(Heat Sink & Internal)
The Heat Sink & Internal Cooling Fans cool the heat sink as well as the output transistor
modules of the Drive.
1. Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely.
2. If there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad, the fan motor can be checked with a
digital mutli-meter.
3. Set the digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
4. Measure across the fan motor terminals. If zero ohms are measured, conclude that the fan
motor is shorted. If infinite ohms are measured, conclude that the fan motor is burned
open.
5. If the fan is not working, then disconnect the fan and apply 24Vdc to the fan to test the
motor.
230/240VAC Cooling Fans
(Heat Sink)
The Heat Sink Cooling Fans cool the heat sink to remove heat from the Drive.
1. Conduct a visual inspection to ensure the fan turns freely.
2. If there is no physical evidence that the fan is bad, the motor can be checked with a
digital mutli-meter.
3. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
4. Measure across the fan motor terminals. If the fan motor is good, the measured value
should be about 500 ohms. If zero ohms are measured, conclude that the fan motor is
shorted. If infinite ohms are measured, conclude that the fan motor is burned open.
If the fan is not working, then disconnect the fan and apply 230/240VAC to the fan to
test the motor.
Cooling Fan Fuse
Large Drive units contain a Cooling Fan Fuse. It is located on either the Gate Drive Board
(3PCB) or the Tap Change Board (8PCB). If the Cooling Fan Fuse is open, then the
230/240VAC cooling fans may be defective.
1. Set a digital multi-meter to the R x 1 scale.
2. Place one lead of the multi-meter on one side of the fuse and place the other lead of the
multi-meter on the other side of the fuse.
3. If the fuse is good, the measured value will be zero ohms.
If the fuse is bad, the measured value will be infinite ohms.
Page 394 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 29
Drive Date Stamp Information
This information is used to determine when a Drive was built to see if it is within its warranty period. The date stamp is located
on the lower right side of the Drive.
Fig 6.2 Date Stamp Location

PRD
INSP2
96 3. 31
YEA Production
Manufacture Date
Inspector Number
00.7.22
Page 395 of 541
Diagnostic & Troubleshooting 6 - 30
Notes:
Page 396 of 541
Maintenance 7 - 1
Chapter 7
Maintenance
This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection of the Drive and Bypass
unit. Please refer to these instructions to ensure that the Drive receives the proper
maintenance to maintain overall performance.
E7N Maintenance ........................................................................... 2
Periodic Inspection .................................................................... 2
Preventive Maintenance ............................................................ 3
Drive Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement ................................. 4
Page 397 of 541
Maintenance 7 - 2
E7N Maintenance
4Periodic Inspection
Check the following items during periodic maintenance.
The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.
There should be no abnormal heat generation from the Drive and Bypass or motor.
The ambient temperature should be within the Drive and Bypass specification of -10C to 40C (14F to 104F).
The output current value shown in parameter U1-03 should not be higher than the motor rated current for an extended period
of time.
The cooling fan in the Drive and Bypass should be operating normally.
Always turn OFF the input power before beginning inspection. Confirm that the digital operator and indicator lights on the
front panel have all turned OFF, and then wait an additional five minutes before beginning the inspection. Be sure not to touch
terminals immediately after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock. Please refer to Warnings on
page i.
Apply power to the Drive and Bypass, then conduct the following inspection.
Table 7.1 Periodic Inspections With no Power Applied
Item Inspection Corrective Action
External terminals,
mounting bolts,
connectors, etc.
Are all screws and bolts tight? Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly.
Are connectors tight? Reconnect the loose connectors.
Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
clean and dry air at a pressure between 55-85 psi.
Bypass Operator
Interface PCB
Bypass
Controller PCB
Control PCB
Power PCB
Gate Drive PCBs
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the
PCBs?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
clean and dry air at a pressure between 55-85 psi.
Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean.
Contactors
Input Diodes
Output Transistors
or IPMs
Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the
modules or components?
Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using
clean and dry air at a pressure between 55-85 psi.
DC bus capacitors
Are there any irregularities, such as
discoloration or odor?
Replace the capacitors or Drive.
Table 7.2 Periodic Inspections With Power Applied
Item Inspection Corrective Action
Cooling fan(s)
Is there any abnormal noise or vibration, or has
the total operating time exceeded 20,000 hours.
Check U1-40 for elapsed cooling fan operation
time.
Replace Cooling Fan.
Page 398 of 541
Maintenance 7 - 3
4Preventive Maintenance
If the Drive is used under the following conditions, it may be necessary to inspect more often:
High ambient temperatures, humidity or altitudes above 3,300 feet
Frequent starting and stopping
Fluctuations of the AC power supply or load
Excessive vibration and/or shock loading
Poor environment, including dust, metal particles, salt, sulfuric acid, chlorine
Table 7.3 Preventive Maintenance
Inspection Points Item Check Points Every 3-6 Months Yearly
General
Environment
Ambient Temperature
Humidity
Dust
Harmful Gas
Oil Mist
-
-
-
-
-
Equipment
Abnormal vibration or noise
-
AC Power Supply
Main circuit & control voltage
-
AC Power Circuit &
Devices
Conductors & Wire
Connections
Loose lugs, screws & wires
Hot spots on parts
Corrosion
Bent conductors
Breakage, cracking or discoloration
Check spacing
-
-
-
-
-
-
Transformers & Reactors
Discoloration or Noise
-
Terminal Blocks
Loose, damaged
-
DC Bus Capacitors
Leakage
Ruptures, broken, expansion
Capacitance & insulation resistance
-
-
-
Relays & Contactors
Noisy
Contact discoloration
-
-
Soft Charge Resistors
Cracked
Discoloration
-
-
Control Circuits Operation
Speed reference voltage/current
I/O contact operation
Relay logic
-
-
Cooling System Cooling Fans/Fins & Heatsink
Abnormal fan noise
Loose connectors
Free of accumulation
-
-
-
Keypad/Front Panel
Display
Digital Operator and
Front Panel
LEDs
Monitor display values
Key and selector switch functionality
Clean
-
-
-
-
Page 399 of 541
Maintenance 7 - 4
4Drive Heatsink Cooling Fan Replacement
Drive Models CIMR-_ _ _20P4 thru 2018 (25 HP@ 208 V) and 40P4 thru 4018
(30 HP@ 480 V)
A cooling fan is attached to the bottom of the Drive.
If the Drive is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Drive heatsink, the cooling fan can be replaced without
removing the Drive from the enclosure panel.
Removing the Drive Heatsink Cooling Fan
1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan.
2. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows 1 and then pull the fan out in the direction
of arrow 2.
3. Pull out the cable connected to the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the power connector. See Figure 7.4.
4. Open the fan cover on the left and right sides in the direction of arrows 3 and remove the fan cover from the fan.
Fig 7.4 Cooling Fan Replacement Procedure
Installing the Drive Heatsink Cooling Fan
1. Attach the fan cover to the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces into the
Drive.
2. Connect the power connector securely and place the power connector and cable into the fan cover.
3. Mount the fan cover on the Drive. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click into place on the Drive.
IMPORTANT
If the Drive is mounted with the heatsink external to the enclosure, as it is in Bypass units, the cooling fan
can only be replaced by removing the Drive from the enclosure. See Removing and Replacing the Drive
in this chapter.
Power
Connector
3
3
Page 400 of 541
Maintenance 7 - 5
Drive Models 4030 (40 HP and above @ 480 V)
A cooling fan assembly is attached to the top inside the Drive. The cooling fan assembly includes the heat sink cooling fans
and the internal cooling fan. The cooling fan(s) can be replaced without removing the Drive from the enclosure panel.
Removing the Drive Cooling Fan Assembly
1. Always turn OFF the input power before removing and installing the heatsink cooling fan assembly.
2. Remove the terminal cover, Drive cover, Digital Operator, and front cover from the front of the Drive.
3. Remove the Control PCB bracket (if necessary) to which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected to the
Control PCB and remove the cooling fan power connector from the fan board (13 PCB) positioned near the top of the
Drive.
4. Remove the cooling fan power connectors from the gate Drive board (3PCB) positioned at the back of the Drive.
5. Remove the fan assembly screws and pull out the fan assembly from the Drive.
6. Remove the cooling fan(s) from the fan assembly.
Mounting the Drive Cooling Fan Assembly
After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure to attach all of the components.
When attaching the cooling fan to the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow goes toward the top of the Drive.

Fig 7.5 Cooling Fan Assembly Replacement Procedure
Fan Cover
Gate driver
Connector
Control PCB bracket
Control PCB
Page 401 of 541
Maintenance 7 - 6
Notes:
Page 402 of 541
Parameters A - 1
Appendix A
Parameters
This appendix lists all the parameter numbers and names, along with a description
of each. Also, below the parameter name in bold type is the abbreviated name as it
appears on the digital operator display/keypad.
Parameter List ................................................................................ 2
Monitor List ................................................................................... 26
Fault Trace List ............................................................................. 28
Fault History List ........................................................................... 29
Decimal to Hex Conversion........................................................... 30
NOTE 1: Factory settings listed in this appendix are for the Drive only. See Table
5.1 and Table 5.2 for E7N Bypass factory settings.
NOTE 2: In this parameter list, the second column Parameter Name/LCD Digital
Operator Display contains information that appears on the optional LCD
display. The standard LED display does not show this level of detail. For
the LED display only the data entered or the number of the selection will
be shown. The optional LCD keypad is required to see the complete
description.
Page 403 of 541
Parameters A - 2
Parameter List
Table A.1 Parameter List
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Initialization
A1-00
4
Language Selection
Select Language
Language selection for digital operator display
0: English
2: Deutsch
3: Francais
4: Italiano
5: Espanol
6: Portugues
*Not returned to factory setting by initialization
0 to 6 0 Programming
A1-01
4
Access Level Selection
Access Level
This setting determines which parameters are accessible.
0: Operation Only
1: User Level
2: Advanced Level
0 to 2 2 Programming
A1-03
Initialize Parameters
Init Parameters
Used to return all parameters to their factory or user setting.
0: No Initialize
1110: User Initialize (The user must set their own parameter
default values and then parameter o2-03 must be set to 1 to save
them. If the parameter values are changed after o2-03 is set to 1,
the user default values can be restored by setting A1-03 to 1110)
2220: 2-Wire Initial
3330: 3-Wire Initial
0 to
3330
0 Programming
A1-04
Password 1
Enter Password
When the value set into A1-04 does NOT match the value set into
A1-05, parameters A1-01 thru A1-03 and A2-32 cannot be
changed. All other parameters determined by A1-01 can be
changed. Parameter A1-05 can be accessed by displaying
parameter A1-04, then press and hold the RESET key along with
the MENU key simultaneously.
0 to 9999 0 Programming
A1-05
Password 2
Select Password
0 to 9999 0 Programming
User Parameters
A2-01
User Parameter 1
User Param 1
Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level
(A1-01 = 1). These are the only parameters accessible for the user
level. These parameters are not related to the User Initialize
function.
b1-01
to
o3-02
Programming
A2-02
User Parameter 2
User Param 2
Programming
A2-03
User Parameter 3
User Param 3
Programming
A2-04
User Parameter 4
User Param 4
Programming
A2-05
User Parameter 5
User Param 5
Programming
A2-06
User Parameter 6
User Param 6
Programming
4Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
Page 404 of 541
Parameters A - 3
A2-07
User Parameter 7
User Param 7
Selects the parameters to be available in the User Access Level
(A1-01 = 1). These are the only parameters accessible for the user
level. These parameters are not related to the User Initialize
function.
b1-01
to
o3-02
Programming
A2-08
User Parameter 8
User Param 8
Programming
A2-09
User Parameter 9
User Param 9
Programming
A2-10
User Parameter 10
User Param 10
Programming
A2-11
User Parameter 11
User Param 11
Programming
A2-12
User Parameter 12
User Param 12
Programming
A2-13
User Parameter 13
User Param 13
Programming
A2-14
User Parameter 14
User Param 14
Programming
A2-15
User Parameter 15
User Param 15
Programming
A2-16
User Parameter 16
User Param 16
Programming
A2-17
User Parameter 17
User Param 17
Programming
A2-18
User Parameter 18
User Param 18
Programming
A2-19
User Parameter 19
User Param 19
Programming
A2-20
User Parameter 20
User Param 20
Programming
A2-21
User Parameter 21
User Param 21
Programming
A2-22
User Parameter 22
User Param 22
Programming
A2-23
User Parameter 23
User Param 23
Programming
A2-24
User Parameter 24
User Param 24
Programming
A2-25
User Parameter 25
User Param 25
Programming
A2-26
User Parameter 26
User Param 26
Programming
A2-27
User Parameter 27
User Param 27
Programming
A2-28
User Parameter 28
User Param 28
Programming
A2-29
User Parameter 29
User Param 29
Programming
A2-30
User Parameter 30
User Param 30
Programming
A2-31
User Parameter 31
User Param 31
Programming
A2-32
User Parameter 32
User Param 32
Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 405 of 541
Parameters A - 4
Sequence
b1-01
Frequency Reference
Selection
Reference Source
Selects the speed command (frequency reference) input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed d1-01
1: Terminals - Analog Input Terminal A1 (or Terminal A2 see
parameter H3-13)
2: Serial Com - RS-485 terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-
3: Option PCB - Option board connected at 2CN
0 to 3 1
Quick Setting
b1-02
Run Command Selection
Run Source
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - "Hand" and "Off" keys on digital operator
1: Terminals - Contact Closure on Terminal S1
2: Serial Com - RS-485 terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-
3: Option PCB - Option board connected at 2CN
0 to 3 1 Quick Setting
b1-03
Stopping Method Selection
Stopping Method
Selects the stopping method when the run command is removed.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: DC Injection to Stop
3: Coast w/Timer (A new run command is ignored if input before
the time in C1-02 expires)
0 to 3 0
Quick Setting
b1-04
Reverse Operation Selection
Reverse Oper
Determines the forward rotation of the motor, and if reverse
operation is disabled.
0: Reverse Enabled
1: Reverse Disabled
2: Exchange Phase - Change direction of forward motor rotation
3: Exchange Phase, Reverse Disabled - Change direction of
forward motor rotation and disable reverse operation
0 to 3 1
Programming
b1-07
Local/Remote Run Selection
LOC/REM RUN Sel
0: Cycle External RUN - If the run command is closed when
switching from hand (local) mode to auto (remote) mode, the
drive will not run
1: Accept External RUN - If the run command is closed when
switching from hand (local) mode to auto (remote) mode, the
drive WILL run
0 or 1 0 Programming
b1-08
Run Command Selection
During Program
RUN CMD at PRG
0: Disabled - Run command accepted only in the operation menu.
1: Enabled - Run command accepted in all menus
(except when b1-02 = 0)
0 or 1 0 Programming
b1-11
Drive Delay Time Setting
Wait to Run Time
After a run command, drive output will start after this delay time. 0 to 600 0sec Programming
b1-12
Hand Frequency Reference
Selection
HAND Fref Source
Selects the speed command input source in hand mode.*
0: Operator - Digital preset speed d1-01
1: Terminals - Analog Input Terminal A1 (or Terminal A2 see
parameter H3-13)
0 or 1 0 Programming
b1-13
HAND/AUTO During Run
Selection
HAND/AUTO @Run
Selects if drive will permit switching between HAND and AUTO
modes while running.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 0 Programming
b1-14
Emergency Override Speed
E Override Speed
Sets the speed command used in emergency override mode when
b1-15=0.
0.00 to
120.00 Hz
0.00 Programming
b1-15
Emergency Override
Reference Selection
E OverrideRefSel
Selects the emergency override reverse source.
0: Use b1-14 Ref
1: Use AUTO Ref
0 or 1 0 Programming
DC Braking
b2-01
DC Injection Braking Start
Frequency
DCInj Start Freq
Sets the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when ramp
to stop (b1-03 = 0) is selected. If b2-01< E1-09, DC Injection
braking starts at E1-09.
0.0 to 10.0 0.5Hz Programming
b2-02
DC Injection Braking
Current
DCInj Current
Selects the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the
Drive rated current.
0 to 100 50% Programming
b2-03
DC Injection Braking Time at
Start
DCInj Time @Start
Sets the time length of DC injection braking at start in units of 1
second.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00sec Programming
b2-04
DC Injection Braking Time at
Stop
DCInj Time @Stop
When b1-03 = 2 actual DC Injection time is calculated as follows:
b2-04 * 10 * Output Frequency / E1-04. When b1-03 = 0, this
parameter determines the amount of time DC Injection is applied to
the motor at the end of the decel ramp. This should be set to a
minimum of 0.50 seconds when using HSB. This will activate DC
injection during the final portion of HSB and help ensure that the
motor stops completely.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00sec Programming
* If b1-13=1, this parameter instead selects whether the AUTO reference is retained as the new HAND reference (setting=0), or the drive will ramp from the AUTO
reference to the existing HAND reference (setting=1).
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 406 of 541
Parameters A - 5
b2-09
Motor Pre-Heat Current
Preheat Current
Motor Pre-heat current in % of drive rated current. This is used to
keep the motor warm to prevent condensation and is used in
conjunction with a digital input (data = 60).
0 to100 0% Programming
b2-10
Motor Pre-Heat Current 2
Preheat Current2
Sets the DC preheat current for multi-function output setting 80
(Motor Preheat 2) as a percentage of Motor Rated Current (E2-01).
0 to 10% 5 Programming
Speed Search
b3-01
Speed Search Selection
SpdSrch at Start
Enables/disables and selects the speed search function at start.
0: SpdsrchF Disable - Speed search at start is disabled
(estimated speed method is used at other times)
1: SpdsrchF Enable - Speed search is enabled
(estimated speed method)
2: SpdsrchI Disable - Speed search at start is disabled
(current detection method is used at other times)
3: SpdscrhI Enable - Speed search is enabled
(current detection method)
Estimated Speed Method:
Actual motor speed and direction is estimated, then the motor is
ramped from that speed to the commanded speed.
Current Detection Method:
Current level is monitored while output frequency is ramped down.
0 to 3 2 Programming
b3-02
Speed Search Deactivation
Current
SpdSrch Current
Used only when b3-01 = 3. Sets the speed search operation current
as a percentage of drive rated current.
0 to 200 120% Programming
b3-03
Speed Search Deceleration
Time
SpdSrch Dec Time
Used only when b3-01 = 3. Sets the deceleration time during speed
search.
0.1 to 10.0 2.0sec Programming
b3-05
Speed Search Delay Time
Search Delay
Delays the speed search operation after a momentary power loss to
allow time for an external output contactor to re-energize.
0.0 to
20.0sec
0.2sec Programming
b3-14
Bidirectional Speed Search
Selection
Bidir Search Sel
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 1 Programming
Delay Timers
b4-01
Timer Function ON-Delay
Time
Delay-ON Timer
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input and a
multi-function digital output. This sets the amount of time between
when the digital input is closed, and the digital output is energized.
0.0 to
3000.0
0.0sec Programming
b4-02
Timer Function OFF-Delay
Time
Delay-OFF Timer
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input and a
multi-function digital output. This sets the amount of time the
output stays energized after the digital input is opened.
0.0 to
3000.0
0.0sec Programming
PI Control
b5-01
PI Mode Setting
PI Mode
This parameter enables / disables the closed loop (PI) controller.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (commanded speed becomes PI setpoint)
3: Fref+PI
0, 1, 3 0 Quick Setting
b5-02
4
Proportional Gain Setting
P Gain
Sets the proportional gain of the PI controller.
0.00 to
25.00
2.00 Quick Setting*
b5-03
4
Integral Time Setting
PI I Time
Sets the integral time for the PI controller. A setting of zero
disables integral control.
0.0 to 360.0 5.0sec Quick Setting*
b5-04
4
Integral Limit Setting
PI I Limit
Sets the maximum output possible from the integrator. Set as a %
of fmax.
0.0 to
100.0
100% Programming
b5-06
4
PI Output Limit
PI Limit
Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PI controller.
Set as a % of fmax.
0.00 to
100.0
100.0% Programming
b5-07
4
PI Offset Adjustment
PI Offset
Sets the amount of offset of the output of the PI controller. Set as a
% of fmax.
The PI Offset Adjustment parameter has two different uses.
Parameter b5-07 serves different functions depending on whether it
is used on a standard PI loop or a Differential PI loop.
1: Parameter b5-07 causes an offset to be applied to the output of
the PI function in a non-Differential PI loop. Every time the PI
output is updated, the offset is summed with the PI output. This
can be used to artificially kick-start a slow starting PI loop.
2: If the Drive is configured for Differential PI Regulation
(H3-09=16), then the PI Offset is the targeted maintained differ-
ential between the signal measured on analog input A1 and the
signal measured on analog input A2.
100.0 to
+100.0
0.0% Programming
4 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running. * Menu location is Quick Setting when b5-01=1, and Programming when b5-01=0.
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 407 of 541
Parameters A - 6
b5-08
4
PI Primary Delay Time
Constant
PI Delay Time
Sets the amount of time for a filter on the output of the PI
controller.
0.00 to
10.00
0.00sec Programming
b5-09
PI Output Level Selection
Output Level Sel
Determines whether the PI controller will be direct or reverse
acting.
0: Normal Output (direct acting)
1: Reverse Output (reverse acting)
0 or 1 0 Programming
4Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
b5-10
PI Output Gain Setting
Output Gain
Sets the output gain of the PI controller. 0.0 to 25.0 1.0 Programming
b5-11
PI Output Reverse Selection
Output Rev Sel
0: 0 limit (when PI output goes negative Drive stops)
1: Reverse (when PI goes negative Drive reverses)
0 limit automatic when reverse prohibit is selected using b1-04
0 or 1 0 Programming
b5-12
PI Feedback Reference
Missing Detection Selection
Fb los Det Sel
0: Disabled
1: Alarm
2: Fault
0 to 2 0 Programming
b5-13
PI Feedback Loss Detection
Level
Fb los Det Lvl
Sets the PI feedback loss detection level as a percentage of
maximum frequency (E1-04).
0 to 100 0% Programming
b5-14
PI Feedback Loss Detection
Time
Fb los Det Time
Sets the PI feedback loss detection delay time in terms of seconds. 0.0 to 25.5 1.0sec Programming
b5-15
Sleep Function Start
Level
Sleep Level
Sets the sleep function start frequency. 0.0 to 200.0 0.0Hz Programming
b5-16
Sleep Delay Time
Sleep Time
Sets the sleep function delay time in terms of seconds. 0.0 to 25.5 0.0sec Programming
b5-17
PI Accel/Decel Time
Acc/Dec Time
Applies an accel/decel time to the PI setpoint reference. 0.0 to 25.5 0.0sec Programming
b5-18
PI Setpoint Selection
PI Setpoint Sel
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 0 Programming
b5-19
4
PI Setpoint Value
PI Setpoint
Depends on b5-20.
0.00 to
100.00**
0.00% Programming
b5-20
PI Setpoint Display Scaling
Setpoint Scaling
Set display/setting Unit of b5-19, U1-24, and U1-38.
0 to 39999 1 Programming
b5-21
PI Sleep Input Source
PI Sleep Source
Input Source Selection for Sleep function Mode.
0: PI Setpoint
1: SFS Input (This is near the PI output)
2: Snooze
0 to 2 1 Programming
b5-22
4
PI Snooze Level
Snooze Level
Sets the PI snooze function start level as a percentage of maximum
frequency (E1-04).
0 to 100 0% Programming
b5-23
PI Snooze Delay Time
Snooze Delay Time
Sets the PI snooze function delay time in terms of seconds. 0 to 3600 0sec Programming
b5-24
PI Snooze Deactivation Level
Wake-Up Level
When the PI feedback drops below this level, normal PI operation
starts again. Set as a percentage of maximum frequency (E1-04).
0 to 100 0% Programming
b5-25
PI Setpoint Boost Setting
Setpoint Boost
Temporary increase of PI setpoint to create an overshoot of the
intended PI setpoint.
0 to 100 0% Programming
b5-26
PI Maximum Boost Time
Max Boost Time
Sets a time limitation for reaching temporarily boosted PI setpoint
(intended PI setpoint + b5-25).
0 to 3600 0sec Programming
b5-27
PI Snooze Feedback Level
Snooze Feedback
PI snooze mode will be activated when PI feedback is above this
level. Set as a percentage of maximum frequency (E1-04).
0 to 100 60% Programming
4Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running. ** Range depends on b5-20 setting. Units depend on b5-31 setting.
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 408 of 541
Parameters A - 7
b5-28
PI Feedback Square Root
Function Selection
PI Feedback SqRt
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 0 Programming
b5-29
PI Square Root Gain
PI Fb SqRt Gain
A multiplier applied to the square root of the feedback. 0.00 to 2.00 1.00 Programming
b5-30
Output Square Root
Monitor Selection
PI Out Moni SqRt
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 0 Programming
b5-31
PI Unit Selection
PI Unit Sel
Sets units for b5-19, U1-24, U1-38.
0: WC:InchOfWater
1: PSI:lb/SqrInch
2: GPM:Gallons/Min
3: F:DegFahrenheit
4: CFM:Cubic ft/Min
5: CMH:Cubic M/Hr
6: LPH:Liters/Hr
7: LPS:Liters/Sec
8: Bar:Bar
9: Pa:Pascals
10: C:DegCelsius
11: Mtr:Meters
0 to 11 0
Quick
Setting*
Energy Saving
b8-01
Energy Saving Control
Selection
Energy Save Sel
Energy Savings function enable/disable selection
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 0 Quick Setting
b8-04
Energy Saving Coefficient
Value
Energy Save COEF
Used to fine-tune the energy savings function.
0.0 to
655.00
kVA
Dependent
Programming
b8-05
Power Detection Filter Time
kW Filter Time
0 to 2000 20ms Programming
b8-06
Search Operation Voltage
Limit
Search V Limit
0 to 100 0% Programming
Accel / Decel
C1-01
4
Acceleration Time 1
Accel Time 1
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency.
0.0
to
6000.0
30.0sec
Quick Setting
C1-02
4
Deceleration Time 1
Decel Time 1
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero.
30.0sec
Quick Setting
C1-03
4
Acceleration Time 2
Accel Time 2
Sets the time to accelerate from zero to maximum frequency when
selected via a multi-function input.
30.0sec
Programming
C1-04
4
Deceleration Time 2
Decel Time 2
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero when
selected via a multi-function input.
30.0sec
Programming
C1-09
Fast Stop Time
Fast Stop Time
Sets the time to decelerate from maximum frequency to zero for
the "Fast Stop" function.
0.0
to
6000.0
10.0sec Programming
C1-11
Accel/Decel
Switch Frequency
Acc/Dec SW Freq
Sets the frequency for automatic switching of accel / decel times.
Fout < C1-11: Accel/Decel Time 2
Fout >= C1-11: Accel/Decel Time 1
Multi-function input "Multi-Acc/Dec 1" has priority over C1-11.
0.0 to
200.0
0.0Hz Programming
4 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the Drive is running. * Menu location is Programming when PI is disabled and Quick Setting when PI is enabled.
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 409 of 541
Parameters A - 8
S-Curve Acc/Dec
C2-01
S-Curve Characteristic at
Accel Start
SCrv Acc @ Start
0.00 to
2.50
0.20sec Programming
C2-02
S-Curve Characteristic at
Accel End
SCrv Acc @ End
0.00 to 2.50 0.20sec Programming
Torque Comp
C4-01
4
Torque Compensation Gain
Torq Comp Gain
This parameter helps to produce better starting torque. It
determines the amount of torque or voltage boost based upon
motor current and motor resistance.
0.00 to 2.50 1.00 Programming
C4-02
Torque Compensation
Primary Delay Time
Torq Comp Time
This parameter adjusts a filter on the output of the torque
compensation function. Increase to add torque stability, decrease
to improve torque response.
0 to 10000 200ms Programming
Carrier Freq
C6-01
Normal Duty Selection
Normal Duty Sel
1: Normal Duty 1
2: Normal Duty 2
1 or 2 2 Programming
C6-02
Carrier Frequency Selection
CarrierFreq Sel
Carrier frequency sets the number of pulses per second of the out-
put voltage waveform.
0: Low Noise (Carrier frequency is randomly moduled for lower
audible noise)
1: Fc = 2.0 kHz
2: Fc = 5.0 kHz
3: Fc = 8.0 kHz
4: Fc = 10.0 kHz
5: Fc = 12.5 kHz
6: Fc = 15.0 kHz
F: Program (Determined by the settings of C6-03 thru C6-05)
0 to F
kVA
Dependent
Programming
C6-03
Carrier Frequency Upper
Limit
CarrierFreq Max
Maximum carrier frequency allowed when C6-02 = F.
0.4 to 15.0
kHz
kVA
Dependent
Programming
C6-04
Carrier Frequency Lower
Limit
CarrierFreq Min
Minimum carrier frequency allowed when C6-02 = F.
0.4 to 15.0
kHz
kVA
Dependent
Programming
C6-05
Carrier Frequency Propor-
tional Gain
CarrierFreq Gain
Sets the relationship of output frequency to carrier frequency when
C6-02 = F.
0 to 99 0 Programming
Preset Reference (Speeds)
d1-01
4
Frequency Reference 1
Reference 1
Digital preset speed command 1. Used when b1-01 = 0 and when
in "hand" mode. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
0.00 to
E1-04
Value
0.00Hz Programming
d1-02
4
Frequency Reference 2
Reference 2
Digital preset speed command 2. Selected via multi-function input
terminals. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
0.00Hz Programming
d1-03
4
Frequency Reference 3
Reference 3
Digital preset speed command 3. Selected via multi-function input
terminals. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
0.00Hz Programming
d1-04
4
Frequency Reference 4
Reference 4
Digital preset speed command 4. Selected via multi-function input
terminals. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
0.00Hz Programming
d1-17
4
Jog Frequency Reference
Jog Reference
Speed command used when a jog is selected via multi-function
input terminals. Setting units are affected by o1-03.
0.00 to
E1-04
Value
6.00Hz Programming
4Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Time

command
Output frequency
ON
C2-02
C2-01
OFF
S-curve is used to further soften the starting ramp.
The longer the S-curve time, the softer the starting
ramp.
Run
Page 410 of 541
Parameters A - 9
Reference Limits
d2-01
Frequency Reference Upper
Limit
Ref Upper Limit
Determines maximum speed command, set as a percentage of
parameter E1-04. If speed command is above this value, actual
drive speed will be limited to this value. This parameter applies to
all speed command sources.
0.0 to 110.0 100.0% Quick Setting
d2-02
Frequency Reference Lower
Limit
Ref Lower Limit
Determines minimum speed command, set as a percentage of
parameter E1-04. If speed command is below this value, actual
drive speed will be set to this value. This parameter applies to all
speed command sources.
0.0 to 110.0 0.0% Quick Setting
d2-03
Master Speed Reference
Lower Limit
Ref1 Lower Limit
Determines the minimum speed command, set as a percentage of
parameter E1-04. If speed command is below this value, actual
drive speed will be set to this value. This parameter only applies to
analog inputs A1 and A2.
0.0 to 110.0 0.0% Programming
Jump Frequencies
d3-01
Jump Frequency 1
Jump Freq 1
These parameters allow programming of up to three prohibited
frequency points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration
of the motor / machine. This feature does not actually eliminate the
selected frequency values, but will accelerate and decelerate the
motor through the prohibited bandwidth.
0.0 to 200.0
0.0Hz Programming
d3-02
Jump Frequency 2
Jump Freq 2
0.0Hz Programming
d3-03
Jump Frequency 3
Jump Freq 3
0.0Hz Programming
d3-04
Jump Frequency Width
Jump Bandwidth
This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each
selected prohibited frequency point. A setting of "1.0" will result
in a deadband of +/- 1.0 Hz.
0.0 to 20.0 1.0Hz Programming
MOP and Trim Control
d4-01 MOP Ref Memory
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 0 Programming
d4-02
Trim Control Level
Trim Control Lvl
Set the percentage of maximum speed to be added or subtracted via
multi-function inputs.
0 to 100 10% Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 411 of 541
Parameters A - 10
V/F Pattern
E1-01
Input Voltage Setting
Input Voltage
Set to the nominal voltage of the incoming line.

155 to 255.0
(240V)
310 to 510.0
(480V)

240V
480V
Quick Setting
E1-03
V/F Pattern Selection
V/F Selection
0: 50Hz
1: 60 Hz Saturation
2: 50 Hz Saturation
3: 72 Hz
4: 50 Hz VT1
5: 50 Hz VT2
6: 60 Hz VT1
7: 60 Hz VT2
8: 50 Hz HST1
9: 50 Hz HST2
A: 60 Hz HST1
B: 60 Hz HST2
C: 90 Hz
D: 120 Hz
F: Custom V/F
FF: Custom w/o limit
0 to FF F
Programming
E1-04
Maximum Output Frequency
Max Frequency
To set V/f characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for
E1-07 and E1-09. In this case, the setting for E1-08 will be
disregarded.
Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following
manner:
E1-04 (FMAX) E1-06 (FA) > E1-07 (FB) E1-09 (FMIN)
0.0 to
120.0
60.0Hz Programming
E1-05
Maximum Output Voltage
Max Voltage
0 to 255.0
(240V)
0 to 510.0
(480V)
230.0V
460.0V
Programming
E1-06
Base Frequency
Base Frequency
0.0 to
200.0
60.0Hz
Programming
E1-07
Mid Output Frequency A
Mid Frequency A
0.0 to 200.0
3.0Hz
Programming
E1-08
Mid Output Voltage A
Mid Voltage A
0 to 255.0
(240V)
0 to 510.0
(480V)
18.0VAC Programming
E1-09
Minimum Output Frequency
Min Frequency
0.0 to 200.0 1.5Hz Programming
E1-10
Mid Output Voltage
Min Voltage
0 to 255.0
(240V)
0 to 510.0
(480V)
10.8VAC Programming
E1-11
Mid Output Frequency B
Mid Frequency B
Set only when V/f is finely adjusted at rated output range.
Adjustment is not normally required.
0.0 to
200.0
0.0Hz Programming
E1-12
Mid Output Voltage B
Mid Voltage B
0 to 255.0
(240V)
0 to 510.0
(480V)
0.0VAC Programming
E1-13
Base Voltage
Base Voltage
0 to 255.0
(240V)
0 to 510.0
(480V)
0.0VAC Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Output voltage (V)
Frequency (Hz)
FMIN FA FBASE FMAX
(E1-09) (E1-07) (E1-06) (E1-04)
VMAX
(E1-05)
VBASE
(E1-13)
VA
(E1-08)
VMIN
(E1-10)
Page 412 of 541
Parameters A - 11
Motor Setup
E2-01
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated FLA
Set to the motor nameplate full load amps.
10% to
200%
kVA
Dependent
Quick Setting
E2-03 No-Load Current Sets the magnetizing current of the motor.
kVA
Dependent
kVA
Dependent
Programming
E2-05
Motor Line-to-Line
Resistance
Term Resistance
Phase to phase motor resistance, normally set by the autotuning
routine.
0.000 to
65.000
kVA
Dependent
Programming
Com OPT Setup
F6-01
Operation Selection after
Communication Error
Comm Bus Flt Sel
Sets the stopping method for option PCB communications error
(BUS fault). Active only when a communications option PCB is
installed and when b1-01 or b1-02 = 3.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
0 to 3 1 Programming
F6-02
Detection Selection of Exter-
nal Fault from Communica-
tion Option Card
EF0 Detection
0: Always detected
1: Detected only during run
0 or 1 0 Programming
F6-03
Stopping Method for
External Fault from
Communication Option Card
EF0 Fault Action
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
0 to 3 1 Programming
F6-05
Current Monitor Display Unit
Selection
Current Unit Sel
0: A Display (Amps Display)
1: 100%/8192 (Drive Rated Current)
0 or 1 0 Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 413 of 541
Parameters A - 12
Digital Inputs
H1-01
Terminal S3 Function
Selection
Terminal S3 Sel
0: 3-wire control
FWD/REV selection for 3-wire sequence
1: Local/Remote Sel
Hand/Auto Selection - Closed = Hand, Open = Auto
2: Option/Inv Sel
Selects source of speed command and sequence
Closed = b1-01 & b1-02, Open = Option Card
3: Multi-Step Ref 1
Closed = speed command from d1-02 or Aux Terminal
Open = speed command determined by b1-01
4: Multi-Step Ref 2
Closed = speed command from d1-03 or d1-04
Open speed command determined by b1-01
6: Jog Freq Ref
Closed = speed command from d1-17
Open = speed command determined by b1-01
7: Multi-Acc/Dec 1
Closed = Accel & Decel Ramps determined by C1-03 & C1-04,
Open = Accel & Decel Ramps determined by C1-01 & C1-02
8: Ext BaseBlk N.O.
Closed = Output transistors forced off
Open = Normal operation
9: Ext BaseBlk N.C.
Closed = Normal Operation
Open = Output transistors forced off
A: Acc/Dec Ramp Hold
Closed = Acceleration suspended and speed held
Open = Normal Operation
C: Term A2 Enable
Closed = Terminal A2 is active
Open = Terminal A2 is disabled
F: Term Not Used
Terminal has no effect
10: MOP Increase
Closed = Speed Command Increases
Open = Speed Command Held.
Must be set in conjunction with MOP Decrease and b1-02 must
be set to 1.
11: MOP Decrease
Closed = Speed Command Decreases
Open = Speed Command Held.
Must be set in conjunction with MOP Increase and b1-02 must
be set to 1.
(Continued on following page).
0 to 6E 24 Programming
H1-02
Terminal S4 Function
Selection
Terminal S4 Sel
0 to 6E 14 Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 414 of 541
Parameters A - 13
H1-03
Terminal S5 Function
Selection
Terminal S5 Sel
12: Forward Jog
Closed = drive runs forward at speed command entered into
parameter d1-17
13: Reverse Jog
Closed = drive runs in reverse at speed command entered into
parameter d1-17
14: Fault Reset
Closed = Resets the drive after the fault and the run
command have been removed
15: Fast-Stop N.O.
Closed = Drive decelerates using C1-09, regardless of run
command status
17: Fast-Stop N.C.
Closed = Normal operation
Open = Drive decelerates using C1-09, regardless of run
command status
18: Timer Function
Input for independent timer, controlled by b4-01 and b4-02.
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital output.
19: PI Disable
Turns off the PI controller, and PI setpoint becomes speed
command
1B: Program Lockout
Closed =All parameter settings can be changed.
Open = Only speed command at U1-01 can be changed.
1C: TrimCtl Increase
Closed = Increase motor speed by value in d4-02.
Open = Return to normal speed command.
Not effective when using d1-01 thru d1-04 as a speed
command.
Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Decrease.
1D: Trim Ctl Decrease
Closed = Decrease motor speed by value in d4-02
Open = Return to normal speed command.
Not effective when using d1-01 thru d1-04 as speed command.
Must be used in conjunction with Trim Ctrl Increase.
0 to 6E
3: 2-wire
0: 3-wire
Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 415 of 541
Parameters A - 14
Digital Inputs
H1-04
Terminal S6 Function
Selection
Terminal S6 Sel
1E: Ref Sample Hold
Analog speed command is sampled then held at time of input
closure.
20: External fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Ramp To
Stop
21: External fault, Normally Closed, Always Detected, Ramp To
Stop
22: External fault, Normally Open, During Run, Ramp To Stop
23: External fault, Normally Closed, During Run, Ramp To Stop
24: External fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Coast To
Stop
25: External fault, Normally Closed, Always Detected, Coast To
Stop
26: External fault, Normally Open, During Run, Coast To Stop
27: External fault, Normally Closed, During Run, Coast To Stop
28: External fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Fast-Stop
29: External fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Fast-Stop
2A: External fault, Normally Open, During Run, Fast-Stop
2B: External fault, Normally Closed, During Run, Fast-Stop
2C: External fault, Normally Open, Always Detected, Alarm Only
2D: External fault, Normally Closed, Always Detected, Alarm Only
2E: External fault, Normally Open, During Run, Alarm Only
2F: External fault, Normally Closed, During Run, Alarm Only
30: PI Integral Reset
Resets the PI Integral component to zero when closed
31: PI Integral Hold
Holds the PI integral value when closed
34: PI SFS Cancel (SFS= SoftStart, also called Accel/Decel,
See Parameter b5-17)
35: PI Input Level Sel
Inverts the PI error signal when closed
36: Option/Inv Sel 2 Selects source of speed command and
sequence
Closed = Option Card, Open = b1-01 & b1-02
60: Motor Preheat
Applies current to create heat to avoid condensation
Closed = Apply amount of current as set in parameter b2-09
61: Speed Search 1
When closed as a run command is given, drive does a speed
search starting at maximum frequency (E1-04). (current detection)
62: Speed Search 2
When closed as a run command is given, drive does a speed
search starting at speed command. (current detection)
64: Speed Search 3
When opened, the Drive performs a baseblock (motor coasts).
When closed, the Drive performs Speed Search from set
frequency.
67: Com Test Mode - Used to test RS-485/422 interface.
68: High Slip Braking - Closed = Drive stops using High Slip
Braking regardless of run command status.
69: Jog2 - Closed = Drive runs at speed command entered into
parameter d1-17. Direction determined by fwd/rev input.
3-wire control Only.
6A: Drive Enable - Closed = Drive will accept run command.
Open = Drive will not run.
If running, drive will stop per b1-03.
Run Command must be cycled
6B: Com/Inv Sel - Selects source of Speed Command and Sequence.
Closed = Serial Communication (R+,R-,S+,S-), Open = b1-01
& b1-02
6C: Com/Inv Sel 2 - Selects source of Speed Command and
Sequence.
Closed = b1-01 & b1-02, Open = Serial Communication
(R+,R-,S+,S-)
6D: Auto Mode Sel - Hand/Auto Selection - Closed = Auto, Open
= Hand
6E: Hand Mode Sel - Hand/Auto Selection - Closed = Hand,
Open = Auto
70: Bypass/Drv Enbl. Same as 6A except a run command is
accepted
80: Motor Preheat 2 - Closed = Enable motor preheat with the
current level as set by b2-10
81: EmergOverrideFWD - Closed = Forward Emergency
Override Command
82: EmergOverrideREV - Closed = Reverse Emergency
Override Command
0 to 6E
4: 2-wire
3: 3-wire
Programming
H1-05
Terminal S7 Function
Selection
Terminal S7 Sel
0 to 6E
6: 2-wire
4: 3-wire
Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 416 of 541
Parameters A - 15
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator
Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Digital Outputs
H2-01
Terminal M1-M2 Function
Selection
Term M1-M2 Sel
0: During RUN 1 = Closed when a run command is input or
the drive is outputting voltage.
1: Zero Speed = Closed when drive output frequency is less
than Fmin (E1-09)
2: Fref/Fout Agree 1 = Closed when drive output speed
equals the speed command within the
bandwidth of L4-02.
3: Fref/Set Agree 1 = Closed when the drive output speed
and the speed command are equal to
the value in L4-01 within the bandwidth of L4-02.
4: Freq Detect 1 = Closed when the drive output speed is
less than or equal to the value in L4-01,
with hysteresis determined by L4-02.
5: Freq Detect 2 = Closed when the drive output speed is
greater than or equal to the value in
L4-01, with hysteresis determined by L4-02.
6: Inverter Ready = Closed when the drive is not in a fault
state, and not in program mode.
7: DC Bus Undervolt = Closed when the DC bus voltage
falls below the UV trip level (L2-05)
8: Base Blk 1 = Closed when the drive is not outputting
voltage.
9: Operator Reference = Closed when the speed command
is coming from the digital operator.
A: Remote/Auto Oper = Closed when the run command is
coming from the digital operator.
B: Trq Det 1 N.O. - Closes when the output current exceeds
the value set in parameter
L6-02 for more time than is set in parameter L6-03.
C: Loss of Ref - Closes when the drive has detected a loss
of analog speed command.
Speed command is considered lost when it drops 90% in
0.4 seconds.
Parameter L4-05 determines drive reaction to a loss of
speed command.
D: DB Overheat
E: Fault - Closes when the drive experiences a major fault.
F: Not Used
10: Minor Fault - Closes when drive experiences a minor
fault or alarm.
11: Reset Cmd Active - Closes when the drive receives a
reset command from terminals or serial comms.
12: Timer Output - Output for independent timer, controlled
by b4-01 and b4-02.
Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input.
17: Trq. Det 1 N.C. - Opens when the output current
exceeds the value set in parameter
L6-02 for more time than is set in parameter L6-03.
1A: Reverse Dir - Closes when the drive is running in the
reverse direction.
1E: Restart Enabled - Closes when the drive is performing
an automatic restart.
Automatic restart is configured by parameter L5-01.
1F: Overload (OL1) - Closes before a motor overload
occurs. (90% of OL1 time)
20: OH Prealarm - Closes when the Drives heatsink
temperature exceeds the setting
of parameter L8-02.
38: Drive Enable - Closes when the drive enable input is
active.
39: Waiting to Run - Closes during the time after a run
command is issued, but the Drive is not running due to
the time set in parameter b1-10.
3A: OH Freq Reduce
3B: Run Src Com/Opt
3D: Cooling Fan Err = Closed during internal cooling fan
failure
0 to 3B 0 Programming
H2-02
Terminal M3-M4 Function
Selection
Term M3-M4 Sel
0 to 3B A Programming
Page 417 of 541
Parameters A - 16
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Analog Inputs
H3-02
4
Terminal A1 Gain Setting
Terminal A1 Gain
Sets the speed command when 10V is input, as a
percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0% Programming
H3-03
4
Terminal A1 Bias Setting
Terminal A1 Bias
Sets the speed command when 0V is input, as a
percentage of the maximum output frequency (E1-04).
100.0 to
+100.0
0.0% Programming
H3-08
Terminal A2 Signal Level
Selection
Term A2 Signal
Selects the signal level of terminal A2.
0: 0 - 10VDC (switch S1-2 must be in the off position)
2: 4 - 20 mA (switch S1-2 must be in the on position)
0 or 2 2 Programming*
H3-09
Aux Terminal Function Selection
Terminal A2 Sel
Selects what effect the Aux terminal (A2) has on the
drive.
0: Frequency Bias - 0 - 100% bias
2: Aux Reference
B: PI Feedback
D: Frequency Bias 2 - 0 - 100% bias
E: Motor Temperature - See parameters L1-03 & L1-04
16: PI Differential
1F: Not Used
0 to 1F 2** Programming*
H3-10
4
Terminal A2 Gain Setting
Terminal A2 Gain
Sets the level of the A2 function corresponding to a
10V input (in%).
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0% Programming
H3-11
4
Terminal A2 Bias Setting
Terminal A2 Bias
Sets the level of the A2 function corresponding to a
0V input (in%).
100.0 to
+100.0
0.0% Programming
H3-12
Analog Input Filter Time Constant
Filter Avg Time
Used to "smooth" out erratic or noisy analog input
signals.
0.00 to
2.00
0.30sec Programming
H3-13
Master Frequency Reference
Terminal Selection
TA1/A2 Select
Determines which terminal will be the main reference
source.
0: Main Fref TA1 - Terminal TA1 is the main speed
command and Terminal TA2 is the Aux speed
command.
1: Main Fref TA2 - Terminal TA2 is the main speed
command and Terminal TA1 is the Aux speed
command.
Only effective when H3-09 is set to 2 "Aux Reference".
0 or 1 0 Programming*
4 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
* Menu location is Quick Setting when b5-01=1, and Programming when b5-01=0.
** Factory setting changes to B when b5-01=1.
Page 418 of 541
Parameters A - 17
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Analog Outputs
H4-01
Terminal FM Monitor Selection
Terminal FM Sel
Selects which monitor will be output on terminals FM
and AC.
1: Frequency Ref (100% = max. output frequency)
2: Output Freq (100% = max. output frequency)
3: Output Current (100% = drive rated current)
6: Output Voltage (100% = 230V or 100% = 460V)
7: DC Bus Voltage (100% = 400V or 100% = 800V)
8: Output kWatts (100% = drive rated power)
15: Term A1 Level
16: Term A2 Level
18: Mot SEC Current (100% = Motor rated secondary
current)
20: SFS Output (100% = max. output frequency)
24: PI Feedback
31: Not Used
36: PI Input
37: PI Output (100% = max. output frequency)
38: PI Setpoint
51: Auto Mode Fref (100% = max. output frequency)
52: Hand Mode Fref (100% = max. output frequency)
53: PI Feedback 2
NOTE: 100% = 10V DC output * FM gain setting
(H4-02).
1 to 53 2 Programming
H4-02
4
Terminal FM Gain Setting
Terminal FM Gain
Sets terminal FM output voltage (in percent of 10V)
when selected monitor is at 100% output.
0.0 to
1000.0
100.0% Programming
H4-03
4
Terminal FM Bias Setting
Terminal FM Bias
Sets terminal FM output voltage (in percent of 10V)
when selected monitor is at 0% output.
110.0 to
110.0
0.0% Programming
H4-04
Terminal AM Monitor Selection
Terminal AM Sel
Selects which monitor will be output on terminals AM
and AC.
1: Frequency Ref (100% = max. output frequency)
2: Output Freq (100% = max. output frequency)
3: Output Current (100% = drive rated current)
6: Output Voltage (100% = 230V or 100% = 460V)
7: DC Bus Voltage (100% = 400V or 100% = 800V)
8: Output kWatts (100% = drive rated power)
15: Term A1 Level
16: Term A2 Level
18: Mot SEC Current (100% = Motor rated secondary
current)
20: SFS Output (100% = max. output frequency)
24: PI Feedback
31: Not Used
36: PI Input
37: PI Output (100% = max. output frequency)
38: PI Setpoint
51: Auto Mode Fref (100% = max. output frequency)
52: Hand Mode Fref (100% = max. output frequency)
53: PI Feedback 2
NOTE: 100% = 10V DC output * AM gain setting
(H4-05).
1 to 53 8 Programming
H4-05
4
Terminal AM Gain Setting
Terminal AM Gain
Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 10V)
when selected monitor is at 100% output.
0.0 to
1000.0
50.0% Programming
4Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
Page 419 of 541
Parameters A - 18
Analog Outputs
H4-06
4
Terminal AM Bias Setting
Terminal AM Bias
Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 10V)
when selected monitor is at 0% output.
110.0 to
110.0
0.0% Programming
H4-07
Terminal FM Signal Level
Selection
AO Level Select1
0: 0 - 10 VDC
2: 4-20 mA*
0 or 2 0 Programming
H4-08
Terminal AM Signal Level
Selection
AO Level Select2
0: 0 - 10 VDC
2: 4-20 mA*
* An analog output of 4 - 20 mA can not be used with
the standard terminal board. Therefore an optional
terminal board (with shunt connector CN15) is needed.
0 or 2 0 Programming
Serial Com Setup
H5-01
Drive Node Address
Serial Comm Adr
Selects drive station node number (address) for
terminals R+, R-, S+, S-.*
An address of 0 disables serial com.
0 to 20
(H5-08=0)
0 to FF
(H5-08=1)
0 to 63
(H5-08=2)
1F # Programming
H5-02
Communication Speed Selection
Serial Baud Rate
Selects the baud rate for terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-.*
0: 1200 Baud
1: 2400 Baud
2: 4800 Baud (APOGEE FLN)
3: 9600 Baud (Metasys N2)
4: 19200 Baud
0 to 4 3 Programming
H5-03
Communication Parity Selection
Serial Com Sel
Selects the communication parity for terminals R+, R-,
S+ and S-.*
0: No Parity
1: Even Parity
2: Odd Parity
0 to 2 0 Programming
H5-04
Stopping Method after
Communication Error
Serial Fault Sel
Selects the stopping method when a communication
error is detected.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
4: Run at d1-04 - available when H5-08=
1: N2 METASYS or 2: FLN APOGEE
0 to 3 3 Programming
H5-05
Communication Error Detection
Selection
Serial Flt Dtct
Enables or disables the communications timeout
detection function.
0: Disabled - A communications loss will NOT cause a
communications fault.
1: Enabled - If communications are lost for more than
the time specified in parameter H5-09,
a communications fault will occur.
0 or 1 1 Programming
H5-06
Drive Transmit Wait Time
Transmit WaitTIM
Sets the time from when the drive receives data to when
the drive sends data.
5 to 65 5ms Programming
H5-07
RTS Control Selection
RTS Control Sel
Enables or disables request to send (RTS) control:
0: Disabled (RTS is always on)
1: Enabled (RTS turns on only when sending)
0 or 1 1 Programming
H5-08
Communication Protocol
Selection
Protocol Select
Selects the communication protocol.
0: Memobus (Modbus)
1: N2 (Metasys)
2: FLN (APOGEE)
0 to 2 0 Programming
H5-09
Communication Error
Detection Time
CE Detect Time
Determines how long communications must be lost
before a fault is annunciated. Works in conjunction with
parameters H5-05 and H5-04.
0 to 10.0
(H5-08=0)
0 to 10.0
(H5-08=1)
0 to 90.0
(H5-08=2)
2.0sec Programming
4Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
* After these parameters are changed, drive power must be cycled before the changes will take effect.
# Hex, see page A-30.
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 420 of 541
Parameters A - 19
Motor Overload
L1-01
Motor Overload Protection
Selection
MOL Fault Select
Enables or disables the motor thermal overload
protection.
0: Disabled
1: Std Fan Cooled (Enabled)
2: Std Blower Cooled
3: Vector Motor
0 to 1 1 Programming
L1-02
Motor Overload Protection
Time
MOL Time Const
Determines how much time will elapse prior to a motor
overload fault (OL1), when motor amps exceed the
value set in parameter E2-01 by 10%. Actual (OL1) trip
time will vary depending on severity of overload.
0.1 to 20.0 8.0min Programming
L1-03
Motor Overheat Alarm Operation
Selection
Mtr OH Alarm Sel
Operation selection when the motor temperature analog
input (H3-09=E) exceeds the OH3 alarm level (1.17V)
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
0 to 3 3 Programming
L1-04
Motor Overheat Fault Operation
Selection
Mtr OH Fault Sel
Stopping method when the motor temperature analog
input (H3-09=E) exceeds the OH4 level (2.34V).
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
0 to 2 1 Programming
L1-05
Motor Temperature Input Filter
Time
Mtr Temp Filter
Delay Time applied to motor temperature analog input
(H3-09=E) for filtering purposes.
0.00 to
10.00
0.20sec Programming
PwrLoss Ridethru
L2-01
Momentary Power Loss Detection
Selection
PwrL Selection
Enables and disables the momentary power loss
function.
0: Disabled - Drive trips on (UV1) fault when power is
lost.
1: PwrL Ride Thru t - Drive will restart if power returns
within the time set in L2-02.*
2: CPU Power Active - Drive will restart if power
returns prior to internal power supply shut down.*
* In order for a restart to occur, the run command must
be maintained throughout the ride thru period.
0 to 2 2 Programming
L2-02
Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru
Time
PwrL Ridethru t
Determines the power loss ride-thru time. This value is
dependent on the capacity of the drive. Only effective
when L2-01 = 1.
0.0 to
25.5sec
kVA
Dependent
Programming
L2-03
Momentary Power Loss Mini-
mum Base Block Time
PwrL Baseblock t
Used to allow the residual motor voltage to decay before
the drive output turns back on. After a power loss, if
L2-03 is greater than L2-02, operation resumes after the
time set in L2-03.
0.1 to 5.0sec
kVA
Dependent
Programming
L2-04
Momentary Power Loss Voltage
Recovery Ramp Time
PwrL V/F Ramp t
The time it takes the output voltage to return to the
preset V/f pattern after speed search (current detection
mode) is complete.
0.0 to 5.0sec
kVA
Dependent
Programming
L2-05
Undervoltage Detection
Level
PUV Det Level
Sets the drive's DC Bus undervoltage trip level. If this is
set lower than the factory setting, additional AC input
reactance or DC bus reactance may be necessary.
Voltage
Class
Dependent
Voltage
Class
Dependent
Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 421 of 541
Parameters A - 20
Stall Prevention
L3-01
Stall Prevention Selection During
Accel
StallP Accel Sel
0: Disabled (Motor accelerates at active acceleration,
C1-01 or C1-03. The motor may stall if load is too
heavy or accel time is too short).
1: General Purpose (When output current exceeds L3-02
level, acceleration stops. It starts to accelerate at
current value recovery).
2: Intelligent (The active acceleration rate, C1-01 or
C1-02, is ignored. Acceleration is completed in the
shortest amount of time w/o exceeding the current
value set in L3-02).
0 to 2 1 Programming
L3-02
Stall Prevention Level During
Accel
StallP Accel Lvl
This function is enabled when L3-01 is 1 or 2.
Drive rated current is 100%. Decrease the set value if
stalling occurs at factory setting.
0 to 200 120% Programming
L3-04
Stall Prevention Selection During
Decel
StallP Decel Sel
0: Disabled (The drive decelerates at the active
deceleration rate, C1-02 or C1-04. If the load is too
large or the deceleration time is too short, an OV fault
may occur).
1: General Purpose (The drive decelerates at the active
deceleration rate, C1-02 or C1-04, but if the main
circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention
level the output frequency will clamp. Deceleration
will continue once the DC bus level drops below the
stall prevention level).
2: Intelligent (The active deceleration rate is ignored and
the drive decelerates as fast as possible w/o
hitting OV fault level).
0 to 3 1 Programming
L3-05
Stall Prevention Selection During
Run
StallP Run Sel
0: Disabled (Drive runs a set frequency). A heavy load
may cause the drive to trip on an OC fault.
1: Decel Time 1 (In order to avoid stalling during heavy
loading, the drive will start to decelerate at Decel time
1 (C1-02) if the output current exceeds the level set by
L3-06. Once the current level drops below the L3-06
level the drive will accelerate back to its set frequency
at the active acceleration rate).
2: Decel Time 2 (Same as setting 1 except the drive
decelerates at Decel Time 2 (C1-04).
For 6Hz or less frequency, stall prevention function
during run is disabled regardless of L3-05 set.
0 to 2 1 Programming
L3-06
Stall Prevention Level During
Running
StallP Run Level
This function is enabled when L3-05 is 1 or 2.
Drive rated current is set as 100%.
Normally, changing the setting is not required.
Decrease the set value if stalling occurs at factory
setting.
30 to 200 120% Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 422 of 541
Parameters A - 21
Ref Detection
L4-01
Speed Agreement Detection Level
Spd Agree Level
L4-01 and L4-02 are used in conjunction with the
multi-function outputs, (H2-01and H2-02) as a setpoint
and hysteresis for a contact closure.
0.0 to 200.0 0.0Hz Programming
L4-02
Speed Agreement Detection Width
Spd Agree Width
0.0 to 20.0 2.0Hz Programming
L4-05
Frequency Reference Loss
Detection Selection
Ref Loss Sel
Determines how the drive will react when the frequency
reference is lost.
0: Stop (Disabled) - Drive will not run at the fre-
quency reference
1: Enabled @ % of PrevRef - Drive will run at a
percentage (L4-06) of the frequency reference level at
the time frequency reference was lost.
0 or 1 1 Programming
L4-06
Frequency Reference Level at
Loss Frequency
Fref at Floss
If Frequency Reference loss function is enabled
(L4-05=1) and Frequency Reference is lost, then the
drive will run at reduced frequency reference deter-
mined by L4-06. New Fref =Fref at time of loss x L4-06.
0 to 100.0% 80.0% Programming
Fault Restart
L5-01
Number of Auto Restart Attempts
Num of Restarts
Determines the number of times the drive will perform
an automatic restart.
0 to 10 0 Quick Setting
L5-02
Auto Restart Operation Selection
Restart Sel
Determines if the fault contact activates during an
automatic restart attempt.
0: No Flt Relay - fault contact will not activate during an
automatic restart.
1: Flt Relay Active - fault contact will activate during an
automatic restart.
0 or 1 0 Programming
L5-03
Maximum Restart Time After
Fault
Max Restart Time
If the restart fails (or is not attempted due to a
continuing fault condition, e.g. an OV fault) the Drive
waits L5-03 seconds before attempting another restart.
0.5 to 600.0 180.0sec Quick Setting
Torque Detection
L6-01
Torque Detection Selection 1
Load Detection
Determines the drive's response to an overtorque /
undertorque condition. Overtorque and Undertorque are
determined by the settings in parameters L6-02 and
L6-03.
0: Disabled
1: OL@SpdAgree - Alm (Overtorque Detection only
active during Speed Agree and Operation continues
after detection).
2: OL At RUN - Alm (Overtorque Detection is always
active and operation continues after detection)
3: OL@SpdAgree - Flt (Overtorque Detection only
active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut
down on an OL3 fault).
4: OL At RUN - Flt (Overtorque Detection is always
active and drive output will shut down on an OL3
fault.)
5: LL@SpdAgree - Alm (Undertorque Detection is only
active during Speed Agree and operation continues
after detection).
6: LL at RUN - Alm (Undertorque Detection is always
active and operation continues after detection)
7: LL @ SpdAgree - Flt (Undertorque Detection only
active during Speed Agree and drive output will shut
down on an OL3 fault).
8: LL At RUN - Flt (Undertorque Detection is always
active and drive output will shut down on an OL3
fault).
0 to 8 0 Programming
L6-02
Torque Detection Level 1
Load Det Lvl
Sets the overtorque/undertorque detection level as a
percentage of Drive rated current.
0 to 300 15% Programming
L6-03
Torque Detection Time 1
Loss Det Time
Sets the length of time an overtorque / undertorque
condition must exist before being recognized by the
drive. OL3 is then displayed.
0.0 to 10.0 10.0sec Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 423 of 541
Parameters A - 22
Hdwe Protection
L8-01
Internal Dynamic Braking Resis-
tor Protection Selection
DB Resistor Prot
0: Not Provided
1: Provided
0 or 1 0 Programming
L8-02
Overheat Pre-Alarm Level
OH Pre-Alarm Lvl
When the cooling fin temperature exceeds the value set
in this parameter, an overheat pre-alarm (OH) will
occur.
50 to 130
kVA
Dependent
Programming
L8-03
Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation
Selection
OH Pre-Alarm Sel
Drive Operation upon OH Pre Alarm Detection.
0: Ramp to Stop (Decel Time C1-02).
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop (Decel Time = C1-09).
3: Alarm Only
*0 to 2 is recognized as fault detection, and 3 is
recognized as alarm. (For the fault detection, the fault
contact operates.)
4: OH Alarm & Reduce (Continue operation and reduce
output frequency by L8-19).
0 to 4 4 Programming
L8-06
Input Phase Loss Detection Level
Ph Loss In Lvl
Monitors the DC Bus current ripple and activates when
one of the input phases is lost (PF).
0.0 to 25.0
kVA
Dependent
Programming
L8-09
Output Ground Fault Detection
Selection
Ground Fault Sel
Enables and disables drive output ground fault
detection.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 1 Programming
L8-10
Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation
Selection
Fan On/Off Sel
Controls the Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation.
0: Fan On-Run Mode (Fan will operate only when drive
is running and for L8-11 seconds after RUN is
removed).
1: Fan Always On (Cooling fan operates whenever drive
is powered up).
0 or 1 0 Programming
L8-11
Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation
Delay Time
Fan Delay Time
When L8-10=0 this parameter sets a delay time for
Cooling Fan de-energization after the run command is
removed.
0 to 300 300sec Programming
L8-12
Ambient Temperature Setting
Ambient Temp
When the drive is installed in an ambient temperature
exceeding its rating, drive overload (OL2) protection
level is reduced.
45 to 60C 45C Programming
L8-15
OL2 Characteristic Selection at
Low Speeds
OL2 Sel @ L-Spd
This parameter assists in protecting the output transistor
junctions from overheating when output current is high
and output frequency is low.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled (L8-18 is active)
0 or 1 1 Programming
L8-18
Soft CLA Selection
Soft CLA Sel
Enables and disables software Current Limit A (CLA)
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 1 Programming
L8-19
OH Frequency Reference
Reduction Level
Fref During OH
Sets the amount of frequency reference reduction when
an Overheat Pre-alarm (OH) is detected.
0.0
to
100.0
20.0% Programming
L8-32
OH1 Detection Selection for Fan
Failure
OH1 Detect Sel
Selects the drive response upon failure of the internal
cooling fan.
0: Disabled
FAN alarm is displayed
1: Enabled
OH1 fault occurs
0 or 1 1 Programming
Hunting Prev
n1-01
Hunting Prevention Selection
Hunt Prev Select
0: Disabled (Hunting prevention function disabled).
1: Enabled (Hunting prevention function enabled).
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded, hunting
prevention may reduce the vibration. There is a loss of
responsiveness if hunting prevention is enabled.
0 or 1 1 Programming
n1-02
Hunting Prevention Gain Setting
Hunt Prev Gain
Gain setting for the Hunting Prevention Function.
If the motor vibrates while lightly loaded and n1-01=1,
increase the gain by 0.1 until vibration ceases.
If the motor stalls while n1-01=1 decrease the gain by
0.1 until the stalling ceases.
0.00 to 2.50 1.00 Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 424 of 541
Parameters A - 23
High Slip
n3-01
High-Slip Braking Deceleration
Frequency Width
HSB Decel Width
Sets how aggressively the drive decreases the output
frequency as it stops the motor. If overvoltage (OV)
faults occur during HSB, this parameter may need to be
increased.
1 to 20 5% Programming
n3-02
High-Slip Braking Current Limit
HSB Current Ref
Sets the maximum current to be drawn during a HSB
stop. Higher n3-02 settings will shorten motor stopping
times but cause increased motor current, and therefore
increased motor heating.
100 to 200 150% Programming
n3-03
High-Slip Braking Dwell Time at
Stop
HSB DwelTim@ Stp
Sets the amount of time the Drive will dwell at E1-09
(Minimum Frequency). If this time is set too low, the
machine inertia can cause the motor to rotate slightly
after the HSB stop is complete and the Drive output is
shut off.
0.0 to 10.0 1.0sec Programming
n3-04
High-Slip Braking Overload Time
HSB OL Time
Sets the time required for a HSB Overload Fault to
occur when the Drive output frequency does not change
for some reason during a HSB stop. Normally this does
not need to be adjusted.
30 to 1200 40sec Programming
Monitor Select
o1-01
4
User Monitor Selection
User Monitor Sel
Selects which monitor will be displayed upon power-up
when o1-02 = 4.
6 to 53 6 Programming
o1-02
User Monitor Selection After
Power-Up
Power-On Monitor
Selects which monitor will be displayed upon
power-up.
1: Frequency Ref
2: Output Freq
3: Output Current
4: User Monitor (set by o1-01)
1 to 4 1** Programming
o1-03
Digital Operator Display Selection
Display Scaling
0 to 39999 0 Programming
o1-05
LCD Brightness Adjustment
LCD Contrast

0 to 5 3 Programming
** Factory setting changes to 2 when b5-01=1
o1-06
User Monitor Selection Mode
Monitor Mode Sel
Selects the "U1" monitors displayed on the 4th and 5th
lines of the digital operator display.
0: 3 Mon Sequential (Displays the next 2 sequential U1
monitors).
1: 3 Mon Selectable (Displays U1 monitors set by o1-07
and o1-08).
0 or 1 0** Programming
o1-07
Second Line User Monitor
Selection
2nd Monitor Sel
Sets the "U1" monitor always displayed on the 4th line
of the digital operator display. Effective only when
o1-06 = 1.
1 to 53 2** Programming
o1-08
Third Line User Monitor
Selection
3rd Monitor Sel
Sets the "U1" monitor always displayed on the 5th line
of the digital operator display. Effective only when
o1-06 = 1.
1 to 53 3** Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Sets the units of the Frequency References (d1-01
through d1-17) and the Frequency Reference Monitor
(U1-01).
0: Hz
1: % (100%. = E1-04)
2 to 39: RPM. (Enter the number of motor poles.)
40 to 39999: User display
Desired set/display value is set at Max.
output frequency.
4 digit number.
The number of digits from the right
the decimal point is displayed.
Example: If 200.0 is displayed at Max. output
frequency, set 12000.
When o1-0340 (user units), the unit selected in
o1-09 will be displayed for D1-01 to D1-17, U1-01,
U1-02, and U1-20
Set Value Description
5 LCD display becomes dark
3 Standard setting
1 LCD display becomes light
Page 425 of 541
Parameters A - 24
o1-09
4
Frequency Reference Display
Units
Frq Display Unit
Sets unit display for the frequency reference parameters
and frequency related monitors when o1-0340.
0: WC:InchOfWater
1: PSI:lb/SqrInch
2: GPM:Gallons/Min
3: F:DegFahrenheit
4: CFM:Cubic ft/Min
5: CMH:Cubic M/Hr
6: LPH:Liters/Hr
7: LPS:Liters/Sec
8: Bar:Bar
9: Pa:Pascals
10: C:DegCelsius
11: Mtr:Meters
0 to 11 0 Programming
Key Selections
o2-01
Local/Remote Key Function
Selection
Local/Remote Key
Determines the status of the Local/Remote key, if
present.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
Has no function when H/O/A operator is connected.
0 or 1 1 Programming
o2-02
OFF Key Function During Auto
Run
Oper OFF Key
Determines if the off key on the digital operator will
stop the drive when drive is operating from external
terminals or serial communications.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 1 Programming
o2-03
User Parameter Default Value
User Defaults
Allows storing of current parameter values as a User
Initialization Selection at parameter A1-03.
0: No Change (No user parameter set active).
1: Set Defaults (Saves current parameter settings as user
initialization. A1-03 now allows selecting <1110> for
user initialization.
2: Clear All (Clears the currently saved user
initialization. A1-03 no longer allows selecting
<1110>.
0 to 2 0 Programming
o2-04
Drive/kVA Selection
Inverter Model #
Sets the kVA of the drive. Enter the number based on
drive Model #. Use the EEEE portion of the
CIMR-E7EEEE Model Number.
Reference Appendix B
0 to FF
kVA
Dependent
Programming
o2-05
Frequency Reference Setting
Method Selection
Operator M.O.P.
Determines if the Data/Enter key must be used to input a
frequency reference from the digital operator.
0: Disabled - Data/Enter key must be pressed to enter a
frequency reference.
1: Enabled - Data/Enter key is not required. The
frequency reference is adjusted by the up and down
arrow keys on the digital operator without having to
press the data/enter key.
0 or 1 1 Programming
o2-06
Operation Selection when Digital
Operator is Disconnected
Oper Detection
Determines if the drive will stop when the digital
operator is removed.
0: Disabled - The drive will not stop when the digital
operator is removed.
1: Enabled - The drive will fault (OPR) and coast to stop
when the operator is removed.
0 or 1 1 Programming
o2-07
Cumulative Operation Time
Setting
Elapsed Time Set
Sets the initial value of the elapsed operation timer. 0 to 65535 0 hours Programming
4 Denotes that parameter can be changed when the drive is running.
** Factory settings change when b5-01=1 as follows: o1-06=1, o1-07=38, o1-08=24.
o2-08
Cumulative Operation Time
Selection
Elapsed Time Run
Sets how time is accumulated for the elapsed timer
(o2-07).
0: Power-On Time
(Time accumulates whenever drive is powered)
1: Running Time
(Time accumulates only when drive is running)
0 or 1 1 Programming
o2-09
Initialization Specification
Selection
Init Mode Sel
Determines parameter values after a drive initialization
(A1-03) is executed. This should always be set to "1"
American Spec.
1: American spec
2: European spec
4: PV-A spec
5: PV-E spec
6: Chinese spec
1 to 5 1 Programming
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 426 of 541
Parameters A - 25
o2-10
Cumulative Cooling Fan
Operation Time Setting
Fan ON Time Set
Sets the initial value of the heatsink fan operation time. 0 to 65535 0 hours Programming
o2-12
Fault Trace/Fault History Clear
Function
FLT Trace Init
Clears the fault memory contained in the U2 and U3
monitors.
0: Disabled (no effect)
1: Enabled - resets U2 and U3 monitors, and returns
o2-12 to zero
0 or 1 0 Programming
o2-14
kWh User Monitor (U1-29)
Initialization
kWh MonitorClear
Used to reset the kilowatt Hour monitor to zero
0: Disabled (no change)
1: Clear all - Resets U1-29 to zero and returns o2-14 to
zero.
0 or 1 0 Programming
o2-15
Hand Key Function Selection
Oper Hand Key
Enables or disables the "Hand" key on the digital
operator.
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 1 Programming
COPY Function
o3-01
Copy Function Selection
Copy Function Sel
This parameter controls the copying of parameters to
and from the digital operator.
0: COPY SELECT (no function)
1: INV -> OP READ - All parameters are copied from
the drive to the digital operator.
2: OP -> INV WRITE - All parameters are copied from
the digital operator into the drive.
3: OP<-->INV VERIFY - Parameter settings in the drive
are compared to those in the digital operator.
NOTE: When using the copy function, the drive model
number and software number (U1-14) must match or an
error will occur.
0 to 3 0 Programming
o3-02
Read Allowed Selection
Read Allowable
Enables and disables all digital operator copy functions.
0: Disabled - No digital operator copy functions are
allowed
1: Enabled - Copying allowed
0 to 1 0 Programming
Auto-Tuning
T1-02
Motor Rated Power
Mtr Rated Power
Sets the motor rated power in kW.
NOTE: T1-02 should be left at the Drive default (the last
3 digits of the Drive model number).
0.00 to
650.00
kVA
Dependent
Auto-Tuning
T1-04
Motor Rated Current
Rated Current
Sets the motor rated current.
(Used only during an auto-tune).
kVA
Dependent
kVA
Dependent
Auto-Tuning
Table A.2 Monitor List
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
Monitor
U1-01
Frequency Reference
Frequency Ref
Frequency reference (speed command) monitor when in auto
mode, frequency reference (speed command) setting location
when in hand mode. Units changeable via o1-03.
U1-02
Output Frequency
Output Freq
Output frequency (speed) monitor. Units changeable via
o1-03.
U1-03
Output Current
Output Current
Output current monitor
U1-06
Output Voltage
Output Voltage
Displays Drive output voltage
Table A.1 Parameter List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Menu
Location
Page 427 of 541
Parameters A - 26
U1-07
DC Bus Voltage
DC Bus Voltage
Displays DC Bus Voltage
U1-08
Output Power
Output kWatts
Displays Drive output power
U1-10
Input Terminal Status
Input Term Sts
Displays Drive input terminal status
U1-11
Output Terminal Status
Output Term Sts
Output terminal ON/OFF Check
U1-12
Drive Operation Status
Int Ctl Sts 1
Monitor
U1-13
Cumulative Operation Time
Elapsed Time
Displays total operating or power-on time of the Drive.
U1-14
Software Number
FLASH ID
Displays Drive's software number.
U1-15
Terminal A1 Input Voltage
Term A1 Level
Displays the input voltage on Terminal A1, as a percentage of
10V DC.
U1-16
Terminal A2 Input Voltage
Term A2 level
Displays the input current (or voltage) on Terminal A2, as a
percentage of 20mA (or 10 V DC).
Table A.2 Monitor List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
0
1: FWD. run
(Terminal S1) is ON
1: REV. run
(Terminal S2) is ON
1: Multi-function input 1
(Terminal S3) is ON
1: Multi-function input 2
(Terminal S4) is ON
1: Multi-function input 3
(Terminal S5) is ON
1: Multi-function input 4
(Terminal S6) is ON
1: Multi-function input 5
(Terminal S7) is ON
0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: Multi-function Contact 1
output 1 (Terminal M1-M2)
is ON
1: Multi-function Contact 2
output 1 (Terminal M3-M4)
is ON
Not used
1: Fault output
(Terminal MA/MB) is ON

0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
1: During running
1: During zero speed
1: During reverse
1: During reset signal input
1: During speed agree
1: Drive operation ready
1: During fault detection
(Minor fault)
1: During fault detection
(Major fault)
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Monitor List
Page 428 of 541
Parameters A - 27
U1-18
Motor Secondary Current (I
q
)
Mot SEC Current
Displays the amount of current being used by the motor to
produce torque (Iq).
U1-20
Output Frequency After Soft Start
SFS Output
Displays the frequency reference (speed command) after the
accel and decel ramps.
U1-24
PI Feedback Value
PI Feedback
Displays the feedback signal when PI control is used.*
U1-28
CPU Number
CPU ID
Displays control board hardware revision.
U1-29
kWh
kWh Lo 4 Digits
Displays the accumulated kWh.
U1-30
MWh
kWh Hi 5 Digits
Displays the accumulated MWh.
U1-34
First Parameter Causing an OPE
OPE Detected
Displays the parameter number causing an "OPE" fault.
U1-36
PI Input
PI Input
Displays the "error" in the PI regulator. (U1-36 = PI Setpoint -
PI Feedback).
U1-37
PI Output
PI Output
Displays the output of the PI as a percentage of maximum
frequency (E1-04).
U1-38
PI Setpoint
PI Setpoint
Displays the setpoint of the PI regulator (U1-38 = PI reference
+ PI bias).*
U1-39
Memobus Communication Error
Code
Transmit Err
U1-40
Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation
Time
FAN Elapsed Time
Displays total operating time of the heatsink cooling fan.
U1-51
Auto Mode Frequency Reference
Value
AUTO Mode Fref
Displays the frequency reference (speed command) when in
auto mode.
U1-52
Hand Mode Frequency Reference
Value
HAND Mode Fref
Displays the frequency reference (speed command) when in
hand mode, or displays Terminal A2 when differential mode is
selected.
U1-53
PI Feedback 2 Value
PI Feedback 2
Displays PI feedback 2 value.
** Units depend on b5-31 setting; scaling is set by b5-20
Table A.2 Monitor List (Continued)
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
LCD Digital Operator Display
Description
1: CRC error
1: Data length error
Not used. Always 0.
1: Parity error
1: Overrun error
1: Fleming error
1: Timeover
Not used. Always 0.
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Page 429 of 541
Parameters A - 28
Fault Trace List
Table A.3 Fault Trace List
Fault Trace
U2-01
Current Fault
Current Fault
U2-02
Previous Fault
Last Fault
U2-03
Frequency Reference at Most Recent Fault
Frequency Ref
U2-04
Output Frequency at Most Recent Fault
Output Freq
U2-05
Output Current at Most Recent Fault
Output Current
U2-07
Output Voltage at Most Recent Fault
Output Voltage
U2-08
DC Bus Voltage at Most Recent Fault
DC Bus Voltage
U2-09
Output Power at Most Recent Fault
Output kWatts
U2-11
Input Terminal Status at Most Recent Fault. The format is the same as
for U1-10.
Input Term Sts
U2-12
Output Terminal Status at Most Recent Fault. The format is the same as
for U1-11.
Output Term Sts
U2-13
Drive Operation Status at Most Recent Fault. The format is the same as
for U1-12.
Inverter Status
U2-14 Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault
Elapsed time
(Note) Fault trace is not executed at CPF00, CPF01, CPF03, UVI and UV2.
Page 430 of 541
Parameters A - 29
Fault History List
Table A.4 Fault History List
Fault History
U3-01
Most Recent Fault
Last Fault
U3-02
2
nd
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 2
U3-03
3
rd
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 3
U3-04
4
th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 4
U3-05
Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 1
U3-06
Cumulative Operation Time at 2
nd
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 2
U3-07
Cumulative Operation Time at 3
rd
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 3
U3-08
Cumulative Operation Time at 4
th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 4
U3-09
5
th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 5
U3-10
6
th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 6
U3-11
7
th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 7
U3-12
8
th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 8
U3-13
9
th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 9
U3-14
10
th
Most Recent Fault
Fault Message 10
U3-15
Cumulative Operation Time at 5
th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 5
U3-16
Cumulative Operation Time at 6
th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 6
U3-17
Cumulative Operation Time at 7
th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 7
U3-18
Cumulative Operation Time at 8
th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 8
U3-19
Cumulative Operation Time at 9
th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 9
U3-20
Cumulative Operation Time at 10
th
Most Recent Fault
Elapsed Time 10
(Note) Faults such as CPF00, CPF01, CPF02, CPF03, UV1, and UV02
are not stored in fault history.
Page 431 of 541
Parameters A - 30
Decimal to Hex Conversion
Table A.5
Decimal Hex Decimal Hex
1 1 51 33
2 2 52 34
3 3 53 35
4 4 54 36
5 5 55 37
6 6 56 38
7 7 57 39
8 8 58 3A
9 9 59 3B
10 A 60 3C
11 B 61 3D
12 C 62 3E
13 D 63 3F
14 E 64 40
15 F 65 41
16 10 66 42
17 11 67 43
18 12 68 44
19 13 69 45
20 14 70 46
21 15 71 47
22 16 72 48
23 17 73 49
24 18 74 4A
25 19 75 4B
26 1A 76 4C
27 1B 77 4D
28 1C 78 4E
29 1D 79 4F
30 1E 80 50
31 1F 81 51
32 20 82 52
33 21 83 53
34 22 84 54
35 23 85 55
36 24 86 56
37 25 87 57
38 26 88 58
39 27 89 59
40 28 90 5A
41 29 91 5B
42 2A 92 5C
43 2B 93 5D
44 2C 94 5E
45 2D 95 5F
46 2E 96 60
47 2F 97 61
48 30 98 62
49 31 99 63
50 32 100 64
Page 432 of 541
Capacity Related Parameters B - 1
Appendix B
Capacity Related Parameters
This appendix lists the parameters affected by the Drive Capacity setting of o2-04.
Drive Capacity ................................................................................ 2
Parameters Affected by o2-04 ................................................... 3
Capacity Related Parameter Values........................................... 4
Page 433 of 541
Capacity Related Parameters B - 2
Drive Capacity
Parameter o2-04 sets the Drive capacity according to the model number. Parameter o2-04 will need to be adjusted when
replacing a control board.
If a Control PCB is changed, the first time the Drive is powered up, parameter o2-04 must be set to the appropriate value listed
in Table B.1 for the Drive model number. After properly setting parameter 02-04, a 2-wire or 3-wire initialization must be
performed by setting parameter A1-03=2220 or A1-03=3330, respectively.This will automatically program the values of all
other parameters listed in Table B.2 to the factory settings for that particular Drive rating.
Table B.1 Drive Capacity Selection
Voltage Model Number o2-04 Setting Nominal Hp
208 VAC
CIMR-E7U20P4 0
0.5/0.75
CIMR-E7U20P7 1
1
CIMR-E7U21P5 2
1.5/2
CIMR-E7U22P2 3
3
CIMR-E7U23P7 4
5
CIMR-E7U25P5 5
7.5
CIMR-E7U27P5 6
10
CIMR-E7U20111 7
15
CIMR-E7U20151 8
20
CIMR-E7U20181 9
25
480 VAC
CIMR-E7U40P4 20
0.5/0.75
CIMR-E7U40P7 21
1
CIMR-E7U41P5 22
1.5/2
CIMR-E7U42P2 23
3
CIMR-E7U43P7 24
5
CIMR-E7U45P5 26
7.5
CIMR-E7U47P5 27
10
CIMR-E7U4009 28
15
CIMR-E7U4011 28
20
CIMR-E7U4015 29
25
CIMR-E7U4018 2A
30
CIMR-E7U4024 2C
40
CIMR-E7U4030 2C
50





.
Page 434 of 541
Capacity Related Parameters B - 3
4Parameters Affected by o2-04
The factory setting of the following parameters may change when the Drive capacity is changed.
Table B.2 Parameters Affected by o2-04
Parameter Number
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
b8-04
Energy Saving Coefficient Value
Energy Save COEF
C6-02
Carrier Frequency Selection
CarrierFreq Sel
E2-01
Motor Rated Current
Motor Rated FLA
E2-03
Motor No Load Current
No-Load Current
E2-05
Motor Line-to-Line Resistance
Term Resistance
L2-02
Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time
PwrL Ridethru t
L2-03
Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time
PwrL Baseblock t
L2-04
Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time
PwrL V/F Ramp t
L8-02
Overheat Pre-Alarm Level
OH Pre-Alarm Lvl
L8-06
Input Phase Loss Detection Level
Ph Loss In Lvl
o2-04
Drive/kVA Selection
Inverter Model #
Page 435 of 541
Capacity Related Parameters B - 4
4Capacity Related Parameter Values
The following tables detail the factory default settings for the parameters that are affected by the setting of parameter o2-04.
Table B.3 208 VAC Drives
Drive Model
CIMR-_ _ _
Nominal
Hp
Factory
Default
for
b8-04
Factory
Default
for
C6-02
Factory
Default
for
E2-01
Factory
Default
for
E2-03
Factory
Default
for
E2-05
Factory
Default
for
L2-02
Factory
Default
for
L2-03
Factory
Default
for
L2-04
Factory
Default
for
L8-02
Factory
Default
for
L8-06
20P4
0.5/0.75
288.2 10kHz 1.9 1.2
9.842 0.1 0.1 0.3 95 C 5
20P7 2
223.7 10kHz
3.3 1.8 5.156 0.1 0.2 0.3 95 C 7.5
21P5 1.5/2
169.4 10kHz
6.2 2.8 1.997 0.2 0.3 0.3 95 C 10
22P2 3
156.8 8kHz
8.5 3.0 1.601 0.3 0.4 0.3 100 C 12
23P7 5
122.9 10kHz
14.0 4.5 0.771 0.5 0.5 0.3 95 C 12
25P5 7.5
94.75 15kHz
19.6 5.1 0.399 1.0 0.6 0.3 95 C 10
27P5 10
72.69 15kHz
26.6 8.0 0.288 1.0 0.7 0.3 95 C 17
2011 15
70.44 8kHz
39.7 11.2 0.230 1.0 0.8 0.3 95 C 21
2015 20
63.13 10kHz
53.0 15.2 0.138 2.0 0.9 0.3 90 C 17
2018 25 57.87 10kHz
65.8 15.7 0.101 2.0 1.0 0.6 100 C 15
Note: b8-04 = Energy Savings Coefficiant
C6-02 = Carrier Frequency
E2-01 = Motor Rated Current
E2-03 = Motor No-Load Current
E2-05 = Motor Line-to-Line Resistance
L2-02 = Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time
L2-03 = Momentary Power Loss Minimun Base Block Time
L2-04 = Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time
L8-02 = Overheat Pre-Alarm Level
L8-06 = Input Phase Loss Detection Level
Page 436 of 541
Capacity Related Parameters B - 5
Table B.4 480 VAC Drives
Drive Model
CIMR-_ _ _
Nominal
Hp
Factory
Default
for
b8-04
Factory
Default
for
C6-02
Factory
Default
for
E2-01
Factory
Default
for
E2-03
Factory
Default
for
E2-05
Factory
Default
for
L2-02
Factory
Default
for
L2-03
Factory
Default
for
L2-04
Factory
Default
for
L8-02
Factory
Default
for
L8-06
40P4 0.5/0.75 576.40 15kHz 1.0 0.6
38.198 0.1 0.1 0.3 95C 5
40P7 1
447.40 15kHz
1.6 0.8 22.459 0.1 0.2 0.3 95C 7.5
41P5 1.5/2
338.80 15kHz
3.1 1.4 10.100 0.2 0.3 0.3 95C 10
42P2 3
313.60 15kHz
4.2 1.5 6.495 0.3 0.4 0.3 90 C 10
43P7 5
245.80 15kHz
7.0 2.3 3.333 0.5 0.5 0.3 95C 12
45P5 7.5
189.50 15kHz
13.3 2.6 1.595 1.0 0.6 0.3 95C 10
47P5 10
145.38 15kHz
19.9 4.0 1.152 1.0 0.7 0.3 90C 20
4011 15
140.88 8kHz
26.5 5.6 0.922 2.0 0.8 0.3 95C 23
4011 20
140.88 8kHz
26.5 5.6 0.922 2.0 0.8 0.3 95C 23
4015 25
126.26 10kHz
32.9 7.6 0.550 2.0 0.9 0.3 95C 17
4018 30 115.74 10kHz
52.3 7.8 0.403 2.0 1.0 0.6 98C 17
4030
40
92.54 8kHz
65.6 10.9 0.269 2.0 1.1 0.6 85C 20
4030 50
92.54 8kHz
65.6 10.9 0.269 2.0 1.1 0.6 85C 20
Note: b8-04 = Energy Savings Coefficiant
C6-02 = Carrier Frequency
E2-01 = Motor Rated Current
E2-03 = Motor No-Load Current
E2-05 = Motor Line-to-Line Resistance
L2-02 = Momentary Power Loss Ride-Thru Time
L2-03 = Momentary Power Loss Minimun Base Block Time
L2-04 = Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time
L8-02 = Overheat Pre-Alarm Level
L8-06 = Input Phase Loss Detection Level
Page 437 of 541
Capacity Related Parameters B - 6
Notes:
Page 438 of 541
Specifications C - 1
Appendix C
Specifications
This appendix details the standard Drive Specifications.
Standard Drive and Bypass Specifications ..................................... 2
208 VAC ..................................................................................... 2
480 VAC ..................................................................................... 3
All Voltages ................................................................................ 4
Page 439 of 541
Specifications C - 2
Standard Drive and Bypass Specifications
The standard Drive and Bypass specifications are listed in the following tables.
4208 VAC
Table C.1 208 VAC Drive and Bypass Specifications
Bypass Model Number E7L_ * D003 D004 D007 D010 D016 D024 D030 D046 D059 D074
Motor HP 208V 0.5/0.75 1 1.5/2 3 5 7.5 10 15 20 25
Bypass rated output current (A) 3.5 4.6 7.5 10.6 16.7 24.2 30.8 46.2 59.4 74.8
Drive Model Number CIMR-E7U 22P2 22P2 22P2 22P2 23P7 25P5 27P5 2011 2015 2018
Drive rated output capacity (kVA) 1.4 1.8 3.0 4.1 6.4 8.8 12.0 18.0 23.0 29.0
Drive rated output current (A) 3.6 4.6 7.8 10.8 16.8 23.0 31.0 46.2 59.4 74.8
Drive max. output voltage (V) 3-phase; 200, 208, 220, or VAC (Proportional to input voltage)
Drive max. output frequency (Hz) 120 Hz
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
3-phase, 200/208/220 VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated input current (A) 4.3 5.5 9.4 13 20 24 37 53 70 89
Allowable voltage fluctuation + 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation 5%
Measures for
power supply
harmonics
DC Reactor Optional
12-Pulse
Rectification
Not possible
Note: The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole motor. When selecting the actual motor and Drive, be sure that the
Bypass and Drive's rated output current is equal to, or greater than, the motor's rated current.
A phase-shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12-pulse rectification.
* Only 208V model numbers are shown.
C
o
n
t
r
o
l


c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c
s
P
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c
s
Page 440 of 541
Specifications C - 3
4480 VAC
Table C.2 480 VAC Drive and Bypass Specifications
Bypass Model Number E7L_ * B001 B002 B003 B004 B007 B011 B014
Motor HP (460V) 0.5/0.75 1 1.5/2 3 5 7.5 10
Bypass rated output current (A) 1.6 2.1 3.4 4.8 7.6 11 14
Drive Model Number CIMR-E7U 42P2 42P2 42P2 42P2 43P7 45P5 47P5
Drive rated output capacity (kVA) 1.4 1.6 2.8 4.0 5.8 9.5 13.0
Drive rated output current (A) 1.8 2.1 3.7 5.3 7.6 12.5 17.0
Drive max. output voltage (V) 3-phase; 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage.)
Drive max. output frequency (Hz) 120 Hz
Rated voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated input current (A) 2.2 2.5 4.4 6.4 9.0 15 20
Allowable voltage fluctuation + 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation 5%
Measures for
power supply
harmonics
DC Reactor Optional
12-pulse
Rectification
Not possible
Table C.2 480 VAC Drive Specifications (Continued)
Bypass Model Number E7L_ * B021 B027 B034 B040 B052 B065
Motor HP (460V) 15 20 25 30 40 50
Bypass rated output current (A) 21 27 34 40 52 65
Drive Model Number CIMR-E7U 4009 4011 4015 4018 4024 4030
Drive rated output capacity (kVA) 17.0 21.0 26.0 30.0 41.0 51.0
Drive rated output current (A) 21.0 27.0 34.0 40.0 52.0 67.2
Drive max. output voltage (V) 3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460 or 480 VAC (Proportional to input voltage)
Drive max. output frequency (Hz) 120 Hz
Max. voltage (V)
Rated frequency (Hz)
3-phase, 380, 400, 415, 440, 460, or 480VAC, 50/60 Hz
Rated input current (A) 26 33 40 48 57 74
Allowable voltage fluctuation + 10%, - 15%
Allowable frequency fluctuation 5%
Measures for power
supply harmonics
DC Reactor Optional Built-in
12-Pulse
Rectification
Not possible Possible
Note: The maximum applicable motor output is given for a standard 4-pole motor. When selecting the actual motor and Drive, be sure that the Bypass
and Drive's rated output current is equal to, or greater than, the motor's rated current.
A 3-wire phase-shifting transformer is required on the power supply for 12-pulse rectification.
P
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c
s
P
o
w
e
r

s
u
p
p
l
y

c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l


c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l


c
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c
s
Page 441 of 541
Specifications C - 4
4All Voltages
Table C.3 Common Drive Specifications
All Models Specification
Control method
Sine wave PWM
V/f control
Speed range 40:1
Speed control accuracy 2 to 3% (77F 50F) (25C 10C)
Frequency accuracy
(temperature characteristics)
Digital references: 0.01% (14F to 104F) (-10C to +40C)
Analog references: 0.1% (77F 50F) (25C 10C)
Frequency setting resolution
Digital references: 0.01 Hz
Analog references: 0.025/50 Hz (10 bit with sign)
Frequency setting signal
(Speed Command)
0-10 Vdc, 4-20 mA
Acceleration/Deceleration
time
0.0 to 6000.0 s (2 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings)
Main Drive control
functions
Restarting for momentary power loss, bi-directional speed search, overtorque detection, 5 preset speeds,
acceleration/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration, 3-wire sequence, auto-tuning, cooling fan ON/OFF con-
trol, torque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for frequency references, DC braking for starting
and stopping, high-slip braking, PI control (with sleep function), energy-saving control, Modbus communications (RS-
485/422, 19.2 kbps maximum), fault reset, and copy function
Main Bypass control
functions
Provides an alternate connection for the motor to line power for operation at full speed only, directly from line power.
Three electrically interlocked IEC rated contactors isolate the Drive when operating in Bypass mode. Control logic cir-
cuit provides Hand/Off/Auto functions and safety circuit interlocks. Includes fused 120VAC control transformer, motor
circuit protector/disconnect, motor overload relay, selector switches and indicating lights.
Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal overload relay
Fuse blown protection Stops for fuse blown
Overload capacity and
maximum current
110% of rated output current for 60 seconds
Overvoltage protection
208-240VAC: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 410 V
480VAC: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is above 820 V
Undervoltage protection
208-240VAC: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 190 V
480VAC: Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V
Momentary power loss
ride thru
Power Interuptions of 15 ms or more
By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is restored within 2 s
Cooling fin overheating Protection by thermistor
Stall prevention Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running
Grounding protection Protection by electronic circuits. (50% of inverter rated current)
Charge indicator Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 Vdc or more
Enclosure Type
Enclosed wall-mounted type (NEMA 1): CIMR-E7U20P4 thru 2030 and 40P4 thru 4055
Open chassis type (IP00): CIMR-E7U2022 thru 2110 and 4030 thru 4300
Ambient operating
temperature
14F to 104F (-10C to 40C) NEMA 1 type
14F to 113F (10C to 45C) Open chassis type
Ambient operating humidity 95% max. (with no condensation)
Storage temperature -4F to 140F (- 20C to + 60C) short-term temperature during transportation
Application site Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.)
Altitude 3300 ft. (1000 m), higher altitudes by derate
Vibration
10 to 20 Hz, 32 ft/sec
2
(9.8 m/s
2
) max.; 20 to 50 Hz, 6.5 ft/sec
2
(2 m/s
2
) max.
Appraisal Agencies UL File E143427
P
r
o
t
e
c
t
i
v
e

F
u
n
c
t
i
o
n
s
C
o
n
t
r
o
l

C
h
a
r
a
c
t
e
r
i
s
t
i
c
s
E
n
v
i
r
o
n
m
e
n
t
Page 442 of 541
Communications D - 1
Appendix D
Communication
This appendix details the specifications, connections, and programming of the Drive
for Modbus communications. This Drive also contains embedded APOGEE FLN
and Metasys N2 communication protocols. For details regarding APOGEE FLN,
please refer to the E7 APOGEE FLN Technical Manual (TM.E7.21). For details
regarding Metasys N2, please refer to the Technical Manual (TM.E7.22). These
two documents can be found on the CD-ROM included with this Drive and Bypass
unit or at www.drives.com.
E7N and Serial Communication ...................................................... 2
Using Modbus Communication ...................................................... 3
Modbus Communication Configuration ...................................... 3
Communication Specifications ................................................... 3
Communication Connection Terminal ........................................ 4
Procedure for Setting Up Communication ................................. 4
Modbus Function Code Details .................................................. 8
Modbus Data Tables ................................................................ 10
Modbus Self-Diagnosis ............................................................ 15
Metasys N2 Point Database.......................................................... 16
Metasys N2 Analog Input (AI) Summary ................................. 16
Metasys N2 Analog Output (AO) Summary ............................. 17
Metasys N2 Binary Input (BI) Summary .................................. 18
Metasys N2 Binary Output (BO) Summary .............................. 18
Mailbox Function Points ........................................................... 19
APOGEE FLN Point Database...................................................... 20
APOGEE FLN Point List Summary .......................................... 20
APOGEE FLN Logical Analog Input (LAI) Summary ............... 23
APOGEE FLN Logical Analog Output (LAO) Summary .......... 24
APOGEE FLN Logical Digital Input (LDI) Summary ................ 25
APOGEE FLN Logical Digital Output (LDO) Summary ........... 25
Mailbox Function Points ........................................................... 26
Page 443 of 541
Communications D - 2
E7N and Serial Communication
The H/O/A selector keys must be in the AUTO position if serial communication is to be used for E7N run, stop or speed
control.
E7N serial communication may be used for any or all of the following monitoring and control functions:
Monitor - Drive Parameters
Control - Drive Auto Run/Stop
Bypass Auto Run/Stop
Drive Auto Speed Command
Drive Auto PI Setpoint
If DIP switch S2-2 is set to power-up the E7N in the OFF mode (the factory default) and a serial communication run command
exists, then a DNE (Drive Not Enabled) alarm will be displayed when the unit is first powered.
Pressing HAND or AUTO will eliminate the alarm. Pressing Reset or Menu will temporarily eliminate the alarm display and
allow the user to continue with programming the Drive parameters.
Page 444 of 541
Communications D - 3
Using Modbus Communication
Serial communication can be performed with Direct Digital Controllers (DDCs) or similar devices using the Modbus protocol.
4Modbus Communication Configuration
Modbus communication is configured using 1 master (PLC) and a maximum of 31 slaves. Serial communication between
master and slave is normally initiated by the master and responded to by the slaves.
The master performs serial communication with one slave at a time. Consequently, the slave address of each slave must be
initially set, so that the master can perform serial communication using that address. Slaves receiving commands from the
master perform the specified functions, and send a response back to the master.
Fig D.1 Example of Connections between Master and Drive
4Communication Specifications
The Modbus communication specifications are shown below:
Table D.1 Modbus Communication Specifications
Item Specifications
Interface RS-422, RS-485
Communications Cycle Asynchronous (Start-stop synchronization)
Communications Parameters
Baud rate: Select from 1200, 2400, 4800, 9600, and 19200 bps.
Data length: 8 bits fixed
Parity: Select from even, odd, or none.
Stop bits: 1 bit selected
Communications Protocol Modbus
Number of Connectable Units 31 units max.
Master
E7 E7 E7
Slaves
Page 445 of 541
Communications D - 4
4Communication Connection Terminal
Modbus communication uses the following terminals: TB4-1 (S+), TB4-2 (S-), TB4-3 (R+), and TB4-4 (R-). The terminating
resistance must be turned ON only if the Drive is at the very end of the Serial Communication chain. Set the terminating
resistance by turning ON pin 1 of switch S1.
Fig D.2 Communication Connection Terminals and Terminating Resistance
Fig D.3 RS-485 Communication Connection
4Procedure for Setting Up Communication
Use the following procedure to perform communication with the DDC.
1. Turn OFF the input to the Drive power and connect the communication cable between the PLC and the Drive.
2. Turn ON the input power to the Drive.
3. Set the required communication parameters (H5-01 to H5-09) using the Digital Operator.
4. Turn OFF the input to the Drive power, and check that the Digital Operator display has completely disappeared.
5. Turn ON the input power to the Drive once again.
6. Perform communication with the DDC.
IMPORTANT
1. Separate the communication cables from the main circuit cables and control circuit wiring.
2. Use shielded cables for the communication cable, and use proper shield clamps.
3. When using RS-485 communication, connect S+ to R+, and S- to R-, on the control circuit terminal
board. See Fig. D.3 below.
4. Shield at one end only.
Terminating resistance (1/2W, 110 Ohms)
RS-422A
or RS-485
Switch
S1
O
F
F
1
Terminating
resistance
DIP Switch S1-1 located on
E7N terminal board.
2
1
TB4-4 TB4-1 TB4-2 TB4-3
Page 446 of 541
Communications D - 5
Related Parameters
Modbus communication can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b1-01 and b1-02:
1. Monitoring operation status of the Drive
2. Setting and reading Drive parameters
3. Resetting faults
4. Input multi-function commands
Table D.2 Serial Communication Related Parameters
Parameter
No.
Parameter Name
Digital Operator Display
Description
Setting
Range
Factory
Setting
Chapter
Ref #
Menu
Location
b1-01
Frequency Reference
Selection
Reference Source
Selects the speed command (frequency reference)
input source.
0: Operator - Digital preset speed d1-01
1: Terminals - Analog Input Terminal A1
(or Terminal A2 see parameter H3-13)
2: Serial Com - RS-485 terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-
3: Option PCB - Option board connected at 2CN
0 to 3 1
Quick
Setting
b1-02
Run Command Selection
Run Source
Selects the run command input source.
0: Operator - "Hand" and "Off" keys on digital oper-
ator
1: Terminal - Contact Closure on Terminal S1
2: Serial Com - RS-485 terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-
3: Option PCB - Option board connected at 2CN
0 to 3 1
Quick
Setting
H5-01
Drive Node Address
Serial Com Adr
Selects Drive station node number (address) for
terminals R+, R-, S+, S-.*
* Set H5-01 to 0 to disable Drive responses to
Modbus communications.
0 to FF
(H5-08
dependent)
1F Programming
H5-02
Communication Speed Selection
Serial Baud Rate
Selects the baud rate for terminals R+, R-, S+
and S-*.
0: 1200 Baud
1: 2400 Baud
2: 4800 Baud
3: 9600 Baud
4: 19200 Baud
0 to 4 3 Programming
H5-03
Communication Parity Selection
Serial Com Sel
Selects the communication parity for terminals R+,
R-, S+ and S-.*
0: No Parity
1: Even Parity
2: Odd Parity
0 to 2 0 Programming
H5-04
Stopping Method after
Communication Error
Serial Fault Sel
Selects the stopping method when a communication
error is detected.
0: Ramp to Stop
1: Coast to Stop
2: Fast-Stop
3: Alarm Only
4: Run at D1-04
0 to 3 3 Programming
H5-05
Communication Error Detection
Selection
Serial Flt Dtct
Enables or disables the communications timout
detection function.
0: Disabled - A communications loss will NOT
cause a communications fault.
1: Enabled - If communications is lost for more than
the time specified in parameter H5-09, a communi-
cations fault will occur.
0 or 1 1 Programming
H5-06
Drive Transmit Wait Time
Transmit WaitTIM
Sets the time from when the Drive receives data to
when the Drive sends data.
5 to 65 5ms Programming
H5-07
RTS Control Selection
RTS Control Sel
Enables or disables request to send (RTS) control:
0: Disabled
1: Enabled
0 or 1 1 Programming
H5-08
Communication Protocol
Selection
Protocol Select
Selects the communication protocol.
0: Modbus
1: N2 (Metasys)
2: P1 (APOGEE)
0 to 2 0 Programming
H5-09
Communication Error
Detection Time
CE Detect Time
Determines how long communications must be lost
before a fault is annunciated. Works in conjunction
with parameters H5-05 and H5-04.
0.0 to 10.0 2.0sec Programming
* After these parameters are changed Drive power must be cycled before the changes will take effect.
IMPORTANT
An OR operation is performed between the multi-function command input from the DDC and the command
input from multi-function digital input terminals S3 to S7.
Page 447 of 541
Communications D - 6
Message Format
In Modbus communication, the master sends commands to the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is
configured for both sending and receiving as shown below. The length of the data packets is changed by the command
(function) contents.
Fig D.4 Message Format
The space between messages must support the following:
Fig D.5 Message Spacing
Slave Address
Set the Drive address from 0 to 32. If 0 is selected, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the Drive will not return
responses).
Function Code
The function code specifies commands. There are four function codes, as shown below.
Data
Configure consecutive data by combining the storage register address (test code for a loopback address) and the data the
register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.
Slave address
Function code
Data
Error check
Table D.3 Modbus Function Codes
Function Code
(Hexadecimal)
Function
Command Message Response Message
Min.
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
Min.*
(Bytes)
Max.
(Bytes)
03H Reading/Holding Register Contents 8 8 7 37
06H Write In Single Holding Register 8 8 8 8
08H Loopback Test 8 8 8 8
10H Write In Several Holding Registers 11 41 8 8
* Minimum bytes for a normal Response Message (error response message is always 5 bytes).
DDC to Drive Drive to DDC DDC to Drive
Command message Response message
Command message
Time (Seconds)
24 bits long 5 ms min.
H5-06
setting
24 bits long
Page 448 of 541
Communications D - 7
Error Check
Errors are detected during communication using CRC-16. Perform calculations using the following method:
1. The factory setting for CRC-16 communication is typically zero, but when using the Modbus system, set the factory setting
to one (e.g., set all 16 bits to 1).
2. Calculate CRC-16 using MSB as slave address LSB, and LSB as the MSB of the final data.
3. Calculate CRC-16 for response messages from the slaves and compare them to the CRC-16 in the response messages.
Page 449 of 541
Communications D - 8
4Modbus Function Code Details
Reading/Holding Register Contents (03H)
Read the contents of the storage register only for specified quantities. The addresses must be consecutive, starting from a
specified address. The data content of the storage register are separated into higher 8 bits and lower 8 bits.
The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and frequency
references from the slave 2 Drive.
Fig D.6 Function Code 03H Message Example
Write In Single Holding Register (06H)
Fig D.7 Function Code 06H Message Example
Command Message
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H Slave Address 02H
Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H
Start
Address
Higher 00H Data quantity 08H Error code 03H
Lower 20H 1st storage
register
Higher 00H
CRC-16
Higher F1H
Quantity
Higher 00H Lower 65H Lower 31H
Lower 04H
Next storage
register
Higher 00H
CRC-16
Higher 45H Lower 00H
Lower F0H Next storage
register
Higher 00H
Lower 00H
Next storage
register
Higher 01H
Lower F4H
CRC-16
Higher AFH
Lower 82H
Command Message
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
Function Code 06H Function Code 06H 80H + Function Code 86H
Register
Address
Upper 00H
Register
Address
Upper 00H Error code 21H
Lower 01H Lower 01H
CRC-16
Upper 82H
Setting
Data
Upper 00H Setting
Data
Upper 00H Lower 78H
Lower 03H Lower 03H
CRC-16
Upper 98H
CRC-16
Upper 98H
Lower 0BH Lower 0BH
Page 450 of 541
Communications D - 9
Loopback Test (08H)
The loopback test returns the command message directly as the response message without changing the contents to check the
communications between the master and slave. Set user-defined test code and data values.
The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave 1 Drive.
Fig D.8 Function Code 08H Message Example
Write In Several Holding Registers (10H)
Write the specified data to the registers from the specified addresses. The written data must be consecutive, starting from the
specified address in the command message: Higher 8 bits, then lower 8 bits, in storage register address order.
The following table shows an example of a message when a forward run command has been set at a speed command of
60.0 Hz in the slave 1 Drive by the PLC.
Fig D.9 Function Code 10H Message Example
Command Message
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave address 01H Slave address 01H Slave address 01H
Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H
Test Code
Higher 00H
Test Code
Higher 00H Error Code 01H
Lower 00H Lower 00H
CRC-16
Higher 86H
Data
Higher A5H
Data
Higher A5H Lower 50H
Lower 37H Lower 37H
CRC-16
Higher DAH
CRC-16
Higher DAH
Lower 8DH Lower 8DH
Command Message
Response Message
(During Normal Operation)
Response Message
(During Error)
Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H Slave Address 01H
Function Code 10H Function Code 10H Function Code 90H
Start
Address
Higher 00H Start
Address
Higher 00H Error code 02H
Lower 01H Lower 01H
CRC-16
Higher CDH
Quantity
Higher 00H
Quantity
Higher 00H Lower C1H
Lower 02H Lower 02H
No. of data 04H
CRC-16
Higher 10H
Lead data
Higher 00H Lower 08H
Lower 01H
Next data
Higher 02H
Lower 58H * No. of data = 2 x (quantity)
CRC-16
Higher 63H
Lower 39H
IMPORTANT
Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x 2. Handle
response messages in the same way.
Page 451 of 541
Communications D - 10
4Modbus Data Tables
The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monitor data and broadcast data.
Reference Data
The reference data table is shown below. Reference data can be read and written to.
Table D.4 Reference Data
Register No. Contents
0000H Reserved
0001H
Frequency reference
Bit 0 Run/stop command 1: Run 0: Stop
Bit 1 Forward/reverse operation 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bit 2 External fault 1: Fault (EFO)
Bit 3 Fault reset 1: Reset command
Bit 4 ComNet
Bit 5 ComCtrl
Bit 6 Multi-function digital input command 3
Bit 7 Multi-function digital input command 4
Bit 8 Multi-function digital input command 5
Bit 9 Multi-function digital input command 6
Bit A Multi-function digital input command 7
Bits B to F Not used
0002H Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o1-03)
0003H to 0005H Not used
0006H PI Setpoint
0007H Analog output 1 setting (-11 V = 726 to 11 V = 726) 10V = 660
0008H Analog output 2 setting (-11 V = 726 to 11 V = 726) 10V = 660
0009H
Multi-function contact output setting
Bit 0 Digital output 1 (Terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Digital output 2 (Terminal M3-M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Not Used
Bits 3 to 5 Not used
Bit 6 Set fault contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Fault contact (terminal MA-MC) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 8 to F Not used
000AH to 000EH Not used
000FH
Reference selection settings
Bit 0 Not used
Bit 1 Input PI setpoint 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
Bits 3 to B Not used
C Broadcast data terminal S5 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
D Broadcast data terminal S6 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
E Broadcast data terminal S7 input 1: Enabled 0: Disabled
F Not used
Note: Write 0 to all unused bits. Also, do not write data to reserved registers.
Page 452 of 541
Communications D - 11
Monitor Data
The following table shows the monitor data. Monitor data can only be read.
Table D.5 Monitor Data
Register No. Contents
0020H
Drive status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation 1: Reverse operation 0: Forward operation
Bit 2 Drive startup complete 1: Completed 0: Not completed
Bit 3 Fault 1: Fault
Bit 4 Data setting error 1: Error
Bit 5 Multi-function digital output 1 (terminal M1 - M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function digital output 2 (terminal M3 - M4) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 7 Not used
Bits 8 to F Not used
0021H
Fault details
Bit 0 Overcurrent (OC) Ground fault (GF)
Bit 1 Main circuit overvoltage (OV)
Bit 2 Drive overload (OL2)
Bit 3 Drive overheat (OH1, OH2)
Bit 4 Not used
Bit 5 Fuse blown (PUF)
Bit 6 PI feedback reference lost (FbL)
Bit 7 External error (EF, EFO)
Bit 8 Hardware error (CPF)
Bit 9 Motor overload (OL1) or overtorque 1 (OL3) detected
Bit A PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV)
Bit B Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected
Bit C
Main circuit undervoltage (UV1), control power supply error (UV2), inrush prevention
circuit error (UV3), power loss
Bit D Missing output phase (LF)
Bit E Modbus communications error (CE)
Bit F Operator disconnected (OPR)
0022H
Data link status
Bit 0 Writing data
Bit 1 Not used
Bit 2 Not used
Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors
Bit 4 Data integrity error
Bits 5 to F Not used
0023H Frequency reference U1-01
0024H Output frequency U1-02
0025H Output voltage reference U1-06
0026H Output current U1-03
0027H Output power U1-08
0028H Torque reference U1-09
0029H Not used
002AH Not used
Page 453 of 541
Communications D - 12
002BH
Sequence input status
Bit 0 Input terminal S1 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Input terminal S2 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Multi-function digital input terminal S3 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 3 Multi-function digital input terminal S4 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 4 Multi-function digital input terminal S5 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 5 Multi-function digital input terminal S6 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 6 Multi-function digital input terminal S7 1: ON 0: OFF
Bits 7 to F Not used
002CH
Drive status
Bit 0 Operation 1: Operating
Bit 1 Zero speed 1: Zero speed
Bit 2 Frequency agree 1: Matched
Bit 3 Desired frequency agree 1: Matched
Bit 4 Frequency detection 1 1: Output frequency L4-01
Bit 5 Frequency detection 2 1: Output frequency L4-01
Bit 6 Drive startup completed 1: Startup completed
Bit 7 Low voltage detection 1: Detected
Bit 8 Baseblock 1: Drive output baseblock
Bit 9 Frequency reference mode 1: Not communication 0: Communication
Bit A Run command mode 1: Not communication 0: Communication
Bit B Overtorque detection 1: Detected
Bit C Frequency reference lost 1: Lost
Bit D Retrying error 1: Retrying
Bit E Error (including Modbus communications time-out) 1:Error occurred
Bit F Modbus communications time-out 1: Timed out
002DH
Multi-function digital output status
Bit 0 Multi-function digital output 1 (terminal M1-M2) 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 1 Multi-function digital output 2 (terminal M3-M4): 1: ON 0: OFF
Bit 2 Not used
Bits 3 to F Not used
002EH - 0030H Not used
0031H Main circuit DC voltage
0032H - 0037H Not used
0038H PI feedback level (Input equivalent to 100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; without sign)
0039H PI input level (100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003AH PI output level (100%/Max. output frequency; 10/1%; with sign)
003BH CPU software number
003CH Flash software number
003DH
Communication error details
Bit 0 CRC error
Bit 1 Invalid data length
Bit 2 Not used
Bit 3 Parity error
Bit 4 Overrun error
Bit 5 Framing error
Bit 6 Time-out
Bits 7 to F Not used
003EH KVA setting
003FH Control method
Note: Communication error details are stored until an error reset is input (errors can be reset while the Drive is operating).
Table D.5 Monitor Data (Continued)
Register No. Contents
Page 454 of 541
Communications D - 13
Broadcast Data
The following table shows the broadcast data. Broadcast data can be written to.
Enter Command
When writing parameters to the Drive from the PLC using Modbus communication, the parameters are temporarily stored in
the constant data area in the Drive. To enable these parameters in the parameter data area, use the Enter command.
There are two types of Enter commands:
1. Enter commands that enable parameter data in RAM
2. Enter commands that write data to EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Drive at the same time as enabling data in RAM.
The following table shows the Enter command data. Enter command data can only be written.
The Enter command is enabled by writing 0 to register number 0900H or 0901H.
Table D.6 Broadcast Data
Register
Address
Contents
0001H
Operation signal
Bit 0 Run command 1: Operating 0: Stopped
Bit 1 Reverse operation command 1: Reverse 0: Forward
Bits 2 and 3 Not used
Bit 4 External error 1: Fault (set using H1-01)
Bit 5 Error Fault 1: Reset command (set using H1-02)
Bits 6 to B Not used
Bit C Multi-function digital input terminal S5 input
Bit D Multi-function digital input terminal S6 input
Bit E Multi-function digital input terminal S7 input
Bit F Not used.
0002H Frequency reference 30000/100%
Note: Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously.
Table D.7 Enter Command
Register No. Contents
0900H Write parameter data to EEPROM
0910H Parameter data is not written to EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only.
IMPORTANT
The maximum number of times you can write to EEPROM using the Drive is 100,000. Do not frequently
execute Enter commands (0900H) written to EEPROM.
The Enter command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address
will become invalid (Error code: 02H).
Page 455 of 541
Communications D - 14
Error Codes
The following table shows Modbus communication error codes.
Slave Not Responding
In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function.
When a communication error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-16) is detected in the command message.
When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Drive do not agree.
When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceed 24 bits.
When the command message data length is invalid.
Table D.8 Error Codes
Error
Code
Contents
01H
Function code error
A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 10H has been set by the PLC.
02H
Invalid register number error
The register address you are attempting to access is not recorded anywhere.
With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 0001H, or 0002H has been set.
03H
Invalid quantity error
The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range of 1 to 16.
In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x 2.
21H
Data setting error
Upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters.
When writing parameters, the parameter setting is invalid.
22H
Write mode error
Attempting to write parameters to the Drive during run.
Attempting to write via Enter commands during run.
Attempting to write parameters other than A1-00 to A1-05, E1-03, or 02-04 when a
CPF03 (defective EEPROM) fault has occurred.
Attempting to write read-only data.
23H
Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) fault
Writing parameters to the Drive during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
Writing via Enter commands during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm.
24H
Writing error during parameters processing
Attempting to write parameters while processing parameters in the Drive.
IMPORTANT
If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not
return response messages to the master.
Page 456 of 541
Communications D - 15
4Modbus Self-Diagnosis
The Drive has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communication interface circuits. The
self-diagnosis function connects the communication parts of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the
Drive, and checks if communication is being performed normally.
Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.
1. Turn ON the power supply to the Drive, and set parameter H1-05 (Terminal S7 Function Selection) to 67 (Com Test
Mode).
2. Turn OFF the power supply to the Drive.
3. Perform wiring according to the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF.
4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin 1 on DIP switch 1.)
5. Turn ON the power supply to the Drive again.
Fig D.10 Communication Terminal Connection for Self -Diagnosis Function
6. During normal self-diagnostic operation, the Digital Operator displays the frequency reference value. If an error occurs, a
CE (Modbus communication error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the fault contact output will be turned
ON, and the Drive operation ready signal will be turned OFF.
Page 457 of 541
Communications D - 16
Metasys N2 Point Database
4Metasys N2 Analog Input (AI) Summary
Table D.9 Metasys N2 Analog Input Summary (E7 to Metasys N2)
Object ID Object Name Units E7 Parameter
AI 1 SPEED REFERENCE 0.01 Hz U1-01
AI 2 OUTPUT SPEED 0.01 Hz U1-02
AI 3 OUTPUT CURRENT 0.1A U1-03
AI 4 kWATT HOUR METER kWh -
AI 5 OUTPUT POWER 0.1kW U1-08
AI 6 DRIVE TEMPERATURE
1
o
C
-
AI 7 PI FEEDBACK 0.01% U1-24
AI 8 AC OUTPUT VOLTAGE 0.1VAC U1-06
AI 9 DC BUS VOLTAGE 1Vdc U1-07
AI 10 FAULT CODE - U2-01
AI 11 ELAPSED TIME - HOURS 1 HOUR U1-13
AI 12 ELAPSED TIME 10K HOURS 10K HOURS U1-13
AI 13 MEGAWATT HOUR METER MWh U1-30
AI 14 DRIVE RATED CURRENT A n9-01
AI 15 COMMUNICATION ERROR CODE - U1-39
AI 16 PI DEVIATION 0.01% U1-36
AI 17 PI OUTPUT CAPACITY 0.01% U1-37
AI 18 PI REFERENCE 0.01% U1-38
AI 19 LAST FAULT CODE - U2-02
AI 20 FREQ REF @ FAULT 0.01Hz U2-03
AI 21 OUTPUT FREQ @ FAULT 0.01Hz U2-04
AI 22 OUTPUT CURRENT @ FAULT 0.1A U2-05
AI 23 OUT VOLT REF @ FAULT 0.1VAC U2-07
AI 24 DC BUS VOLTS @ FAULT 1Vdc U2-08
AI 25 OUTPUT POWER @ FAULT 0.1Kw U2-09
AI 26 INPUT TERM STATUS @ FAULT - U2-11
AI 27 OUTPUT TERM STATUS @ FAULT - U2-12
AI 28 OPERATION STATUS @ FAULT - U2-13
AI 29 ELAPSED OPERATION TIME @ FAULT 1 HOUR U2-14
AI 30 MOST RECENT FAULT - U3-01
AI 31 2nd MOST RECENT FAULT - U3-02
AI 32 3rd MOST RECENT FAULT - U3-03
AI 33 4th MOST RECENT FAULT - U3-04
AI 34 ELAPSED TIME @ CURRENT FAULT 1 HOUR U3-05
AI 35 ELAPSED TIME @ 2nd FAULT 1 HOUR U3-06
AI 36 ELAPSED TIME @ 3rd FAULT 1 HOUR U3-07
AI 37 ELAPSED TIME @ 4th FAULT 1 HOUR U3-08
AI 38 READ PARAMETER DATA - -
Page 458 of 541
Communications D - 17
4Metasys N2 Analog Output (AO) Summary
Table D.10 Metasys N2 Analog Output Summary (Metasys N2 to E7)
Object ID Object Name Units Default Value E7 Parameter
AO 1 SPEED COMMAND 0.01 Hz -
AO 2 ACCELERATION TIME SEC 30.0 C1-01
AO 3 DECELERATION TIME SEC 30.0 C1-02
AO 4 PI PROPORTIONAL GAIN - 2.00 b5-02
AO 5 PI INTEGRAL TIME SEC 5.0 b5-03
AO 6 STALL PREVENTION LEVEL RUN % 120 L3-06
AO 7 STALL PREVENTION LEVEL ACCEL % 120 L3-02
AO 8 REFERENCE OPERATION MODE SELECT - 1 b1-01
AO 9 RUN OPERATION MODE SELECT - 1 b1-02
AO 10 PI MODE SELECT - 0 b5-01
AO 11 FREQUENCY COMMAND UPPER LIMIT % of MAX 100.0 d2-01
AO 12 FREQUENCY COMMAND LOWER LIMIT % of MAX 0.0 d2-02
AO 13 MOTOR RATED CURRENT A Motor model dependent E2-01
AO 14 JUMP FREQUENCY 1 0.1Hz 0.0 d3-01
AO 15 JUMP FREQUENCY 2 0.1Hz 0.0 d3-02
AO 16 JUMP FREQUENCY 3 0.1Hz 0.0 d3-03
AO 17 JUMP FREQUENCY BANDWIDTH 0.1Hz 1.0 d3-04
AO 18 NUMBER OF AUTO RESTARTS - 0 L5-01
AO 19 OPERATOR DISPLAY MODE - 0 o1-03
AO 20 POWER LOSS RIDE THROUGH SEC Drive model dependent L2-02
AO 21 CABLE LOSS TIME-OUT SEC 2.0 H5-09
AO 22 CABLE LOSS SPEED 0.01Hz 0.00 d1-04
AO 23 PI INTEGRAL LIMIT 0.1% 100.0 b5-04
AO 24 PI UPPER LIMIT VALUE 0.1 100.0 b5-06
AO 25 PI OFFSET ADJUSTMENT 0.1 0.0 b5-07
AO 26 PI PRIMARY DELAY TIME 0.01 0.00 b5-08
AO 27
PI FEEDBACK REFERENCE
MISSING DETECTION SELECT
1 0 b5-12
AO 28
PI FEEDBACK REFERENCE
MISSING DETECTION LEVEL
1% 0 b5-13
AO 29
PI FEEDBACK REFERENCE
MISSING DETECTION TIME
0.1 SEC 1.0 b5-14
AO 30 READ PARAMETER NUMBER - -
AO 31 WRITE PARAMETER NUMBER - -
AO 32 WRITE PARAMETER DATA - -
Page 459 of 541
Communications D - 18
4Metasys N2 Binary Input (BI) Summary
4Metasys N2 Binary Output (BO) Summary
Table D.11 Metasys N2 Binary Input Summary (E7 to Metasys N2)
Object ID Object Name Default Off (0) State On (1) State
BI 1 RUN / STOP MONITOR 0 STOPPED RUNNING
BI 2 FORWARD / REVERSE MONITOR 0 FORWARD REVERSE
BI 3 DRIVE READY MONITOR 0 NOT READY READY
BI 4 FAULT MONITOR 0 NOT FAULTED FAULTED
BI 5 ZERO SPEED 0 NOT ZERO SPEED ZERO SPEED
BI 6 SPEED AGREE 0 NOT SPEED AGREE SPEED AGREE
BI 7 MINOR FAULT 0 NO MINOR FAULT MINOR FAULT
BI 8 MAJOR FAULT 0 NO MAJOR FAULT MAJOR FAULT
BI 9
DRIVE COMMUNICATION
ERROR MONITOR
0 NO ERROR ERROR
BI 10 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT 1 (H2-01) 0 - -
BI 11 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT 2 (H2-02) 0 - -
BI 12 MULTI-FUNCTION OUTPUT 3 (H2-03) 0 - -
BI 13 SAFETY INTERLOCK MONITOR 0
SAFETY CLEAR
TERMINAL 3 CLOSED
SAFETY SET
TERMINAL 3 OPEN
BI 14 HAND / AUTO REFERENCE MONITOR 0 REMOTE LOCAL
BI 15 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT 1 MONITOR 0 OFF ON
BI 16 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT 2 MONITOR 0 OFF ON
BI 17 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT 3 MONITOR 0 OFF ON
BI 18 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT 4 MONITOR 0 OFF ON
BI 19 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT 5 MONITOR 0 OFF ON
Table D.12 Metasys N2 Binary Output Summary (Metasys N2 to E7)
Object ID Object Name Default Off (0) State On (1) State
BO 1 RUN FORWARD COMMAND 0 STOP FORWARD
BO 2 RUN REVERSE COMMAND 0 STOP REVERSE
BO 3 SERIAL FAULT (EF0) COMMAND 0 NO FAULT FAULT
BO 4 FAULT RESET COMMAND 0 NO RESET RESET
BO 5 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT 1 (H1-01) 0 - -
BO 6 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT 2 (H1-02) 0 - -
BO 7 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT 3 (H1-03) 0 - -
BO 8 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT 4 (H1-04) 0 - -
BO 9 MULTI-FUNCTION INPUT 5 (H1-05) 0 - -
BO 10 PANEL LOCK 0
LOCAL/REMOTE AND
STOP/RESET KEYS
ENABLED
LOCAL/REMOTE AND
STOP/RESET KEYS
DISABLED
BO 11 COMMUNICATION FAULT ENABLE 0
EF0 NOT ACTIVATED IF
CABLE LOSS OCCURS
EF0 ACTIVATED IF
CABLE LOSS OCCURS
Page 460 of 541
Communications D - 19
4Mailbox Function Points
Reading a Drive Parameter
Two points are defined for reading any Drive parameter:
AO 30 Specifies the parameter to be read from the E7 Drive
AI 38 Reports the value of the parameter specified in AO 30
When this point is read, it retrieves data from the parameter and sends it to the controller
Example:
Writing a value of 387 (183 hex) to AO 30 specifies Drive parameter b1-04. Reading AI 38 returns the current setting
of parameter b1-04 to the controller
Writing to a Drive Parameter
Two points are defined for writing to any Drive parameter:
AO 31 Specifies the parameter to be written to
AO 32 Entry location of the value to be written to the parameter specified in AO 31. When this point is written to,
it will write the value to the Drive. An ENTER or ACCEPT command does not need to be sent for the data to be taken
by the Drive. The behavior of the write is the same as with the digital operator. If the Drive is running, there are a lim-
ited number of Drive parameters that can be written to.
Example:
Writing a value of 387 (183 hex) to AO 31 specifies Drive parameter b1-04. Writing a value of 1 to AO 32 enables the
Drive for reverse run.
Page 461 of 541
Communications D - 20
APOGEE FLN Point Database
4APOGEE FLN Point List Summary
This database is for APOGEE FLN Application 2721 and features 97 logical points: 29 Logical Analog Inputs (LAI), 35 Log-
ical Analog Outputs (LAO), 19 Logical Digital Inputs (LDI) and 14 Logical Digital Outputs (LDO). These points configure,
control or monitor the operation of the Drive.
Information to consider when referencing this table:
1. Points not listed are not used in this application.
2. A single value in a column means that the value is the same in English units and in SI units.
3. Point numbers that appear in brackets, e.g. {03}, can be unbundled at the field panel.
Table D.13 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Point Number Summary
Point
Number
Point
Type
Point Name
Factory Default
(SI Units)
Engr. Units
(SI Units)
Slope
(SI Units)
Intercept
(SI Units)
On
Text
Off
Text
E7
Parameter
01 LAO CTLR ADDRESS 31 1 0 H5-01
02 LAO APPLICATION 1 0
{03} LAI FREQ OUTPUT 0 HZ 0.01 0 U1-02
{04} LAI PCT OUTPUT 0 PCT 0.01 0
{05} LAI SPEED 0 RPM 0.01 0
{06} LAI CURRENT 0 AMPS (A) 0.01 0 U1-03
{07} LAI TORQUE 0 PCT 0.1 0
{08} LAI POWER 0 KW 0.1 0 U1-08
{09} LAI DRIVE TEMP 0 DEG F / C 1 0 U1-41
{10} LAI DRIVE KWH 0 KWH 0.1 0 U1-29
{11} LAI MWH 0 MWH 1 0 U1-30
{12} LAI RUN TIME 0 HRS 1 0 U1-13
{13} LAI DC BUS VOLT 0 PCT 1 0 U1-07
{14} LAI AC OUT VOLT 0 VOLTS (V) 0.1 0 U1-06
15 LAI PAR N9.01 0 AMPS (A) 0.01 0 N9-01
{16} LAI RUN TIMEX10K 0 10K HR 1 0 U1-13
{17} LAI FAULT CODE 0 1 0 U2-01
{18} LDI MINOR FLT NO FLT 1 0 FAULT NO FLT U1-12 (Bit 6)
{19} LDI MAJOR FLT NO FLT 1 0 FAULT NO FLT U1-12 (Bit 7)
20 LAO OVRD TIME 1 HRS 1 0
{21} LDI FWD.REV FWD 1 0 REV FWD U1-12 (Bit 2)
{22} LDO CMD REV.STOP STOP 1 0 REV STOP
{23} LDI RUN.STOP STOP 1 0 RUN STOP U1-12 (Bit 0)
{24} LDO CMD RUN.STOP STOP 1 0 FWD STOP
{25} LDI ZERO SPEED OFF 1 0 ON OFF U1-12 (Bit 1)
{26} LDI SPEED AGREE NO AGR 1 0 AGREE NO AGR U1-12 (Bit 4)
{27} LDI DRIVE READY NOTRDY 1 0 READY NOTRDY U1-12 (Bit 5)
{28} LDI LOC.REM MON REMOTE 1 0 LOCAL REMOTE
{29} LDO DAY.NGT DAY 1 0 NGT DAY
30 LAO CURRENT LIM 0 AMPS (A) 0.01 0 E2-01
31 LAO ACCEL TIME 1 0 SEC 0.1 0 C1-01
32 LAO DECEL TIME 1 0 SEC 0.1 0 C1-02
33 LDO LOCK PANEL UNLOCK 1 0 LOCK UNLOCK
35 LDO RUN ENABLE STOP 1 0 ENABLE STOP
36 LAO STALL PRE RN 90 PCT 30 0 L3-06
37 LAO STALL PRE AC 120 PCT 1 0 L3-02
38 LAO FREQ UP LIM 100 PCT 0.1 0 D2-01
Page 462 of 541
Communications D - 21
Table D.13 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Point Number Summary (Continued)
Point
Number
Point
Type
Point Name
Factory Default
(SI Units)
Engr. Units
(SI Units)
Slope
(SI Units)
Intercept
(SI Units)
On
Text
Off
Text
Drive
Parameter
39 LAO FREQ LOW LIM 0 PCT 0.1 0 d2-02
{40} LDI MULTI OUT 1 OFF 1 0 ON OFF U1-11 (Bit 0)
{41} LDI MULTI OUT 2 OFF 1 0 ON OFF U1-11 (Bit 1)
{42} LDI MULTI OUT 3 OFF 1 0 ON OFF U1-11 (Bit 2)
{43} LDI SAFETY ILOCK OFF 1 0 ON OFF
{44} LDO MF INP 1 OFF 1 0 ON OFF
{45} LDO MF INP 2 OFF 1 0 ON OFF
{46} LDO MF INP 3 OFF 1 0 ON OFF
{47} LDO MF INP 4 OFF 1 0 ON OFF
{48} LDO MF INP 5 OFF 1 0 ON OFF
49 LAO JUMP FREQ 1 0 HZ 0.1 0 d3-01
50 LAO JUMP FREQ 2 0 HZ 0.1 0 d3-02
51 LAO JUMP FREQ 3 0 HZ 0.1 0 d3-03
52 LAO JUMP FREQ BW 0 HZ 0.1 0 d3-04
53 LAO NUM AUTOSTRT 0 1 0 L5-01
54 LAO POWER LOSS RT 0.1 SEC 0.1 0 L2-02
55 LAO RUN OP MODE 1 1 0 b1-02
56 LAO REF OP MODE 1 1 0 b1-01
57 LAO OPER DISP MD 0 1 0 o1-03
{58} LDI MF IN 1 MON OFF 1 0 ON OFF U1-10 (Bit 2)
{59} LDI MF IN 2 MON OFF 1 0 ON OFF U1-10 (Bit 3)
{60} LAO INPUT REF 1 0 HZ 0.01 0
61 LAO INPUT REF 2 0 HZ 0.01 0 d1-02
{62} LAI PID FEEDBACK 0 PCT 0.01 0 U1-24
63 LAO PID P GAIN 1 0.01 0 b5-02
64 LAO PID I TIM 1 SEC 0.1 0 b5-03
65 LDO PID MODE SEL DISABLE 1 0 ENABLE DISABLE b5-01
{66} LAI LST FLT CODE 0 1 0 U2-02
{67} LAI FREF.FLT 0 HZ 0.01 0 U2-03
{68} LAI OUT FREQ FLT 0 HZ 0.01 0 U2-04
{69} LAI OUT CUR.FLT 0 AMPS (A) 0.01 0 U2-05
70 LAO RD PARAM NUM 1 1 0
71 LAI RD PARAM DAT 0 1 0
72 LAO WR PARAM NUM 1 1 0
73 LAO WR PARAM DAT 0 1 0
{74} LDI MF IN 3 MON OFF 1 0 ON OFF U1-10 (Bit 4)
{75} LAI OUT VOLT.FLT 0 VOLTS (V) 0.1 0 U2-07
{76} LAI DC BUS.FLT 0 VOLTS (V) 1 0 U2-08
{77} LAI OUT PWR.FLT 0 KW 0.1 0 U2-09
{78} LDI MF IN 4 MON OFF 1 0 ON OFF U1-10 (Bit 5)
{79} LAI PID DEVIATE 0 PCT 0.01 0 U1-36
80 LAO PID I LIMIT 100 PCT 0.1 0 b5-04
81 LAO PID UP LIMIT 100 PCT 0.1 0 b5-06
82 LAO PID OFFS ADJ 100 PCT 0.1 -100 b5-07
83 LAO PID PRI DYTM 0 SEC 0.1 0 b5-08
84 LAO PID FB RMDS 0 1 0 b5-12
85 LAO PID FB RMDL 0 PCT 1 0 b5-13
86 LAO PID FB RMDT 1 SEC 0.1 0 b5-14
Page 463 of 541
Communications D - 22
Table D.13 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Point Number Summary (Continued)
Point
Number
Point
Type
Point Name
Factory Default
(SI Units)
Engr. Units
(SI Units)
Slope
(SI Units)
Intercept
(SI Units)
On
Text
Off
Text
Drive
Parameter
{87} LAI PID OUT CAP 0 PCT 0.01 0 U1-37
{88} LAI PID REF 0 PCT 0.01 0 U1-38
{89} LAI COM ERR CD 0 1 0 U1-39
90 LDO COM FLT ENA DISABLE 1 0 ENABLE DISABLE H5-05
91 LAO CBL LOSS FRQ 0 HZ 0.01 0 d1-04
92 LAO CBL LOSS TMR 2 SEC 0.1 0 H5-09
{93} LDI OK.FAULT OK 1 0 FAULT OK U1-12 (Bit 7)
{94} LDO RESET FAULT NO 1 0 RESET NO
{95} LDI DRV COM ERR NO FLT 1 0 FAULT NO FLT
{96} LDO EXTERNAL FLT OK 1 0 FAULT OK
{97} LDI MF IN 5 MON OFF 1 0 ON OFF U1-10 (Bit 6)
{99} LAI ERROR STATUS 0 1 0
Page 464 of 541
Communications D - 23
4APOGEE FLN Logical Analog Input (LAI) Summary
Table D.14 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Logical Analog Input (LAI) Summary (Drive to APOGEE FLN)
Point
Number
Database Descriptor Units Slope Intercept Default Min Max
Drive
Parameter
3 FREQ OUTPUT HZ 0.01 0 0 Fmin Fmax U1-02
4 PCT OUTPUT PCT 0.01 0 0 0 100
5 SPEED RPM 1 0 0 Fmin Fmax
6 CURRENT AMPS 0.01 or 0.1 0 0 0 DriveMax U1-03
7 TORQUE PCT 0.1 0 0 0 300
8 POWER KW 0.1 0 0 0 100 U1-08
9 DRIVE TEMP DEG F 1 0 DrvTemp 0 4000 U1-41
10 DRIVE KWH KWH 0.1 or 1
kVA Dep
0 0 0 32767 U1-29
11 DRIVE MWH MWH 1 0 0 0 32767 U1-30
12 RUN TIME HR 1 0 0 0 32767 U1-13
13 DC BUS VOLT VOLTS 1 0 kVA Dep 0 4000 U1-07
14 AC OUT VOLT VOLTS 1 0 0 0 kVA Dep U1-06
15 DRV RATED AMP AMPS 0.01 or 0.1 0 0 0 kVA Dep n9-01
16 RUN TIME x 10K 10K HR 1 0 0 0 32767 U1-13
17 FAULT CODE ERR CD 1 0 0 0 U2-01
62 PID FEEDBACK HZ 0.01 0 0 0 40 U1-24
66 LST FLT CODE 1 0 0 U2-02
67 FREF.FLT HZ 0.01 0 0 0 400 U2-03
68 OUT FREQ.FAULT HZ 0.01 0 0 0 400 U2-04
69 OUT CUR.FLT AMPS 0.1 0 0 0 kVA Dep U2-05
71 RD PARAM DAT 1 0
75 OUT VOLT.FLT VOLTS 0.1 0 0 0 400 U2-07
76 DC BUS.FLT VOLTS 1 0 0 0 4000 U2-08
77 OUT PWR.FLT KW 0.1 0 0 0 400 U2-09
79 PID DEVIATE PCT 0.01 0 0 0 400 U1-36
87 PID OUT CAP PCT 0.01 0 0 0 40 U1-37
88 PID REF PCT 0.01 0 0 0 40 U1-38
89 COM ERR CD 1 0 0 0 4000 U1-39
99 ERROR STATUS 1 0 0 0 255
Page 465 of 541
Communications D - 24
4APOGEE FLN Logical Analog Output (LAO) Summary
Table D.15 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Logical Analog Output (LAO) Summary (APOGEE FLN to Drive)
Point
Number
Database Descriptor Units Slope Intercept Default Min Max
Drive
Parameter
1 CTLR ADDRESS 1 0 31 0 99 H5-01
2 APPLICATION 1 0 2721 0 32767
20 OVRD TIME HR 1 0 8 1 255
30 CURRENT LIMIT A 0.01 or 0.1 0 kVA Dep 0 1500 E2-01
31 ACCEL TIME SEC 0.1 0 10 0 32767 C1-01
32 DECEL TIME SEC 0.1 0 10 0 32767 C1-02
36 STALL PRE RN PCT 30 0 90 0 170 L3-06
37 STALL PRE AC PCT 1 0 120 0 200 L3-02
38 FREQ UP LIM PCT 0.1 0 100 0 110 d2-01
39 FREQ LOW LIM PCT 0.1 0 0 0 110 d2-02
49 JUMP FREQ 1 HZ 0.1 0 0 0 400 d3-01
50 JUMP FREQ 2 HZ 0.1 0 0 0 400 d3-02
51 JUMP FREQ 3 HZ 0.1 0 0 0 400 d3-03
52 JUMP FREQ BW HZ 0.1 0 1 0 20 d3-04
53 NUM AUTOSTRT 1 0 0 0 10 L5-01
54 PWR LOSS RT SEC 0.1 0 0 0 25.5 L2-02
55 RUN OP MODE 1 0 1 0 3 b1-02
56 REF OP MODE 1 0 1 0 3 b1-01
57 OPER DISP MD 1 0 0 0 32767 o1-03
60 INPUT REF 1 HZ 0.01 0 0 0 400
61 INPUT REF 2 HZ 0.01 0 0 0 400 d1-02
63 PID P GAIN 0.01 0 1 0 25 b5-02
64 PID I TIME SEC 0.1 0 1 0 360 b5-03
70 RD PARAM NUM 1 0
72 WR PARAM NUM 1 0
73 WR PARAM DAT 1 0
80 PID I LIMIT PCT 0.1 0 100 0 100 b5-04
81 PID UP LIM PCT 0.1 0 100 0 100 b5-06
82 PID OFFS ADJ PCT 0.1 -100 0 0 200 b5-07
83 PID PRI DYTM SEC 0.01 0 0 0 10 b5-08
84 PID FB RMDS 1 0 0 0 2 b5-12
85 PID FB RMDL 1 0 1 0 2 b5-13
86 PID FB RMDT SEC 0.1 0 1 0 25.5 b5-14
91 CBL LOSS FRQ HZ 0.01 0 0 0 400 d1-04
92 CBL LOSS TMR SEC 0.1 0 2 0 3600 H5-09
Page 466 of 541
Communications D - 25
4APOGEE FLN Logical Digital Input (LDI) Summary
4APOGEE FLN Logical Digital Output (LDO) Summary
Table D.16 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Logical Digital Input (LDI) Summary (E7 to APOGEE FLN)
Point
Number
Database Descriptor Slope Intercept
Defaul
t
Min Max
Off (0)
State
On (1)
State
E7
Parameter
18 MINOR FLT 1 0 0 0 1 NO FLT FAULT U1-12 (Bit 6)
19 MAJOR FLT 1 0 0 0 1 NO FLT FAULT U1-12 (Bit 7)
21 FWD.REV 1 0 0 0 1 FWD REV U1-12 (Bit 2)
23 RUN.STOP 1 0 0 0 1 STOP RUN U1-12 (Bit 0)
25 ZERO SPEED 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON U1-12 (Bit 1)
26 SPEED AGREE 1 0 0 0 1 NO AGR AGREE U1-12 (Bit 4)
27 DRIVE READY 1 0 0 0 1 NOTRDY READY U1-12 (Bit 5)
28 HND/AUTO MON 1 0 0 0 1 REMOTE LOCAL
40 MULTI OUT 1 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON U1-11 (Bit 0)
41 MULTI OUT 2 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON U1-11 (Bit 1)
42 MULTI OUT 3 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON U1-11 (Bit 2)
43 SAFETY ILOCK 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON
58 MF IN 1 MON 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON U1-10 (Bit 2)
59 MF IN 2 MON 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON U1-10 (Bit 3)
74 MF IN 3 MON 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON U1-10 (Bit 4)
78 MF IN 4 MON 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON U1-10 (Bit 5)
93 OK.FAULT 1 0 0 0 1 NO FLT FAULT U1-12 (Bit 7)
95 DRV COM ERR 1 0 0 0 1 NO FLT FAULT
97 MF IN 5 MON 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON U1-10 (Bit 6)
Table D.17 APOGEE FLN Application 2721 Logical Digital Output (LDO) Summary (APOGEE FLN to E7)
Point
Number
Database Descriptor Slope Intercept
Defaul
t
Min Max
Off (0)
State
On (1)
State
E7
Parameter
22 CMD REV.STOP 1 0 0 0 1 STOP REV
24 CMD RUN.STOP 1 0 0 0 1 STOP FWD
29 DAY.NGT 1 0 0 0 1 DAY NGT
33 LOCK PANEL 1 0 0 0 1 UNLOCK LOCK
35 RUN ENABLE 1 0 0 0 1 STOP ENABLE
44 MF INP 1 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON
45 MF INP 2 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON
46 MF INP 3 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON
47 MF INP 4 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON
48 MF INP 5 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON
65 PID MODE SL 1 0 0 0 1 OFF ON B5-01
90 COM FLT ENA 1 0 1 0 1 DISABLE ENABLE H5-05
94 RESET FAULT 1 0 0 0 1 RESET OK
96 EXTERNAL FLT 1 0 0 0 1 FAULT OK
Page 467 of 541
Communications D - 26
4Mailbox Function Points
Reading a Drive Parameter
Two points are defined for reading any Drive parameter:
#70 Specifies the parameter to be read from
#71 Reports the value of the parameter specified in Point #70
When this point is read, it retrieves data from the parameter and sends it to the controller
Example:
Entering a value of 387 (183 hex) in Point #70 specifies Drive parameter B1-04. Reading Point #71 returns the cur-
rent setting of parameter B1-04 to the controller
Writing to a Drive Parameter
Two points are defined for writing to any Drive parameter:
#72 Specifies the parameter to be written to
#73 Entry location of the value to be written to the parameter specified in Point #72
When this point is written to, it will write the value to the Drive. An enter or accept command does not need to be
sent for the data to be taken by the Drive. The behavior of the write is the same as with the digital operator. If the
Drive is running, there are a limited number of Drive parameters that can be written to.
Example:
Entering a value of 387 (183 hex) in Point #72 specifies Drive parameter B1-04. Commanding Point #73 to a value
of 1 enables the Drive for reverse run.
Refer to the either the E7 User's Manual or the E7 MODBUS

Technical Manual for MODBUS

communication set-up and

configuration. The E7 User's Manual and the E7 MODBUS

Technical Manual provide a reference to E7 Drive parameters

and their respective Drive addresses.
Page 468 of 541
Peripheral Devices E - 1
Appendix E
Peripheral Devices
This appendix describes recommended branch short circuit protection and
peripheral devices.
Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection............................... E-2
Branch Circuit Overload Protection.................................... E-3
Peripheral Devices............................................................. E-4
Page 469 of 541
Peripheral Devices E - 2
Branch Circuit Short Circuit Protection
The following peripheral devices may be required between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive input
terminals L1(R), L2(S), and L3(T). Refer to applicable codes to determine the devices necessary for a given
installation. Use Table E.1 or E.2 when selecting fuses and circuit breakers per the NEC. When selecting
semiconductor fuses to provide Drive input I
2
t protection and comply with UL, CSA, NEC, and CEC branch circuit
short circuit protection requirements, select one of the fuses in Table E.3 or E.4.
Fuse Type: UL designated Time-Delay or Non-Time-Delay Fuse
Class: CC, J, T, RK1 or RK5
Designators (typical):KTK, FNQ, FRS, LPJ, LPS, JKS, JJN, or JJS
Voltage Rating: 250V for Drives with 208V input
600V for Drives with 480V input
Circuit Breaker Type: Inverse Time (MCCB) or Instantaneous Trip (MCP)
Voltage Rating: 600V
Table E.1 Recommended Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings per NEC (208 Vac Input)
Model
CIMR-E7U
Hp
Input
Amps
*1
(Continuous
Rating)
Output
Amps
*1
(Continuous
Rating)
Fuse
Selection Criteria
Circuit Breaker
Selection Criteria
Maximum
Time-Delay
Fuse Rating (A)
Maximum
Non-Time-Delay
Fuse Rating (A)
Maximum CB
Rating (A)
20P4 0.5/0.75 4.3 3.6 6 12 15
20P7 1 5.5 4.6 8 12 15
21P5 1.5/2 9.4 7.8 15 15 15
22P2
3
13 10.8 20 20 20
23P7
5
20 16.8 30 30 35
25P5
7.5
24 23 40 50 45
27P5
10
37 31 60 80 80
2011
15
53 46.2 80 80 100
2015
20
70 59.4 110 125 125
2018
25
89 74.8 125 150 150
*1 Input and Output Amps are based on the Normal Duty (ND) current rating. Consult the Specification section for details on the Heavy Duty (HD) and Normal Duty (ND) ratings.

Page 470 of 541
Peripheral Devices E - 3
Branch Circuit Overload Protection
All models have built-in UL evaluated motor overload protection. Motor overload protection is also provided in
accordance with the NEC and CEC. Additional branch circuit overload protection is not required for single motor
applications.
Table E.2 Recommended Fuse and Circuit Breaker Ratings per NEC (480 Vac Input)
Model
CIMR-E7U
Hp
Input
Amps
*1
(Continuous
Rating)
Output
Amps
*1
(Continuous
Rating)
Fuse
Selection Criteria
Circuit Breaker
Selection Criteria
Maximum
Time-Delay
Fuse Rating (A)
Maximum
Non-Time-Delay
Fuse Rating (A)
Maximum CB
Rating (A)
40P4 0.5/0.75 2.2 1.8 4 10 15
40P7 1 2.5 2.1 4 10 15
41P5 1.5/2 4.4 3.7 8 12 15
42P2 3 6.4 5.3 10 15 15
43P7 5 9 7.6 15 20 20
44P0 - 10.4 8.7 15 30 20
45P5 7.5 15 12.5 25 30 30
47P5 10 20 17 30 30 40
4011 15 33 27 45 50 60
4011 20 33 27 45 50 60
4015 25 40 34 60 70 80
4018 30 48 40 70 80 90
4022 - 55 50.4 80 70 100
4030 40 74 67.2 100 100 125
4030 50 74 67.2 100 100 125
*1 Input and Output Amps are based on the Normal Duty (ND) current rating. Consult the Specification section for details on the Heavy Duty (HD) and Normal Duty (ND) ratings.
Page 471 of 541
Peripheral Devices E - 4
Peripheral Devices
The following peripheral devices may be required to be mounted between the AC main circuit power supply and the Drive
input terminals R/LI, S/L2, and T/L3.
For more details on peripheral devices, contact the manufacturer.
Magnetic Contactor
Mount a surge protector on the coil. When using a magnetic contactor to start and stop the Drive, do not exceed one start per
hour.
AC and DC reactor
When using the E7N on a power supply transformer with a capacity of 600kVA or more, install a DC reactor. The reactor
improves the input power factor and provides protection to the rectifier circuit within the Drive.
Noise filter
Use a noise filter exclusively for the Drive if radio noise generated from the Drive causes other control devices to malfunction.
CAUTION
Never connect a general LC/RC noise filter to the Drive output circuit.
Never connect a phase-advancing capacitor to the input or output sides, or a surge suppressor to the output
side of the Drive. When magnetic contactor is installed between the Drive and the motor, never turn it on or off
during operation.
Page 472 of 541
Drives Technical Support in USA and Canada
Technical Support for Inverters and Drives is available by phone as follows:
Normal: Monday through Friday during the hours of 8 a.m. to 5:00 p.m. C.S.T.
Emergency: After normal hours, 7 days a week including weekends and holidays
To contact Drives Technical Support, please call 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292).
From the menu, dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products, then 5 for Technical Support.
Drives Technical Support can also be reached by e-mail at DriveSupport@yaskawa.com.
Support information, such as technical manuals, FAQs, instruction sheets and software downloads are available at our
website, www.yaskawa.com.
When calling for technical support, please have the following materials available:
The appropriate Technical Manual in hand because the support associate may refer to this
Complete nameplate information from the drive and the motor.
(Confirm that Drive Nameplate Output amps is equal to or greater than Motor Nameplate amps)
A list with your parameter settings
A sketch of the electrical power train, from AC line to motor, including filters and disconnects
Field Service, Start Up Assistance, Factory Repair, Replacement Parts, and Other Support
Contact Drives Technical Support for help with any of these needs.
Technical Training
Training is conducted at Yaskawa training centers, at customer sites, and via the internet.
For information, visit www.yaskawa.com or call 1-800-YASKAWA (927-5292).
From the phone menu, dial 2 for Inverter and Drive Products, then 4 for Product Training.
Support in Other Countries
Yaskawa is a multi-national company with offices and service representation around the world.
To obtain support, always contact the local distributor first for guidance and assistance.
Contact the closest Yaskawa office listed for further assistance.
Page 473 of 541
E7N Drive/Bypass
YASKAWA ELECTRIC AMERICA, INC.
2121 Norman Drive South, Waukegan, IL 60085, U.S.A.
Phone: (800) YASKAWA (800-927-5292) or 1-847-887-7000 Fax: (847) 887-7370
Internet: http://www.yaskawa.com
YEA Document Number: TM.E7N.01 03/01/2009 Rev. 09-03
Data subject to change without notice. Yaskawa Electric America, Inc.
Page 474 of 541

YASKAWAAMERICA,INC.(YAI),DRIVES&MOTIONDIVISION
LimitedWarranty
1. YaskawaAmerica,Inc("YAI"),Drives&MotionDivision(hereinafterD&M),warrantsatthe
timeofshipment,newandunusedproductsoldbyD&Mshallbefreefromdefectsinmaterials
andworkmanship.D&Mwarrantsthatforaperiodofone(1)yearfromthedatetheproductis
firstusedbyBuyer,or18monthsfromthedateofshipment,whicheveroccursfirst,ifany
productorpartisfoundbyD&Mtobedefective,D&Mwill,atitssolediscretionandasBuyers
exclusiveremedy,eitherrepair,replaceorreturnthepurchasepricepaidtoD&M;provided
thatthesubjectproductisusedundernormalconditionsforwhichitwasdesignedand
installed,operatedandmaintainedinaccordancewithD&M'sinstructionsandinaccordance
withgenerallyacceptedindustrialpractices.Productsrepairedorreplacedduringthewarranty
periodshallbecoveredbytheforegoingwarrantyfortheremainderoftheoriginalwarranty
periodorninety(90)daysfromdateoftherepairorshipmentofthereplacement,whicheveris
longer.D&Mwarrants,foraperiodofninety(90)days,thatservicesshallbeperformedina
workmanlikemanner.Buyerssoleremedyforabreachofthisservicewarrantyislimitedto
furtherserviceorarefundorcreditofamountspaidbyBuyer,atSellersoption.
2. D&MswarrantyobligationshallbeconditioneduponreceiptbyD&Mofwrittennoticeofany
allegeddefectswithinsixty(60)daysafterdiscovery.D&Mwillnotberesponsiblefor
unauthorizedrepairstoanyproducts,evenifdefective.D&Mshallnotberesponsibleforany
productswhichhavebeenaltered,abused,misused,orimproperlyinstalledorrepaired,orfor
anyloss,damage,defect,claimornonperformanceresultingfromorattributabletoBuyer's
specifications.D&Mdoesnotguaranteeproductionratesorthequalityofgoodsmadeusing
D&Msproductsorservices,norshallanylongerwarrantyperiodsapply,exceptasagreedin
writingsignedbyanauthorizedD&Mrepresentative.
3. WhereBuyerordersnonstockproductsorpartsmanufacturedbyathirdparty,D&Mwill,to
theextentpermitted,passthroughtoBuyeranywarrantyofthemanufacturer.Astosuch
items,Buyerssoleremedyforbreachofwarrantyshallbetheremedyofferedbyandavailable
fromthemanufacturer,ifany.
4. D&M'swarrantyhereinisinlieuofandexcludesallotherwarrantiesofD&Mandanyparentor
affiliatedcompaniesofD&M.D&Mdisclaimsallotherwarranties,whetherexpress,impliedor
statutory,including,butnotlimitedto,anyimpliedwarrantiesofmerchantabilityand/orfitness
foraparticularpurposeoruse.
5. UndernocircumstancesshallD&M,oranyparentoraffiliatedcompanyofD&M,beliableto
buyeroranyentityforanyspecial,indirectorconsequentialdamages,whetherarisingfrom
breachofcontract,tort,negligence,misrepresentation,strictliabilityorotherwise,includingfor
lostprofits,impairmentofgoods,workstoppageorotherwise,inanywayarisingoutofor
relatedtoproductsorservicessuppliedbyD&Moranytransactiontowhichthesestandard
termsapply.ThemaximumliabilityofD&M,including,butnotlimitedto,withrespecttothe
design,manufacture,sale,delivery,resale,inspection,assembly,installation,testing,repair,
replacement,maintenanceoruseofanyproductortheperformanceofanyservice,shallnot
exceedthepurchasepricepaidtoD&M.
Page 475 of 541
9





OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA



PROJ ECT: J ohn M. Roll US - Yuma Courthouse



LOCATION: Yuma, AZ



CONTRACTOR: Tempe Mechanical



SUBMITTED BY: Climatec, Inc.
2851 W. Kathleen Rd.
Phoenix, AZ. 85053
602-944-3330


MANUFACTURER: Griswold Water Systems



PRODUCT: Centrifugal Separator
w/ Sweeping System
CSS-201-D-HH-AC-4-MBV-Z-Z-PE


DATE: 7/12/12
Page 476 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 1
CSS/CSR INSTALLATION & OPERATION MANUAL
Separator, Recovery Tank, Purge Valve, CYC Timer & Pump
CSS-HH & LH SYSTEM
(HIGH HEAD AND LOW HEAD)
CSS-SP SYSTEM
(SELF PRIMING PUMP)
Record Information About Your System
1. Date Purchased ___________________________________
2. Date Installed _____________________________________
3. Serial Number ____________________________________
4. Local Representative _______________________________
For assistance, please call your Local Representative or the Factory Help Line:
(951) 270-1776 Ext. 201 or 202
CSR-HH & LH SYSTEM
(HIGH HEAD AND LOW HEAD)
CSR-SP SYSTEM
(SELF PRIMING PUMP)
*NOTE: Strainer Basket Not Standard On All Systems.
REV. 08/09
Page 477 of 541
NOTICE:
All rights reserved. No part of this document may be altered , photocopied, reproduced,
transmitted or translated to another language without the written consent of Griswold
Filtration.
The information contained in this document is subject to change without notice. Griswold
Filtration shall not be held liable for errors contained in this document herein or for
consequential damages from improper installation or operation of this system.
REV. 08/09
Page 478 of 541
CSS/CSR INSTALLATION & OPERATION TABLE OF CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1: INSTALLATION
System Location....................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 4
Suction Piping ......................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 4
Description ...........................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 4
MBV Valve ............................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 4
PBVSR Valve .......................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 4
MBVFS .................................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 4
Mechanical ............................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 5
Electrical ................................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 5
Startup...................................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 5
Additional Installation Information
Wiring (CSR Systems Only) ..................................................................................................Section 15, Page 6
Connecting to Water Supply ................................................................................................Section 15, Page 8

CHAPTER 2: OPERATION
Priming .................................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 11
Flooded Suction ...................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 11
Suction Lift............................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 11
Wiring ...................................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 11
Grounding Panel ..................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 11
CHAPTER 3: MAINTENANCE
Lubrication ...........................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 12
Cleaning ...............................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 12
Taking Out of Service ...........................................................................................................Section 15, Page 12
CHAPTER 4: CYC TIMER (CSS Systems Only)
CYC Timer Operation Settings ............................................................................................Section 15, Page 13
CYC Control Panel Layout ..................................................................................................Section 15, Page 14
Trouble Shooting Valves with CYC Timer.............................................................................Section 15, Page 14
CYC Wiring Diagram with MBV Valve ..................................................................................Section 15, Page 15
CYC Wiring Diagram with MBVSR Valve .............................................................................Section 15, Page 16
CYC Wiring Diagram with MBVFS Valve .............................................................................Section 15, Page 17
CHAPTER 5: RECOVERY TANK (CSR Systems Only)
Recovery Tank Operation RT Series ....................................................................................Section 15, Page 18
Recovery Tank Operation RTM Series ................................................................................Section 15, Page 19
Recovery Tank Monitor Tube Connection (RTM Series) .....................................................Section 15, Page 20
Recovery Tank Monitor Parts List (RTM Series) .................................................................Section 15, Page 21
CHAPTER 6: TROUBLE SHOOTING
Service Guide ......................................................................................................................Section 15, Page 22
REV. 08/09
Page 479 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 4
CHAPTER 1
INSTALLATION
SYSTEM LOCATION
System location should provide the following:
1. Locate system as close to the fuid source as possible.
2. Place the suction port below pumping level to provide priming.
3. Provide room for inspection and maintenance.
4. Be sure to use the correct power supply to the motor; all wiring should meet National Electrical, and Local Codes and Regulations.
5. If outdoors, protect the pump from water damage and the elements such as fooding, excessive moisture, and freezing.
SUCTION PIPING
CAUTION: SUCTION PIPING SHOULD BE INDEPENDENTLY SUPPORTED NEAR THE PUMP. LIBERAL USE OF
PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORT BLOCKS WILL PREVENT EXCESSIVE STRAIN ON THE PUMP CASING AND
ON THE PIPE JOINTS. PROPER PIPING ALIGNMENT IS ESSENTIAL BEFORE CONNECTION IS MADE. THE
PIPING ALIGNMENT SHOULD NEVER BE ACHIEVED BY FORCE; THIS COULD PRODUCE STRAIN ON THE
PUMP CASING.
DESCRIPTION
The CSS system is a solid separation, automatic purge, fltration system. The CSS system comes complete with pump, control panel,
separator, purge valve, factory piping and electrical wiring. The CSR System is a solid separation, with recovery tank fltration system.
MBV Valve: The MBV Valve is an electrically operated 115VAC normally closed motorized
ball valve. The actuator is permanently lubricated. The valve comes equipped with a
manual override stem. If power seizes to exist while valve is open, then it will remain open
until closed manual or power is restored. If power seizes to exist while valve is closed,
then it will remain closed.
MBVSR Valve: Motorized ball valve. Normally closed. Requires power to open and power
to close. If opened during a power outage, the valve will close.
MBVFS Valve: The MBVFS is a motorized ball valve with battery pack. It is constructed
from 316 stainless steel with Tefon seal. The valve requires power to open and close.
Actuator includes failsafe self-rechargeable battery pack for fail-safe close on power loss.
Battery pack requires 24 hrs charge before operation.
REV. 08/09
Page 480 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 5
MECHANICAL
1. The CSS/CSR system skid should be bolted to a fat & level concrete foundation with suitably sized and quantity of anchor bolts.
The entire system (1-6) is on a single skid. For systems 8 and larger, the separator stands alone on its own 3 legs, while the
pump/motor, recovery tank (CSR only), and control panel are on an individual skid. It is therefore incumbent upon the installer to
insure that the complete package is bolted to a fat & level concrete foundation, to insure that the piping assembly is installed
without any undue stress.
2. Inspect and hydrotest all pipe connections for leaks.
3. All fanged connections must have gaskets, and all threaded connections must have Tefon tape or anti-seize coating.
4. Flush all new pipe construction before system operation. In the absence of a pump strainer basket, use a y-strainer with 1/4
perforated screen. The perforated screen must be at least the same size or one pipe size larger than the pump suction. The
perforated screen will block out larger debris such as welding rods, tools, rugs, gloves, etc.
ELECTRICAL
1. Voltage supply to the system must be the same as the voltage indicated on the control panel.
2. Follow the pump operating instructions prior to start-up.
3. Turn the motor ON and check rotation. Rotation must turn in the same direction as the arrow located on the pump
casing. If pump is rotating in the opposite direction then reverse L1 and L2 on the incoming power to the panel.
Recheck rotation.
4. Starting or in-rush current should not exceed 3 seconds, running current should be equal to or less than nameplate
full load amps (FLA).
5. Thermal Overload Setting
5a. Select the Operating Voltage
5b. Multiply Motor Service Factor (SF) by the Full Load
Amps (FLA) to get the Service Factor Amps (SFA).
5c. Adjust the Thermal Overload Dial to match SFA
Note: Some motors come with SFA written on the nameplate.
The majority of our motors come with a 1.15 service
factor, but very few come with a 1.25 SF.
STARTUP
1. Open system inlet valve 100% and outlet valve 50% (supplied by others).
2. Suction line must be fooded.
3. Open separator air vent located near the outlet, (standard on 2 and larger).
4. Turn the system ON.
5. Purge all the air.
6. For HH & SP systems, open outlet valve until the gauge reads 35psi. For LH systems, open outlet valve until a 100%
opening is achieved. If system begins to vibrate, then slightly close separator outlet until it stabilizes.
CAT. No.
RPM: 3450 Hz: 60 Voltage: 230 Voltage: 460
HP: 3 DUTY: Continuous FLA: 8 FLA: 4
FR: G56C Service Factor: 1.15 SFA: 9.2 SFA: 4.6
Max Amp: 40C Design: B Code: J PH 3 Enclosure: TEFC
Ins. Cl: F4 Thermally Protected: Not
Wiring Diagram
NEMA Nom. Eff. 80 Prem. Eff. 88
TYP. MOTOR NAMEPLATE
REV. 08/09
Page 481 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 6
CHAPTER 1
WIRING DIAGRAM (CSR Systems Only)
WIRING DIAGRAM w/SERVICE LIGHT (CSR Systems Only)
1
2
3
4
C1
C1
AUTO HAND
OFF
PUMP MOTOR
MDS
X
X
REMOTE PUMP START CONTACT
BY OTHERS
460/120VAC 250VA
MP
MP AUX
G
2A CB 2A CB
L
EQUIP. GRND.
L1
L2
L3
PROTECT CIRCUIT AS PER NEC 430-62
SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 460V/3PH/60HZ
PRESSURE SWITCH & SERVICE LIGHT BY GRISWOLD
T1
T2
T3
1
2
3
4
C1
C1
AUTO HAND
OFF
PUMP MOTOR
MDS
1 2
3 4
BLU X
X VIO
ORG
REMOTE PUMP START CONTACT
BY OTHERS
460/120VAC 50VA
MP
MP AUX
G
1A CB 1A CB EQUIP. GRND.
L1
L2
L3
PROTECT CIRCUIT AS PER NEC 430-62
SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 460V/3PH/60HZ
PRESSURE SWITCH BY GRISWOLD
T1
T2
T3
REV. 08/09
Page 482 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 7
CHAPTER 1
1
2
3
4
C1
C1
AUTO HAND
OFF
PUMP MOTOR
MDS
X
X
REMOTE PUMP START CONTACT
BY OTHERS
575/120VAC 250VA
MP
MP AUX
G
2A CB 2A CB
L
EQUIP. GRND.
L1
L2
L3
PROTECT CIRCUIT AS PER NEC 430-62
SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 575V/3PH/60HZ
PRESSURE SWITCH & SERVICE LIGHT BY GRISWOLD
T1
T2
T3
WIRING DIAGRAM (575V CSR Systems Only)
1
2
3
4
C1
C1
AUTO HAND
OFF
PUMP MOTOR
MDS
1 2
3 4
BLU X
X VIO
ORG
REMOTE PUMP START CONTACT
BY OTHERS
575/120VAC 50VA
MP
MP AUX
G
1A CB 1A CB EQUIP. GRND.
L1
L2
L3
PROTECT CIRCUIT AS PER NEC 430-62
SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 575V/3PH/60HZ
PRESSURE SWITCH BY GRISWOLD
T1
T2
T3
WIRING DIAGRAM w/SERVICE LIGHT (575V CSR Systems Only)
REV. 08/09
Page 483 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 8
CHAPTER 1
1. The pipe should not be pulled into position by tightening the piping joints. The pipe should meet the pump.
2. All piping should be supported independently of the pump. Pumps are not designed for carrying loads imposed by
piping and its contents.
3. Installations, which will be subjected to considerable temperature variation, should be provided with some means
for compensating for expansion and contraction. A 50F temperature change means an expansion or contraction
of approximately 3/8 in a pipeline of 100ft. length. This will result in distortion and misalignment of pump, and
sometimes breakage.
RIGHT WRONG
REV. 08/09
Page 484 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 9
CHAPTER 1
4. Size and install suction piping to keep pressure loss at a minimum and to provide correct NPSH.
5. Use 45-degree or long-sweep 90-degree elbows.
6. A suction valve should be installed for maintenance purposes. Valve must be fully open before start-up. Do not use
valve to throttle pump. This may cause loss of prime, excessive temperatures, damage to pump, and warranty will be
voided.
7. If a basket strainer is used, then it should have a free-opening area equal to 3 to 4 times the area of suction pipe.
Otherwise, excessive frictional loss will result.
RIGHT WRONG
RIGHT WRONG
REV. 08/09
Page 485 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 10
CHAPTER 1
8.
A. Never use pipe of a smaller size than the suction connection of the pump. The suction pipe should be equal in
size or, preferably, one size larger than the suction connection of the pump in order to avoid excessive frictional
loss with the resultant low NPSH available. If the pipe is larger than the pump suction, an eccentric pipe reducer
should be used at the pump. Select the size pipe necessary so that NPSHA exceeds NPSHR by 3-5 feet. When
centrifugal pumps are operated with insuffcient NPSHA, cavitation will occur, resulting in noisy operation and
damage to the pump.
B. When the suction supply is taken from a tank or sump, incoming water should never be allowed to fall into the
water near the end of suction pipe. This will carry air down into the suction pipe.
C. Pipe should slope upward to the pump, even for horizontal run. The suction pipe should be laid with a gradual
incline from the source of water supply, with the highest point in the line at the pump suction connection. If the
pipe is level and if there are any high points in the line that will form air pockets the pump will not operate properly.
Insure that the size and minimum submergence over suction inlet is suffcient to prevent air from entering
pump through a suction vortex.
H min.
D
H
D
GPM x 0.321
Area
GPM x 0.4085
D
OR
0 5 15 10
0
5
15
10
VELOCITY IN FEET PER SECOND
H

=

M
I
N
.

S
U
B
M
E
R
G
E
N
C
E

I
N

F
E
E
T
REV. 08/09
Page 486 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 11
CHAPTER 2
OPERATION
PRIMING
CAUTION: DO NOT RUN PUMP DRY HOPING THAT IT WILL SELF-PRIME. CENTRIFUGAL END SUCTION
PUMPS SHOULD NEVER BE STARTED OR RUN DRY. OPERATING A PUMP DRY WILL CAUSE SCORING OF
THE MECHANICAL SEAL, RESULTING IN PREMATURE SEAL FAILURE. To prevent the pump from being run dry,
it must be primed before starting.
FLOODED SUCTION:
1. If the pump is installed with a positive head on the suction, prime by opening suction valve and allowing liquid to enter
the casing, at the same time venting all air out of the top of the separator and recovery tank (on CSR system).
2. If the liquid source is located above the pump, open the separator and recovery tank (on CSR system) air vent valve,
and suction isolation valve.
3. The suction line and pump should be flled slowly until a steady stream of liquid is observed fowing from the air vents.
4. After fve minutes of operation, it is recommended that the air vent valve or plug be opened again to insure that all air
has been expelled from the pump casing.
SUCTION LIFT:
CAUTION: CERTAIN CRITERIA MUST BE MET BEFORE INSTALLING AN END SUCTION PUMP UNDER
NEGATIVE SUCTION LIFT. PLEASE CONTACT FACTORY BEFORE PRIMING.
1. If the pump is installed with a suction lift, priming must be done by other methods, such as foot valves, or by manually
flling casing and suction line.
2. A foot valve should be used for priming on suction lift applications. The foot valve, located at the end or foot of the
suction piping, functions as a check valve and allows fow in one direction only, toward the pump. Otherwise, all the
liquid will drain from the pump and suction piping back into the sump after shutdown.
3. Initial priming is accomplished by completely flling the suction or pipe and pump casing with the liquid. This can be
done by removing the air vent valve or plug at the top of the pump casing, and inserting a pipe nipple in the orifce
with an appropriate increaser to accomodate a hose connection. A priming line can also be inserted in the discharge
piping between the check valve and the pump, or the priming can be done with a bucket and funnel. The important
thing is to completely fll the suction pipe and pump casing with liquid.
4. When the pump starts, the fuid combined with atmospheric pressure creates a vacuum. Fluid is forced into the
suction pipe, which opens the check valve and keeps it open until the pump is shut down.
5. When the pump is shut down, the liquid being pumped reverses its fow causing the valve to close. The liquid is now
trapped in the suction piping and pump casing, thus maintaining a prime on the pump.
WIRING AND GROUNDING PANEL
CAUTION: THE WIRING TO THE CONTROL PANEL MUST BE INSTALLED AND MAINTAINED IN ACCORDANCE
WITH THE NATIONAL ELECTRICAL CODE OR YOUR LOCAL ELECTRICAL CODE. IF MORE INFORMATION IS
NEEDED, CALL YOUR LOCAL LICENSED ELECTRICIAN OR YOUR POWER COMPANY.
WIRING:
1. Panel wiring should conform to national, state, and local electrical codes.
2. Use wire of adequate size to prevent voltage drop.
3. Connect the electrical supply from the switch to the control panel, following the wiring diagram on the inside of the
door panel. NOTE: Make sure the voltage and frequency of the electrical current supply agrees with that stamped on
the motor nameplate. If in doubt, check with the local Power Company.
4. Three phase motors can be run in either direction, depending on how they are connected to the power supply.
GROUNDING PANEL:
1. It is required that a permanent ground connection be made to the unit using a conductor of appropriate size from a
metal underground water pipe or a grounded lead in the service panel.
2. Do not ground to a gas supply line.
3. Do not connect to electric power supply until unit is permanently grounded.
4. Connect the ground wire to the approved ground and then connect to the terminal provided.
REV. 08/09
Page 487 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 12
CHAPTER 3
MAINTENANCE
LUBRICATION
1. Closed-Coupled Units: Bearings are located in and are part of the motor. For lubrication information, refer to motor
manufacturers instructions
2. Frame-Mounted Units: Frame mounted should be regreased every 2,000 hours or at a three month interval,
whichever occurs frst. Use a #2 sodium or lithium based grease. Fill until grease comes out of relief fttings, or lip
seals, then wipe off excess. Follow motor and coupling manufacturers lubrication instructions. Recheck alignment.
CLEANING
1. Remove oil, dust, dirt, water, chemicals from exterior of motor and pump.
2. Keep motor air inlet and outlet open.
3. Blow out interior of open motors with clean compressed air at low pressure.
4. Regularly drain moisture from TEFC motors.
TAKING OUT OF SERVICE:
1. Make sure the pump strainer basket (if supplied), pump casing and separator are drained and free of any blockage
when not in use to prevent rust from forming and water from freezing during the winter. It is recommended that a
good rust inhibitor be put into the liquid end to prevent excessive corrosion. Keep the motor dry and covered.
2. To drain, remove the drain plug that is located below the suction inlet of the pump. Drain the suction pipe to a point
below the frost line. All other pipes, which may be exposed to freezing temperatures, should also be drained.
3. Remove the priming plug. This will help the pump body to drain by permitting air to enter the case.
4. Short Term: Pumps can be retained in storage, as factory assembled, in a dry atmosphere with constant
temperatures for up to six (6) months.
5. Long Term: Any length of time exceeding six (6) months, but not more than twenty (20) months. The units should
be stored in a temperature controlled area, a roofed over walled enclosure that provides protection from the
elements (rain, snow, wind blown dust, etc.), and whose temperature can be maintained between +40 deg. F and
+120 deg. F.
6. If extended high humidity is expected to be a problem, all exposed parts should be inspected before storage and
all surfaces that have the paint scratched, damaged, or worn should be recoated with a water base, air-dry enamel
paint. All surfaces should then be sprayed with rust-inhibiting oil.
* Cold Weather Precautions Should Be Taken When Conditions Approach Freezing.
REV. 08/09
Page 488 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 13
CHAPTER 4
CYC TIMER OPERATION SETTINGS (CSS Systems Only)
0.6
0.4
0.2
0.8
1.0
1.2 0
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
10s
10s
Green OFF Indicator Light: Lit when off
Orange ON Indicator Light: Lit when on
Time Range Display: The set of numbers
displayed on the face of the timer dial.
Time Range Selector: For use with both On Time
& Off Time. Turn using a Phillips screwdriver until
the desired time range appears in display window.
(Refer to available time ranges in matrix Fig. 1)
Purge Off Display Window: Unit of time applied to time range
numbers.
Purge Off Selector: Use a Phillips screwdriver to select the
unit of time for time range.
ON-TIME Knob: Use orange pointer to set on time amount.
OFF-TIME Knob: Use green pointer to set off time amount.
Purge On Display Window: Unit of time applied to time range
numbers.
Purge On Selector: Use a Phillips screwdriver to select the
unit of time for time range.
TIME
RANGE
TIME UNITS
x10s
(10 sec)
x10m
(10 min)
h
(hrs)
x10h
(10 hrs)
0-1.2 1.2 to 12 1.2 to 12 0.12 to 1.2 1.2 to 12
0-3 3 to 30 3 to 30 0.3 to 3 3 to 30
0-12 12 to 120 12 to 120 1.2 to 12 12 to 120
0-30 30 to 300 30 to 300 3 to 30 30 to 300
FIG. 1
MOTORIZED BALL VALVE
(STANDARD)
MOTORIZED BALL VALVE
SPRING RETURN
(OPTIONAL)
MOTORIZED BALL VALVE FAIL SAFE
(OPTIONAL)
Separator 1/2-3 4-6 8-12 14-20 Separator 1/2-3 4-6 8-12 14-20 Separator 1/2-3 4-6 8-12 14-20
Purge Outlet 1 1-1/2 2 3 Purge Outlet 1 1-1/2 2 3 Purge Outlet 1 1-1/2 2 3
Factory Setting* 8/4/8 6/5/6 25/0/25 Factory Setting 55/0/15 150/0/15 Factory Setting 7/7/7 12/0/12 30/0/30
Time Range 0-1.2 0-12 Time Range 0-12 0-30 Time Range 0-30 0-1.2 0-30
Purge OFF 10h hrs Purge OFF hrs Purge OFF hrs 10h hrs
Purge ON 10s Purge ON 10s Purge ON 10s
OFF-Time .4 4 OFF-Time 4 OFF-Time 4 .4 4
ON-Time 1.2 1.1 2.5 ON-Time 6 15 ON-Time 1.4 1.2 3
Approx.
Gal/Purge
2.70 6.35 9.60 48.04 7.86 43.66 71.96 158.54 3.15 7.41 10.47 57.65
*SECONDS OPEN/DURATION/CLOSE
BASIC SETTING OF SELECTOR:
1. The selectors can be turned clockwise and counterclockwise to select the desired time unit, and time range.
2. The desired time range is selected with the Time Range Selector at the lower left corner of the front panel. Use a
Phillips screwdriver at the Time Range Selector until the correct range is displayed. Available time ranges are 0-1.2,
0-3, 0-12, 0-30. Factory default range is 0-1.2 for up to 2 purge valves as displayed above. Please refer to matrix
above for specifc settings and time ranges GF recommends.
3. The desired time unit for Purge Off is selected with Purge Off Selector at the upper right corner of the front panel. Use
a Phillips screwdriver at the Purge Off Selector until the correct time unit is displayed. Available time units include
seconds, minutes hours, 10 hours. Factory default time unit is 10s as displayed above.
4. The desired time unit for Purge On is selected with Purge On Selector at the lower right corner of the front panel. Use
a Phillips screwdriver at the Purge On Selector until the correct time unit is displayed. Available time units include
seconds, minutes hours, 10 hours. Factory default time unit is 10s as displayed above.
5. Use the On Time and Off Time knobs to place the pointers at the desired time amount. Factory default for a motorized
ball valve Off Time up to 2 is 0.4. Factory default for a motorized ball valve On Time is 1.2 for 1, 1.1 for 1.5 2.
Please refer to the matrix above for information on setting the Time Units and Time Ranges for your specifc purge
valve.
REV. 08/09
Page 489 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 14
CHAPTER 4
TROUBLE SHOOTING VALVES with CYC TIMER (CSS Systems Only)
1. If the valve wont open, then check the following:
FOR MBV, MBVFS, AND MBVSR VALVES:
a. Check voltage to the CYC. Check for 115VAC at the 8-pin socket terminal 2 & 7. Check primary/
secondary voltage and continuity on fuses or circuit breakers on transformer.
b. Check voltage to MVBSR. Check 115VAC voltage at panel terminal S1 & S2 after pressing
MANUAL PURGE push button. Voltage drop should not exceed more than 10%. If voltage is
adequate, then check the relay.
c. Check voltage to MBV. Check 115VAC voltage at panel terminal C & OP after pressing MANUAL
PURGE push button. Voltage drop should not exceed more than 10%. If voltage is adequate, then
view the stem on top. If it does not rotate clockwise after pressing the MANUAL PURGE push
button, then check the relay. If relay is good then replace the motorized ball valve.
MBVSR
VALVE
MBV
VALVE
MBVFS
VALVE
CYC TIMER
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
10s
10s
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
d. Check voltage to MBVFS. Check 115VAC voltage at panel terminal V1 & V4 after pressing MANUAL PURGE push
button. Voltage drop should not exceed more than 10%. If voltage is adequate, then the stem on top. If it does not rotate
clockwise after pressing the MANUAL PURGE push button, then check the relay. If relay is good then replace the valve.
2. If the valve wont close then check the following:
FOR MBV, MBVFS, and MBVSR Valves:
a. Check voltage to the CYC. Check for 115 VAC at the 8-pin socket terminal 2 & 7. Check primary/secondary voltage and
continuity on fuses or circuit breakers on transformer.
b. Check voltage to MBVSR. No voltage should be present at panel terminal S1 & S2 during OFF period. If voltage is
present during OFF period, then review Valve Operation with CYC ON and OFF setting. If settings are correct, then
check 8-pin socket at terminal 1 & 3. If voltage is present then replace timer. If voltage is not present, then check relay.
c. Check voltage to MBV. Check 115VAC voltage at panel terminal C & CL during OFF period. Voltage drop should not
exceed more than 10%. If voltage is adequate, then view the stem on top of the valve and check the CYC ON and OFF
settings. If it does not rotate clockwise after pressing MANUAL PURGE push button, then check the CYC settings. If
settings are correct, then check 8-pin socket at terminal 1 & 3. If voltage is present during OFF period, then check relay.
Stem must be perpendicular to the fow in the close position. If not, then replace the motorized ball valve.
d. Check voltage to the MBVFS. Check 115VAC voltage at panel terminal V1 & V4 after pressing MANUAL PURGE push
button. Voltage drop should not exceed more than 10%. If voltage is adequate, then view the stem on top of the valve and
check the CYC ON and OFF settings. If it does not rotate clockwise after pressing MANUAL PURGE push button,
then check CYC settings. If settings are correct, then check 8-pin socket at terminal 1 & 3. If voltage is present during
OFF period, then check relay. Stem must be perpendicular to the fow in the close position. Allow battery pack on the
MBVFS to charge for 24 hours before using valve. If valve still does not close after a full charge, then replace it.
0
0.2
0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
10s
10s
OFF
OFF
ON
ON
CYC Timer
Transformer
CONTROL PANEL LAYOUT
Primary
Circuit Breakers
Secondary
Circuit Breaker
Door
Disconnect
Starter
w/Overload
Magnetic
Contactor
Terminal
Strip
Ground
Terminal
FRONT PANEL INSIDE PANEL
Door
Disconnect
Pump
RUN Light
HOA
Switch
REV. 08/09
Page 490 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 15
CHAPTER 4
CYC WIRING DIAGRAM WITH MBV VALVE (CSS Systems Only)
1
2
AUTO HAND
OFF
X
X
REMOTE PUMP START CONTACT
BY OTHERS
460/120VAC 250 VA
G
MDS
C1
C1
MP1 AUX
2A CB 2A CB
HP
R1
R1
EQUIP. GRND.
L1
L2
L3
PROTECT CIRCUIT AS PER NEC 430-62
SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 460V/3PH/60HZ
2 7 1 4 3
T1
T2
T3
CYCLE TIMER
MANUAL PURGE
CL
C
OP
CLOSE
OPEN
VALVE
COMMON
BALL
C1
NOTE: Valve will not open when
pump is off
1
2
AUTO HAND
OFF
X
X
REMOTE PUMP START CONTACT
BY OTHERS
575/120VAC 250 VA
G
MDS
C1
C1
MP1 AUX
2A CB 2A CB
HP
R1
R1
EQUIP. GRND.
L1
L2
L3
PROTECT CIRCUIT AS PER NEC 430-62
SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 575V/3PH/60HZ
2 7 1 4 3
T1
T2
T3
CYCLE TIMER
MANUAL PURGE
CL
C
OP
CLOSE
OPEN
VALVE
COMMON
BALL
C1
CYC WIRING DIAGRAM WITH MBV VALVE (575V CSS Systems Only)
NOTE: Valve will not open when
pump is off
NOTE: Valve must be closed
manually if open during
a power outage or the
system was turned off
NOTE: Valve must be closed
manually if open during
a power outage or the
system was turned off
REV. 08/09
Page 491 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 16
CHAPTER 4
CYC WIRING DIAGRAM WITH MBVSR VALVE
(CSS Systems Only)
1
2
AUTO HAND
OFF
X
X
REMOTE PUMP START CONTACT
BY OTHERS
460/120VAC 250 VA
G
MDS
C1
C1
MP1 AUX
2A CB 2A CB
HP
R1
R1
EQUIP. GRND.
L1
L2
L3
PROTECT CIRCUIT AS PER NEC 430-62
SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 460V/3PH/60HZ
2 7 1 4 3
T1
T2
T3
S1
CYCLE TIMER
PURGE SOLENOID
S2
MANUAL PURGE
C1
NOTE: Valve will not open
when pump is off
1
2
AUTO HAND
OFF
X
X
REMOTE PUMP START CONTACT
BY OTHERS
575/120VAC 250 VA
G
MDS
C1
C1
MP1 AUX
2A CB 2A CB
HP
R1
R1
EQUIP. GRND.
L1
L2
L3
PROTECT CIRCUIT AS PER NEC 430-62
SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 575V/3PH/60HZ
2 7 1 4 3
T1
T2
T3
S1
CYCLE TIMER
PURGE SOLENOID
S2
MANUAL PURGE
C1
CYC WIRING DIAGRAM WITH MBVSR VALVE
(575V CSS Systems Only)
NOTE: Valve will not open
when pump is off
REV. 08/09
Page 492 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 17
CYC WIRING DIAGRAM WITH MBVFS VALVE (CSS Systems Only)
NOTE: Valve will not open
when pump is off
CYC WIRING DIAGRAM WITH MBVFS VALVE (575V CSS Systems Only)
NOTE: Valve will not open
when pump is off
T1
AUTO HAND
OFF
EQUIP. GRND.
L1
L2
L3
PROTECT CIRCUIT AS PER NEC 430-62
SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 460V/3PH/60HZ
1
2
T2
T3
X
X
REMOTE PUMP START CONTACT
BY OTHERS
460/120VAC 250 VA
G
MDS
C1
C1
MP1 AUX
2A CB 2A CB
HP
2 7 1 4 3
CYCLE TIMER
R1
MANUAL PURGE
13 14
1 2
NOTE: VALVE WILL NOT OPEN WHEN PUMP IS OFF
V5
V4
V1
PURGE VALVE
5
4
1
R1 C1
V6 6
T1
AUTO HAND
OFF
EQUIP. GRND.
L1
L2
L3
PROTECT CIRCUIT AS PER NEC 430-62
SUPPLY VOLTAGE: 575V/3PH/60HZ
1
2
T2
T3
X
X
REMOTE PUMP START CONTACT
BY OTHERS
575/120VAC 250 VA
G
MDS
C1
C1
MP1 AUX
2A CB 2A CB
HP
2 7 1 4 3
CYCLE TIMER
R1
MANUAL PURGE
13 14
1 2
NOTE: VALVE WILL NOT OPEN WHEN PUMP IS OFF
V5
V4
V1
PURGE VALVE
5
4
1
R1 C1
V6 6
REV. 08/09
Page 493 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 18
CHAPTER 5
RECOVERY TANK OPERATION
1. If the Recovery Tank is not already fastened to a frame, anchor
the adjustable tripod stand to the concrete foor or metal base.
Save all literature provided with the unit for safekeeping and
future reference.
2. Liquid fows from inlet (high pressure) to outlet (low pressure).
3. Upstream/downstream valves should be installed for service.
4. Connections: A Pressure gauge (provided by others) should
be on each 1/4NPT inlet/outlet gauge port. The difference
between the two gauges indicates the pressure differential
across the recovery tank. If the pressure differential increases
to approximately 9-12 PSI, it is signaling a dirty flter bag.
FILTER BAG INSERTION
1. Insert the flter bag into the support basket and form it to the contours.
2. Filter bag collar should rest inside the support basket between the support
basket and the positioning spring.
CLOSING LID PROCEDURE
1. Close recovery tank lid.
2. Bring all swing bolts into position. We recommend approximately 30-50 lb/ft of
torque on each swing bolt.
3. Torque each swing bolt at 5 lb/ft in sequential order (1-2-3) until the recommended
torque requirement is reached. This procedure should be followed to insure a
complete seal.
FILTER
BAG
SUPPORT
BASKET
TYPICAL SEPARATOR & RECOVERY TANK SETUP
O-RING
O-RING
ANCHOR
INLET
OUTLET
UPSTREAM
VALVE
DOWNSTREAM
VALVE
MANUAL
AIR VENT
VALVE
SWING BOLT
INLET GAUGE
OUTLET
GAUGE
DRAIN
1
2
3
POSITIONING
SPRING
RECOVERY TANK OPERATION
RT/RTM-SERIES (CSR Systems Only)
TOP VIEW
5. A manual vent valve (provided) should be installed on the
1/4NPT lid vent port. As liquid enters the recovery tank,
air is allowed to escape through the top to avoid an air
pocket.
REV. 08/09
Page 494 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 19
CHAPTER 5
RECOVERY TANK STARTUP
Open upstream valve before opening the downstream valve to prevent
any back fow from occurring.
1. Vent any air from the housing by using the manual air vent.
2. Slowly increase the pressure within the recovery tank.
FILTER BAG REMOVAL
1. Close upstream and downstream valves.
2. Open the air vent.
3. Slowly open drain located at the bottom, and capture the liquid in an
appropriate container. Safeguard should be taken by wearing protective
clothing suitable for the handled material.
NOTE: Draining recovery tank eliminates overspill when removing or
installing Filter Bag.
LEAKS:
1. Check o-rings for dirt, cuts, or swelling. If damaged,
then replace both o-rings.
2. Check all threaded connections and redo sealant with a
leak lock product.
3. Check for a smooth machine surface with a straight
edge. Uneven surface may not allow surface to mate
properly.
POOR FILTRATION RESULTS
1. Check the position of the flter bag. The collar should
be recessed inside the support basket and secured into
place with the positioning spring.
2. Check if the flter bag has been ripped or torn.
3. If there is abnormal short flter bag life, then a larger
recovery tank may be required.
GENERAL RULES
Initial differential pressure across the recovery tank is between 1-2 psi. At 9-12
psi differential pressure, a flter bag reaches approximately its 80% fll capacity.
SAFETY NOTES
1. Follow the maximum allowable working pressure and temperature rating located on the Recovery Tank
label or nameplate.
2. Before pressuring the recovery tank, always make sure that all connections and swing bolts are securely
fastened.
3. If necessary, wear protective garments, safety glasses, and respirators.
4. O-rings are subject to wear and should be checked each time the flter bag is cleaned or replaced. Check
for cuts, abrasion, or swelling. Verify flter bag and o-rings are compatible with the fuid.
5. Always relieve pressure before loosing swing bolts.
6. Dispose flter bags properly.
TROUBLESHOOTING
UPSTREAM
VALVE
DOWNSTREAM
VALVE
MANUAL
AIR VENT
VALVE
DRAIN
Results may vary with each flter bag manufacture. Actual pressure differential, pressure drops, and flter
bag cleaning or replacement are unique on each individual application.
RECOVERY
TANK
O-RING
SEALS
LID
FILTER
BAG
SUPPORT
BASKET O-RING
SEALS
POSITIONING
SPRING
RECOVERY TANK OPERATION
RT/RTM-SERIES (CSR Systems Only)
REV. 08/09
Page 495 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 20
CHAPTER 5
OVERVIEW
The RTM allows easy connection from a separator to a recovery tank. It monitors the differential pressure
between the inlet and outlet of the recovery tank. This pressure differential indicates the condition of the flter
bag. When the pressure differential reaches 9-12 PSID the flter bag should be changed.
INSTALLATION
1. Install one 1/4 elbow tube ftting into the low and high side of the
differential pressure switch.
2. Install one 1/4 elbow tube ftting onto the upstream and downstream
ball valve.
4. Connect one end of the 1/4 black tubing onto high side of differential
pressure switch, and the other end to the upstream ball valve.
6. Connect one end of the 1/4 black tubing onto low side of differential
pressure switch, and the other end to the downstream ball valve.
Electrical: The differential pressure switch has the capability of switching a
Service Light (optional), when the differential pressure reaches 9 psid.
Switch specifcation: 100AC max. voltage switching, .30amps max.
switch current, 10 VA contact rating.
DIFFERENTIAL
PRESSURE SWITCH
LOW
Side Elbow
HIGH
Side Elbow
UPSTREAM
Ball Valve
Mounting Bracket
Differential
Pressure Switch
Sight Flow
Indicator
T
o

P
u
m
p

S
u
c
t
i
o
n







F
r
o
m



S
e
p
a
r
a
t
o
r
P
u
r
g
e
Mounting Bracket
1/4
Black Tubing
DOWNSTREAM
Ball Valve
RECOVERY TANK MONITOR (RTM) TUBE CONNECTION
(CSR Systems Only)
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SWITCH
Function:
1. Color GREEN Indicates CLEAN. Pressure drop 0-6psi
2. Color YELLOW Indicates CHANGE. Pressure drop 6-9psi
3. Color RED Indicates DIRTY. Pressure drop 9-12psi
C
L
E
A
N
D
I
R
T
Y
C
H
A
N
G
E
LOW HIGH
NOTE: In the event that the 1/4 tubing is not connected the Recovery
Tank, follow the instructions below.
Inlet Gauge
Outlet Gauge
UPSTREAM
Ball Valve
To HIGH Side Differential
Pressure Switch
To LOW Side Differential
Pressure Switch
DOWNSTREAM
Ball Valve
REV. 08/09
Page 496 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 21
CHAPTER 5
Mounting Bracket Included
with Differential Switch
11
10
12
5
4
4
4
6
7
3
2
1
9 8
RECOVERY TANK MONITOR PARTS LIST
RTM-SERIES (CSR Systems Only)
RTM-10 Rated at 10 GPM
RTM-20 Rated at 20 GPM
RTM-30 Rated at 30 GPM
RTM-70 Rated at 70 GPM
UPSTREAM ASSEMBLY
COMPONENTS RTM SERIES CONNECTION
ITEM # QTY. DESCRIPTION RTM-10 RTM-20 RTM-30 RTM-70
1 1 HOSE ASSEMBLY 3/4 NPT 1 NPT 1-1/2 NPT
2 1 BALL VALVE 3/4 NPT 1 NPT 1-1/2 NPT
3 2 REDUCER BUSHING * 2 x 3/4 NPT N/A
4 2 ELBOW, 90 1/4 TUBE 1/8 NPT
5 1 DIFFERENTIAL SWITCH 1/8 NPT
DOWNSTREAM ASSEMBLY
COMPONENTS RTM SERIES CONNECTION
ITEM # QTY. DESCRIPTION RTM-10 RTM-20 RTM-30 RTM-70
6 1 HOSE ASSEMBLY
1/2 NPT 3/4 NPT 1 NPT 1-1/2 NPT
7 1 SIGHT FLOW INDICATOR
8 1 NIPPLE, CLOSE
9 1 BALL VALVE
10 1 ELBOW, 90 STREET
11 1 REDUCER BUSHING * 2 x 1/2 NPT 2 x 3/4 NPT N/A
12 2 ELBOW, 90 1/4 TUBE 1/4 NPT
* RT-0.5 Requires 1NPT x 3/4NPT & 1NPT x 1/2NPT Bushing
RTM SELECTION
S
E
P
A
R
A
T
O
R

S
I
Z
E
S
Recovery Tank Size
RT-0.5 RT-1 RT-1.5
1/2
RTM-10 N/A
N/A
3/4
1
1-1/4
1-1/2
2
N/A
RTM-10
2-1/2
3
4
5
6
8
N/A
RTM-10
10
RTM-20
12
REV. 08/09
Page 497 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 22
CHAPTER 6
SERVICE GUIDE
TROUBLE AND CAUSE REMEDY
1.Failure to pump:
a. Pump not properly primed
b. Suction lift too great
c. Speed too slow
d. Motor running in wrong direction
a.Be sure that pump case and suction line are full of water.
See priming instructions.
b.Locate the pump closer to the water source. Make sure
that the suction-piping diameter is large enough.
c.Check the voltage at motor terminals and at the
meter when the pump is operating. Check for loose
connections. If voltage is low, contact your Power
Company. Be sure that wire size is adequate.
d.Check the wiring diagram on the motor nameplate. If it is
a 3-Phase motor, refer to the Wiring instructions.
2.Motor Overloads
a. Total head lower than pump rating, unit delivering
too much water
b. Specifc gravity and viscosity of liquid being
pumped different than the pump rating
c. Speed too high
a.Increase backpressure on pump by turning outlet
isolation valve to partially closed position that will not
overload the motor.
b.Consult factory.
c.Check and correct, lower speed.
3.Little or no discharge; unit will not prime; or reduced
capacity and/or head:
a. Casing not flled with water
b. Total head too high
c. Suction head higher than pump designed for
d. Impeller partially or completely plugged
e. Hole or leak in suction line
f. Foot-valve too small
g. Impeller damaged
h. Foot-valve or suction line not submerged deep
enough in water; pulling air
i. Insuffcient inlet pressure or suction head
j. Suction piping too small
k. Casing gasket leaking
l. Suction or discharge line valves closed
m. Piping is fouled or damaged
n. Clogged strainer or foot-valve
o. Air pockets or leaks in suction line
p. Strainer too small or clogged
q. Insuffcient submergence of suction pipe
r. Excessive suction lift
s. Excessively worn impeller
a.Fill pump casing. Using a foot-valve will extend pump
life and facilitate immediate priming.
b.Shorten suction head.
c. Lower suction head, install foot-valve, and prime.
d.Disassemble pump and clean out impeller.
e.Repair or replace suction line.
f. Match foot-valve to piping or install one size larger foot-
valve.
g.Disassemble pump and replace impeller.
h.Submerge lower in water.
i. Increase inlet pressure by adding more water to tank
or increasing backpressure by turning gate valve on
discharge line partially closed position.
j. Increase pipe size to pump inlet size or larger.
k.Replace.
l. Open.
m.Clean or replace.
n.Clean or replace.
o.Check the line for air leaks for excessive lift.
p.Check the end of the suction pipe and foot valve to
see that it is not plugged or buried in mud or sediment.
When installing in pond or lake, support the suction line
so that it will be submerged in water, but not imbedded
in mud or sediment. A strainer with greater screen area
may be required.
q.Add suffcient pipe to keep the submerged end well
below the water surface.
r.If caused by suction pipe friction, increase the size of the
pipe; otherwise move the pump closer to the water level
s.Order replacement parts. See repair list.
TROUBLESHOOTING
REV. 08/09
Page 498 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
1
5
Section 15, Page 23
CHAPTER 6
SERVICE GUIDE
TROUBLE AND CAUSE REMEDY
4.Pump leaks at shaft:
a. Worn mechanical sea
b. Replacement seal not installed properly
a. Replace.
b. Follow Maintenance instructions carefully.
5.Motor will not start:
a. Blown fuses or tripped breakers
b. No electric current at motor
c. Motor hums but will not start
d. Motor damaged by lightning or voltage surge
a. Replace with new fuses or reset breakers. NOTE:
Blown fuses or tripped breakers are caused by a short
circuit in the panel electrical system or motor wiring.
b.The power supply may be off, the connections may be
loose, connections may be incorrect, or the wire may
have been chewed by rodents.
c. Turn power off. Check the rotating element of the pump
to see that it turns freely.
d. Take the motor to any authorized motor repair shop.
6. Pump losses prime or loss of suction after
satisfactory operation:
a. Air leaks in suction line
b. Excessive suction lift and operating too near shut-
off point
c. Water level drops while pumping, exposing suction
pipe or strainer
d. When unit was last turned off, water siphoned out
of pump casing
e. Suction head higher than pump designed for
f. Insuffcient inlet pressure or suction head
g. Clogged foot-valve, strainer, or pump
h. Defective wearplate(s)
a. Check suction piping. Piping might have frozen, causing
it to split. Repair or replace suction line.
b. Move the pump closer to the water level.
c. Check the water supply. Add a length of pipe to the
suction line to keep the submerged end under water.
d. Refll (reprime) pump casing before restarting.
e. Lower suction head, install foot-valve and primer.
f. Increase inlet pressure by adding more water to tank
or increasing backpressure by turning gate valve on
discharge line to partially closed position.
g. Unclog, clear, or replace as necessary.
h. Replace.
7. Pump vibrates and/or makes excessive noise
a. Mounting plate or foundation not rigid enough
b. Foreign material in pump causing unbalance
c. Impeller bent
d. Cavitation present
e. Piping not supported to relieve any strain on pump
assembly
a. Reinforce.
b. Disassemble pump and remove.
c. Replace impeller.
d. Check suction line for proper size and check valve in
suction line if completely open, remove any sharp bends
before pump, and shorten suction line.
e. Make necessary adjustments.
8. Pump runs but no fuid
a. Faulty suction piping (air leak)
b. Pump located too far from fuid source
c. Suction valve closed
d. Clogged strainer
e. Fouled foot-valve
f. Discharge height too great
g. Fouled impeller
h. Faulty mechanical seal
a. Replace.
b. Relocate.
c. Open.
d. Clean or replace.
e. Clean or replace.
f. Lower the height.
g. Clean or replace.
h. Replace
TROUBLESHOOTING
REV. 08/09
Page 499 of 541
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798
www.griswoldwatersystems.com
GWS-1009-A 1/11
LIMITED WARRANTY

Warranty 1. - Griswold Water Systems (GWS) warrants its products to be free from defects in material and
workmanship as indicated below:
GWS warrants Separators and Electronic Water Treatment Units for a period of sixty (60) months a.
from the date of install or sixty-six (66) months from date of shipment, whichever occurs rst.
Except as set forth herein, GWS warrants all other products, including pump control panels and b.
system components, for a period of twelve (12) months from the date of install or eighteen (18)
months from the date of shipment, whichever occurs rst.
GWS will transfer and assign to the customer any extended warranties provided by the original c.
equipment manufacturer for GWS purchased items.
Notwithstanding the limited warranty herein, pump seals, lter bags and other normal wear items d.
and products are not covered under this limited warranty.
Limits of Liability 2. - GWS sole responsibility for malfunctions and defects in product(s) is limited to repair
and replacement, as set forth in this limited warranty statement.
This warranty does not cover incidental or consequential damages, injuries, loss of revenue, fail- a.
ure to realize savings or other costs resulting from defective product(s).
The cost of product installation, removal or replacement is excluded from warranty coverage. b.
Return shipping costs to GWS or any original equipment manufacturer are the customers re- c.
sponsibility.
Fitness of Use 3. THE WARRANTIES HEREIN ARE EXCLUSIVE AND NO OTHER WARRANTY OR
CONDITION, WHETHER WRITTEN OR ORAL, IS EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED AND GWS SPECIFICAL-
LY DISCLAIMS ANY IMPLIED WARRANTIES OR CONDITIONS OF MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFAC-
TORY QUALITY, AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Damages 4. - This limited warranty does not apply to products, damages or injuries resulting from misuse,
neglect, normal expected wear, corrosion, improper installation, modications, alterations, tampering or
operation contrary to GWS or an original equipment manufacturers recommendations. THE REMEDIES
IN THIS WARRANTY ARE CUSTOMERS SOLE AND EXCLUSIVE REMEDIES.
RMA Required 5. Before sending any item to GWS for warranty repair or replacement, a Return Material
Authorization (RMA) number must be obtained from GWS.
This number needs to be placed on the address label and the packing slip in order to assure a.
proper credit is issued.
Ship defective unit, freight prepaid, to GWS, ATTENTION RMA#__, 1525 E. 6th St., Corona, CA b.
92879.
Inspection 6. - Upon inspection of the product at GWS facility in Corona, California within the warranty
period, if the defective material is determined to be covered under this limited warranty, GWS shall repair
or replace the defective material at no additional cost to the customer.
Repairs & Replacements 7. - GWS has the option, at its sole discretion, to either repair or replace defec-
tive items with either new or remanufactured components. Warranty replacement or repair shall not
extend the original warranty period.
Shipping Damage 8. All products are shipped F.O.B. factory. Damage to a unit during shipping must be
claimed at the time of product receipt and noted on the bill of lading before signing. Any and all shipping
damages are the responsibility of the freight company and not the obligation or responsibility of GWS.
Shipment of Replacement Parts and Units 9. - The customer must provide GWS with a Purchase Order
for replacement units. When received by GWS, the returned unit will be inspected.
If the defective unit is determined to be covered under this limited warranty, a credit for the cost of a.
the replacement unit will be made.
If the defect is not a covered defect, the replacement unit will be invoiced in accordance with b.
the Purchase Order. The customer can request the unit be returned to the customer. Shipping
charges will be the responsibility of the customer.
Page 500 of 541
F.4 / P.1 10865 WASHINGTON BOULEVARD CULVER CITY CALIFORNIA 90232 >T.310 838 9700 F.310 838 9737 EHRLICHARCHITECTS.COM
To Date / /
Project Name
Project No.
Submittal No. Description
SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL
ACTION
APPROVED (Fabrication/Installation may be undertaken. Approval does not authorize changes to the Contract Sum or Contract Time.)
APPROVED AS CORRECTED (Fabrication/Installation may be undertaken. Approval does not authorize changes to the Contract Sum or Contract Time.)
REVISE AND RESUBMIT (Fabrication and/or installation MAY NOT be undertaken. In resubmitting, limit corrections to items marked.)
REJECTED (Fabrication and/or installation MAY NOT be undertaken. In resubmitting, limit corrections to items marked.)
COMMENTS
Signature Date / /
Print Name
Nathan Meikle
SUNDT Construction Inc.
2620 South 55th Street
Tempe, AZ 85282
12 07 2011
John M. Roll Federal Courthouse
562.00
132 - 23 65 01 - 00 Cooling Towers
G
Corrections or comments made to this submittal do not relieve the Contractor with compliance with the requirements of the Contract documents.
This check is only for review of the general conformance with the design intent as expressed in the Contract documents. The Contractor is
responsible for conforming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabricating processes and techniques of construction,
coordinating the work with all other trades, and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
12 07 2011
Laura Hudson
Submittal Transmittal
Yuma Courthouse (Construction) Sundt Construction, Inc. (F)
Prime Contract #: GS-09P-10-KTC-0045
Project # 141111
Project Phone:
Project Fax:
98 West First Street
Yuma, AZ 85364
Reference Number: 0191 Date: 12/2/2011
Nate Meikle Laura Hudson
Transmitted To: Transmitted By:
Ehrlich Architects Sundt Construction, Inc. (F)
10865 Washington Road
Culver City, CA 90232
Tel: 310-838-9700
Fax: 310-838-9737
108 West 1st Street Suite #D
Yuma, AZ 85364
For Review and
Approval
12/16/2011 Cooling Towers 132 - 23 65 01 - 00 1
Package Action: Description: Submittal Package No: Qty Due Date:
email approval
Tracking Number: Delivered Via: Transmitted For:
Item Action: Notes: Description: Qty: Items:
Open-Circuit, Induced Draft, Cooling Towers
Product Data
For Review and
Approval
1 23 65 01 - 0450 -
00
Shop Drawings For Review and
Approval
1 23 65 01 - 0451 -
00
Certificates For Review and
Approval
1 23 65 01 - 0452 -
00
VFD For Review and
Approval
1 23 65 01 - 0453 -
00
Seismic Certification For Review and
Approval
1 23 65 01 - 0454 -
00
Cc: Company Name: Contact Name: Copies: Notes:
Remarks:
Signed Date Signature Nate Meikle
SubTranWdevXI.rpt
REVIEWEDBYSUNDTCONSTRUCTION,INC.
Reviewisfordesignonly.Subcontractorisresponsible
fordimensions,quantities,andfullcompliancewiththe
requireddocuments.Approvalbythearchitectdoesnot
relievethesubcontractoroftheresponsibilityrequired
bythetermsandconditionsofthiscontractwithSundt
Construction,Inc.
ByNathanMeikle________Dated:________________
12-2-11'















SEE SUBMITTAL REVIEW FORM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
AS APPLICABLE.
ACTION SHOWN ABOVE IS ONLY FOR CONFORMANCE WITH THE
DESIGN CONCEPT OF THE WORK AND THE INFORMATION IN THE
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
BY REVIEW AND SUBMISSION, CONTRACTOR REPRESENTS THAT
HE HAS DETERMINED AND VERIFIED MATERIALS, FIELD
MEASUREMENTS, AND CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA, SPECIFIED
PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA AND SIMILAR DATA.
DEVIATIONS FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ARE NOT REVIEWED
UNLESS SPECIFICALLY REQUESTED IN WRITING BY
CONTRACTOR. REVIEW ON RE-SUBMISSION WILL COVER ONLY
DESIGNATED CHANGES ON THIS SUBMITTAL AND OTHER
CHANGES CLEARLY IDENTIFIED BY CONTRACTOR WITH AN
ENCIRCLEMENT.
REVIEWED BY DATE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED
EXCEPTIONS NOTED
SEE COMMENTS
REJECTED
MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED
RESUBMIT
DO NOT RESUBMIT
REVIEW NOT REQUIRED
X
RICHARD PATTON 2011-12-07 06:51-07:00






HVAC SUBMITTALS

Yuma Courthouse
98 W 1
st
St.
Yuma, AZ 85364

23 65 01 Cooling Tower


SPEC DESCRIPTION PAGE


2.1 OPEN-CIRCUIT, INDUCED-DRAFT, COOLING TOWERS
A Product Will Comply
B Cooling Tower Wind Load 7, 15, 16
C Casing and Frame 16
D Collection Basin 20
E Mechanically Operated, Collection Basin Water-Level
Control
25
F Water Distribution System 19
G Fill 18
H Drift Eliminator 18
I Air-intake Louvers 31
J Axial Fan 17
K Drive System 17
L Fan Motor (VFD) 17, 26, 34-40
See section 23 05 14
M Fan Discharge Stack 28
N Vibration Switch 25
O Personnel Access Components 20, 21

Climatec, Inc.
2851 W K thl R d
COOLING TOWERS
PROJ ECT: J ohn M Roll US Courthouse
SUBMITTAL DATA
SUBMITTED BY:
LOCATION:
ENGINEER:
CONTRACTOR:
Yuma, AZ
LSW Engineers
Tempe Mechanical
2851 W. Kathleen Road
Phoenix, AZ 85053
602-944-3330
Submittal Date:
Plan Date:
Specification Section:
Prepared by: J ames Stein
Sales Engineer:
MANUFACTURER:
PRODUCT:
TAG:
NC8401
CT-1,2
Bryan Nelson
//2011
/2011
236501
Marley

Page 1 of 40
Material List
Project:
Equipment:
Manufacturer:
Tags: CT-1,2
J ohn M Roll US Courthouse
NC8401
Marley

Standard Components and Options:
All 300 stainless steel construction.
5 year parts warranty.
Factory installed basin sweeper piping.
Float valve.
Access doors with interior plenum walkway.
Ladder with handrail.
Vibration switch (interior mounted w/ manual reset).
Bottom equalizer connection.
Double top inlet connections with HC valves.
Side suction outlet.
Gear driven fan motor.

Submittal data and drawings are typical of CT-1. CT-2 will be designed as a mirror
image of CT-1. Please confirm access and piping locations prior to release.



Standard Components and Options:
All 300 stainless steel construction.
5 year parts warranty.
Factory installed basin sweeper piping.
Float valve.
Access doors with interior plenum walkway.
Ladder with handrail.
Vibration switch (interior mounted w/ manual reset).
Bottom equalizer connection.
Double top inlet connections with HC valves.
Side suction outlet.
Gear driven fan motor.

Submittal data and drawings are typical of CT-1. CT-2 will be designed as a mirror
image of CT-1. Please confirm access and piping locations prior to release.



Page 2 of 40
UPDATE Version 4.14.7 2011 SPX Cooling Technologies, Inc.
Product Data: 6/29/2011 (Current) 8/29/2011 3:16:45 PM
Job Information Selected By
Climatec, Inc. BRYAN NELSON
10802 N. 23rd Avenue Tel 602-906-4128
Phoenix, AZ 85029 Fax 602-944-4759
bryann@climatec.com
Cooling Tower Definition
Manufacturer Marley Fan Motor Speed 1800 rpm
Product NC Steel Fan Motor Capacity per cell 7.500 BHp
Model NC8401MAN1 Fan Motor Output per cell 7.376 BHp
Cells 1 Fan Motor Output total 7.376 BHp
CTI Certified No Air Flow per cell 55280 cfm
Fan 6.000 ft, 5 Blades Air Flow total 55280 cfm
Fan Speed 370 rpm, 6974.3 fpm Static Lift 10.425 ft
Fans per cell 1 Distribution Head Loss 0.000 ft
ASHRAE 90.1 Performance 78.4 gpm/Hp
Model Group Standard Low Sound (A)
Sound Pressure Level 73 dBA (Single Cell), 5.000 ft from Air Inlet Face. See sound report for details.
Conditions
Tower Water Flow 390.0 gpm Air Density In 0.07058 lb/ft
Hot Water Temperature 94.92 F Air Density Out 0.07129 lb/ft
Range 10.00 F Humidity Ratio In 0.01848
Cold Water Temperature 84.92 F Humidity Ratio Out 0.02865
Approach 4.92 F Wet-Bulb Temp. Out 87.43 F
Wet-Bulb Temperature 80.00 F Estimated Evaporation 4.7 gpm
Relative Humidity 50.0 % Total Heat Rejection 1943200 Btu/h
Capacity 100.0 %
This selection satisfies your design conditions.
The performance for this selection is not guaranteed because the approach is less than 5 F.
This selection is not CTI Certified because: the approach is less than 5 F.
Weights & Dimensions Minimum Enclosure Clearance
Per Cell Total Clearance required on air inlet sides of tower
Shipping Weight 3841 lb 3841 lb without altering performance. Assumes no
Heaviest Section 3841 lb air from below tower.
Max Operating Weight 8266 lb 8266 lb
Width 12.830 ft 12.830 ft Solid Wall 4.055 ft
Length 6.520 ft 6.520 ft 50 % Open Wall 3.000 ft
Height 10.265 ft
Weights and dimensions do not include options; refer to sales drawings. For CAD layouts refer to file 8401_ALN.dxf
Cold Weather Operation
Heater Sizing (to prevent freezing in the collection basin during periods of shutdown)
Heater kW/Cell 9.0 7.5 6.0 4.5 3.0
Ambient Temperature F -26.64 -14.92 -3.20 8.52 20.23

Page 3 of 40
2.1C

Page 4 of 40

Page 5 of 40

Page 6 of 40

Page 7 of 40

Page 8 of 40

Page 9 of 40

Page 10 of 40
NC

Stainless Steel Cooling Tower

Product Specifications

Page 11 of 40
Specifications / Base
Base 4
Thermal Performance 5
Performance Warranty 5
Design Loading 5
Construction 6
Mechanical Equipment 7
Fill, Louvers and Drift Eliminators 8
Hot Water Distribution System 9
Casing, Fan Deck and Fan Cylinder 9
Access 10
Cold Water Collection Basin 10
Specifications / Options
Convenience and Safety Options
Guardrail and Ladder 11
Ladder Extension 11
Ladder Safety Cage 11
Ladder Safety Gate 11
Access Door Platform 13
Plenum Walkway 13
Interior Mechanical Equipment Access Platform 13
Control Options
Fan Motor Starter Control Panel 14
Marley Single Point TF Terminal Box 14
Vibration Limit Switch 15
Basin Heater 15
Electric Water Level Control 15
Fan Motor Variable Speed Drive 16
Marley Premium VFD System 17
Miscellaneous Options
Motor Outside of the Airstream 18
Fan Cylinder Extensions 18
Inlet Flow Control Valves 19
Equalizer Flume Weir Gate 19
Sound Control 19
Inlet Sound Attenuators 19
Outlet Sound Attenuators 20
Quiet Fan 20
Ultra Quiet Fan 21
Single Hot Water Inlet Connection 21
Air Inlet Screens 21
High Wind/Seismic Designs 22
Multicell Basin Equalizer Outlets 22
Basin Sweeper Piping 22
Extended Geareducer Lube Line Dipstick 22
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Contents
2

Page 12 of 40
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
3
NC Stainless Steel towers are factory assembled,
crossflow cooling towers, designed to serve air conditioning
and refrigeration systems as well as industrial process
loads and power applications on clean water. They evolve
from a factory-assembled concept of towers pioneered
by Marley some 50 years ago, and incorporate all of the
design advancements that our customers have found
valuable. The NC has been designed specifically for sound
control and tonnage density and represents the current
state of the art in this cooling tower category.
This booklet not only relates the language to use in
describing an appropriate NC cooling towerbut also
defines why certain items and features are important
enough to specify with the intention of insisting upon
compliance by all bidders. The left-hand column of
pages 4 thru 22 provides appropriate text for the various
specification paragraphs, whereas the right hand column
comments on the meaning of the subject matter and
explains its value.
Pages 4 thru 10 indicate those paragraphs which will
result in the purchase of a basic cooling towerone that
accomplishes the specified thermal performance, but which
will lack many operationand maintenance-enhancing
accessories and features that are usually desired by those
persons who are responsible for the continued operation
of the system of which the tower is part. It will also
incorporate those standard materials which testing and
experience has proven to provide acceptable longevity in
normal operating conditions.
Pages 11 thru 22 provide paragraphs intended to add
those features, components and materials that will
customize the tower to meet the user's requirements.
Space does not permit definition and explanation of all of
the possible options that can be applied to the
NC. We realize that you, the purchaser, must be happy
with the tower's characteristics, and we are prepared to
provideor provide forany reasonable enhancement that
you are willing to define and purchase. Your needs will
become part of the continuing evolution of this Marley
product line.

Page 13 of 40
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Base
4
1.0 Base:
1.1 Provide an induced draft, crossflow type,
factory assembled, film fill, industrial duty,
stainless steel cooling tower situated as
shown on the plans. The limiting overall
dimensions of the tower shall be _____
wide, _____ long, and _____ high. Total
operating horsepower of all fans shall
not exceed ____ hp, consisting of ___ @
_____ hp motor(s). Tower shall be similar
and equal in all respects to Marley Model
____________.

Your specification base establishes the type, configuration, base material and
physical limitations of the cooling tower to be quoted. During the planning and
layout stages of your project, you will have focused your attention on a cool-
ing tower selection that fits your space allotment, and whose power usage is
acceptable. Limitations on physical size and total operating horsepower avoid
the introduction of unforeseen operational and site-related influences. Specifying
the number of cells, and the maximum fan hp/cell will work to your advantage.

The benefit of crossflow towers is that they are inherently easy to operate,
access and maintain. Compared to counterflow towers, crossflow towers have a
spacious plenum between banks of fill for easy access to all of the towers inter-
nal components, plus the water distribution system is adjacent to the fan deck
and can be maintained during operation.

The NC is also available unassembled for on-site assembly.

Page 14 of 40
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Base
5
2.0 Thermal Performance and Efficiency:
2.1 The tower shall be capable of cooling
_____ GPM of water from ____ F to
_____ F at a design entering air wet-
bulb temperature of _____ F, and its
thermal rating shall be Certified by the
Cooling Technology Institute.
2.2 The tower shall be capable of a minimum
_____ GPM/hp efficiency per ASHRAE
Standard 90.1.
2.3 CTI Certification notwithstanding, the
cooling tower manufacturer shall guaran-
tee that the tower supplied will meet the
specified performance conditions when
the tower is installed according to plan. If,
because of a suspected thermal perfor-
mance deficiency, the owner chooses to
conduct an on-site thermal performance
test under the supervision of a qualified,
disinterested third party in accordance
with CTI or ASME standards during the
first year of operation; and if the tower
fails to perform within the limits of test
tolerance; then the cooling tower manu-
facturer will pay for the cost of the test
and will make such corrections as are
appropriate and agreeable to the owner
to compensate for the performance defi-
ciency.
3.0 Warranty:
3.1 The entire tower, including structure, cas-
ing, basins, decking, fan(s), motor(s), and
all mechanical drive components (includ-
ing belts, if used) shall be warranted
against failure due to defects in materials
and workmanship for a period of five (5)
years from the date of shipment to the
job. Towers not covered by a warranty of
this scope will not be accepted.
4.0 Design Loading:
4.1 The tower structure, anchorage and all
its components shall be designed by
licensed professional engineers per the
International Building Code to withstand
a wind load of 30 psf, as well as a .3g
seismic load. The fan deck, hot water
basin covers and, where specified, main-
tenance platforms shall be designed for
60 psf live load or a 200 lb. concentrated
CTI Certification means that the tower has
been tested under operating conditions and
found to perform as rated by the manufactur-
er under those circumstances. It assures the
buyer that the tower is not intentionally or
inadvertently undersized by the manufacturer.
The minimum efficiency per ASHRAE Standard 90.1 for induced draft open
cooling towers applied to comfort cooling is 38.2 GPM/hp @ 95/85/75. There
are no efficiency requirements for non-comfort cooling applications. If you want
greater efficiency you can require it by specifying a higher ASHRAE Standard
90.1 GPM/hp.

Each model's ASHRAE Standard 90.1 rating can be viewed in our online
sizing and selection software at http://spxcooling.com/update.
CTI certification alone is not sufficient to assure you that the tower will perform
satisfactorily in your situation. Certification is established under relatively con-
trolled conditions, and towers seldom operate under such ideal circumstances.
They are affected by nearby structures, machinery, enclosures, effluent from
other towers, etc. Responsible and knowledgeable bidders will take such site-
specific effects into consideration in selecting the towerbut the specifier must
insist by the written specification that the designer/manufacturer guarantee this
real world performance. Any reluctance on the part of the bidder should cause
you some concern.
It is important to understand the distinction between structure and anchor-
age. Specifying that only the anchorage meet these requirements means the
tower can become non-functional, even fall down, yet remain attached to the
foundation. Specifying structure will require the tower to remain operational.
The indicated design values are the minimum allowables under accepted design
standards. They give you assurance that the tower can be shipped, handled,
hoistedand ultimately operated in a normal cooling tower environment. Most
NC models will withstand significantly higher wind and seismic loads. If your
geographic location dictates higher wind load or seismic load values, please


Page 15 of 40
2.1B
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Base
6
load. Guardrails, where specified, shall
be capable of withstanding a 200 lb.
concentrated live load in any direction,
and shall be designed in accordance with
OSHA guidelines.

5.0 Construction:
5.1 Except where otherwise specified, all
components of the cooling tower shall
be fabricated of heavy-gauge, series
300 stainless steel. The tower shall be
capable of withstanding water having a
chloride content (NaCl) up to 750 ppm; a
sulfate content (SO4) up to 1200 ppm; a
calcium content (CaCO3) up to 800 ppm;
silica (SiO2) up to 150 ppm; and design
hot water temperatures up to 125F.
The circulating water shall contain no oil,
grease, fatty acids, or organic solvents.
5.2 The specifications, as written, are intend-
ed to indicate those materials that will
be capable of withstanding the above
water quality in continuing service, as
well as the loads described in paragraph
4.1. They are to be regarded as minimum
requirements. Where component materi-
als peculiar to individual tower designs
are not specified, the manufacturers shall
take the above water quality and load
carrying capabilities into account in the
selection of their materials of manufac-
ture.
make the appropriate changes, after discussion with your Marley sales repre-
sentative.

Some countries and states, like Florida, require structure and anchorage to
meet a given loading. Check with you local officials.

30 psf windload, .3g seismic loadapplicable for most applications but con-
sult the local code official for actual requirements.
60 psf live load, 200 lb concentrated loadensures the tower can be safely
accessed for routine maintenance when a guardrail is installed as well ensuring
the end user complies with government safety laws.
For pure resistance to corrosioncoupled with the capability to meet stringent
fire and building codesthere is no substitute for stainless steel! No paints or
electrostatically-applied coatings, however exotic they may be, can match stain-
less steel's ability to withstand adverse operating conditions.

Although SPX Cooling Technologies makes use of many structural FRP com-
ponents in various other product lines, they are held to a relative minimum in
the NC Stainless line. This is to assure that there will be no question as to the
structural integrity, fire resistance and life expectancy in the mind of the owner.

Except for those unusual operating situations where the circulating water may
be so laden with suspended solids, algae, fatty acids, product fibers, active
organisms reflected in BOD, and the like that plugging of film type fill is a prob-
ability, the NC Stainless is relatively immune to poor water quality. Where such
conditions do exist, however, thought should be given to the prevention of such
carryoveror to the use of a Marley splash-fill product. Please discuss your situ-
ation with your Marley sales representative.
Factory Assembly

Page 16 of 40
2.1C
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Base
7
5.3* The tower shall include all design and
material modifications necessary to meet
the fire rating requirements of Factory
Mutual. The product proposed shall be
listed in the FM Approval Guide, latest
edition.
*Available as an option on all models.
6.0 Mechanical Equipment:
6.1 Fan(s) shall be propeller-type, incorporat-
ing wide-chord aluminum alloy blades and
galvanized hubs. Blades shall be individu-
ally adjustable. Maximum fan tip speed
shall be 13,000 ft/min. Fan(s) shall be
driven through a right angle, industrial
duty, oil lubricated, geared speed reducer
that requires no oil changes for the first
five (5) years of operation. The gearbox
bearings shall be rated at an L
10A
service
life of 100,000 hours or greater.

6.1 (alternate)* Fan(s) shall be propeller-type,
incorporating wide-chord aluminum alloy
blades and galvanized hubs. Blades shall
be individually adjustable. Fan(s) shall
be driven through a one-piece multi-
groove, solid back V-type belt, pulleys and
tapered roller bearings. Bearings shall be
rated at an L
10A
service life of 40,000
hours or greater.
*Currently available on NC models up to 60 hp.

6.2 Motor(s) shall be ____ hp maximum,
TEFC, 1.15 service factor, variable torque,
and specially insulated for cooling tower
duty. Speed and electrical characteristics
shall be ______ RPM, single-winding, ___
phase, ____ hertz, ____ volts. Motor shall
operate in the shaft-horizontal position,
and nameplate horsepower shall not be
exceeded at design operation.
6.3 The complete mechanical equipment
assembly for each cell shall be supported
by a rigid steel structural support that
resists misalignment between the motor
and the gear reducer.
The Marley NC is the only crossflow cooling
tower approved for single-cell FM installa-
tions. This could have a very beneficial effect
upon your fire insurance premiums. Towers
not able to meet FM requirements may
require the inclusion of a fire protection sprin-
kler system to achieve a comparable level of
insurance premium cost. Even if you are not
insured by FM, this requirement ensures that
each cell will contain any fire that may occur without losing the ability of limited
operations and capacity.
Propeller-type fans require only half the operating hp of blower-type fans.
However, they should be readily adjustable to permit compensation for jobsite
conditions.

With NC, the choice is yours. The exclusive Marley System5 Geareducer

requires no oil changes for five years, offering you unmatched reliability and
low maintenance. Ideal for owners concerned about downtime or maintenance
costs. Currently available on NC models up to 60 hp, the Marley Power Belt
drive system features all-aluminum sheaves, power band belts and long-life
bearings for dependable service.

TEFC motors offer additional benefits over TEAO motors whose only source of
cooling is the flow of air produced by the cooling tower fan. This air rate is not
always ideal due to motor position, blockage, etc. TEFC ensures the motor will
always be cooled properly.

Unless otherwise specified, motor speed will be 1800 RPM in 60 Hertz areas
and 1500 RPM in 50 Hertz areas on standard models. Low sound models will
use motor speeds appropriate for the specific model. If you prefer the operat-
ing flexibility of two-speed operation, please specify two-speed, single-winding
or double-winding motors which offer full and half speeds for maximum energy
savings. Incidentally, two speed, double-winding motors are a better choice than
separate pony motors which simply double the problems indicated above and
induce parasitic loads during operation for lower than nameplate efficiency.


Page 17 of 40
2.1K
2.1M
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Base
8
LOUVERS
DRIFT ELIMINATOR
FILL
7.0 Fill, Louvers and Drift Eliminators:
7.1 Fill shall be film type, thermoformed of 15
mil thick PVC, with louvers formed as part
of each fill sheet. Fill shall be suspended
from stainless steel structural tubing
supported from the tower structure, and
shall be elevated above the floor of the
cold water basin to facilitate cleaning. Air
inlet faces of the tower shall be free of
water splash-out. Fill shall be capable of
withstanding a hot water temperature of
125F.
7.2 Drift eliminators shall be PVC, triple-pass,
and shall limit drift losses to 0.005% or
less of the design water flow rate.
Louvers integral with the fill keep the flowing water within the confines of the
fill. The separate external louvers used by others permit water to escape the fill
and form ice or produce an unsightly situation adjacent to the tower and waste
water. If you plan to use your tower in the
wintertime, particularly for free cooling,
integral louvers will put your operating
concerns to rest. Integral louvers offer the
best available technology for winter opera-
tion and water conservation.

Fill options are available for hot water tem-
peratures up to 140F.
Drift rate varies with design water load-
ing and air rate, as well as drift eliminator
depth and number of directional changes.
A drift rate of 0.001% is readily avail-
able on many standard models. If a lower
rate is required, please discuss with your
Marley sales representative.

Keep in mind
Drift for towers with three-pass high efficiency eliminators constitute a
small percentage of water usage.
Unlike thermal performance, drift rates are not certified and field drift
tests are cost prohibitive for most applications.
Drift rates below 0.001 are difficult to measure in the field.
Certain water treatment chemicals can impact the drift rate.

Page 18 of 40
2.1G
2.1H
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Base
9
8.0 Hot Water Distribution System:
8.1 Two stainless steel open basins (one
above each bank of fill) shall receive hot
water piped to each cell of the tower.
These basins shall be installed and sealed
at the factory, and shall be equipped with
removable, stainless steel covers capable
of withstanding the loads described in
paragraph 4.1. All components of these
basins, with the exception of the nozzles,
shall be stainless steel. The water dis-
tribution system shall be accessible and
maintainable during tower fan and water
operation.
8.2 Each basin shall include an inlet hole
and bolt circle to accept a 125# flange
connection per ANSI B16.1. Removable,
interchangeable polypropylene nozzles
installed in the floor of these basins shall
provide full coverage of the fill by gravity
flow.
8.3 The water distribution system shall be
accessible and maintainable while tower
is operating.
9.0 Casing, Fan Deck and Fan Guard:
9.1 The casing and fan deck shall be heavy-
gauge stainless steel, and shall be capa-
ble of withstanding the loads described in
paragraph 4.1. The top of the fan cylinder
shall be equipped with a conical, non-
sagging, removable fan guard, fabricated
of welded 5/16" and 7 gauge rods, and
hot dip galvanized after fabrication. Fan
cylinders 5'-0" in height and over shall
not be required to have a fan guard.
Gravity-flow distribution basins are a feature of crossflow type towers, result-
ing in operating pump heads of 10 to 20 feet less than that encountered in
counterflow towers with pressurized spray systems. Also, these basins are
located where they can be easily inspectedeven maintainedwhile the tower is
in operation.
Some manufacturers require shutting down the tower to clean the distribution
system. Can you afford to do that?
Materials other than heavy-gauge steel for fan decks may be unable to meet
your specified loading requirements. See remarks Guardrail and Ladder on
page 13.

In addition steel is excellent at resisting damage, cracking, UV and fire.

The heavy construc-
tion of the Marley
fan guard gener-
ally precludes the
need for stainless
steel material. If
you would prefer
these to be stain-
less steel, please
adjust the wording
of the last sentence
accordingly.

Page 19 of 40
2.1F
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Base
10
10.0 Access:
10.1 A large stainless steel, rectangular access
door shall be located on both end panels
for entry into the cold water basin. Doors
shall provide access to the fan plenum
area to facilitate inspection and allow
maintenance to the fan drive system.
11.0 Cold Water Collection Basin:
11.1 The collection basin shall be heavy-gauge
S300 stainless steel, and shall include
the number and type of suction connec-
tions required to accommodate the out-
flow piping system shown on the plans.
Suction connections shall be equipped
with stainless steel debris screens. A fac-
tory-installed, float-operated, mechanical
make-up valve shall be included. An over-
flow and drain connection shall be provid-
ed in each cell of the cooling tower. The
basin floor shall slope toward the drain to
allow complete flush out of debris and silt
which may accumulate. Towers of more
than one cell shall include stainless steel
flumes for flow and equalization between
cells. The basin shall be accessible and
maintainable while water is circulating.
The access doors on NC8401 and NC8402 towers are 30" wide by 33" high.
On NC8403 thru NC8414 the access doors are 48" high. Small access doors
are prohibitive and discourage mainte-
nance, which in turn can impact your
operation. Specifying the size of the door
will cause some bidders to take exception,
alerting you to a potential maintenance
headache. Two doors are standard on all
NC towersone in each endwall.
The NC tower design offers side-suctions,
side-outlet sumps and bottom outlets to
accommodate a significant variety of piping
schemes. Unless so specified, the tower
you may be asked to approve may only be
available with one type of suction connec-
tion, requiring you to redesign your piping
layout.

Page 20 of 40
2.1O
2.1D
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Options
11
Convenience and Safety Options
Guardrail and Ladder:
10.2 Add the following paragraph in the
Access section: The top of the tower
shall be equipped with a sturdy guardrail,
complete with kneerail and toeboard,
designed according to OSHA guide-
lines and factory welded into subas-
semblies for ease of field installation.
Posts, toprails and kneerails shall be 1.5
" square tubing. The guardrail assembly
shall be hot dipped galvanized after weld-
ing and capable of withstanding a 200
pound concentrated live load in any direc-
tion. Posts shall be spaced on centers
of 8'-0" or less. A 1'-6" wide aluminum
ladder with 3" I-beam side rails and 1.25"
diameter rungs shall be permanently
attached to the endwall casing of the
tower, rising from the base of the tower
to the top of the guardrail.
Ladder Extension:
10.2 Add the following to the end of the
above paragraph: Provide a ladder exten-
sion for connection to the foot of the
ladder attached to the tower casing. This
extension shall be long enough to rise
from the roof (grade) level to the base
of the tower. The installing contractor
shall be responsible for cutting the ladder
to length; attaching it to the foot of the
tower ladder; and anchoring it at its base.

Ladder Safety Cage:
10.3 Add the following paragraph in the
Access section: A heavy gauge alumi-
num safety cage shall surround the lad-
der, extending from a point approximately
7'-0" above the foot of the ladder to the
top of the guardrail.
Ladder Safety Gate:
10.3 Add the following paragraph in the
Access section: A galvanized steel, self-
closing gate shall be provided at the
guardrail level of the ladder.

The NC cooling tower has been designed to minimize the need for main-
tenance personnel to get on top of the tower to perform maintenance
and inspections.

For the comfort and safety of your operating personnel, we recommend
that you specify a ladder and guardrailand that you
require it of all bidders! Although not required for
safe operation by OSHA many user's own safety
rules may dictate these options.

Outside the tower, stainless steel guardrail mate-
rial is not normally considered necessary. If your
air quality is sufficiently poor to warrant stainless
steel, change the specification wording accord-
ingly.
Many towers are installed such that the base of the tower is 2'-0" or
more above the roof or grade level. This makes it difficult to get up to
the foot of the attached ladder. The ladder extension alleviates this prob-
lem. Marley ladder extensions are available in standard 5'-0" and 11'-0"
lengths.
To meet OSHA guidelines, towers whose fan decks are 20'-0" or more
above roof or grade, and which are equipped with ladders, should have
safety cages surrounding the ladders, but with approximately 7'-0" clear
headroom.

Outside the tower, stainless steel safety cage material is not normally con-
sidered necessary. If you air quality is sufficiently poor to warrant stainless
steel, change the specification wording accordingly.
A galvanized self-closing gate located at the guardrail level of the fan
deck, exterior motor access platform and access door platform. Stainless
steel is available with the stainless guardrail option.

Page 21 of 40
2.1.O.4
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Options
12
ACCESS DOOR
PLATFORM
GUARDRAIL
LADDER AND
SAFETY CAGE
LADDER
EXTENSION

Page 22 of 40
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Options
13
Access Door Platform:
10.2 Add the following paragraph in the
Access section: There shall be an access
platform at the base of the tower extend-
ing from the vertical ladder to the endwall
access door. The platform shall be sur-
rounded by a guardrail, kneerail and
toeboard.
Plenum Walkway:
10.2 Add the following paragraph in the
Access section: Provide a factory-
installed, stainless steel walkway extend-
ing from one endwall access door to
the other endwall. This walkway shall be
supported by a stainless steel framework,
and the top of the walkway shall be at or
above the cold water basin overflow level.
Interior Mechanical Equipment
Access Platform: NC8402 thru NC8409
10.2 Add the following paragraph in the
Access section: A factory-installed,
elevated stainless steel grating platform
convenient to the care and maintenance
of the tower's mechanical equipment shall
be provided.
Interior Mechanical Equipment
Access Platform: NC8411 thru NC8414
10.2 Add the following paragraph in the
Access section: An internal ladder shall
extend upward from the plenum walkway
to an elevated fiberglass bar grating
platform convenient to the care and main-
tenance of the tower's mechanical equip-
ment. The platform shall be surrounded
by a sturdy guardrail and kneerail system.
Where towers are installed on an elevated grillage or piers, it is often dif-
ficult to get toand throughthe access door conveniently. This platform
provides easy, safe and comfortable access to that door. It also extends
beyond the door to provide ready access to the optional Control System.
See drawing on page 12 and photo on page 15.

Outside the tower, stainless steel platform material is not normally con-
sidered necessary. If you air quality is sufficiently poor to warrant stainless
steel, change the specification wording accordingly.

NOTE
OSHA and other concerned authorities are in the process of
developing guidelines regarding the safety procedures and protec-
tive equipment that should be provided maintenance personnel
who are required to go inside cooling towers. We feel it advisable
to provide for as much maintenance as possible from outside the
cooling tower and, to that end, offer such options as Guardrail and
Ladderpg 13, Ladder Extensionpg 13, Ladder Safety Cagepg
13, Access Door Platformpg 14, and Motor Out of the Airstream
pg 19. Such interior convenience options as Plenum Walkwaypg
14, that are offered are not meant as an invitation to perform inside
maintenance. They are intended solely to maximize the comfort and
safety of maintenance personnel during the performance of any inside
work may become necessary.

Page 23 of 40
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Options
14
Control Options
Fan Motor Starter Control Panel:
6.4 Add the following paragraph in the
Mechanical Equipment section: Each cell
of the cooling tower shall be equipped with
a UL / CUL 508 listed control panel in a
NEMA 3R or 4X outdoor enclosure capable
of controlling single-speed or two-speed
motors as required, and designed specifically
for cooling tower applications. The panel shall
include a main circuit breaker or main fused
disconnect with an external operating handle,
lockable in the off position for safety. Full
voltage non-reversing magnetic starter shall
be controlled with a thermostatic or solid-
state temperature controller. Door mounted
selector switches shall be provided to enable
automatic or manual control and wired for
120VAC control. Control circuit to be wired
out to terminal blocks for field connection to
a remote vibration switch, overload trip alarms
and remote temperature control devices. The
temperature controller shall be adjustable
for the required cold-water temperature. If
a thermostatic controller is used it shall be
mounted on the side of the tower with the
temperature sensing bulb installed in the cold
water basin using a suspension mounting
bracket. If a solid-state temperature controller
is used the controller will be door mounted
on the control panel. The solid-state tem-
perature controller will display two tempera-
tures, one for outgoing water and the other
for set point. Water temperature input shall
be obtained using a three-wire RTD with dry
well in the outlet water piping and wired back
to the solid-state temperature controller in
the control panel.

Marley TF Terminal Box:
6.4 Add the following paragraph in the
Mechanical Equipment section: A factory
installed terminal box shall be furnished and
mounted to the outside of the tower where
applicable. The fan motor and optional
componentsincluding the vibration switch
and water level probesshall be factory
wired to terminal points inside the terminal
box. Optional tower components which
ship loose, including the oil level switch and
immersion heaters shall be field wired to the
terminal box. Enclosure shall be NEMA 4X
fiberglass with hinged and lockable door
meeting UL 508, CSA and IEC standards.
If it is your opinion that the control system for the cooling tower be part
of the tower manufacturers responsibility, we are in wholehearted agree-
ment with you. Who better to determine the most efficient mode and
manner of a cooling towers operationand to apply a system most com-
patible with itthan the designer and manufacturer of the cooling tower?

Marley variable speed drives are also available for the ultimate in temper-
ature control, energy management and mechanical equipment longevity.
See specifications on page 18.
The Marley TF Terminal Box simplifies all electrical connections to the
cooling tower motor and optional control accessories.
Eliminates wiring errors in the field
Reduces field wiring labor and materials
Provides an external access location to internal cooling tower wiring
NEMA 4X fiberglass enclosure suitable for corrosive applications
Terminal points are well identified
UL 508 assembly

Page 24 of 40
2.1L
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Options
15
Terminal box shall include lockable stainless
steel snap-latch door fasteners, terminal
blocks marked with wire numbers, sub-pan
and a wiring diagram. Complete assem-
bly shall be built to UL 508A standards.
Conduit entry and exit points shall be the
bottom of the enclosure preventing water
collection in the enclosure.
Vibration Limit Switch:
6.5 Add the following paragraph in the
Mechanical Equipment section: A single-
pole, double-throw vibration limit switch
in a NEMA 4 housing shall be installed
on the mechanical equipment support for
wiring into the owner's control panel. The
purpose of this switch will be to interrupt
power to the motor in the event of exces-
sive vibration. It shall be adjustable for
sensitivity, and shall require manual reset.
Basin Heater:
11.2 Add the following paragraph in the Cold
Water Basin section: Provide a system
of electric immersion heaters and con-
trols for each cell of the tower to prevent
freezing of water in the collection basin
during periods of shutdown. The system
shall consist of one or more stainless
steel electric immersion heaters installed
in threaded couplings provided in the side
of the basin. A NEMA 4 enclosure shall
house a magnetic contactor to energize
heaters; a transformer to provide 24-volt
control circuit power; and a solid-state
circuit board for temperature and low
water cut-off. A control probe shall be
located in the basin to monitor water level
and temperature. The system shall be
capable of maintaining 40F water tem-
perature at an ambient air temperature of
_____ F.
Electric Water Level Control:
11.1 Replace this paragraph with the fol-
lowing: The collection basin shall be
heavy-gauge series 300 stainless steel
and shall include the number and type of
suction connections required to accom-
modate the out-flow piping system shown
on the plans. Suction connections shall
be equipped with stainless steel debris
screens. A solid-state water level control
Unless specified otherwise, a Marley
M-5 vibration switch will be provided.
The requirement for manual reset
assures that the cooling tower will
be visited to determine the cause of
excessive vibration.
The Marley basin heater components described at left represent our recommen-
dation for a reliable automatic system for the prevention of basin freezing. They
are normally shipped separately for installation at the jobsite by the installing
contractor. When purchased in conjunction with the enhanced Control System
option, however, they are customarily factory-mounted and tested.

Submerged in basin water, in which zinc ions are present,
copper immersion heaters must not be used. Insist
upon stainless steel.

The ambient air temperature that you insert
in the specifications should be the low-
est 1% level of winter temperature
prevalent at site.
Solid-state liquid level controls provide you with state of the art systems to con-
trol and monitor the water level in your cooling tower collection basin. Relays
operating in conjunction with suspended stainless steel electrode probes
monitor basin water levels, providing simple solenoid-valve water makeup or
discrete on/off signals to more sophisticated automation controls. Optional con-
figurations might include makeup along with high and low water level alarm and
cutoff, or pump cutoff. Packaged systems including any of these variations are
available. Consult you Marley sales representative or download a copy of ACC-
NC-9D from spxcooling.com for additional information.

Page 25 of 40
2.1N
2.1E
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Options
16
Marley Variable Speed Drive systems are designed to combine absolute tem-
perature control with ideal energy management. The cooling tower user selects
a cold water temperature and the drive system will vary the fan speed to main-
tain that temperature. Precise temperature control is accomplished with far less
stress to the mechanical equipment components. The improved energy manage-
ment provides fast payback to the user.
system to monitor the water level with a
multi-relay control panel pre-wired and
mounted in a NEMA 4X nonmetallic
enclosure shall be provided. The system
shall consist of water level sensing and
control units in quantities and locations
as indicated on the drawings. An overflow
and drain connection shall be provided
in each cell of the cooling tower. The
basin floor shall slope toward the drain to
allow complete flush out of debris and silt
which may accumulate. Towers of more
than one cell shall include stainless steel
flumes for flow and equalization between
cells. The basin shall be accessible and
maintainable while water is circulating.
Fan Motor Variable Speed Drive:
Marley All Weather ACH550 System
6.4 Add the following paragraph in the
Mechanical Equipment section when
VFD is used with customers Building
Management System: A complete UL
listed Variable Speed Drive system in a
NEMA 1 indoor, NEMA 12 indoor or NEMA
3R outdoor enclosure shall be provided.
The VFD shall use PWM technology with
IGBT switching and integrated bypass
design. VFD out put switching shall not
cause mechanical issues with gearbox teeth
or drive shafts. The VFD shall catch a fan
spinning in the reverse direction without
tripping. The panel shall include a main
disconnect with short circuit protection and
external operating handle, lockable in the
off position for safety. The VFD system shall
receive a speed reference signal from the
Building Management System monitoring
the tower cold-water temperature. As an
option to receiving the speed reference
signal from a building management system,
the drive must have the capability to receive
a 4-20 ma temperature signal from an RTD
transmitter. The VFD shall have an internal
PI regulator to modulate fan speed main-
taining set point temperature. The drive's
panel display shall be able to display the
set-point temperature and cold-water tem-
perature on two separate lines. The bypass
shall include a complete magnetic bypass
circuit and with capability to isolate the VFD
when in the bypass mode. Transfer to the
bypass mode shall be manual in the event
of VFD failure. Once the motor is trans-
ferred to the by-pass circuit the fan motor

Page 26 of 40
2.1.M.6
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Options
17
will run at constant full speed. The bypass
circuit will not modulate ON and OFF based
on cold-water temperature. The applica-
tion must be able to handle very cold water
while VFD is in a by-pass mode. Operator
controls shall be mounted on the front of
the enclosure and shall consist of start and
stop control, bypass/VFD selection, Auto/
Manual selections, manual speed control.
To prevent heating problems in the cool-
ing tower fan motor the VFD system shall
de energize the motor once 25% motor
speed is reached and cooling is no longer
required. The cooling tower manufacturer
shall supply VFD start-up assistance. Tower
vibration testing throughout the speed
range is required to identify and lockout any
natural frequency vibration levels which may
exceed CTI guidelines.
Marley Premium VFD System:
6.4 Add the following paragraph in the
Mechanical Equipment section when
VFD is used as a stand alone system:
A complete UL listed Variable Speed Drive
system in a NEMA 12 indoor or NEMA 3R
outdoor enclosure shall be provided. The
VFD shall use PWM technology with IGBT
switching and integrated bypass design.
VFD output switching shall not cause
mechanical issues with gearbox teeth or
drive shafts. The VFD shall catch a fan
spinning in the reverse direction without
tripping. The panel shall include a main
disconnect with short circuit protection
and external operating handle, lockable
in the off position for safety. The system
shall include a solid state, PI temperature
controller to adjust frequency output of the
drive in response to the tower cold-water
temperature. The temperature of the cold
water and set point shall be displayed on
the door of the control panel. The bypass
shall include a complete magnetic bypass
circuit with capability to isolate the VFD
when in the bypass mode. Transfer to the
bypass mode shall be automatic in the
event of VFD failure or for specific trip con-
ditions allowing safe transfer of utility volt-
age to the motor. Automatic bypass with an
earth ground condition is not allowed. The
bypass contactor shall be cycled on and off
while operating in bypass, to maintain the
set-point temperature of the cold water. The
drive design shall be operated as a stand-

Page 27 of 40
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Options
18
alone system without the need for a BMS
system. Operator controls shall be mounted
on the front of the enclosure and shall
consist of start and stop control, bypass/
VFD selector switch, Auto/Manual selector
switch, manual speed control, and solid-
state temperature controller. An emergency
bypass selector switch internal to the panel
allowing the cooling tower fan motor to be
run at full speed shall be furnished. To pre-
vent heating problems in the cooling tower
fan motor the VFD system shall de ener-
gize the motor once 25% motor speed is
reached and cooling is no longer required.
The VFD shall include de-icing logic with
auto canceling and adjustable time. Speed
in De-Ice mode shall not exceed 50 %
motor speed. The cooling tower manufac-
turer shall supply VFD start-up assistance.
Tower vibration testing throughout the
speed range is required to identify and lock-
out any natural frequency vibration levels
which may exceed CTI guidelines.
Miscellaneous Options

Motor out of the Airstream:
6.1 Add the following to the end of this
paragraph: The motor shall be mounted
outside the casing of the tower, and shall
be connected to the gear reducer by a
dynamically-balanced, stainless steel tube
and flange driveshaft.
Fan Cylinder Extensions:
9.1 Insert the following after the first sen-
tence: Fan cylinder extensions shall be
provided to elevate the fan discharge to a
height of ___ ft above the fan deck level.
For many years, a feature of Marley
cooling towers was that the electric
motors were located outside the fan
cylinders, where they were easily
accessible, and where they were not
subjected to the constant humidity
that exists inside the tower plenum.

Although improved motor designs
(insulation, bearings, seals, and lubricants) have now made it feasible for
us to locate the motor inside the tower in close-coupled proximity to the
Geareducer (page 7), many users still prefer the motor to be located outside
the humid airstream. If you are among those usersor are among those who
see the wisdom of their thinkingplease specify this option. If you do, however,
please require it of all bidders.

Extensions are available in 1'-0 increments to a maximum height equal to the
diameter of the fan. Such extensions may be considered necessary in order to
elevate the discharge beyond the bounds of an enclosure. Discuss applicability
with your local Marley sales representative.

Page 28 of 40
2.1M
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Options
19
Inlet Flow Control Valves:
8.2: Add the following to the end of the
paragraph: Heavy-duty flow-regulator
valves shall be provided at the hot water
inlet connections. These valves shall be
disc-type, with cast iron bodies and stain-
less steel operating stems. There shall
be a locking handle to maintain the valve
setting in any position. Valves shall be
right-angle configuration, precluding the
need for inlet elbows.

Equalizer Flume Weir Gates:
11.2: Add the following paragraph under Cold
Water Collection Basin: The intercon-
necting flume between cells shall be
equipped with a removable cover plate
to permit the shutdown of one cell for
maintenance purposes, or to permit inde-
pendent cell operation.
Sound Control:
1.2 Add the following paragraph under
Base: The cooling tower shall be quiet
operation, and shall produce an overall
level of sound not higher than _______
dB(A) measured at _______ ft from the
locations in the table below. All low noise
options and combinations shall be CTI
Certified for thermal performance.


Inlet Sound Attenuation:

1.3 Add the following paragraph under
Base: The cooling tower shall be
equipped with inlet sound attenuation baf-
fles positioned and spaced vertically. The
baffles will be spaced across the entire
length and extend the full height of the
air inlet. The baffles will be constructed
of perforated sheet metal and contained
within a steel box which is self supporting.
The inlet attenuation will not be allowed to
impact the thermal performance efficiency
of the basic tower configuration.
Marley flow-control valves have been a favor-
ite of users since the 1950s. They remain
serviceable for the life of the tower and pro-
vide a continuing means of flow-regulation
between hot water basinsand between cells
of multicell towers as well.
Where it is your intention to be able to operate both cells of the tower while
the flume cover plate is installed, separate outlet connections, float valves and
overflows must be provided for each cell. Likewise, this would require separate
sensors and controls for basin heater systems, if installed.
Sound produced by a
standard NC Cooling
Tower operating in an
unobstructed environ-
ment will meet all but
the most restrictive
noise limitationsand
will react favorably to
natural attenuation.
Where the cooling
tower has been sized to
operate within an enclo-
sure, the enclosure
itself will have a damp-
ing effect on sound.
Sound also declines
with distanceby about 5 or 6 dB(A) each time the distance doubles. Where
noise at a critical point is likely to exceed an acceptable limit, you have several
optionslisted below in ascending order of cost impact:

Where only a slight reduction in noise will satisfyand the source of concern
is in a particular directionmerely turning the cooling tower may be the answer.
Less sound emanates from the cased face of the cooling tower than does from
the air intake face.

In many cases, noise concerns are limited to nighttime, when ambient noise
levels are lower and neighbors are trying to sleep. You can usually resolve these
situations by using two-speed motorsoperating the fans at reduced speed
without cycling after hours. The natural nighttime reduction in wet-bulb tem-
perature makes this a very feasible solution in most areas of the world, but the
need to avoid cycling may cause the cold water temperature to vary significantly.

A Marley Variable Speed Drive automatically minimize the towers noise level
Location 63 125 250 500 1000
Discharge
Air Inlet
Cased Face
Location 2000 4000 8000 Overall dB(A)
Discharge
Air Inlet
Cased Face

Page 29 of 40
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Options
20
Outlet Sound Attenuation:
1.4 Add the following paragraph under
Base: The cooling tower shall be
equipped with outlet sound attenuation
baffles positioned and spaced horizontally
across the entire fan opening. The baffles
will be constructed of perforated sheet
metal and contained within a steel box
which is self supporting.
Quiet Fan:
6.1 Replace paragraph 6.1 with the follow-
ing: Fan(s) shall be propeller-type, incor-
porating a minimum of seven wide-chord
aluminum alloy blades and galvanized
hubs. Blades shall be individually adjust-
able. Maximum fan tip speed shall be
11,000 ft/min. Fan(s) shall be driven
through a right angle, industrial duty, oil
lubricated, geared speed reducer that
requires no oil changes for the first five
(5) years of operation. The gearbox bear-
ings shall be rated at an L
10A
service life
of 100,000 hours or greater.

6.1 (alternate)* Fan(s) shall be propeller-
type, incorporating a minimum of seven
wide-chord aluminum alloy blades and
galvanized hubs. Blades shall be individu-
ally adjustable. Fan(s) shall be driven
through a one-piece multi-groove, solid
back V-type belt, pulleys, and tapered
roller bearings. Bearings shall be rated at
an L
10A
service life of 40,000 hours or
greater.
*Currently available on models 60hp or
less.
during periods of reduced load and/or reduced ambient temperature without
sacrificing the systems ability to maintain a constant cold water temperature.
This is a relatively inexpensive solution, and can pay for itself quickly in reduced
energy costs.

The most extreme cases may require inlet and discharge sound attenuator
sectionshowever, the static pressure loss imposed by discharge attenuators
may necessitate an increase in tower size. Two stages of inlet or discharge
attenuators supported by the tower and designed and tested for the most strin-
gent requirements are available as an option.
Falling water soundunlike counterflow towers which allow the water to free-fall
and splash into the cold water collection basin, PVC film-fill crossflow towers
have no splashing. This allows a crossflow tower much lower sound levels at
the air inlet than a counterflow towerespecially induced draft counterflow tow-
ers. Even with the splash-matting option in a counterflow cold water collection
basin, a crossflow tower air inlet is still quieter. Plus you do not have to worry
about clogging the splash matting. Yet another maintenance and operation
advantage of the crossflow configuration.
The Marley "Quiet Package" includes the affordable Quiet Fan mechanical
option, optimized to achieve the lowest possible sound levels while maintaining
efficiency. In combination with a Marley Variable Speed Drive, this package is
capable of meeting all but the most restrictive noise limitations.
Tip Speedunlike thermal performance, no certification program exists for
sound. While Marley conducts actual sound tests on all its configurations there
are only a few ways for the client to ensure they get a quiet tower.

One is to conduct a field sound test after installation. On-site testing after
installation can however be inaccurate depending on the environment.

Another is to conduct a sound test at the factory. However both can be cost
prohibitive for smaller applications.

Specifying fan blade tip speed is one way to physically force the tower selec-
tion to be quiet. Tip speed is easily checked by multiplying the fan rpm by the
fan circumference at the blade tip ( fan dia). Over 12,000 ft/min is consid-
ered high by most people. 10,000-12,000 is considered typical and expected.
8,000-10,000 would be considered low noise. Below 8,000 is difficult to hear
above the water noise.

Page 30 of 40
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Options
21
Ultra Quiet Fan:
6.1 Replace paragraph 6.1 with the follow-
ing: Fan(s) shall be propeller-type, incor-
porating wide-chord forward-swept FRP
blades and galvanized hubs. Blades shall
be individually adjustable. Maximum fan
tip speed shall be 10,000 ft/min. Fan(s)
shall be driven through a right angle,
industrial duty, oil lubricated, geared
speed reducer that requires no oil chang-
es for the first five (5) years of operation.
The gearbox bearings shall be rated at
an L
10A
service life of 100,000 hours or
greater. Available on Models NC8402
through NC8414.

Single Hot Water Inlet Connection
per Cell:
8.2 Replace this paragraph with the follow-
ing: Each cell of the tower shall include a
single hot water inlet connection located
as shown on the plans. An internal sys-
tem of piping shall deliver water equally
to the distribution basins without the
need for balancing valves. This internal
piping system shall require no scheduled
maintenance, and shall be located such
that it does not interfere with normal
maintenance access. The internal pip-
ing must extend to the tower exterior.
Removable, interchangeable polypropyl-
ene nozzles installed in the floor of these
basins shall provide full coverage of the
fill by gravity flow.
Air Inlet Screens:
9.1 Add the following paragraph to the
Casing, Fan Deck and Fan Guard sec-
tion: The air inlet faces of the tower
shall be covered by 1" mesh hot-dipped
galvanized welded wire screens. Screens
shall be secured to removable galva-
nized U-edge frames. Screens shall be
designed so bottom half can be removed
for easy access to the cold water basin.
For more severe cases requiring the lowest possible fan sound levels the Marley
Ultra Quiet fan option is now available on all but the NC8401 NC models.
Tower height may increase slightlyobtain current sales drawings from your
Marley sales representative for accurate dimensions. If your requirement calls
for inlet and outlet
attenuation, you
might consider the
Ultra Quiet fan in
lieu of attenuation.
Outlet attenuators
are not available with
the Ultra Quiet Fan
option.
This option reduces
what might otherwise be a complex hot water piping layout to a simple, single
connection per cell. It also avoids an unsightly (perhaps unsafe) maze of pipe
exposed above the top deck of the tower.

The single inlet connection can be located either in the tower's endwall casing,
or below the cold water basin. The endwall entry point is suitable for single-
cell towers, and for those that might be installed in groups of two cells each.
Bottom inlet piping lends itself to close-spaced, multicell installations and to
those situations where it is appropriate to keep all pipework below the level of
the tower.

Be sure to specify that the internal pipe extends to the tower exterior panel,
either the casing panel or collection basin floor. Some manufacturers require the
contractor to complete the internal piping adding to your cost.
In wooded or windy areas,
these screens help to keep
leaves or blowing debris out
of the cooling tower and cir-
culating water system.

Page 31 of 40
2.1I
Specifications Specification Value
NC Stainless Steel Cooling Tower
/
Specifications: Options
22
High Wind Load/Seismic Designs:
4.1 Replace this paragraph with the follow-
ing: The tower structure, anchorage and
all its components shall be designed by
licensed structural engineers per the
international building code to withstand
a wind load of ______ psf, as well as a
______ seismic load. The fan deck and
hot water basin covers shall be designed
for 50 psf live load or a 200 lb. concen-
trated load. Guardrails, where specified,
shall be capable of withstanding a 200
lb. concentrated live load in any direction,
and shall be designed in accordance with
OSHA guidelines.
Multicell Basin Equalizer Outlets:
11.1 Add the following paragraph in the
Access section: A hole and bolt circle
shall be provided in the depressed sec-
tion of the basin for equalizer piping
between cells. A full-face, .25" thick, 50
durometer gasket shall be provided at
each equalizer location.
Basin Sweeper Piping:
11.1 Add the following paragraph in the
Access section: The cold water basin
shall be equipped with PVC sweeper pip-
ing with plastic eductor nozzles. The pip-
ing should create a grid under the fill and
force all dirt and debris to the depressed
section of the collection basin.
Extended Geareducer Lube Line
with Dipstick:
6.1 Add the following paragraph in the
Mechanical Equipment section: An
external oil level dipstick shall be located
adjacent to the motor at the fan deck
surface and shall be accessible from a
portable maintenance ladder.
High wind load designs greater than 30 psf are available up to 100 psf. It
is important to consult the local code official for actual requirements. Some
manufacturers will claim their tower is capable but have never had the design
reviewed by a licensed structural engineer. Not requiring this review for high
wind and seismic regions is dangerous to you and the public.
Used as water level equalizers between multicell towers. Not intended for water
migration. Piping and attachment hardware by others. Flat faced flange required.
PVC sweeper piping and nozzles.
The dipstick option is accessible from a portable maintenance ladder on one
and two cell towers only. Maintenance considerations recommends this option
be combined with the ladder and guardrail option on installations of three or
more cells since the dipstick cannot be reached without accessing the fan deck.

Page 32 of 40
SPX COOLING TECHNOLOGIES, INC
7401 WEST 129 STREET
OVERLAND PARK, KANSAS 66213
UNITED STATES
913 664 7400 | spxcooling@spx.com
spxcooling.com
In the interest of technological progress,
all products are subject to design and/or
material change without notice.
2011 SPX | Printed in USA
SPEC-SS-NC-10

Page 33 of 40
Climatec, Inc.
2851 W. Kathleen Road
Phoenix, AZ 85053
602-944-3330
Submittal Date:
Plan Date:
Specification Section:
Prepared by: Bryan Nelson
Sales Engineer:
SUBMITTED BY:
MANUFACTURER:
PRODUCT:
Tempe Mechanical
10/19/2011
8/10/2011
None
TAG:
VARIABLE FREQUENCY DRIVES
PROJ ECT: J ohn M. Roll U. S. Courthouse
SUBMITTAL DATA
Yaskawa
E7N
CT-1, 2
Bryan Nelson
LOCATION:
ENGINEER:
CONTRACTOR:
Yuma, Arizona
LSW Engineers

Page 34 of 40
Material List
Project:
Equipment:
Manufacturer:
Tags:
MARK: CT-1, 2
(2) Yaskawa Variable Frequency Drives with the following:
NEMA 1 enclosure
Manual bypass

LED display

Start-up
3 year parts and labor warranty
Input disconnect switch
CT-1, 2
J ohn M. Roll U. S. Courthouse
E7N
Yaskawa

Page 35 of 40
PB.E7.01, 7/1/08
Data subject to change without notice
Yaskawa Electric America
Page 51
Description
1/2-20HP
E7 Narrow Bypass
E7N
The E7N Bypass package is a 2-contactor style bypass with HOA touchpad control, allowing motor operation from either
the drive or across the line. This allows continued operation even if the E7 drive is disabled, by fault or intention. Drive
maintenance must be delayed until line power can be removed. The E7 and E7N Bypass have been designed for flexibility
in providing the features and options commonly specified by facility designers.
The E7 Drive is a variable torque AC drive, designed specifically for HVAC applications in building automation. A new
benchmark for size, cost, performance, benefits, and quality, the E7 includes numerous built-in features such as Network
Communications, PI control and energy savings functions.
The E7 has embedded communications for the popular building automation protocols, Johnson Controls Metasys N2 and
Siemens APOGEE, as well as Modbus. An optional LonWorks or BACnet interface card is available.
Performance Features
VT Ratings: 1/2-10 HP, 208 VAC
1/2-20 HP, 480 VAC
Overload capacity: 110% for 60 sec
(150% peak)
Starting torque: 100% at 3 Hz
DC injection braking: at start or stop,
adjustable, current limited (anti-windmill-
ing)
Motor preheat function
Adjustable accel/decel: 0.1 to 6000 sec.
Controlled speed range: 40:1
Critical frequency rejection: 3 selectable,
adjustable bands
Current limiting: 30-180%
Energy $aving control
Torque boost: full range, automatic
Power loss ride-thru: 2 seconds
Inertia ride-thru
Auto restart after power loss or resettable
fault, selectable, programmable
Feedback signal loss detection
Serial communication loss detection
"Up/Down" floating point control capability
Stationary motor auto-tuning
Customizable monitor display
Sleep function
Run permissive input
Ramp-to-stop or coast-to-stop selection
Runtime changes in control and display
Project-specific parameter reinitialization
Copy keypad
Protective Features
Current limited stall prevention
Heat sink over-temperature, speed
fold-back
Cooling fan operating hours recorded
Bi-directional start into rotating motor at
synchronized speed
DC bus charge indicator
Current limiting DC bus fuse
Optically-Isolated controls
Short circuit protection: Phase-phase and
phase-neutral
Ground fault protection
Electronic motor overload: UL
Current and torque limit
Fault display: last 10 faults
Fault trace capabilities
Over torque and under torque protection
Program security code
"Hunting" prevention logic
Input source protection (MOVs)
Input/output phase loss protection
Design Features
32-bit microprocessor logic
Flash upgradeable firmware
Non-volatile memory, program retention
Surface-mount devices
Displacement power factor: 0.98
Output frequency: 0.1 to 120 Hz
Frequency resolution: 0.06 Hz
Frequency regulation: 0.1%
Carrier frequency: selectable to 15 kHz
3% DC bus reactor: 40-60 HP, 480 VAC
(optional on lower ratings)
LED display
24 VDC control logic
Transmitter/Option power supply
Input/output terminal status
Timer function: Elapsed time, Delay on
start, Delay on stop
Embedded Metasys N2, APOGEE FLN,
and Modbus
Volts/hertz ratio: Preset and programmable
V/Hz patterns
Remote speed command: 0-10 VDC or
4-20 mA, direct or reverse-acting
Setpoint (PI) control with inverse or square
root input, differential control via two
feedback capability
Feedback signal: low pass filter
Speed command: bias and gain
Meter Functions: Volt, amp, kilowatt,
elapsed run time, speed command
Output Current Transformers: qty 3
UL, cUL listed and CE marked; IEC 146;
MTBF: exceeds 28 years
Service Conditions
Ambient Temperature: -10C to 40C
(14 F to 104 F)
Humidity: 95% RH, non-condensing
Altitude: 3300 ft; higher by derate
Input voltage: +10%/-15%
Input frequency: 50/60 Hz 5%
3-phase, 3-wire, phase sequence insensitive
Options
Circuit breaker (MCP) disconnect
Main disconnect
Semi-conductor fast acting fuses
Drive input fused disconnect
RFI cap network
3% or 5% line impedance
LCD "Alpha" drive keypad
Pneumatic pressure transducer : 3-15 psi
LonWorks communication and BACnet
Engraved nameplate
3 Contactor Bypass
Bypass Features
Bypass and Drive are factory assembled,
utilizing 2 contactors with Electronic
Control System
NEMA 1 metal enclosure standard
Input disconnect switch with a lockable,
through-the-door operating mechanism
Sealed Bypass Control Keypad mounted
on front door
Integrated Drive touchpad control
Drive Output and Bypass contactors
Bi-metallic thermal overload relay, provides
motor protection in both the "drive" and
"bypass" modes
120 VAC control power transformer
Control and safety circuit terminal strip
(Selectable for 120 VAC or 24 VDC input)
Indicator LEDs for Control Power, Drive
Ready, Drive Run, Drive Selected, Drive
Fault, Drive Test, Bypass Selected, Bypass
Run, Motor OL, Safety Open,
Damper/BAS, Auto Run, Auto/Rem
Transfer, Smoke Purge, Hand Mode, Off
Mode, and Auto Mode
3 programmable Form C contacts (250
VAC, 1 Amp) for: Motor Run, Damper/BAS,
Drive Run, Hand Mode, Auto Mode,
Bypass Run, Fault or 1 selectable from the
drive menu
Remote Run/Stop via contact closure or
serial communication
Input speed command via 0-10 VDC, 4-20
mA or serial communication
2 Programmable analog outputs
(0-10 VDC or 4-20 mA )
Damper control circuit
Programmable auto transfer to bypass on
drive fault
Remote transfer to bypass via contact
closure
Smoke purge function via contact closure
Safety (freezestat, firestat, duct pressure,
etc.) interlock
Building Automation System (BAS)
interlock

Page 36 of 40
Document: DD.E7N.203.01













J ob Name: J ohn M Roll Courthouse
Customer: Tempe Mechanical











PROJ ECT NAME: J ohn M Roll Courthouse
SYSTEM/TAG #: CT-1, 2
MODEL #: E7NVB011
HP: 7.5
AMPS: 11
VOLTS: 460


Page 37 of 40

D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
:

D
S
.
E
7
N
.
0
1

R
4


S
h
e
e
t

1

o
f

3





J
o
b

N
a
m
e
:


J
o
h
n

M

R
o
l
l

C
o
u
r
t
h
o
u
s
e

C
u
s
t
o
m
e
r
:



T
e
m
p
e

M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l





E
q
u
i
p
m
e
n
t

T
a
g
:

C
T
-
1
,

2

M
o
d
e
l

N
u
m
b
e
r
:

E
7
N
V
B
0
1
1

H
P
:

7
.
5


V
o
l
t
s
:

4
6
0

A
m
p
s
:

1
1


Page 38 of 40
D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
:

D
S
.
E
7
N
.
0
1

R
4


S
h
e
e
t

2

o
f

3



















J
o
b

N
a
m
e
:


J
o
h
n

M

R
o
l
l

C
o
u
r
t
h
o
u
s
e

C
u
s
t
o
m
e
r
:



T
e
m
p
e

M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l






Page 39 of 40













J
o
b

N
a
m
e
:


J
o
h
n

M

R
o
l
l

C
o
u
r
t
h
o
u
s
e

C
u
s
t
o
m
e
r
:



T
e
m
p
e

M
e
c
h
a
n
i
c
a
l





D
o
c
u
m
e
n
t
:

D
S
.
E
7
N
.
0
1

R
4


S
h
e
e
t

3

o
f

3




















Page 40 of 40
F.4 / P.1 10865 WASHINGTON BOULEVARD CULVER CITY CALIFORNIA 90232 >T.310 838 9700 F.310 838 9737 EHRLICHARCHITECTS.COM
To Date / /
Project Name
Project No.
Submittal No. Description
SUBMITTAL TRANSMITTAL
ACTION
APPROVED (Fabrication/Installation may be undertaken. Approval does not authorize changes to the Contract Sum or Contract Time.)
APPROVED AS CORRECTED (Fabrication/Installation may be undertaken. Approval does not authorize changes to the Contract Sum or Contract Time.)
REVISE AND RESUBMIT (Fabrication and/or installation MAY NOT be undertaken. In resubmitting, limit corrections to items marked.)
REJECTED (Fabrication and/or installation MAY NOT be undertaken. In resubmitting, limit corrections to items marked.)
COMMENTS
Signature Date / /
Print Name
Nathan Meikle
SUNDT Construction Inc.
2620 South 55th Street
Tempe, AZ 85282
02 02 2012
John M. Roll Federal Courthouse
562.00
204 - 23 65 01 - 00 Cooling Towers- Tower Basin Cleaner
G
Corrections or comments made to this submittal do not relieve the Contractor with compliance with the requirements of the Contract documents.
This check is only for review of the general conformance with the design intent as expressed in the Contract documents. The Contractor is
responsible for conforming and correlating all quantities and dimensions; selecting fabricating processes and techniques of construction,
coordinating the work with all other trades, and performing the work in a safe and satisfactory manner.
02 02 2012
Laura Hudson
Submittal Transmittal
Yuma Courthouse (Construction) Sundt Construction, Inc. (F)
Prime Contract #: GS-09P-10-KTC-0045
Project # 141111
Project Phone:
Project Fax:
98 West First Street
Yuma, AZ 85364
Reference Number: 0280 Date: 2/1/2012
Nate Meikle Laura Hudson
Transmitted To: Transmitted By:
Ehrlich Architects Sundt Construction, Inc. (F)
10865 Washington Road
Culver City, CA 90232
Tel: 310-838-9700
Fax: 310-838-9737
108 West 1st Street Suite #D
Yuma, AZ 85364
For Review and
Approval
2/15/2012 Cooling Towers-Tower Basin Cleaner 204 - 23 65 01 - 00 1
Package Action: Description: Submittal Package No: Qty Due Date:
email approval
Tracking Number: Delivered Via: Transmitted For:
Item Action: Notes: Description: Qty: Items:
Tower Basin Cleaner For Review and
Approval
1 23 65 01 - 0711 -
00
Cc: Company Name: Contact Name: Copies: Notes:
Remarks:
Signed Date Signature Nate Meikle
SubTranWdevXI.rpt
REVIEWEDBYSUNDTCONSTRUCTION,INC.
Reviewisfordesignonly.Subcontractorisresponsible
fordimensions,quantities,andfullcompliancewiththe
requireddocuments.Approvalbythearchitectdoesnot
relievethesubcontractoroftheresponsibilityrequired
bythetermsandconditionsofthiscontractwithSundt
Construction,Inc.
ByNathanMeikle________Dated:________________
2-1-12'















SEE SUBMITTAL REVIEW FORM FOR ADDITIONAL INFORMATION
AS APPLICABLE.
ACTION SHOWN ABOVE IS ONLY FOR CONFORMANCE WITH THE
DESIGN CONCEPT OF THE WORK AND THE INFORMATION IN THE
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS.
BY REVIEW AND SUBMISSION, CONTRACTOR REPRESENTS THAT
HE HAS DETERMINED AND VERIFIED MATERIALS, FIELD
MEASUREMENTS, AND CONSTRUCTION CRITERIA, SPECIFIED
PERFORMANCE AND DESIGN CRITERIA AND SIMILAR DATA.
DEVIATIONS FROM CONTRACT DOCUMENTS ARE NOT REVIEWED
UNLESS SPECIFICALLY REQUESTED IN WRITING BY
CONTRACTOR. REVIEW ON RE-SUBMISSION WILL COVER ONLY
DESIGNATED CHANGES ON THIS SUBMITTAL AND OTHER
CHANGES CLEARLY IDENTIFIED BY CONTRACTOR WITH AN
ENCIRCLEMENT.
REVIEWED BY DATE
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
NO EXCEPTIONS NOTED
EXCEPTIONS NOTED
SEE COMMENTS
REJECTED
MAKE CORRECTIONS NOTED
RESUBMIT
DO NOT RESUBMIT
REVIEW NOT REQUIRED
X
X
RICHARD PATTON 2012-02-02 07:13-07:00






HVAC SUBMITTALS

Yuma Courthouse
98 W 1
st
St.
Yuma, AZ 85364

Tower Basin Cleaner


SPEC DESCRIPTION PAGE


Tower Basin Cleaner 1-3

Climatec, Inc.
2851 W. Kathleen Road
Phoenix, AZ 85053
602-944-3330
Submittal Date:
Plan Date:
Prepared by:
SEPARATOR PACKAGES
PROJ ECT: J ohn M Roll US Courthouse
SUBMITTAL DATA
J ames Stein
Sales Engineer:
SUBMITTED BY:
MANUFACTURER:
PRODUCT:
TAG:
CSS
N/A
Bryan Nelson
9/6/2011
8/10/2011
Griswold
LOCATION:
ENGINEER:
CONTRACTOR:
Yuma, AZ
LSW Engineers
Tempe Mechanical
PROPOSALS & ENGINEERING 1597 industrial drive, new smyrna beach, fl 32168 | t: 386.663.3370 f: 386.663.3371
CUSTOMER SERVICE & MANUFACTURING 1525 east 6th street, corona, ca 92879 | t: 951.278.8992 f: 951.735.0798

www.griswoldwatersystems.com
S
E
C
T
I
O
N
5
Section 5, Page 4
Note: Dimensions are approximate and are for reference only. Dimensions subject to change without notice. Weights are approximate.
MODEL GLS/CSS-201 HH
SYSTEM MODEL GLS-201-HH CSS-201-HH
Design Flow Rate, GPM 115@40 TDH 115@80 TDH
Item 1 Separator Model CS-2T-THD Carbon Steel, Powder Coated
Item 2 Frame Construction Carbon Steel, Powder Coated
Item 3 Pipe Assembly Carbon Steel, Rust Inhibitor Primer with Enamel Finish
MOTOR 460 VAC TEFC
Item 4
Horsepower 3 hp 5 hp
Approximate Amps @ 460V 4.8 amps 7.6 amps
RPM 3500
PUMP
Item 5
Pump Casing Cast Iron
Pump Impeller Bronze
Std.Mechanical Seal VITON Elastomer, Silicon Carbide Seat, Carbon Rotary
BASKET STRAINER (Optional)
Item 6
Body Construction Cast Iron
Internal Screen 1/4 Perforated 304 Stainless Steel
Connection Type Female NPT Thread
CONTROL PANEL (UL listed and labeled, manufactured to UL-508A Std.)
Item 7
Enclosure
NEMA 4 Powder Coated, Watertight, UL listed and CSA
approved
Electrical Components
Starter with Thermal Overload, HOA, 460/120 Transformer with
Circuit Breakers, Pump RUN Light, Lockable Door Disconnect,
Magnetic Contactor, Purge Timer, Manufactured with all UL listed &
CSA approved electrical components.
PURGE VALVE (Requires Power to Open and Power to Close. Must Close Manually if Open During a Power Outage)
Item 8
Actuator, Motorized 120 VAC 60Hz
Connection Type 1 Female NPT, Ball Valve
SPECIFICATIONS
Dim A 52-1/2 52
Dim B 26-1/8
Dim C 29-1/4
Max. Inlet P.S.I. 100
Max. Operating P.S.I. 150
Max. Operating Temp. 100F
Inlet (Female NPT Thread) 2 (2-1/2) 2-1/2
Outlet (Female NPT Thread) 2
Shipping Weight 420 Lbs
7
1
3
2
5
4
6
B
A
C
Note: Drawing not to
scale. Shown for clarity.
In
le
t
O
u
t
l
e
t
8
Optional Strainer
Shipped Loose
REV. 12/10